diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77081-0.txt | 6789 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77081-h/77081-h.htm | 8985 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77081-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 887558 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77081-h/images/coversmall.jpg | bin | 0 -> 248061 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77081-h/images/i_f000.jpg | bin | 0 -> 92242 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77081-h/images/i_f001.jpg | bin | 0 -> 53458 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77081-h/images/i_f001a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 18876 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77081-h/images/i_p066a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 141149 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77081-h/images/i_p114a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 129088 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 77081-h/images/i_p218a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 151402 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
13 files changed, 15790 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/77081-0.txt b/77081-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..245c221 --- /dev/null +++ b/77081-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6789 @@ + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77081 *** + + +[Illustration: “YOU MUST BE MORE CAREFUL IN THE FUTURE,” SAID COMMODORE +DEWEY. “WE CAN’T AFFORD TO LOSE ANY MEN JUST NOW.”] + + + + + A SAILOR BOY + WITH DEWEY + + OR + + _AFLOAT IN THE PHILIPPINES_ + + BY + CAPTAIN RALPH BONEHILL + + AUTHOR OF “WHEN SANTIAGO FELL,” “OFF FOR HAWAII,” + “GUN AND SLED,” “RIVAL BICYCLISTS,” “YOUNG + OARSMEN OF LAKEVIEW,” “LEO, THE + CIRCUS BOY,” ETC. + + [Illustration] + + CHATTERTON-PECK COMPANY + NEW YORK, N. Y. + + + + +BY THE SAME AUTHOR + + + WITH CUSTER IN THE BLACK HILLS; + Or, A Young Scout among the Indians. + + BOYS OF THE FORT; + Or, A Young Captain’s Pluck. + + THE YOUNG BANDMASTER; + Or, Concert Stage and Battlefield. + + WHEN SANTIAGO FELL; + Or, The War Adventures of Two Chums. + + A SAILOR BOY WITH DEWEY; + Or, Afloat in the Philippines. + + OFF FOR HAWAII; + Or, The Mystery of a Great Volcano. + + + _12mo, finely illustrated and bound in cloth. Price, per volume, 60 + cents._ + + NEW YORK + CHATTERTON-PECK COMPANY + 1905 + + COPYRIGHT, 1899, BY + THE MERSHON COMPANY + + + + +PREFACE. + + +“A Sailor Boy with Dewey,” while a complete story in itself, forms the +second volume of a line of works issued under the general title of the +“Flag of Freedom Series.” + +In writing this tale of adventure I had in mind to acquaint our boys +with something of the strange sights and scenes which come to light +daily in Uncle Sam’s new possessions in the far East, or far West, as +you will. The Philippines are but little understood by the average +reader, and if I have served to make the picture of them a little +clearer my object will have been accomplished. + +Some may argue that the adventures introduced in the volume are +overdrawn, but I can assure all that the incidents are underdrawn +rather than otherwise. Many savage and barbarous natives still inhabit +the Philippines, and to bring these people to genuine civilization will +take many years of patient labor and encouragement. In the past Spain +had accomplished something, but not much; what our own nation will do +remains still to be seen. Let us hope for the best. + +Again thanking my young friends for the kindness with which they have +perused my stories in the past, I place this book in their hands with +my best wishes for their future welfare. + + CAPTAIN RALPH BONEHILL. + + _April 15, 1899._ + + + + +CONTENTS. + + + CHAPTER PAGE + + I. OFF FOR MANILA BAY, 1 + + II. THE COLLISION IN THE HURRICANE, 10 + + III. IN WHICH DAN AND I BECOME SEPARATED, 19 + + IV. THE RESCUE OF THE UNWORTHY ONE, 27 + + V. CAST ASHORE ON LUZON, 34 + + VI. ADVENTURES IN THE FOREST, 43 + + VII. THE WRECK ON THE SHORE, 52 + + VIII. ATTACKED BY THE TAGALS, 59 + + IX. THE FLIGHT FROM BUMWOGA, 67 + + X. THE BATTLE AT A DISTANCE, 74 + + XI. OFF FOR SUBIG BAY, 82 + + XII. ATTACKED IN THE CANYON, 91 + + XIII. MY FIRST ADVENTURE IN MANILA, 99 + + XIV. THE ESCAPE FROM THE PRISON, 107 + + XV. BACK TO HONG KONG, 115 + + XVI. THE OPENING OF THE WAR, 123 + + XVII. I MEET COMMODORE DEWEY, 130 + + XVIII. THE FIGHTING ENGINEER, 139 + + XIX. “FIRE!” 147 + + XX. IN WHICH ONE SPANISH SHIP IS SUNK, 155 + + XXI. A NEVER-TO-BE-FORGOTTEN CONTEST, 162 + + XXII. BETWEEN TWO FIRES, 169 + + XXIII. THE ESCAPE FROM THE INN, 177 + + XXIV. ONE WAY OF ENTERING A FORTIFIED CITY, 184 + + XXV. FOUR WOULD-BE PLUNDERERS, 192 + + XXVI. THE FIGHT IN THE OFFICES, 200 + + XXVII. A LETTER OF GREAT IMPORTANCE, 208 + + XXVIII. TREED BY BUFFALO BULLS, 215 + + XXIX. CAPTAIN KENNY AGAIN, 223 + + XXX. A FIGHT AT LONG RANGE, 230 + + XXXI. THE WRECKING OF THE HOWITZER, 237 + + XXXII. GOOD-BY TO THE PHILIPPINES, 245 + + + + +A SAILOR BOY WITH DEWEY + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +OFF FOR MANILA BAY. + + +“What do you think of this storm, Oliver?” + +“I think it is going to be a heavy one, Dan,” I answered. “Just look at +those black clouds rolling up from the southeast. We’ll catch it before +midnight.” + +“Just what I think,” answered my chum, Dan Holbrook. “Where is Captain +Kenny?” + +“Where he always is, in his cabin, more than half intoxicated. I tell +you, Dan, I would never have taken passage on the _Dart_ had I known +what sort of a man Captain Kenny was. Why, our lives are not safe in +his hands.” + +“Humph! I don’t know as they are safe out of his hands, Oliver,” +returned Dan, with a toss of his handsome head. “Since we left China +we’ve struck two heavy hurricanes,--perhaps that coming on will finish +us.” + +“Gracious! don’t say that!” I cried, with a shiver. “We don’t want to +be finished--at least, I don’t.” + +“Neither do I. But when a storm comes, it comes, that is all there is +to it.” + +“True, but we might do something toward meeting it,” I went on, +with a grave shake of my head, for I did not altogether like Dan’s +light-hearted way of looking at things. “In my opinion Captain Kenny +ought to be on deck this instant, watching this storm.” + +“Supposing you tell him that?” + +“I’ve a good mind to.” + +“You’ll get a belaying pin over your head, as Dawson, the mate, got. +Captain Kenny is not a man to be talked to. He is bad enough when he is +sober, and when he isn’t he is simply terrible.” + +“But he has no right to imperil the lives of twenty or more people by +his drunkenness,” I rejoined warmly. “If I had my way, I’d put the +captain in irons and place Dawson in command of the _Dart_. He knows +enough to keep sober, and----” + +“Ye would do thet, would ye?” roared a hoarse voice at my shoulder, and +turning swiftly I found myself confronted by Captain Kenny. “I’ll teach +ye how to talk ag’in the master o’ this vessel, an’ don’t ye forgit +it!” And he grabbed me by the arm. + +Captain Kenny’s face was as red as a beet. Usually it was far from +being handsome, now it was positively hideous. His breath was heavily +laden with the odor of rum, showing that he had been imbibing more than +usual. + + * * * * * + +I was a boy of sixteen, tall and strong for my age. I was not a poor, +down-trodden lad, knocking about from pillar to post, trying to earn +my living. My father, Samuel Raymond, was a rich merchant of San +Francisco, owning interests in several lines of trade, with offices at +San Francisco, Hong Kong, Manila in the Philippine Islands, and several +other points. + +Just six months before I had graduated at a business college in +California. As I was to follow my father into trade, it was not thought +worth while to give me a term at the University, or any similar +institute of learning. Instead, my father called me into his library +and said to me: + +“Oliver, I believe you understand that you are to go into business with +me.” + +“I do, sir,” had been my reply. “I wish for nothing better.” + +“Usually I do not believe in letting boys remain idle after their +school days are over, but in this case I think an exception should be +made. You have worked hard, and come out at the top of your class. You +deserve a good, long holiday. How will you take it?” + +To answer this question puzzled me at first, for I knew I had the whole +world before me. I had been as far east as New York and as far south as +St. Louis, and had even taken a trip on Lake Michigan. I concluded that +I had gone eastward far enough. + +“If it’s all the same, I’ll go to Hong Kong and get acquainted with +our branch out there,” was my answer, and the use of the words, “our +branch,” made my father laugh. + +“That will suit me exactly,” was his return. “You shall go from San +Francisco direct to Hong Kong, and you can return by way of the +Philippines and see how our place of business is doing at Manila. The +place at Manila is running down--the Spaniards are doing their best +to drive us out altogether, and if you can see any way of improving +conditions, now or later on, so much the better.” + +In less than two weeks I was ready to start, but I did not leave home +even then as quickly as did my father, who received word which took him +to the east and then to Cuba. What happened to my parent in Cuba has +been excellently told by my friend, Mark Carter, in his story which +has been printed under the title of “When Santiago Fell.” At that +time I did not know Mark at all, but since then we have become very +intimately acquainted, as my readers will soon learn. + +The voyage from the Golden Gate to Hong Kong was made without anything +unusual happening. On landing at the Chinese-English port I was +immediately met by Dan Holbrook, whose father was one of my parent’s +partners. Dan had put in two years at Hong Kong and the vicinity, and +he took me around, and talked Chinese for me whenever it was required. + +At last came the time when I thought I ought to think of returning +to San Francisco by way of Manila, or at least to run over to the +Philippines and back and then start for home. “If only you could go +to Manila with me!” had been my words to Dan, to whom I was warmly +attached. + +“I will go,” had been the ready answer, which surprised me not a +little. Soon I learned that Dan had been talking the matter over with +his father and mother. Mr. Holbrook was as anxious as my father to have +the business connection at Manila improved, and he thought that both of +us ought to be able to do something, even though I was but a boy and +Dan was scarcely a young man. + +Manila, the principal city of the Philippines, is located but four +or five days’ sail from Hong Kong and there is a regular service of +steamers between the two ports. But both Dan and I had seen a good deal +of ocean travel on steamers, and we decided to make the trip to Manila +Bay in a sailing craft, and, accordingly, took passage on the _Dart_, +a three-masted schooner, carrying a miscellaneous cargo for Manila, +Iloilo, and other points. + +When we secured our berths we did not see Captain Kenny, only the +first and second mates of the vessel. Had we seen the captain with his +tough-looking and bloated face, it is quite likely that we would have +endeavored to secure passage to the Philippines elsewhere. + +Yet for several days all went well. The weather was not all that it +should have been, for we were sailing in a portion of our globe where +hurricanes and earthquakes are of frequent occurrence. Our course had +been set directly for Corregidor Island at the entrance to Manila +Bay, but it had begun to blow harder and harder, we drove up in the +direction of Subig Bay. + +The weather kept growing fouler and fouler, and with this Captain Kenny +gave himself over to liquor until he was totally unfit to command the +_Dart_. He was a man to allow sails to be set when they should have +been furled, and already had he lost one sheet through his foolishness. + +The mate, Tom Dawson, was a first-rate fellow, as kind and considerate +as the captain was rough and brutal. How he had shipped with such a +beast was a mystery, but it did not concern me and I did not bother my +head about it. On three occasions I had seen the captain attack Dawson, +but each time the mate had escaped and refused to take up the quarrel. +In the meantime the second mate and the men grumbled a good deal, but +so far no open rupture had occurred among the forecastle hands. + + * * * * * + +“You let go of that arm,” I said, as I found Captain Kenny’s harsh face +poked out close to my cheek. + +“I’ll let go when I’m done with you, not afore!” he went on, with +increasing wrath. “Call me a drunkard, will ye!” And he gave the arm a +savage twist that hurt not a little. “On board o’ my own ship, too!” + +“If I did I only spoke the truth,” I said steadily. “You drink +altogether too much for the good of those on board. We are going to +have a big storm soon, and you ought to have your wits about you, if +you want to save the _Dart_ from going down.” + +“I know my business, boy--ye can’t teach it me nohow! Take thet fer +talkin’ to me in this fashion!” + +Releasing my arm, he aimed a heavy blow at my head. But I was on the +alert and dodged, and the blow nearly carried the irate skipper off his +feet. Then, as he came on again, I shoved him backward, and down he +went in a heap on the deck. + +“By Jove, now you’ve done it!” whispered Dan. + +“I don’t care, it serves him right,” I answered. “He had no right to +touch me.” + +“That’s true. But you must remember that a captain is king on his own +deck, on the high seas.” + +“A brute can never be a king--and make me submit, Dan.” + +By this time Captain Kenny was scrambling up, his face full of rage. +Instantly he made for me again. + +“I’ll teach ye!” he screamed. “You good-fer-nuthin landlubber! I’ve had +it in fer ye ever since ye took passage. Maybe my ship aint good enough +fer ye! If thet’s so, I’ll pitch ye overboard!” And he tried to grab me +once more. + +But now Dan stepped between us. “Captain Kenny, you let Raymond alone,” +he ordered sternly. + +“I won’t--he’s called me a drunkard, and--” + +“He told the truth. You attend to your business and we’ll attend to +ours.” + +“I’ll--I’ll put him in irons. He shan’t talk so afore my crew!” fumed +the captain. + +“You shan’t touch him.” + +“Shan’t I?” The half-drunken man glared at both of us. Then he backed +away, shaking his fist. “Just wait a minute and I’ll show you a trick +or two--just wait!” And still shaking his fist, he reeled off to the +companion way, almost fell down the stairs, and disappeared into the +cabin. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +THE COLLISION IN THE HURRICANE. + + +“Now, what is he going to do?” I murmured, turning to my companion. + +“Something out of the ordinary, that’s certain,” answered Dan. “He has +just enough in him to be thoroughly ugly.” + +“I don’t believe he’ll let this matter drop, storm or no storm.” + +“Not he, Oliver. I’m afraid we have got ourselves into a scrape. I wish +we were in sight of Manila.” + +“So do I. But I haven’t done anything wrong. Somebody ought to tell the +man that he is drinking too much, Dan.” + +At that instant Dawson, the mate, came up. He had been standing behind +the mainmast and had heard every word uttered. His face showed plainly +that he was greatly troubled. + +“This is too bad,” he observed. “The cap’n bad enough, but you have +made him wuss, ten times over, lads.” + +“He hasn’t any right to drink, Dawson.” + +“We won’t talk about thet--seein’ as how he’s in command and I’m only +the fust mate. I’m sorry you quarreled, with the end o’ the voyage +almost in sight.” + +“What will he do?” put in Dan. + +“I dunno. Drink more, I reckon, an’ then come up twict as ugly.” + +“What about this storm that is coming up?” I questioned. + +“I notified him of that half an hour ago.” + +“And he didn’t pay any attention? It’s a shame! I don’t want to go to +the bottom of the China Sea, whether the captain drinks or not.” + +“None o’ us want to go to the bottom, lad. But then----” Tom Dawson +ended with a shrug of his shoulders. He realized more than I did what a +responsibility would rest upon him did he dare to issue orders contrary +to Captain Kenny’s wishes. + +It was about three o’clock in the afternoon, and the day had been +unusually oppressive, even for this latitude, which, as most of my +readers must know, never boasts of cold weather, but can easily break +the record for scorchers. During the morning, when the sun had shone, +the seams of the deck had run with tar, and no one had exposed himself +more than was absolutely necessary. But now the sun was hidden by +clouds that kept growing darker and darker, and the wind was so strong +it could not be otherwise than refreshing. + +Captain Kenny had left positive orders that the main and mizzen courses +be left as they were, fully set, and both sheets were straining and +tugging as though ready to lift the two masts out of their resting +places. The forecourse had been taken in, also the jib, but so far this +had had no effect on the riding of the _Dart_, and she dipped her nose +into every fourth or fifth wave that came along. + +“If I was you I’d take in more sail,” remarked Dan, after a pause. +“Even if you don’t lose a mast, you’re running the risk of opening more +than one seam. If we founder----” + +He did not finish, for at that moment Captain Kenny’s head reappeared +above the combing of the companion way. He came staggering toward us +with his right hand in his jacket pocket and a sickly grin on his +unshaven face. + +“Now we’ll come to terms,” he began, with a hiccough. + +“Captain Kenny, how about that mainsail?” interrupted the mate. “The +wind is freshening rapidly, sir.” + +“I’ll take care o’ the--hic--mainsail, when I’ll through which +these--hic--young rascals,” was the answer. “Yarson! Carden!” he bawled +out. “Come here, you’re wanted.” + +At once two of the sailors, a Swede and an American, came aft and +touched their forelocks. + +“Do you know what I’m--hic--going to do?” went on the captain, closing +one eye suggestively. “I’m going to place both of you under arrest +until we arrive at Manila.” + +“Arrest!” cried Dan and I simultaneously. + +“You shall not arrest me,” I added, and my companion said something +very similar. + +“I said--hic--arrest, and I mean it. Throw up your hands, both of you.” + +“I refuse to obey the order.” + +“Do you know that I am the--hic--commander of this ship?” + +“You are when you are sober,” returned Dan. + +“I am sober now--I never get--hic--drunk. I place you under arrest. +Yarson, Carden, conduct the two passengers to the--hic--brig and lock +’em in.” + +“Keep your hands off!” I exclaimed. “Don’t you dare to touch me!” + +“And don’t you dare to touch me,” added Dan. + +We had scarcely spoken than Captain Kenny withdrew his right hand from +his pocket and showed us the muzzle of a revolver. + +“You’ll--hic--obey or take the consequences,” he hiccoughed. “I’m a +peaceful man until I’m aroused, and then----” Another hiccough ended +the sentence. + +I must say that I was both alarmed and disgusted, but my disgust was +greater than my alarm, for I knew I had right on my side and was +willing to wager that in his present condition Captain Kenny could not +hit the broadside of a barn, excepting by accident. + +The two sailors advanced, but they came on slowly, evidently having no +relish for the job at hand. When the Swede attempted to take hold of me +I flung him off. + +“Stand back!” I said, and at the same time Dan motioned Carden to keep +his distance. + +“Are you going to do as I ordered?” fumed the captain. + +“I vos reatty to opey orders, captain,” said Yarson. + +“So am I, cap’n, if you say it’s all right,” added Carden. + +“It is all--hic--right. Arrest ’em--arrest ’em on the spot!” +vociferated the skipper of the _Dart_. + +“You keep your distance,” I ordered. “If you don’t it will be the worse +for you.” + +“The first man who touches me will get knocked down,” said Dan, and +caught up a marline spike which hung by the mast. + +“Captain, I think we really ought to look to those sails,” pleaded +Dawson, taking hold of his chief’s arm. “It won’t do to lose ’em, you +know.” + +“Didn’t I say I’d take care of ’em when I’m--hic--through with these +fellows?” was the surly return. “Stand back, Dawson!” and now the +captain rushed forward and leveled his pistol at my head. “You march to +the brig, and be quick about it, or I’ll----” + +What Captain Kenny would have done, had I refused to march as ordered, +I never learned, for while he was speaking Dan made a rush forward and +caught the pistol from his hand and sent him flat on his back, in the +bargain. Then my companion stepped to my side, and both of us backed up +toward the companion way. + +For fully a minute Captain Kenny lay where he had fallen, nobody caring +to go to his assistance. Then he cried loudly to the sailors to help +him get up, and they did so. In the meantime Tom Dawson stood by, +scratching his head in perplexity. + +“Captain, we must attend to the sails,” he began, when there came a +sudden puff of air, and the _Dart_ seemed to fairly stand up on ends. I +had to catch hold of the companion-way rail to keep from falling, and +Dan held on, too. Captain Kenny collapsed and went sliding into the +mainmast, and then toward the lee rail. + +“Save me!” he yelled, when he felt that he could not help himself. +“Save me!” And Dawson and the American sailor immediately ran to his +assistance. + +It was all I could do now to save myself from being thrown down the +companion way, and for the time being I lost interest in Captain Kenny. +“This is awful!” I said to Dan. “I believe we are in for another +hurricane.” + +“The fools ought to take in every rag of canvas,” was the reply. “Tom +Dawson hasn’t any backbone, or he’d take matters in his own hands.” + +“Let us go below,” I went on, as a wave swept the deck, drenching us +both. “There is no use of remaining here.” + +Dan tumbled down the companion way and into the cabin, and I came after +him, stumbling over an empty rum bottle which was rolling over the +floor. From the cabin we went to our stateroom, to see that the port +was tightly closed. + +“I think I’ll keep this pistol until we reach Manila,” observed my +companion. “You know I haven’t any weapon of my own. I wish I had some +extra cartridges.” + +“Perhaps the caliber of my pistol is the same as Captain Kenny’s +weapon,” I suggested, and produced my little six-shooter. Both pistols +used the same size of cartridge, and I divided a box of those articles +between us, and shoved my share and my revolver in my pocket. + +We now heard a hurried tramping on deck, and soon the creaking of +blocks as the main and mizzen courses came down on the run. Soon every +rag of canvas was furled, this being done by Dawson’s directions, as I +afterward learned, Captain Kenny having been knocked partly unconscious +by his tumble upon the lee rail. + +A half hour went by, a time that to Dan and I seemed an age. The _Dart_ +tumbled and tossed, and it was all we could do to keep from having our +brains dashed out against the stateroom walls. + +“We would have done much better had we taken a steamer to Manila,” I +remarked, when the hurricane seemed to be at its height. “If we get out +of this storm we have still our row with the captain to be settled up.” + +“Never mind, Oliver, we ought to reach Manila in a couple of days. If +the captain attempts to arrest us again, I’ll give him warning that +I’ll have him up before the court at the first landing we make.” + +“He ought to have his vessel taken away from him. Do you suppose the +owners would keep him in command if they knew of his habits?” + +“As it happens he owns a one-fourth interest in the _Dart_, and his +contract says he shall be skipper, so Dawson told me,” answered Dan. +“I’ll wager Dawson will have a story to tell when he comes below. My, +what a sea must be running!” And my companion swung forward and back +with the motion of the schooner. “And see how dark it is getting!” + +It was so gloomy we could scarcely see each other. It had now begun to +lighten and thunder, while the rain came down in perfect sheets. We +huddled together, as if feeling instinctively that something out of the +ordinary was about to occur. + +And it did occur a moment later. A clap of thunder had just rolled away +when there came a cry from the deck, so appalling that it could be +distinctly heard above the fury of the elements. + +“Ship, ahoy! Don’t run us down!” + +The cry was followed by a tearing, grinding, sickening crash that I +shall never forget. The crash threw me headlong and I lay at Dan’s feet +for several seconds, completely dazed. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +IN WHICH DAN AND I BECOME SEPARATED. + + +“We are struck, Oliver, get up!” + +“Oh, my head!” I groaned, for I had struck the stateroom wall a blow by +no means gentle. + +“We must get on deck!” urged my companion. “We have run into another +ship and may be sinking!” + +Collecting my scattered senses as best I could, I arose and caught Dan +by the arm. Soon we were mounting the companion-way stairs, two steps +at a time. As we emerged into the open the downpour of rain and flying +spray nearly drowned us. + +A vivid flash of lightning lit up the scene, and looking to port we +saw a big Chinese vessel bearing away, with a broken bowsprit and a +big hole in her side, well forward. We also saw that our own deck was +filled with fallen rigging and wooden splinters. + +“Sound the pumps!” was the cry, coming from Tom Dawson. “Quigley, see +if you can make out the damage”--the last words to the ship’s carpenter. + +“We got it pretty heavily,” gasped Dan, who was about as much winded as +myself. “Pray heaven we may outride the shock and the storm.” + +Several sailors had sprung to the pumps and were pumping up sea water +in great quantities. “A foot and four inches,” cried one. “And gaining +rapidly!” he announced, a minute later. + +Those last words caused every cheek to blanch. For the time there was +almost a panic. But now Tom Dawson showed what was really in him. + +“Keep your wits about you, men!” he called out. “We may yet be able +to stop the leak and pump her out. Keep to the work for all you are +worth!” And the men at the pumps obeyed, while the mate hurried forward +to obtain the carpenter’s report. + +It was soon forthcoming. The blow had been so severe that a gaping +hole, four feet in diameter, had been stove in the _Dart’s_ bow. It was +partly above and partly below the water line, but in such a sea the +water was coming in by the hundreds of gallons at every lurch of the +schooner. + +“I’ll try to stop it up,” said Quigley, but shook his head as he spoke. +“You had better order the small boats out, and stock ’em with water and +grub,” and he ran off. + +By this time Captain Kenny was up once more, but in his condition could +do little but find fault and use language not fit to transcribe to +these pages. Once he tried to take the command from Tom Dawson, but the +mate would not listen. + +“We’re sinking, Captain Kenny,” said Dawson. “I must do what I can for +the men and myself.” + +“Sinking!” gasped the unreasonable one. “Sinking!” + +“Yes, sinking. Keep your wits about you or you’ll go to Davy Jones’ +locker,” concluded Tom Dawson. His remarks so frightened the captain +that he ran to the cabin, there to plunder his trunks and lockers in a +drunken and vain effort to stow what he owned of value about his person. + +The carpenter was as good as his word, but although he labored manfully +and had all the aid that could be used, the water could not be stopped +from coming in. The shock had opened up half a dozen seams and the +water in the hold had reached four feet and a half. + +“She can’t stand that!” cried Dan, as he heard the announcement. +“She’ll go to the bottom inside of a quarter of an hour. Oliver, we are +lost, unless we get into one of the small boats.” + +“The life-preservers!” I ejaculated. “Let us each get one of those on, +if nothing else!” and I led the way to where the articles were stored. +While we were adjusting them, the mate passed us. + +“That’s right,” he cried. “You two shall go in our boat. We’ll leave +in about five minutes, if we can catch the sea right.” And then he +disappeared from sight once more. + +I must confess that my heart was in my throat, and Dan has since told +me that he felt just as awed. “Come down and get what we must have,” he +whispered hoarsely, and once again we tumbled below to our stateroom, +passing Captain Kenny as he tore around his cabin like a man bereft of +his reason. + +“You are responsible for this!” he growled. “If it hadn’t been for you +no accident would have happened.” For a wonder, his fright had quite +sobered him, even though he was half crazy as before mentioned. + +There was not much to get, for we knew that trunks or even traveling +bags would not be taken into the small boats. I donned a little extra +clothing and was about to get out my money belt, containing some gold +and silver and a draft on a Manila banking institution, when a call +from above reached us. + +“To the boats! To the boats!” came the cry from the deck, and a scurry +of footsteps followed. Grabbing each other by the hand we leaped for +the companion way, to find our passage blocked by Captain Kenny. + +“Let us up!” cried Dan, and tried to get past the man, but the captain +merely shoved him back. + +“I’m the one to go--you can stay here, hang ye!” he hissed. + +“Stay here? Not much!” I burst out, and catching him by the legs, I +shot him up on deck as if he had been fired from a spring gun. He tried +to turn and strike me, but I avoided the blow with ease. + +The _Dart_ had now settled so much that every wave washed her deck from +stem to stern. “Look out, or you’ll go down!” roared Dan in my ear, but +the caution was not needed, for I was already exercising all the care +possible in making my way to the boat Tom Dawson was to command. + +There were four small craft and twenty of us all told. This gave +five persons to a boat, the first being in command of Captain Kenny, +the second in command of Tom Dawson, while the second mate and the +boatswain had the others under their care. + +“I reckon you two want to keep together,” said Dawson, as we reached +his side. “I can’t blame you, but----” + +“Don’t put those two landlubbers in one boat!” roared Captain Kenny. +“It’s bad enough to have ’em at all. Put one in your boat and one in +Brown’s,” indicating the second mate. + +“Oh, can’t we go together?” I whispered to Dawson. + +“We ought to have at least four experienced sailors in each boat,” was +the mate’s reply. “Do as the captain commanded, and we’ll see if we +can’t keep the small boats together.” + +And with this he shoved Dan into his own boat and turned me back to +join the party under Watt Brown, the second mate. + +My heart now beat more painfully than ever. “Good-by, Dan, if we don’t +meet again!” I said huskily. + +“Good-by, Oliver,” he answered. “Oh, if only we could go together!” And +then we parted in the darkness, and I scuttled for the boat that was +already awaiting me. + +How we ever got over the _Dart’s_ side and away from the settling +schooner I cannot describe to this day. Amid the roar of thunder and +the flashing of lightning, the small boat was swung out. Three sailors +were at the oars, while the mate stood ready with a hatchet to cut the +davit ropes. Down we went, to strike the rolling sea with a resounding +smack that almost pitched me overboard. “Steady now! Pull! pull!” came +the command, and away the sailors pulled, while a bit of rope snapped +down and hit me across the cheek, nearly blinding me. For the next few +minutes I felt as if I was roller-coasting up one mountain side and +down another. + +When I was able to look around me another flash of lightning lit up +the scene. Behind us rested the _Dart_, well over on her port side, as +though getting ready to take her final plunge beneath the waves of the +sea. To the left of us was one small boat and to the right the others. + +“Are we away all right?” I asked of the second mate. + +“Can’t say--yet,” was his laconic answer, and I felt that he did not +wish to be questioned further. I wanted to aid in handling the boat, +but was not allowed to do anything. “Just wait, lad, your time may +come,” said one of the sailors grimly, and I shuddered, for I knew what +he meant--that it might be many a weary day before we would sight land, +if land were sighted at all. Perhaps that very sea upon which we were +riding would prove our open grave. + +Five minutes passed in painful suspense and then the lightning lit +up the firmament again. “Look! look!” yelled Watt Brown, and at the +sound of the second mate’s voice all in the boat turned, to see one of +the craft to our starboard founder beneath a curling wave that looked +higher than a six-story office building. + +“What boat is that?” I cried. + +“Don’t know exactly, but it looked like Tom Dawson’s,” was the answer, +which almost prostrated me. Was it possible that Dan had been lost thus +quickly? + +“Won’t you try to pick them up?” I went on, when I could speak. “Surely +you won’t forsake them!” + +“We’ll try it,--but it’s wuss nor looking for a pin in a haystack,” +was the second mate’s reply. “To starboard, boys, but don’t get caught +under a capper, or it will be all up with us.” And then our own craft +veered around and moved slowly and painfully over the billows to the +spot where the other small boat had gone down. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE RESCUE OF THE UNWORTHY ONE. + + +I was in a tremble of excitement, and for the moment forgot all about +my own peril. Since coming to the far East, or West, as you will, I +had become greatly attached to Dan Holbrook; indeed he seemed like +a brother to me. If he was lost, what would I do, even if we were +fortunate to reach some part of the Island of Luzon, upon which the +city of Manila is located? + +But a treacherous wave, mountain-high, brought me to a sudden +realization of my own condition. “Hold hard!” I heard Watt Brown yell, +and I held to the seat with all of my might, and this was all that +prevented me from being swept overboard. + +We had shipped a good deal of water, and I was ordered to bail out the +small craft, while the sailors continued at the oars, assisted by the +second mate. There was a big dipper handy and I think I can truthfully +say that I never worked harder in my life than I did then, meanwhile +continuing to hold on with one hand. + +It was fully ten minutes ere we reached the locality where the small +boat had foundered. In the meanwhile flash after flash of lightning +had lit up the scene, showing the _Dart_ far to the northward, driving +rapidly before the fury of the storm. But at last distance and the +steady downpour of rain hid the vessel from view, and we could not tell +if she sunk or not. + +“A man!” It was the second mate who uttered the words, and a head +bobbed up just alongside of our bow. At once the mate dropped his oar +and seized the individual by his hair. Then he caught hold of an arm +and in a trice the fellow was on board, where he fell in a heap at the +bottom of our craft. It was Captain Kenny. + +“The captain’s boat,” observed Watt Brown, and I breathed a long sigh +of relief, thinking that Dan might yet be safe. “I wonder if Yarson, +Betts, Camar, and Dilwoddy are floating around?” + +He referred to the four sailors that had accompanied the captain in the +first boat. Standing up as best he could, he waited for another flash +of lightning and gazed around hurriedly. Not another soul was in sight. + +“They are gone, I am afraid,” he murmured. “Keep her head up, lads, and +I’ll take another look.” + +“Never mind the others,” growled Captain Kenny, struggling to a seat. +“We must save ourselves. Pull on, or we’ll be swamped.” + +“You wretch!” I cried indignantly. “Supposing we had left you to shift +for yourself?” + +“Shut up, boy, or----” + +“The lad is right, captain,” interrupted Watt Brown. “It was no more +to us to save you than it is to save Betts and the rest. Remember, the +_Dart_ has been abandoned and now one man is as good as another.” + +“Do you mean to say I am not still in command?” roared Captain Kenny in +a fury that was positively silly. + +“No, you’re not!” spoke up one of the men at the oars. “Sit still, +or I’ll be in for heaving you overboard again,” and this was said so +harshly that the captain sunk back without another word. + +The long hours of the night which followed were filled with an anxiety +which words cannot describe. The sailors at the oars could do nothing +but keep the small boat head up to the waves and at times they became +so exhausted, as the sea ran stronger and stronger, that more than one +was ready to drop in a faint. I took an oar for two hours and then had +to relinquish the blade, for fear it would be torn from my grasp and +lost. + +It was about five o’clock in the morning when the hurricane abated. +As is usual in this locality, the storm let up as quickly as it had +gathered. The rain stopped and the wind dropped all in a few minutes, +and in less than an hour the sun was shining down upon us from a +cloudless sky. The sea, however, still ran dangerously high. + +“Do you see anything?” I asked of the second mate, as he balanced +himself on one of the middle seats and took a careful look about the +horizon. + +“Nothing,” was his disheartening answer. “Not a sail or a small boat in +sight.” + +“Then the other boats must be lost,” and my heart sank again. + +“Perhaps not. The wind during the night may have carried us miles +apart.” + +We knew we must be a good distance from land, but we also knew that +we were somewhere to the westward of Luzon, so the only thing to do +was to steer a course due east and trust to sight the shore before our +provisions gave out. + +We had on board but two articles, a keg of ship’s biscuits and a keg +of water. Several other things had been put into the small craft, but +these had either been washed overboard or ruined by the salt water +which I had bailed out. + +“By close economy we can make the biscuits last three days, and the +water about as long,” announced the second mate. “We ought to make +shore long before that time expires.” And he proceeded to deal out a +breakfast of two biscuits and one cup of water to each person. + +“I want more than two biscuits and I am bound to have them!” cried +Captain Kenny and leaped for the biscuit keg. But instantly Watt Brown +and two of the sailors confronted him, one with an upraised oar, and +again he subsided. After that all of the others watched him carefully. + +As I have said, the sea still ran high, and we soon learned that to +steer in a due east course was impossible. We had to head to the +northeast and at times almost due north. + +“This will take us a good many miles to the north of Manila Bay, even +if we strike shore,” observed Watt Brown to me. “I calkerlate we are +already some miles north of Subig Bay.” + +“Well, I hardly care where we land, if only we escape the sea,” I +returned. “I have no desire to fill a watery grave, as Betts and the +others have done.” + +“I think we are safe on making shore--providing we don’t strike another +hurricane, Raymond.” Then the second mate leaned close to me. “Watch +out for the captain, he has it in for you,” he whispered. “He’s a bad +man when he’s got a spell on.” + +“I’ll be on my guard,” I replied. I almost wished we had saved +somebody else in place of the unreasonable skipper of the _Dart_. + +The morning passed away slowly. By eleven o’clock the sun was almost +directly overhead and it was so hot that all craved a shelter that +could not be had. The cup of water dealt out at noon seemed pitiably +small, but nobody but the captain complained, understanding only too +well what the horrors of thirst would be should our supply give out. + +Toward night another storm came up, principally of wind. Again the +waves increased in height, sending us up to a very mountain top one +moment and then letting us down into a gigantic hollow which looked +ready to engulf us forever. We still drove northward at a rate of ten +to twelve miles an hour. + +Having had no sleep for forty-eight hours I was utterly worn out, and +when the storm let up a bit, sometime after midnight, I sank in a bunch +on my seat and closed my eyes. “It’s all right, catch a nap if you +can,” said the second mate. Soon I was sleeping as soundly as if in my +bed at home, although disturbed by the wildest of dreams. + +I awoke with a start, to find a firm hand on my shoulder and Captain +Kenny glaring into my face. “You’re to be number two, lad!” he hissed. +“We’ll save the water and biscuits for a better mouth!” And then he +lifted me up and attempted to hurl me into the sea! + +For the fraction of a second my tongue was too paralyzed to utter a +sound; then I let out an ear-splitting yell that brought Watt Brown and +one of the sailors to my immediate aid. “Let go of me!” I cried. “He +wants to heave me overboard!” + +“Let him alone!” commanded Brown, and hauled Captain Kenny backward. +The sailor hit him a heavy crack on the head, and down went the captain +on the boat’s bottom unconscious. + +“I told ye to be watchful of him,” said the second mate, when it was +all over. “If Captain Kenny is your enemy onct he’s your enemy allers, +don’t forgit that.” + +“He said something to me about being number two,” I said. “What did +he--a man is gone!” + +I had glanced around hastily, to discover that one of the oar hands was +missing. Watt Brown followed my gaze. + +“Garwell!” murmured the second mate. His face grew dark, and in +justifiable indignation he leaped to where Captain Kenny lay and shook +the unconscious man vigorously. “Where is Garwell!” he cried out. “Tell +me, captain, or I’ll pitch ye overboard! Where is Garwell?” + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +CAST ASHORE ON LUZON. + + +To Watt Brown’s vigorous questioning Captain Kenny returned not a word. +Either he was still unconscious or he had recovered and come to the +conclusion that he had best remain quiet and answer nothing. The mate +had caught the captain up, now he flung him down on the hard bottom +of the boat as one unworthy of being touched. “I’ll settle with him +later,” he muttered and shut his teeth hard, for the missing man had +been one of his best friends. + +“Hadn’t we better stay around here until daylight and look for +Garwell?” asked Sandram, the sailor who had used his fist so +effectually upon Captain Kenny’s skull. + +“Yes,” said the second mate. “Poor Garwell! He was a fine fellow.” + +“None better, Brown,” put in Vincent, the second sailor. “Captain Kenny +will have a score to settle when this ill-fated cruise comes to an end.” + +Slowly the remainder of the night dragged by. With the coming of +daylight we gazed around eagerly for the body of Garwell and for the +other small boats. Nothing came to light but the bluish-green and +never-quiet sea, which rose and fell to the edge of the horizon. + +“I want water,” was Captain Kenny’s demand, as he roused up while the +scanty breakfast was being dealt out. + +“Not a drop until you account for Garwell,” returned Watt Brown. + +“Account for Garwell? What do you mean?” + +“You know well enough. You heaved the poor man overboard.” + +“I did not,” roared the captain, but his telltale face belied his +words. “This is a put-up job against me. Give me the water.” + +A wordy war followed. Captain Kenny would confess nothing, but that +he was guilty there could be no doubt. All that the second mate would +allow him was one biscuit and half a cupful of the water, now so warm +it was scarcely palatable. The captain continued to grumble, but +it availed him nothing, and at last he had to stop, for all of us +threatened to send him forth as food for the fishes. + +The second day was coming to an end when far to the eastward we heard a +curious booming sound, not unlike a cannonading at a distance. + +“What is that?” I questioned. + +“It’s the surf, lad!” cried the second mate. “It’s rolling up on a +shore or over a hidden reef.” + +“I hope it’s ashore. Any kind of land in preference to this +never-ending sea,” I said. “Can you see anything?” + +I asked the latter question, for Watt Brown was already on his feet. +Now Vincent followed, and both gazed eastward a long time. + +“I think I see something,” announced the second mate. “But it looks +like smoke more than anything.” + +“It is smoke, blowing from off shore,” put in Vincent. “We must be +about ten miles from land.” + +This announcement filled us with hope, and all, even Captain Kenny, +took their turns at the oars with renewed vigor. Inside of an hour the +booming of the surf could be heard quite distinctly, while some of the +smoke the others had noticed floated almost overhead. + +“I see land!” was the second mate’s welcome cry presently. “There is a +long, low-lying shore and a mountain behind it. We must be at least a +hundred miles north of Subig Bay.” + +We continued to pull until the land could be seen with ease. There was +a wide stretch of sandy beach, backed up by tall rocks and a heavy +tropical growth. In the distance the mountain loomed up, surrounded by +a veil-like mist. + +“To port!” cried Watt Brown. “The breakers are too heavy here!” And +we moved up the coast for a quarter of a mile further. Here there was +something of a bay and the breakers came to an end. Nearer and nearer +we crept to land until the first row of stately palms could be seen +with ease. The mate was on the watch, and finally ordered us to port +again, and five minutes later, we shot past a tiny coral reef and into +the bay mentioned. Here the boat ran up upon the sands, and, throwing +down our oars, we all leaped out and hauled her up still further. + +“Thank God we’re safe!” murmured Watt Brown, and took off his cap +reverently. I did the same, and offered up a silent prayer for my safe +deliverance from the perils of the deep. + +The bay we had entered was pear-shaped and probably five hundred feet +deep by a hundred and fifty feet wide. The sandy beach at either side +was many yards wide, but at the inner end the rocks and trees overhung +the water. From a tropical standpoint it was an ideal spot for a +painter, and I could not help but take in its beauty, even at such a +trying time as this. Captain Kenny, however, “stuck up his nose” at it. + +“A regular jungle,” he snorted. “We can’t live here.” + +“Then you had better take to the water again,” returned Watt Brown +sharply. “You haven’t got to stay with us, you know.” And this again +silenced the unreasonable man for the time being. + +It was decided that Vincent should walk up the shore on the lookout for +the other boats, while Sandram was to skirt the bay and try his luck +in the opposite direction. In the meantime the captain, second mate, +and myself were to do what we could toward building a fire and finding +something to eat beside ship’s biscuits. + +“You go find something to eat,” grumbled Captain Kenny to Watt Brown +and me, and threw himself under the nearest tree to rest. + +“All right, we’ll go,” answered the second mate. “But remember, Kenny, +if you haven’t got a good fire started for us when we come back, so we +can cook whatever we find, you’ll not partake of our supper.” And with +this pointed remark Brown withdrew and I followed. + +“He’s a beast,” I said, when we were out of hearing. “I would rather +have Ah Sid in the crowd.” + +Ah Sid had been the _Dart’s_ cook, a little dried-up Chinaman, but a +fellow who had always tried to make himself agreeable. + +“If he doesn’t behave himself I’ll bounce him out of camp,” was the +second mate’s answer. “Remember, he is absolutely nothing to us, now +we are on land.” + +“Where do you suppose we are?” + +“Somewhere north of Subig Bay, or Port Subig, as the English call it. +We were making for Point Capones when that dirty hurricane struck our +ship and sent us into that Chinese junk. I think we must be somewhere +in the neighborhood of Iba, a settlement something like a hundred miles +northwest of Manila. But we may be still further away.” + +“And what of the natives around here?” + +“They are treacherous people, so I’ve been told. The majority of them +are Tagals, or _Tagaloes_, as the Spanish call ’em. You know all of +these islands belong to Spain.” + +“Yes, I know that only too well, for the Spaniards at Manila have +caused our business firm no end of trouble. They want to drive the +Americans out, if they can.” + +“They would like to drive all foreigners out, so that they can have the +wealth of the Philippines to themselves,” went on the second mate, who +was, as I soon discovered, a well-read man. “You see the islands pay an +immense sum of money into Spain’s treasury every year.” + +“But what of this rebellion here, that I heard of at Hong Kong?” + +“Oh, the natives are continually fighting among themselves and against +the Spanish tax-gatherers, who have their offices located everywhere. +You see there is a terribly mixed population, of Tagals, Malays, +Papuan negroes, Chinese, Japanese, and Caucasians, with half- and +quarter-breeds without number. I understand the Spaniards can count +over a hundred different kinds of natives alone, and in the islands +over a hundred and fifty different languages and dialects are spoken. +It’s a great country. But, come, we must rouse up something to eat.” + +“I have my pistol and some cartridges,” I said, and showed my weapon. + +“Keep your ammunition until you actually need it, lad. We can knock +over something alive, as the natives do, with clubs.” + +In such a tropical forest clubs were soon found, and, holding these +ready for use, we tramped on, through thick, dank moss and under masses +of trailing vines. + +“There they go!” shouted Watt Brown suddenly, as a whir sounded out +ahead. A dozen or more good-sized birds had arisen and his club brought +down two. Then came another whir to our right, and I let fly and +brought down a beautiful white pigeon that weighed all of two pounds. +Another pigeon was wounded and I managed to catch it alive and wring +its neck. With this haul we returned to the beach. + +The second mate’s warning had had its effect upon Captain Kenny, and +a roaring blaze greeted us, which, in the gathering twilight looked +quite homelike. The captain had also kicked up about a bucketful of +shell-fish in the shallow water of the cove. + +By the time the fish and other things were cooked, Vincent and Sandram +came back, each having traveled a good mile out and return. Both +brought back with them some nearly ripe plantains, commonly called +bananas in America. All were hungry, and never did a meal taste better +than did that to me, although I have dined at some of our leading +hotels. + +“I saw nothing but some driftwood,” reported Sandram. “The wood looked +as if it might have belonged to the _Dart_, but I couldn’t get close +enough to make sure, as it was out on a reef, among the breakers.” + +Vincent had seen nothing of boats or crews, but had made a most +grewsome discovery. + +“I thought at a distance they might be big cocoanuts, lying upon the +sand,” he said. “But when I came closer I discovered that they were the +heads of seven negroes, all of whom had been buried in a circle in the +sand up to their necks.” + +“Negroes’ heads!” I ejaculated. “And were the poor fellows dead?” + +“Yes, and had been for some time, for the birds had pecked out their +eyes and carried off parts of their flesh.” + +“This is awful, Brown,” I said. “Persons who would do that cannot be +short of--of----” + +“Cannibals, eh, lad?” returned the mate. “Well, some savages +around here are cannibals yet, Spanish reports to the contrary +notwithstanding. But I don’t like that ring of heads. It is an old sign +among the Malays, and signifies that one tribe of people have made war +on another tribe.” + +“If that’s the case, I hope they don’t make war on us,” put in Sandram. + +“So do I,” I added; and there the talk dropped, for at that moment a +sight far out on the ocean thrilled us to the core. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +ADVENTURES IN THE FOREST. + + +The sight that met our gaze was a small boat dancing far out beyond the +breakers. It contained three men, and as it came in closer, through the +opening by which we had entered, we made out Tom Dawson, Ah Sid, the +Chinese cook, and Matt Gory, an Irish sailor. + +“It is Dawson’s craft,” murmured Watt Brown. “But it’s only got three +men aboard instead of five.” + +“Dan Holbrook is missing!” I gasped, and once again my heart sank like +a lump of lead within my bosom. + +“Boat ahoy!” yelled Vincent and the others, and the cry was speedily +returned. Then Tom Dawson noted where we had run in, and ten minutes +later beached his craft beside our own. + +“Glad to see ye!” he cried, as he caught one after another by the hand. +“I was afraid all of the other boats had gone to the bottom.” + +“The captain’s boat went down,” answered Watt Brown soberly. “We saved +Captain Kenny, but could see nothing of the rest.” + +“And where is Dan Holbrook?” I put in impatiently. + +“It’s a sorry tale to tell, lad,” answered the first mate of the +ill-fated _Dart_. + +“He was--was drowned?” I could scarcely speak the words. + +“He was. You see it was this way. We were running along during the +night and all hands were utterly worn out and half asleep. Suddenly a +wave as big as a church bore down on us and nearly swamped our craft. I +went overboard and so did Dan Holbrook and Casey. All of us went under, +and when I came up and clambered aboard again, Holbrook and Casey were +missing.” + +“Yis, poor Casey was missin’, God rist his sowl!” murmured Matt Gory, +who was the missing man’s cousin. He turned to me. “Was you an’ Mister +Holbrook related, me b’y?” he questioned tenderly. + +“No, but--but Dan was almost like a brother,” I answered, in a voice +that choked me, and then I had to turn away to hide the tears that +would come. + +The only man who seemed to enjoy my sorrow was Captain Kenny, who +leered at me in a manner that made me feel like leaping upon him and +hurling him under my feet to be trampled upon. He was my enemy now, +and I felt he would be my enemy as long as both of us lived. + +The only grain of comfort that I could give myself was the fact that +Tom Dawson’s craft had struck the big wave not far from the coast line. +It was barely possible that Dan had kept himself afloat until cast up +on the beach, although, to be sure, this was far from likely. + +The night was spent under the palm trees which lined the beach. As +Vincent had made such a ghastly discovery, it was decided that all +hands should take an hour at watching. I was awake from one o’clock to +two on my own watch and also from five to six, when Captain Kenny stood +guard, but nothing happened to disturb the improvised camp. + +It was easy to obtain birds, and shell and other fish, and by eight +o’clock an appetizing breakfast was in preparation. While eating we +discussed our situation and decided to remain where we were for one +day more, hoping to learn what had become of the fourth small boat and +those who were still missing. + +As I had had such luck in knocking over the two pigeons I was delegated +to go out again to replenish our larder and was accompanied this time +by Tom Dawson and Gory, the Irish sailor, who had visited the island +of Luzon twice before. In the meantime the others made an even longer +tour than before, up and down the shore. + +“It’s a great counthry, so it is,” observed Matt Gory, as the three of +us strode into the forest. “They have a mixed-up population, as you was +sayin’, and the foightin’ is worse tin toimes over nor a Donnybrook +Fair. Thim Spaniards be afther thinkin’ they kin control the nagers +an’ other haythins, but they can’t. They are a thavin’, lyin’ set, an’ +would be afther stabbin’ yez in the back fer a tin-cint piece.” + +“But the Spaniards control Manila and the other large cities.” + +“So they do, me b’y. But that’s not a drop in the bucket, so to spake, +wid millions o’ haythins living on a thousand or more islands, some of +which have niver yit been visited by white men. It will take two or +three cinturies to make these nagers half dasent, so it will!” And Matt +Gory shook his head to show that he meant all that he said. + +Our talking, and the fire on the beach, had evidently caused an alarm +among the feathered denizens of the forest, for we had to walk a +considerable distance before we roused up any game worth bringing down. +All of us had provided ourselves with clubs and in about an hour we had +secured eight birds and a small squirrel, which I had dislodged from a +hollow tree quite by accident. + +“There’s a foin birrud!” cried Gory presently. “Hould back, both of +yez, an’ Oi’ll bring him down!” And he crept off to our left. + +He was gone fully three minutes, when we heard the crash of his club +among some tree branches, followed by a yell of wonder and then a +scream of fright. “He has stirred up the wrong hornet!” ejaculated Tom +Dawson. “Come on!” And away he bounded, with I following. + +When we reached the Irish sailor he was leaning against a tree, trying +to knock from his shoulder a bat that we afterward found measured three +feet from one wing tip to the other. The bat had clutched him firmly +and was dealing blow after blow, first with one wing and then the other. + +“Save me! Hilp! Save me!” gasped Gory, whose wind was almost gone, and +now a blow on his forehead sent him to the foot of the tree. + +Tom Dawson threw his club, but missed his mark. While he was running +to secure his weapon once more, I leaped forward and hit the bat over +the head. Instantly he came for me, and I received a crack on the +cheek that left its mark for several hours. But now another blow from +my club finished him, and away he sailed with a half-broken wing. +I was afraid he would return, but he passed out of sight among the +overhanging vines, not to come back. + +“Be jabers, that was a birrud I didn’t calculate on!” gasped Matt Gory +when he could speak. “Phat was it--a floyin’ windmill?” + +“It was a bat, Gory,” I answered. “A tropical bat--and a whopper.” + +“I want no more such birruds,” was the Irishman’s response. “Oi reckon +Oi’ll be more careful of phat Oi tackle in the future,” and he was. + +We walked on for half a mile further, for it was a clear day and we +were not likely to miss our way. The undergrowth was thick and we moved +with caution, not caring to rouse up some deadly reptile. On all sides +were stately palm, mahogany, ebony, and other trees of a tropical +nature, and everywhere hung the ponderous vines, some of them hundreds +of feet long and as thick as a man’s wrist. + +“A snake!” yelled Tom Dawson, of a sudden, and we all fell back, +while I drew my pistol, not satisfied to trust to a club in such an +emergency. Matt Gory, who had no use for snakes, took to his heels, and +that was the last we saw of him for fully a quarter of an hour. + +Our alarm proved of short duration, for I soon saw what the supposed +snake was: the bat we had previously wounded. It was more than half +dead, and a single blow from Dawson’s stick finished it, and then we +yelled for Gory to return. + +“The Philippine bats knock ours all to pieces,” observed the first +mate. “We had best take him along.” + +“For eating?” I queried. + +“Perhaps----” Dawson paused. “You don’t like the idea? Very well, let +him go then,” and he threw the creature into the brush. I have since +heard that among certain of the natives these bats are considered a +great delicacy. + +We had begun to ascend a small hill located about a quarter of a mile +in advance of the mountain I have mentioned several times. I now +suggested that we push on to the top. + +“We can get a good look around from there,” I continued. “And it may be +that we will see more than the parties that went up and down the shore.” + +“Sure an that’s a good idee,” said Matt Gory. “Let us go to the top by +all means.” + +The first mate was willing. “If you don’t find it a tougher climb than +ye calculate on,” he cautioned. + +The first part of the journey was comparatively easy, but the nearer we +got to the top of the hill the steeper became the side, until we could +only progress by pulling ourselves up on one vine after another. “Sure +an if a feller had to do it, he could be afther makin’ step-ladders of +the voines,” grinned Gory. + +Noon found us at the topmost point, at a spot where a bit of table +land was surrounded by a score of stately palms many yards in height. +“We can’t see much after all, not unless we climb a tree,” I observed +disappointedly. “And how we are going to get to the top of one of those +palms is a conundrum to me.” + +“I’ll show you a native trick,” answered Tom Dawson, and cast around +for a suitable vine. Soon one was found, and he cut off a piece several +yards long. Throwing this around a tree trunk, he twisted the ends +about his hands and then began to ascend by bracing his feet against +the trunk one after another, at the same time leaning his weight back +so that it was held by the vine, which was slipped up in company with +each footstep. + +“Yez ought to introduce that sthoyle in Americky, among the telephone +linemen,” observed Gory, with a twinkle in his eye. “Oi only trust the +vine proves sthrong enough to hold yez until yez reach the top.” + +Gory’s hope was fulfilled; indeed the bit of green would have held the +weight of a dozen men, and once the branches of the palm were gained, +the first mate of the _Dart_ found it an easy matter to reach the crown +of the tree. From this point a wide expanse of land and sea came into +view, and he scrutinized every point of the compass with care. + +“There is a native village to the northeast of here,” he announced. “I +can see forty or fifty bamboo huts and the smoke from several fires. +There is a road running from the village to a river which winds in +behind the mountain back of us.” + +“And what can you see down to the beach?” I called up. + +“Nothing to the south of us.” Tom Dawson turned to look up the coast. +“By ginger!” we heard him exclaim, in a low voice. + +“Phat now?” queried Matt Gory. + +“I see--yes, it is--the wreck of the _Dart_, cast up high and dry on +the shore!” + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +THE WRECK ON THE SHORE. + + +Tom Dawson’s discovery filled us with amazement and satisfaction: +amazement because all of us had thought that the schooner lay at the +bottom of the China Sea and satisfaction for the reason that all +thought we might now have a chance to obtain such of our belongings as +still remained on board of the vessel. + +“You are sure it is the _Dart_?” I queried, as the first mate took +another long look. + +“Sure, my lad; I know that craft among a thousand,” was the answer. + +“It’s great news,” put in Matt Gory. “Oi haven’t much on board, but +phat Oi have Oi want, especially that ould dudeen of mine which same +Oi have smoked these fifteen years.” Since landing he had bewailed the +loss of his pipe a dozen times. + +“If the _Dart_ is up to the north of here, the party that went that way +must have discovered her too,” I said, as Tom Dawson descended the tree. + +“That’s likely, lad. Still, now we have located her, there is no use in +staying here. We want our things, and I reckon the boat will furnish +us with all we will need to eat until we get back to civilized parts +again.” + +“We don’t want to lose a minit,” burst out Gory. “If we do, thim +haythins livin’ in these parts will be afther claimin’ the wreck, an’ +thin they won’t lit us touch a thing.” + +“Can they do that?” I asked of the first mate. + +“They can if they have the power,” was Dawson’s answer. “In this part +of our globe, might is right in nine cases out of ten. We’ll hurry all +we can, and move directly for the wreck instead of going down to the +old camp.” + +Apparently this was good advice, but in the end it proved to be just +the opposite. We found that getting down the hill was more difficult +than getting up, and once I took a tumble that landed me directly in +the midst of a clump of nasty thorns. Matt Gory came after me, and both +of us were stuck and scratched in more places than I care to mention. + +“Oi’m stabbed!” he moaned. “Hilp me out av here! Ouch, be the powers, +did anywan iver see such a hole as this fer darnin’ nadles, now?” + +The first mate helped us both, and after that we proceeded with more +caution. Halfway down the hill we came upon a beautiful spring of water +which was almost as cold as ice, and here drank our fill. + +I must confess that I was very anxious to get back to the _Dart_, for, +as will be remembered, I had left my money belt with its precious +contents behind. This belt I had secreted in a hollow between my +stateroom and that next to it, and I felt it would be safe so long as +the elements did not utterly destroy the ship. Besides the belt with my +gold, silver, and the Manila draft, I had left behind a large packet of +business papers of great value to our house. If these were lost, I felt +our firm would have more trouble than ever in the Philippines. + +“It’s queer the _Dart_ didn’t sink in the middle of the sea,” I +observed, as we hurried on through the forest skirting the shore. “How +do you account for it?” + +“Well, we had a light cargo, for one thing, and it was packed pretty +tightly forward. Maybe some the boxes got jammed in the hole that was +stove in her,” answered Tom Dawson, and later on, this proved to be +correct. + +The sun was beating down fiercely and the moment we left the shade of +the trees we felt its full force. But we had now but a short distance +further to go, so we did not slacken our pace. + +“Stop!” cried Tom Dawson suddenly, and held me back, while he motioned +to Matt Gory to halt. + +“What’s up?” I whispered. + +“A dozen natives are in possession of the _Dart_. I can see them +running all over her!” + +“That’s too bad, so it is!” groaned the Irish sailor. “To think sech a +noble vessel should become the prize av sech haythins!” + +“Will she really be their prize?” I asked. + +For reply the first mate shrugged his shoulders. “I don’t know what the +law is down here,” he ventured. + +“Perhaps you can buy them off for a trifle.” + +“Not much! There was a time when natives like these could be bought off +for a string of beads, a roll of calico or a six-inch looking glass, +but that time is past. They know the value of gold and silver, even if +paper money is beyond them.” + +“What do you propose to do?” + +“Oh, we’ll go ahead and claim the ship. But I want to give you a bit of +advice. Don’t be rash, or it may cost you your life.” + +“Thrue fer you,” put in Gory. “Them nagers aint to be thrusted, as I +said before. Go slow, and be on your guard.” + +“I will be cautious,” I answered, and as the memory of the circle +of heads on the beach flashed across my mind I shuddered. Certainly +these people, even if they did live but a few miles from the Spanish +settlements, were far from civilized. + +Looking to it that my pistol was ready for use, I followed Dawson out +on the wide stretch of beach which separated us from the ill-fated +vessel which we had left but a few days before. The _Dart_ lay high +out of the water, and a brief glance showed that she had lost none of +her masts and but little of her rigging. “I’ll wager that five hundred +dollars will put her into as good a condition as ever,” remarked Tom +Dawson, and Matt Gory agreed with him. + +As the first mate had said, there were a number of natives on the +craft’s deck, and now we noted another batch of the negroes on the +shore. + +“They are a hard looking-crowd,” I whispered, as I gazed at them. They +were all men, tall, slim, and wearing little but shirts and loin-cloths +and head-coverings made of Manila straw. The crowd on the beach was +chattering away at a lively rate, in a language none of us could +understand, although I soon became convinced that it was not Spanish. + +We had covered half the distance to the _Dart_, when one of the natives +discovered us and pointed us out to his companions. At once the whole +party ran forward and surrounded us, asking a dozen questions at once. + +[Illustration: “AT ONCE THE WHOLE PARTY RAN FORWARD AND SURROUNDED US, +ASKING A DOZEN QUESTIONS AT ONCE.”] + +“Don’t understand you,” shouted Tom Dawson. “Don’t you speak United +States?” + +“Don’t you speak English?” I added. + +The crowd stared at us and all shook their heads. It is doubtful if +any of them had ever heard the English tongue before, for the majority +of foreigners in the Philippines take up Spanish as the language of +commerce when dealing with the natives. + +“Here’s a rum go!” whispered Dawson. Then a happy idea struck him and +he pointed at Gory, me and himself, and then at the _Dart_. + +Instead of nodding to show that they understood, the natives scowled +at us. Then, while the others continued to surround us, one ran off to +summon those on the ship’s deck. Soon he returned with a fellow who was +several inches taller than his companions and who showed by his bearing +that he was some sort of a chief. + +Again Dawson went through the pantomime previously described, and again +the crowd scowled, the chief harder than any of his followers. At once, +a light burst in upon me. + +“I’ll tell you what they are mad about,” I explained to my companions. +“They think we want to take possession of the _Dart_.” + +“Well, that’s jest wot we do want,” growled the first mate. + +“Let us try to push our way to the ship,” I went on, and endeavored to +break away from the Tagals, for such the natives were. + +What followed surprised me beyond measure. The chief rushed up, put out +his foot, gave me a shove, and hurled me flat on the sand. Before I +could arise he had motioned to another native, and this fellow promptly +came and sat on my back, thus holding me down! + +I might have stood such treatment, rather than risk bloodshed, but the +attack was more than Matt Gory could stand. His hot Irish blood boiled +instantly, and raising his club he hit the fellow on top of me a blow +that all but knocked him senseless. + +“Yez will sit on him, will yez?” he cried. “Take that, an’ look out +that yez don’t git another that’s worse, bedad!” and he stepped back +and stood at bay. + +A fierce, blood-curdling yell went up, and almost a score of war clubs +and spears were brandished in the air. + +“Now you’ve put your foot into it!” ejaculated Tom Dawson. “Come, let +us retreat, before it is too late!” + +By pure good luck, we tore ourselves free from the natives who sought +to hold us back. Dawson was already running for the forest. Gory now +followed, and I came behind. With another yell, twice as loud as +before, the Tagals came after us, launching several spears as they did +so. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +ATTACKED BY THE TAGALS. + + +“_Woora camba, woora!_” + +Such was the war cry which was raised,--or, at least, that is how it +sounded to me. Then came the spears, and Gory gave a yell. + +“Oi’m kilt!” he gasped. “Oi’m a dead mon!” + +“No, you’re not!” I answered. “That spear only nipped your ear. Hurry +up, or you will be killed, for certain!” and I grabbed him by the arm. + +We had a lead of fifty feet and the Tagals were lessening this +steadily, when, to frighten them, Tom Dawson turned and fired a pistol +shot over their heads. + +The effect was instantaneous. All of the natives came to a standstill +and several began to retreat. + +“I thought that would fetch ’em,” puffed the first mate. “I reckon they +don’t know much about firearms.” + +But Dawson was mistaken, as we found out later. During the past the +natives had known but little of pistols and guns, but now for several +years they had seen them in the hands of both the Spanish soldiers +and those who were in rebellion against the Spanish crown, and had +even stood up in battle, on the side of those who wanted to make the +Philippines free and independent of the rest of the world, be that +movement, under General Aguinaldo, for good or for evil. + +The natives had halted and some had sought safety in flight, but +now the chief issued several orders, and they came on again, more +determined than ever. Soon they divided, and entered the forest to the +north and south of us. + +The division gave the first mate a good deal of concern. “It’s a +splendid move--for them,” he muttered. “I reckon they know the woods +like a book, too.” + +“Can they have made prisoners of the party who came up here this +morning?” I ventured. + +“Sure an’ that’s more than loikely,” put in Matt Gory. “If they catch +us I’m afther thinkin’ we’ll be ristin’ in a circle in the sand, too. +Come on.” And he tried to increase his speed. + +But our previous climb had made us tired and soon I became so exhausted +I felt ready to drop. Tom Dawson was puffing painfully, his face the +color of a beet. + +“I--I can’t keep it up--no use of tryin’!” he gasped. + +“Neither can I,” I returned. “But if we are caught----” + +“I don’t believe they will dare do much to us.” + +“We must go on!” urged Gory. “Thim haythins--listen to that!” + +The Irish sailor broke off short, as a cry from the beach reached our +ears. A yell followed, and then came several pistol shots. + +“The other party has arrived, or is trying to break away,” I burst out. +“Maybe we had better go back.” + +“I think so myself,” answered the first mate. “We count three and if +there are three more that will give us six, and six white men ought to +be able to subdue four times that number of such wretches.” + +We turned on our tracks, just as a crashing in the brush to our left +came to our ears. Soon we were making for the beach with all of the +strength left to us. + +When we came out into the open we found Watt Brown, Vincent, and +Sandram in a hand-to-hand fight with four natives that had been left +to watch the wreck. So far the contest had been an even one, but more +natives were hurrying in the direction, and soon the second mate and +his men found themselves surrounded. As I came closer I saw Sandram go +down, a spear through his left shoulder. + +“Messmates ahoy!” shouted Matt Gory. “Hould th’ fort until we git +there!” and coming closer, he let fly his club, taking one native in +the head and landing him on the sand with a cracked skull. + +In another moment we were all mixed up, and each one fighting along as +he saw best. I was struck twice, once on the head, and this blow dazed +me and made me stagger to the edge of the woods and sink down on a +rock. I tried to get up, but found myself too weak to do so and had to +content myself with taking shots at long range with my revolver, until +a Tagal came up and kicked the weapon from my hand and made me a close +prisoner by binding my arms behind me with twisted vines. + +In less than a quarter of an hour the fight was over, and two natives +and poor Sandram lay dead on the beach, while several on both sides +were walking around trying to deaden the pain of wounds which were more +or less serious. An ear-splitting whistle from the chief of the Tagals +had brought twenty or thirty others to the scene, and now our party of +five were all made prisoners, Sandram being cast out into the waves +which lapped the _Dart’s_ sides. + +“Here’s a pickle, truly!” growled Tom Dawson. “I wonder what they +intend to do with us?” + +“Mebbe they’ll eat us, hang ’em!” answered Watt Brown. + +“No, they are no longer cannibals,” put in Vincent. “But you can make +up your minds that we won’t sleep on a bed of roses to-night.” + +“They have no right to make us prisoners,” went on the first mate. “I +wonder if there is any Spanish officer near here. I know there is one +at Iba.” + +“We could find out if only some of them understood English,” said I. +“Let me see. The Spanish name for a Spaniard is _Un Español_. I’ll try +them on that.” + +Walking up to the chief, I repeated the words, “_Un Español_,” several +times. At this he gave a sickly grin, then shook his head decidedly. + +“If he knows any Spaniard in authority here he is not going to take us +to him,” was Tom Dawson’s comment. “My private opinion is that they +know perfectly well that this ship belongs to us, but they mean to keep +the prize for themselves, and rather than have any trouble with the +Spanish authorities about her, they’ll put us all out of the way.” + +“That’s not unlikely,” added Watt Brown. “You must remember that all +of the people in this part of the world used to be nateral-born +pirates--those with Malay blood especially.” + +“I don’t believe in giving up the ship, not if it can be helped,” said +I. + +“Neither do I!” answered Tom Dawson, and the others nodded in agreement. + +“The only question is,” continued Watt Brown, “now that we abandoned +the _Dart_, doesn’t she belong to whoever finds her?” + +“What can these nagers do wid a ship like her?” burst out Matt Gory. +“Sure an’ they wouldn’t know how to manage her, even if they sthopped +up the lake in her bow!” + +At this point the chief of the natives came forward and motioned for +us to be silent, and when Gory attempted to go on, slapped the Irish +sailor on the cheek. Gory was “boiling mad,” as the saying goes, +but could do nothing with his hands bound behind him; and so the +conversation had to be dropped. + +The _Dart_ had stranded at the mouth of a fair-sized stream flowing +into the ocean, or to be more correct, the China Sea, and lay secure +from any ordinary storm which might come up. I wondered how she had +gotten in past the breakers so well, and so did Tom Dawson, as he told +me later. It was easily explained when we learned the truth, which now +was not long in being revealed. + +We had been joined in pairs and were now made to march away from the +seacoast and toward the native village of Bumwoga, a collection of +ramshackle bamboo huts, the same we had seen from the top of the hill +at the time the _Dart_ was located. We were in the custody of one-half +of the chief’s guard, the other natives moving off for the vessel, to +loot her of whatever came handy. + +At the village we met the first Tagal women, creatures by no means +bad-looking. They were almost as simply dressed as their husbands and +brothers. There were also a great number of little children, who stared +at us with eyes as big as moons and then dove into the huts out of +sight, fearful that the _nooga-nu_, or bogie-men, had come to carry +them away. + +The sun still beat down fiercely, and by the time the center of the +village was gained I was ready to drop from exhaustion. Indeed, I did +stagger. Seeing this, Tom Dawson, who had been bound to me, braced me +up, and then we sank on a grassy mound close to a tall mahogany tree. +As we remained quiet, no one, for the time being, disturbed us. + +The village of Bumwoga was certainly a curious-looking place, and under +other circumstances I would have viewed all that it contained with +much interest. But just now my interest was centered in myself and my +companions, and I constantly speculated upon the fate which awaited us. + +We had been in the village about an hour, and the chief was in earnest +conversation with his followers, when there came several pistol shots +from the direction of the seacoast. “Captain Kenny and the others have +come up,” murmured Tom Dawson. “I hope the natives get the worst of +it.” He was right, the captain had come up, but the natives overcame +him by sheer force of numbers, and he and his men, including the +Chinese cook, were bound and placed on the _Dart_. What this turn of +affairs led to we will see in the later chapters of my tale. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +THE FLIGHT FROM BUMWOGA. + + +“This is slow, lad.” + +“It is trying, Dawson. I wonder how long they expect to keep us here?” + +“I’m sure I can’t guess, lad,--perhaps until we die of old age.” + +“And what do you suppose they have done with the others?” + +“Can’t say as to that either--maybe killed ’em all off and stewed ’em +in the pot,” and with a voluminous sigh the first mate of the _Dart_ +turned over and fell into a light doze. + +Dawson and I had been confined in one of the bamboo huts. We were tied +fast to a thin palm tree, the top of which waved far above the hut +roof. The place was about twelve feet square and was open at two sides. +The floor was covered with broken palm leaves and refuse of all sorts, +and the whole place was vile-smelling and alive with vermin. + +We had been prisoners in the village for three days, and the time +seemed like so many years. Twice a day an ugly old negro woman came in +to give us meals of rice cakes, fish, and native fruits, and to leave +us an earthen jug full of brackish water. + +“This is a good place to catch a fever,” I had said to Dawson, the day +before, and since that time he had declared that the fever was slowly +but surely getting into his system. + +I had tried to talk to the old woman and to several of the natives that +had dropped in upon us out of curiosity, but nobody understood me and +none were able or willing to give us aid. + +The night to follow brought on a heavy storm, almost as severe as that +which had caused us to abandon our ship. About half the men of Bumwoga +were away and the remainder, with the women and children, huddled in +the huts to escape the fury of the elements. The rain came down “by the +bucketful,” and soon the single street of the village was six inches +deep with water, which flowed around the spot where Tom Dawson and I +were held close prisoners. + +“If this keeps on, we’ll be drowned,” I remarked dismally. “One thing +is certain, if we want to catch any sleep to-night we’ll have to do it +standing up.” + +“Who could sleep with such a racket!” growled Dawson. “Why, just listen +to that!” + +“That” was a fearful crack of thunder, which rolled and roared among +the hills and mountains to the east and north of the village. The +thunder was followed by another downpour, and outside all remained +pitch-black. + +“I’ll tell you what, Dawson!” I cried, after a pause, for the crash had +taken away my breath. “If we want to get away, to-night is the time to +do it!” + +“That’s true, Oliver. But how are we to manage the trick? I’ve turned +and twisted until my wrists are so sore they are ready to run blood. +This vine-rope is as tough as a steel cable.” + +“I think I see a way,” I answered. “I was afraid somebody would spot +us if I mentioned it before. When the old woman brought us in that +shell-fish this afternoon, I managed to save a bit of shell and hide it +in my pocket. The edge is sharp, and by sawing on the vines I think I +can cut them. The question is, can we escape even after the vines are +cut? I rather think we’ll run the risk of our lives.” + +“Let us try it anyway, lad; anything is better than staying here,” said +Dawson. + +I immediately produced the bit of shell and set to work. I could not +reach my own bonds very well, but I could reach those of my companion, +and after fifteen minutes of hard labor, the first mate was liberated. +Then he took the shell and began upon my wrists. + +The storm kept up, and of a sudden came a blinding flash of lightning +and an electrical shock that pitched Dawson headlong. The top of the +palm tree had been hit and knocked off, leaving the stump above the hut +burning like a gigantic torch. + +I was too dazed for several minutes to speak or move, and my companion +was scarcely less affected. Then, however, Dawson leaped up to finish +his work. + +“Free!” I cried, as the vines snapped asunder, and hand in hand we ran +for one of the hut openings. A dozen feet away lay the top of the palm +tree, blazing furiously and spluttering in the never-ending downpour. +By this uncertain light we saw that the village street was deserted. + +Where to go? was now the burning question. I looked at the first mate +and he looked at me. Both of us realized only too well what a false +move might mean. + +“That’s south--the way we want to go,” he said, throwing out his hand. +“Come on,” and off we set, among the huts and across a patch of low +brush. We were less than a hundred yards off when a savage yell told us +that our escape had been discovered. + +“We’ve got to leg it now, my boy!” ejaculated Tom Dawson. “Oh, if only +I had that pistol of mine!” + +“And if I only had mine too,” I added. All of our belongings, +excepting our clothing, had been confiscated. + +At the further side of the brush we came to a small stream, which we +plunged into ere we had time to draw back. + +“Look out, it may be over your head!” shouted Dawson; but the warning +was not needed, as the watercourse proved to be less than a yard deep +at any point. The bottom was of sand and small stones, and both sides +were overhung with brush, moss, and the ever-present vines. + +“Hold on,” whispered my companion, as I was about to step out of the +stream. “It may be safer here than anywhere, for water leaves no trail. +Let us keep to the middle of the stream and see where it brings us.” + +I thought this was good advice, and we hurried on in silence, but both +on guard for fear of plunging into some deep hole. A hundred feet were +covered and we heard the shout again, but this time closer, showing +that the Tagals were indeed on the trail. + +“If it comes to the worst we can sit down in the water and only keep +our mouths and noses out,” remarked Dawson. “I’m not going to be +captured again if I can prevent it--no, sirree!” + +We moved along with added caution, for we could now hear the natives +shouting one to another from several different points. The storm still +continued, and both of us were wet to the skin, so a slip to the bottom +of the shallow river would have proved no hardship. + +“Stop!” The command came in a soft whisper, and instantly I halted. +Both of us listened intently, and I heard what had caused Dawson to +stop me--a splashing of water ahead. + +“Somebody is moving around ahead of us!” he whispered into my ear. +“Those Tagals are regular imps for following a fellow!” + +“Their one study is bush and forest life,” I answered. “But what shall +we do--leave the stream?” + +“Let us wait a moment and listen.” + +We did so, and the splashing came nearer. But now it did not sound +altogether like footsteps, and I told the first mate so. + +“I agree with you,” he said. “But it’s something, that’s certain, a +wild beast, or--Great Scott! lad, make for the bank--quick!” + +Tom Dawson caught me by the arm and made a furious leap, and I +followed. Both of us floundered down, but were up in a trice, and none +too soon, for even in the gloom we presently beheld the ugly head of a +cayman stuck up close to the river bank. + +“An alligator!” I screamed, and ran still further away. Dawson did not +hesitate to follow me, and at the same time screamed as loudly as I +did. Then of a sudden he paused, screamed again and gave a sudden loud +moan and shriek as if in mortal agony. + +“Now, don’t make a sound,” he whispered, as the shriek came to an end. +“Ten to one those natives will think the alligators have eaten us.” + +“I hope they do,” I answered, understanding his ruse and delighted with +it. “But which way now?” + +“We seem to be moving up a hill. Let us keep on until the top is +gained. I am sure that will take us away from the village, and that is +what we want.” + +On and on we went, the wet brush slashing in our faces. Often we sank +into muddy holes up to our knees, but each time one would help the +other out. Whenever a flash of lightning lit up the firmament we tried +to look about us, but the forest cut off the view. + +“I can’t go much further,” I gasped, at last, when Dawson announced +a big cliff ahead. “We ought to find some sort of shelter there,” he +said, and he was not mistaken. Under a portion of the cliff was a +cave-like opening several yards in depth, and into this we crowded, out +of the fury of the storm. We listened intently, but for the balance of +that night saw or heard no more of the Tagals. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +THE BATTLE AT A DISTANCE. + + +Morning dawned as mornings do in the tropics. There is no gradual +coming on of daylight. The sun came up in all of its fiery splendor, +and day was at hand, hot, oppressive, and enervating. To look around +one would have thought that it had not rained for a week, yet there was +a steam in the air--a steam that by noon gave place to a peculiar vapor +laden with that smell which, once experienced, is not easily forgotten, +the smell of rank vegetation mingled with the delicious odor of spices. + +“And how do you feel, Oliver?” asked the first mate, as I sat up and +rubbed my eyes. “Perhaps you forget where you are?” + +“No, I don’t forget, but I am tremendously sleepy yet,” I answered, as +I stretched myself. “What time is it, do you think?” + +“Not seven yet.” + +“Then I haven’t slept very long, after all. I thought by the light it +must be close upon noon.” I paused. “I wish I had something to eat.” + +“So do I, lad; but we’ll have to stay our stomachs until we are further +away from those Tagals, I’m thinking. I’ve been looking around and I +don’t think the top of this hill is far off. Let us get to there and +take in the lay of the land.” + +As there seemed nothing better to do, I agreed, and we began the +ascent of the cliff, which was composed of lava principally, for the +Philippine Islands are largely of volcanic origin, and have numerous +volcanoes which are in constant operation. The cliff passed, we began +another trudge through the woods. + +I had noticed butterflies, small and big, before, but now these +beautiful creatures became more plentiful than ever, until at one point +our way was almost blinded by them. + +“It’s like a snow-storm of ’em, aint it?” remarked Dawson, and his +picture was about correct, excepting that, while a portion of them were +milky white, the others were of every shade imaginable. + +We had hoped to gain the top of the hill by ten o’clock, but it was +afternoon before we came out on the stretch of tableland that was its +highest point. As before, the tableland was surrounded by palms, so +both Dawson and I had to climb into the trees to get a look around. + +We first turned our eyes toward the China Sea, which rolled and +glistened like molten gold in the bright sunlight. Far away two sails +were visible, mere specks upon the horizon. At the beach the breakers +rolled and broke, sending the white spume almost up to the roots of the +palms that fringed the sand. From the point we occupied the mouth of +the river where the _Dart_ lay was concealed from view. + +“Nothing of interest in that direction,” observed Dawson, and turned +carefully to take a look inland. Soon he uttered a cry of astonishment. + +“What do you see?” I queried. + +“What do I see?” he repeated. “Hang me if I don’t see about the biggest +battle on record!” + +“A battle?” I cried, and turned among the branches to get a view myself. + +“Yes, a battle. Don’t you hear the guns?” + +I listened, and sure enough from a great distance I heard the crack and +roll of musketry. At first I could not locate the sounds, but presently +saw the thin white smoke ascending from a valley far to our east, a +valley hedged in between two tall mountains. + +“Can you make out who is fighting?” I asked, straining my eyes to the +utmost. + +“It looks to me like soldiers on one side and natives on the other,” +answered the first mate. “The soldiers are driving the other fellows +up the valley. There must be about five hundred men fighting on each +side.” + +“Can the Tagals be waging war on the Spaniards?” + +“I reckon they are rebels under General Aguinaldo, who has been their +acknowledged leader for over a year.” + +“And do they expect to win their freedom?” + +“I suppose so, although, even if they do throw off the yoke of Spain, I +don’t believe they are capable of governing themselves.” + +“They certainly are not, if they are all like the fellows who made us +prisoners.” + +“Oh, the better class of Tagals are not like these, lad. Why, I’ve been +told that, in Manila, some of them are quite ladies and gentlemen. They +can read and write, and affect the Spanish fashions.” + +The tide of battle had now swept up the valley, and we heard and saw +nothing more of the contest. We gave the surroundings another good +look, and then descended to mother earth. + +“I’ve got an idea,” said Dawson. “If we can find one of the small +boats, why not stock her up with provisions and water and then sail +down the coast to the nearest seaport settlement to Manila--say Port +Subig? That will save us a tedious and perhaps dangerous trip overland.” + +“That’s a good idea, especially as we don’t want to get mixed up in +this fight between the insurgents and the Spanish. But what of the +_Dart_ and our things on board of her?” + +“Ten to one the natives have already looted the ship, Oliver. As it is, +we can do nothing but notify those in Manila who were interested in her +cargo. Perhaps they’ll help us in the matter, for their own sakes.” + +“And what of the others who were made prisoners?” + +“Alone and without weapons what can we do for them? If we can organize +a party in Manila to come here and straighten out matters we’ll be +doing well.” + +Both of us were tremendously hungry, and now we cast about for +something to eat. But little could be found on the hill outside of a +few cocoanuts, and soon we were on our way to the seacoast, taking care +to give the Tagal settlement a wide berth. + +We had just stepped out upon the sand when we saw a figure clad in a +flowing frock coming toward us at top speed. + +“Ah Sid, as I’m a sinner!” burst out Tom Dawson, as he recognized the +Chinese cook of the _Dart_. “Hi! hi! where are you running to?” he +called out. + +At the sound of the first mate’s voice the little Chinaman came to a +dead halt. “Who callee?” he yelled. “Who callee Ah Sid?” + +“I called you, you monkey. Come here,” answered Dawson, and now Ah Sid +saw us and reached our side on the double-quick. + +“Me gittee away flom bad man,” he puffed. “Hide in tree woods, or him +cochee all flee--lun! lun!” And he lost no time in diving into the +forest, and we came after him. + +We had scarcely concealed ourselves when two Tagals burst into view, +skipping along the sands with long spears in their hands, ready to be +launched forth at the first sight of the terror-stricken Celestial. +Ah Sid’s footprints were plainly visible, so they lost no time in +following him into the forest. + +“We must down them!” whispered Dawson excitedly, and as one of the +Tagals passed him he leaped out, caught hold of the man’s spear, +and threw him headlong. Seeing this, I threw myself on the second +copper-colored rascal, and a fierce, all-around struggle ensued. + +It was little Ah Sid who turned the tide of battle in our favor. +Paralyzed at first with fear, he quickly recovered, and picking up a +big stone, approached and struck first one enemy and then the other on +the head. The blows were well directed and heavy, and each Tagal went +down insensible. + +“Good for you, Ah Sid!” cried Tom Dawson. “You can fight, even if you +are a heathen.” + +“Shall me finish um?” asked the cook, as he still held the stone which +had done such good work. + +“No, no, that would be murder!” I ejaculated in horror. “They are both +pretty badly done for and won’t get over this for an hour or more. Come +on, unless there are more coming.” + +“Only dese two, Mlister Raymond. Where you goee?” + +“We thought we might find one of the small boats,” answered the mate. + +“Little boatee dlis way.” Ah Sid pointed down the beach. “Hurry if +wantee him, or bad man git um.” + +Away we went, the Chinaman leading the party. As he ran he managed to +tell us that he had escaped from the Tagals two days before, but had +been unable to get away from the territory. “Watt Brown, Matt Gory, and +um captain gittee away, too,” he concluded. “No knowee where them goee +dough.” + +It did not take long to reach the small boat, which lay in the cove +where we had originally landed. The second small boat was gone, the +natives having carried it off. + +“Now for a stock of provisions,” I said. “We will have to thresh +around the woods at a lively rate, if we want to get away before night.” + +“We won’t hunt for any more than we actually need,” answered Tom +Dawson. “And Ah Sid will help us, I know,” and he explained to the cook +what we proposed to do. + +“Me catchee blirds very soon,” answered Ah Sid, and procured a long, +thin switch. With this he entered the forest, and soon brought down +several birds, including three pigeons. He would stir them up from the +grass, and a lightning-like crack of the switch would finish them. + +“Hold hard!” cried Tom Dawson, while we were in the midst of our +labors. “Hold hard, somebody is coming!” + +We instantly became silent and listened. The first mate was right, +three persons were coming through the forest, and they were heading +directly for the spot where the boat lay. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +OFF FOR SUBIG BAY. + + +Slowly the footsteps came closer, as though the three persons were +approaching with extreme caution. + +“Perhaps they heard us,” I whispered to Tom Dawson, and he nodded. “If +they are natives what shall we do?” + +“We’ll have to trust to luck, lad. I would rather fight to the end than +become a prisoner again.” + +“So will I fight.” + +I had a club which I had been using in knocking over game, and this I +held ready for any emergency which might present itself. Slowly the +three newcomers came closer, then stopped short, and we heard not +another sound. + +I must confess that my heart leaped into my throat, as I had a mental +vision of a tall Tagal sneaking up behind me and running me through +with his cruel spear. Were the newcomers trying to surround us? + +Five minutes passed,--it was more than an age to me,--and still the +silence continued, broken only by the birds as they fluttered from +tree to brush. From a distance came the incessant hum of millions of +tropical insects, but to this sound I had long since become accustomed. + +“Begorra, Oi don’t see nothin at all, at all!” came in a rich Irish +voice not a dozen yards away from me. “If they be haythins, where are +they?” + +“Matt Gory!” I burst out. “Matt Gory, is that you?” + +“The saints be praised, it’s Oliver Raymond!” came from the delighted +Irishman, and now he rushed forward and literally embraced me. “I was +afther thinkin’ ye was one av thim villainous Tagals!” + +Gory was followed by Watt Brown and Captain Kenny. The second mate was +also delighted to see me. Captain Kenny, however, merely scowled, and +then turned to Dawson and Ah Sid. + +Our various stories were soon told, and we learned that the newcomers +had also intended to hunt up a small boat. “I intended to cut down a +sapling and hoist some kind of a sail,” said Watt Brown. “Sailing down +to Subig Bay will be far better than to make the journey overland, +especially during these trying times.” + +Watt Brown had had one advantage over us. He had met a Spaniard who +could speak a little English, and from this man had learned a good +deal that was decidedly interesting. + +“The natives have made war on the Spaniards tooth and nail,” he said. +“Not only the neighborhood around Manila, but the whole of the island +of Luzon is up in arms. General Aguinaldo had under him something like +forty to fifty thousand Tagals, Philippine Spaniards, and others, +and they have declared for independence. They swear they will pay no +further taxes to the Spanish.” + +“But all people have to pay taxes,” I ventured. + +“Yes, but not as the Filipinos do, my boy. They are taxed for about +everything they eat and everything they drink, and they pay a tax for +doing business. They can’t cut down a tree, or shear a sheep, or pull +down cocoanuts without paying a tax to the government. Besides this, +they have also to pay large sums of money to the Church, and so they +are kept poverty-stricken from year to year. I don’t blame ’em for +revolting, as it is called.” + +“Spain is having her hands full just now,” remarked Tom Dawson. “The +war in Cuba is ten times worse than the war here, I’m thinking.” + +“That Spaniard I met was very angry against us Americans,” resumed Watt +Brown. “He said Americans are aiding the Cubans, and if we didn’t look +out Spain would punish us for it.” + +This caused Dawson to laugh. “Ha! ha! The idea of Spain doing anything +to Uncle Sam,” he said. “I reckon we can take care of ourselves, every +trip.” + +How right he was later events proved. + +As there were now six of us, we worked with more confidence. Each of us +had a good club, and we provided ourselves with stones that were jagged +of edge, to use in case of sudden attack. Ah Sid also made himself a +sling shot out of a pliable tree branch and showed us what he could do +with this weapon by bringing down a pigeon with a stone at a distance +of fifty yards. + +It was nearly nightfall by the time we had brought in our birds, +pigeons, and fish and cooked them. In the meantime Watt Brown had been +as good as his word and had rigged up a small mast and a sail on the +_Mollie_, as he had dubbed the craft. The sky was clear and it promised +to be moonlight, and we decided to leave the coast as soon as we had +eaten supper, which would be our last meal on shore for probably three +or four days, if not a week. + +“We must keep our eyes peeled for those Tagals,” remarked Tom Dawson, +as we squatted around the camp-fire. “If we don’t they may surprise us, +and then our cake will be dough.” + +The _Mollie_ lay ready for shoving off, so we could leave at the first +sign of danger. As we ate we discussed the situation and what the +future was likely to bring forth. + +“I shall demand that the Spanish government give me protection to take +the _Dart_ into a proper harbor,” said Captain Kenny, who was now, +perforce, perfectly sober. “Those Tagals have no legal claim to the +wreck.” + +“But they must have some claim,” I answered. + +“No claim whatever--and I can prove it,” returned the captain, as he +glared at me. + +“How can you prove that, captain?” asked Tom Dawson. “Every man of us +left her--there is no gainsaying that.” + +“Never mind; I can prove they have no claim upon her,” was the +captain’s answer, but further than that he would not say. + +Our supper was scarcely concluded when the moon came up over the rim of +the sea, as white as new silver. We began our preparations to embark +without further delay. As we worked I saw Captain Kenny eye me in a +strange manner that gave me a cold chill, and I resolved to be more +than ever on my guard against him. + +Our provisions and ourselves made as much of a load as the _Mollie_ +could safely carry, and at the last moment some cocoanuts had to be +left behind. Water was stored away in the bucket which had been used +for bailing out the craft and in hollow stalks of bamboo, the latter +making first-class receptacles. The cooked things were wrapped in palm +leaves and covered with damp seaweed. + +The captain, the two mates, and Matt Gory took the oars, and a few +well-directed strokes took the _Mollie_ out of the cove and well on +toward the opening in the line of breakers. “We’ll have to row and +watch out, too, since the boy can’t do anything,” grumbled Captain +Kenny. I firmly believe, had he had his way, he would have left me +behind. + +“Watch for the opening, Oliver,” said Tom Dawson. “You can do that as +well as anyone.” I did as directed, and before long the dangerous line +of coral was passed and we were riding the long stretches of the China +Sea as safely as though crossing the Bay of San Francisco. + +Fortunately, not only Captain Kenny, but also Dawson and Brown, could +read the stars with ease, so but little trouble was experienced in +holding to a course which was certain to bring us down to Subig Bay +sooner or later. The wind was favorable, and the sail being hoisted the +oars were shipped, and we took it easy under the pale gleaming of the +Southern Cross. + +“We may as well divide up into watches,” suggested Tom Dawson, and +after some talk it was decided that he, Matt Gory, and myself should +stand the first watch of four hours, while the captain, Watt Brown, and +Ah Sid took the second watch of equal length. + +In this manner the night passed without incident, for when I slept I +did so between my two friends, so I was safe from any evil designs that +Captain Kenny might have upon me, even had he dared to carry them out +while the second mate was on watch with him. + +Sunrise found us still in sight of land, at a point where the mountains +of Luzon ran directly down into the sea. The air was filled with a +bluish mist, and by ten o’clock was oppressive to the last degree. + +“It’s a good thing we have the sail,” I remarked. “Nobody could +possibly row in this awful heat.” + +“The sail may not do us any good presently,” answered Watt Brown. + +“Why not?” + +“Don’t you see how the wind is dying down?” + +The second mate was right, and presently the sail flapped idly against +the stumpy mast. Tom Dawson looked at the oars, picked up one of the +blades, let it fall again, and shook his head. “Too blasted hot, no use +of talking.” + +“I think I would rather lay under the shadow of yonder mountain than +out here all day,” said Brown. “What do you say, boys; shall we pull +for the shore?” + +A vote was taken, and it was found that even Captain Kenny preferred +land to that boiling and sizzling sea. But he declined to row. “Let the +boy take a hand,” he said. + +I was willing, and I think I can safely say that I made fairly good +progress. “I can run an engine or a steam launch, but I never had much +of a chance at a row- or sail-boat,” I explained. + +“By the way, what is taking you to Manila, if I may ask?” questioned +the second mate curiously. + +“It’s partly business and partly pleasure. You know my father is a +member of the firm of Raymond, Holbrook & Smith, manufacturers of +engines and sugar-making machinery. I wanted a vacation and was sent to +Hong Kong and Manila, to get the fresh air and learn the business at +the same time.” + +“You say you can run an engine?” + +“Oh, yes, I can run almost anything that goes by steam,” I laughed. “I +take to it naturally, although I don’t intend to become an engineer. +Now if the _Dart_ had only carried a steam or naphtha launch, we would +have been all right,” and here this talk came to an end. + +Finding a landing at the mountain side was not easy, for the waves ran +up strongly against those rocks, which, in some places, were a hundred +feet in height. But we discovered a small canyon, or split, and ran +into this, a delightful locality, as shady as it was cool and inviting. +Again the boat was beached, and we hopped ashore, I, however, never +dreaming that that was to be my last trip in the little craft. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +ATTACKED IN THE CANYON. + + +A good sleep during the night had rested me thoroughly; so, while the +others sat around, talking or smoking “home-made” cigars, made out of +some native tobacco which Matt Gory had secured during his wanderings, +I started up the canyon on a short tour of exploration. + +“I’ve heard that there is gold on this island,” I laughed, when Tom +Dawson asked me where I was bound. “I’m going to strike a bonanza.” + +“Look out that you don’t stir up some wild animal big enough to chew +you up,” he yelled after me. + +The canyon was filled with brushwood and vines, with here and there +heavy clusters of tropical flowers, so odoriferous that they were +positively sickening. Some of these flowers, I afterward learned, can +readily put one to sleep if you sit by them long enough. + +I found an easy path to the top of the canyon, at a point where the +walls were fifty to sixty feet high and three times as far apart. At +the top was a patch of smooth ground, back of which began the upward +slope of the mountain. + +I kept my eyes open for wild animals, but nothing of size presented +itself, although I detected something moving near the mountain top, +probably some Philippine goats. There were countless birds, and in a +dark corner of the canyon I roused up half a dozen bats, none of which, +however, offered to molest me. + +Coming to a truly beautiful spot, where a tiny mountain stream formed +a waterfall that leaped and danced in the sunshine striking through +some flowered brushwood, I threw myself down and gave myself up to +reflection. + +What a variety of adventures had I passed through since leaving home! +In Hong Kong the days had not passed without incident, and now here I +was, cast away on the island of Luzon, minus my money and the documents +I had been intrusted to deliver, and in a land that was practically in +a state of war. + +And yet I knew absolutely nothing of the important events which were +transpiring in what might be called the outer world. I did not know +that the war between Spain and the inhabitants of Cuba had reached +its height and that the relations between Spain and the United States +had culminated in the total destruction of the battleship _Maine_ in +Havana harbor, and that we were on the verge of war with the Spaniards +in consequence. Nor did I know how my father was suffering in Cuban +wilds, as related in “When Santiago Fell.” Perhaps it is a good thing +that I did not know about my parent’s condition, for I would have +worried a good deal, and worrying would have done no good. + +From day-dreaming over the present I began to speculate on the past, +on my schoolboy days, and on the great interest I had taken for +several years in steam engines, machinery of all sorts, and in big +guns. Guns, such as were used in the forts on our Pacific seacoast, +had particularly interested me, and I had studied them in all of their +details, never once dreaming how useful this knowledge was to be to me. + +From day-dreaming I fell into a light doze, from which I awoke with a +start to find the form of a man leaning over me. The man had clutched +my arm and this had aroused me. One glance showed that the man was +Captain Kenny. + +“Now I’ve got the chance I’ll serve you as I served Holbrook!” he +hissed into my ear, and hurled me over the edge of the canyon down to +where the mountain torrent struck the rocks far below. + +“Don’t!” I managed to gasp; but that was all. I felt myself dropping +through space, made a vain clutch at some brush which scraped my +cheek, and then struck heavily on the rocks--and knew no more. When I +recovered my senses it was pitch-dark around me and a light rain was +falling. At first I could not collect myself and did not attempt to +stir. Where was I, and what had happened? + +The flowing of water over one arm aroused me, and, making examination, +I found that I was lying half in and half out of the mountain torrent. +Had I fallen into a little different position I must surely have +drowned. As a matter of fact my hair showed that I had fallen head +first into the water, but had by some unconscious movement saved myself +from a watery grave. + +It was fully a quarter of an hour before I felt able to sit up, much +less stand on my feet. I ached in every joint, and my head was in such +a whirl that I could scarcely see. + +“Oh, what a villain Captain Kenny is!” were the first words that +crossed my lips. “I’ll get square with him as soon as I can join the +others again!” Alas! little did I then realize that my companions had +hunted for me in vain, and that a band of Tagals had made it necessary +for them to set off in their boat without me, taking with them the +guilty captain, who had never opened his lips concerning his perfidy. + +By the darkness I knew it was night, but what part of the night I could +not determine. Yet I thought it could not be late, and that I must try +to get back to the shore, no matter how much pain it cost me. + +I arose to my feet to make a disheartening discovery. My left ankle +was badly wrenched and much swollen, and to walk on it was out of the +question. Here was a new difficulty, and I must confess that I could +scarcely hold back the tears as I felt my helplessness. Perhaps this +may seem childish to some of my readers, but they must remember that it +is no fun to be cast away in a savage land, away from your friends, and +in the condition in which I found myself. + +Not without considerable pain and exertion, I dragged myself to a place +of shelter beneath the overhanging rocks of the canyon. Here it was +dry, and the winds had swept in a quantity of dried leaves which made +a fairly comfortable couch. The exertion necessary to reach this place +caused me to swoon. + +When I was again myself, it was daylight, but still raining--a fine +drizzle that was little more than a mist. Looking at my ankle I saw +that the swelling had gone down a bit, and I presently found that I +could stand upon it, although the operation was far from a pleasure. +The rain had collected in a hollow close at hand, and here I got a +drink and bathed my bruised head and lower extremity. I might have +eaten some light food, but nothing was at hand, excepting some berries +which were strange to me, and which I did not dare to touch for fear +they might prove poisonous. + +Slowly the hours came and went and still I remained under the cliff, a +prey to many disturbing thoughts. What were my companions doing? Would +they come up the canyon in search of me, or would they sail off and +leave me to my fate? + +Toward nightfall several shots in the distance disturbed me. They +did not come from the shore, but from still further up the canyon. I +listened intently, but nothing but silence succeeded the discharge of +firearms. + +The night which followed proved a long one. For several hours I could +not get to sleep for thinking of my position, but finally I fell into a +deep slumber that lasted far into the next day. + +The sun was now shining brightly and the birds and insects had again +taken up their songs and hummings. I arose and stretched myself, and +was pleased to note that I could walk fairly well and that my brain was +clear, even though my head still felt sore. + +I directed my footsteps down the canyon to the seashore, coming out +at the spot where I had left Dawson and the others encamped. Nothing +remained but the charred embers of a camp-fire, which had been built to +cook some fish. + +I say nothing remained. There was something else there that filled me +with horror. It was a long Tagal spear, and its barb was covered with +blood. The sands were filled with countless tracks of bare feet. + +“There has been a fight here,” I murmured, and ran to the water’s edge. +The _Mollie_ was gone, but whether taken by friends or the enemy there +was no telling. + +For a long while I stood on the sands speculating upon the new turn of +affairs. I was now left utterly alone, that was clear. What should I do? + +Without a boat a journey by water was out of the question. If I tried +to gain Manila by a trip overland I felt that I would either become +lost in the mountains or else fall into the hands of the warlike Tagals. + +“I’ll follow the shore to Subig Bay,” I concluded, and in an hour was +on my slow and painful way, after a morning meal of half-ripe plantains +which were far from palatable. + +By noon I concluded that I had covered four or five miles, having had +considerable difficulty in getting past the mountain which cut off the +beach for the space of two or three furlongs. It was now growing so hot +I was compelled to seek shelter in the forest, and here put in the time +by bringing down half a dozen birds, which afforded me nearly as many +meals. + +The next four days were very much alike. I continued on my way, past +Iba and several other settlements. At the place named, I almost ran +into the lines of the native rebels and saw a pitched battle from afar, +in which, as I afterward ascertained, ten insurgents and six Spaniards +were killed and twice that many were wounded. + +The end of the fourth day found me at the entrance to Subig Bay, and +here I rested for several hours. Lying on the north shore I saw half a +dozen ships at anchor, one of which, a two-masted schooner, flew the +Stars and Stripes. + +“If I can get to that craft I’ll be safe,” I said to myself. “I’ll +watch her and see if anybody comes ashore.” + +On the following morning I saw the schooner move slowly for the +entrance to Subig Bay. Running with all speed for the point of land +between the bay and the China Sea, I waved my hands frantically and +was at last gratified to see that somebody on board had noticed me. +Presently the schooner came to anchor again, and a small boat put out +for the beach. + +As the boat came closer I uttered a cry of amazement and delight, for +at one of the oars sat a person I had not expected to see for many days +to come. It was Tom Dawson. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +MY FIRST ADVENTURE IN MANILA. + + +“Oliver Raymond, is it possible!” exclaimed the first mate of the +_Dart_, as he leaped ashore and almost embraced me. + +“Tom Dawson!” I ejaculated, and wrung his hand over and over again. +“And how did you get on that craft out there?” + +“It’s a long story, lad. But where have you been these five or six +days? You don’t mean to say you left our party on purpose? Or did those +rascally natives capture you?” + +“Neither, Tom. After I left you I walked up the canyon to where there +was a high cliff, and there Captain Kenny tried to do me to death.” I +gave him a few of the particulars. “Where is the captain now? If he’s +on that vessel I’ll soon have him up before the court at the first +civilized seaport comes to hand.” + +“I reckon Captain Kenny has got his deserts, Oliver. After you left us +the Tagals made an unexpected attack, and Captain Kenny, Watt Brown, +and Ah Sid were captured, while I and Matt Gory escaped to the boat. We +didn’t make any more landings until we reached this port and rowed to +the _Starlight_.” + +“Was Watt Brown killed or injured?” + +“He was wounded, but how badly I can’t say. Captain Kenny gave himself +up instead of fighting, and so did that Chinaman.” + +“I wish it had been Captain Kenny who had been wounded,” I said bluntly. + +“So does somebody else,” went on Dawson, and a smile flitted over his +face. “Come on board, and you’ll find a surprise awaiting you.” + +I gladly accepted the offer to come on board of the _Starlight_, which +was seconded by Captain Mason, who was in charge of the jolly-boat. The +row was a short one, and I was just mounting the rope ladder to the +deck when a voice as from the grave hailed me. + +“Is it possible that it is you, Oliver?” + +“Dan!” I gasped, and stumbled over the rail. “I--I thought you were +dead--drowned!” + +The next moment I was in Dan Holbrook’s arms and we were hugging each +other like a couple of schoolgirls, while Tom Dawson and Matt Gory +looked on, well pleased. The Irishman soon after shook hands. + +“But, Dan, how came you here?” I questioned, when I could recover from +my amazement. “Weren’t you lost overboard from that small boat?” + +“To be sure I was, and I came pretty close to drowning, too,” answered +Dan. “But I floated around and a high wave landed me right back on +board of the _Dart_ and there I remained, satisfied that it was as good +a place as any so long as the schooner floated.” + +“And were you on her when the _Dart_ was carried ashore?” + +“I was, and what is more I did what I could toward steering her into +the river mouth, where she now lies. The steering gear was all right, +and I thought I might be able to save her from becoming a total wreck.” + +“But--but, didn’t Captain Kenny attack you?” + +“Did he? Indeed he did and tried to kill me by throwing me into the +sea. But a Tagal saved me and made me a prisoner. I was kept in custody +two days, when the Tagals had a fight with some Spanish soldiers, +and I escaped in the confusion and struck out for Manila. I thought +I was completely lost, when I ran across a scouting party from the +_Starlight_ and was taken on board by them. I had some little tropical +fever, and I’m not very well yet.” + +This was the outline of Dan’s story, which he later on told in all of +its details. The story proved two things: that Captain Kenny was even a +worse villain than I had supposed him to be, and that affairs in the +Philippines were more than interesting. + +“The excitement at Manila is growing every day,” said the captain of +the _Starlight_. “I feel certain there will be a bloody war there +before many months are over. I don’t see how you can do any business +there at present.” + +“I must look to some matters,” I answered, and Dan said the same. + +The _Starlight_ was bound for Manila with a mixed cargo consigned to +a Spanish firm, so Captain Mason considered himself fairly safe for +the time being, as the Spaniards were strong in the town and had thus +far kept the insurgents at bay. He readily agreed to take us with him, +knowing the firm to which my father belonged very well. + +We soon learned that both Tom Dawson and Matt Gory had shipped +temporarily on the schooner, the captain being somewhat short of hands, +several being sick with scurvy. An hour after I was on board the +_Starlight_ was moving down the coast to Manila Bay, and I was taking +it easy in a hammock, satisfied that, for a few days, at least, my +troubles were at an end. + +The run to Manila proved without incident worthy of mention. The +weather was ideal and two days after leaving Subig Bay we sailed past +the grim fortress on Corregidor Island, through the narrow channel +up to the strip of land upon which is built Fort Cavité, and dropped +anchor before Manila proper. + +We had hardly taken our place in the shipping before a Spanish revenue +cutter came dashing up, and a dark-skinned Castilian came aboard and +examined our papers and made a tour of inspection about the schooner. +Then we received passes to visit the city. + +“Not much of a town,” remarked Dan to me, as he surveyed the long line +of tumble-down wharves which met our eyes, but as we got closer we +beheld a good-sized city back of the wharves. + +We had anchored near the mouth of the Pasig River, which divides Manila +into two parts. To the south side of the river is the old town, now +almost abandoned, saving for some Spanish government buildings and the +like. + +To the north side of the river are two districts called Binondo and +Tondo, and here is where the business is done and where all of the best +homes and clubs are located. + +My father’s firm had its offices on Escolta Street, one of the main +thoroughfares of Manila, and to this we now directed our footsteps. + +Our walk took us past many quaint shops, not unlike those I had seen +in Hong Kong and in the Chinatown districts of San Francisco, some +of which were so small that the trading had to be done out on the +sidewalk. Many of the shopkeepers were Spanish, but there were a fair +sprinkling of Germans and Englishmen, intermixed with a large number of +Chinese and Japanese and native Filipinos. At this time the city had a +population of something less than a hundred thousand, and of these less +than five thousand were Europeans and less than five hundred Americans. + +The streets were filled with Spanish soldiers who eyed us sharply as we +passed them. + +“It doesn’t look peaceful-like, does it?” remarked Dan, as we hurried +along. + +“Not much!” I returned. “It looks as if everybody was waiting for +somebody else to knock the chip off of his shoulder, so to speak.” + +“If the natives were thoroughly organized in this rebellion they could +wipe the Spaniards out in no time, to my way of thinking,” I said. “I +reckon they don’t know their power.” + +“You are right, Oliver, the Tagals can whip the Spaniards, I am sure of +that. And I think they ought to be free.” + +“So do I. The islands belong to them.” + +“Yes, and----” Dan broke off short. “Hurry up, it looks as if it was +going to rain,” and he caught me by the arm. + +I understood perfectly well why he had so quickly changed the +subject. Both of us had noted that a villainous-looking Spaniard was +following us and drinking in every word we said. His face showed that +he understood English and now he clung to us closer than ever, as +we turned a corner and came to the long, low building in which were +situated the offices of Raymond, Holbrook & Smith. + +“Dan Holbrook, how do you do!” cried a tall young man as he rushed +forward and caught my companion by the hand. “Why, I thought you had +gone down with the wreck of the _Dart_.” + +The clerk of our firm, for such he proved to be, was named Harry +Longley, and I was speedily introduced to him, and both Dan and I +told our stories. Longley had heard of the wrecking of the _Dart_ +twenty-four hours before. + +“It’s too bad you lost your money and those documents,” he said to +me. “We ought to have those papers, they will settle a case over some +land which has been in litigation here for two years. You see, these +Spaniards are trying to squeeze us out if they possibly can.” + +“But what of this rebellion here?” I questioned. + +“We haven’t felt much of it so far, but I expect we will before +long. All of our time has been taken up in our difficulties with the +Spaniards, who are trying to force us out of business. They are taxing +us in a way that is outrageous.” + +“But where is Mr. Cass?” asked Dan, referring to the manager at Manila. + +“He has gone to one of the other islands on business.” + +Our talk on business and other matters lasted for fully an hour. My +main concern was for the papers and money left on board of the _Dart_, +but Harry Longley could give me no advice as to how I might get them +back. + +“The Spaniards cannot control the natives up the coast,” he said. “And +the only thing I can see is for Captain Kenny to organize a large body +of men and take the vessel away by force.” + +At that instant the door to the office opened, and the Spaniard who had +followed us up from the wharf came in, followed by four soldiers. + +“There they are,” he said in Spanish, pointing to Dan and me. “Arrest +them as rebel sympathizers!” + +And then the four soldiers advanced upon my companion and me to make us +prisoners. + +[Illustration: “THERE THEY ARE,” HE SAID IN SPANISH, POINTING TO DAN +AND ME, “ARREST THEM AS REBEL SYMPATHIZERS.”] + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE ESCAPE FROM THE PRISON. + + +“What does this mean?” demanded Dan, who understood what was said, even +though I did not. + +“What is up, Dan?” I queried. + +“They want to arrest us as rebel sympathizers.” + +“Great Caesar’s ghost! Why, we----” + +“We talked too much on the street. Don’t you remember?” + +By this time the four soldiers had advanced upon us until we were +penned in one corner of the office. + +In vain Harry Longley expostulated. The Spanish spy who had followed us +would not listen and demanded our immediate arrest. + +I must confess that the sudden turn of affairs confused me. I had yet +to learn the real blessings of “free speech,” as we understand it in +the United States. + +“You are in a pickle, truly,” said the clerk. “I hope they can’t prove +anything against you.” + +“I suppose we did talk a little too much,” I answered bitterly. “What +will they do with us?” + +“They’ll do what they please, from fining you a dollar or two to +shooting you over in the Lunetta,” answered Longley. The Lunetta is a +public park, and here more than one rebel had already been executed. + +“Supposing I decline to be arrested?” I went on. + +“You’ll run the risk of being shot on the spot.” + +By this time two of the soldiers had caught me by the arms. The other +two made Dan their prisoner. + +We tried to argue, but all to no purpose, the Spaniard who had made the +charge stating that we could do our talking when brought up before the +court. + +“We may as well march along,” said Dan helplessly. “These fellows +evidently mean business.” + +“I’m not going to prison if I can help it,” I answered desperately. + +“We will see about zat!” cried the Spanish spy. “March, or I order ze +men to shoot!” + +“I shall escape the first chance I get,” I whispered to Dan. + +“So will I,” answered my companion, and a look passed between us which +each understood thoroughly. + +“I’ll help you if I can,” whispered Harry Longley. + +He was permitted to say no more, indeed, it was hardly safe to say +anything, the Spanish spy being half of a mind to arrest the clerk, too. + +We were marched from the office by a back way and across a narrow +street lined with warehouses. Here we came in contact with a number of +native and Chinese laborers, who eyed us curiously, but said nothing. +As a matter of fact, arrests of foreigners were becoming frequent in +Manila. + +Ten minutes of walking brought us to a fine building--at least fine in +comparison to those which surrounded it. This was the jail in which we +were to be confined until brought up for a hearing. + +We entered the jail yard through a gate to a tall iron fence. Beyond +was a wide, gloomy corridor, the lower floor of the jail being on a +level with the street. A guard passed us after hearing what the spy had +to say, and we were conducted to a room in the rear. + +“What a horrible place,” were my first words to Dan, as I gazed +around at our surroundings. The room was filled with the smoke of +the ever-present cigarette, for it must be remembered that in the +Philippines women as well as men smoke. To this smell of tobacco was +added that of cooking with garlic, for garlic is the one vegetable that +is never missing from the pot. + +A dozen prisoners stood and sat around, some in deep anger and others +in sullen silence. One, an Englishman, was nearly crazy. + +“Hi’ll show them who Hi am!” he bawled. “Hi’ll sue them for a ’undred +thousand punds damages, so Hi will!” + +“What did they arrest you for?” I asked. + +“What for? Nothing, young man, absolutely nothing. Hi said it was a +beastly country, not fit for a ’og to live in, and then they collared +me. But Hi’ll show them, blast me hif Hi don’t!” and he began to +pace the floor at a ten-mile-an-hour gait. Soon a guard came in and +threatened him with a club, and he collapsed in a corner. + +There were no seats vacant, and Dan and I took up our places near +a window, which was barred with half a dozen rusty-looking iron +sticks set in mortar which was decidedly crumbly. As we stood there I +tried one of the bars and found I could wrench it loose with ease. I +mentioned the fact to Dan. + +“Look out of the window and tell me what you see,” he returned, and I +looked. + +“I see a guard at the corner of the jail and another near the fence.” + +“Exactly, and both armed with Mauser rifles, eh?” + +“They are certainly armed.” + +“Then what chance would we stand to escape, even if we pulled those +bars from the window?” + +“A good chance--at night, when they couldn’t see us.” + +“By Jove, Oliver, that’s an idea worth remembering. But we must be +careful, or----” + +Dan did not finish, for he had noticed that a fellow prisoner was +listening intently to all which was said. + +“He may not be a prisoner at all,” he said later on. “He may be another +Spanish spy. My idea is that the woods are full of them.” + +“I’ve no doubt but that you are right,” I returned. + +The day passed slowly and so did that which followed. We had expected +an immediate hearing, but it did not come. + +“I don’t like this,” growled my companion. “Every prisoner is entitled +to appear before the court. I shall demand a hearing at once, or appeal +to the American consul for aid.” + +Accordingly he notified the jailer that we wanted to see somebody in +authority without delay. + +For reply the Spaniard grinned meaningly and shrugged his shoulders. + +“Señor must wait,” he said, in broken English. “All de court verra +busy; no can hear you till next week.” + +“But I demand a hearing,” insisted Dan. “If I don’t get it I shall +write to our American consul about it.” + +“Write to consul, eh? Who carry de lettair, señor? Not me surely,” and +with another grin the jailer walked away and left us to ourselves. We +now realized how it was--we were in the hands of enemies who would do +with us just as they saw fit. + +The next day it began to rain and by nightfall it was pouring down +steadily. There was neither thunder nor lightning and the firmament +was, to use an old simile, as black as ink. Supper was served to us at +seven o’clock, a beef, rice, and garlic stew that neither of us could +touch. “I’ll rather starve,” was Dan’s comment. + +By ten o’clock the majority of the prisoners were sound asleep, the +Englishman snoring loudly and several others keeping in chorus with +him. “Let them snore,” said I, “it will help drown any noise we may +make.” + +Dan and I had secured our places directly beneath the window previously +mentioned, and now, standing on tiptoes, we worked at the bars with an +old fork and a rusty spoon we had managed to secrete from our jailer. + +Ten minutes of twisting and turning and I had one iron bar loose, and +using this as a pry we soon forced three others, and then the opening +thus afforded was large enough to admit the passage of a man’s body. + +“Now out we go!” I whispered. “I’ll drop first and, if the coast is +clear, I’ll whisper to you and you come, but wake the others first, so +that they can have a chance to escape. The more get away the better it +will be for us to escape recapture.” + +I leaped to the window sill, turned and dropped outside. All was +deserted around the window and I gave a soft whistle. Instantly Dan +followed me, after kicking half a dozen in their sides to wake them up. +“Out of the window, all of you!” I heard him cry, and then he landed +beside me, and both of us ran for the high iron fence I have previously +described. + +“_Halte!_” came the sudden command, in Spanish, and from out of the +gloom emerged a guard, with pointed gun. He must have seen Dan, for he +ran full tilt at my companion. + +Seeing this I made a circle and came up in his rear. With a quick +leap I was on him, placed my hands over his mouth and bore him to the +ground. Then Dan leaped in and we tore his gun from his grasp. + +“Silence, on your life!” said Dan, and the fellow must have understood, +for he did not utter a sound. Then we continued to the fence, and, not +without some trouble, leaped over. + +By this time the alarm had broken out in the jail and several lights +flared up. The other prisoners must have tried to escape, for we heard +a wild yelling and half a dozen shots. The latter aroused the entire +neighborhood, and citizens and soldiers came running in from all +directions. + +“We’ve got to leg it now!” I cried. “Come, on, Dan.” + +“But in what direction?” he gasped, for climbing the tall fence had +deprived him of his wind. + +“Any direction is better than staying here. Come,” and I caught him by +the hand. By this time we heard several soldiers making after us, and +away we went at the best speed at our command. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +BACK TO HONG KONG. + + +The main streets of Manila are but few in number. There are two +devoted largely to business, and three or four that have some handsome +residences and public buildings upon them. But all of the other +highways, so-styled, are simply what in a United States city would be +styled alleyways, the sidewalks being but two or three feet wide and +the wagon way just about broad enough for two hand carts to pass each +other. On each side, the ramshackle dwellings project over the walks, +cutting off light and air that are absolutely essential to health and +cleanliness. + +Dan and I had to cross one of the main streets, but this passed, we +lost no time in diving into an alleyway that was as dark as Erebus. On +and on we went until we brought up plump against the broadside of a +warehouse. + +“We can’t go any further,” I exclaimed. + +“Can it be possible that we’ve got into a blind pocket?” queried Dan. +“Come over here.” + +I did as requested, and soon learned that we had indeed entered what +the French call a _cul-de-sac_. On all sides were warehouses, and the +only opening to the narrow highway was that by which we had entered. + +“The soldiers are coming!” I whispered, after listening. “Can’t you +hear their footsteps?” + +“I can, Oliver. Hang me if I know what to do. I wish I had that gun,” +Dan went on, for he had thrown the Mauser rifle away. + +I ran up to the warehouse and felt of the boards. Soon I came to the +casement of an upper doorway, an opening used for hoisting goods in and +out of the warehouse. I snatched at the lower edge, pulled myself up, +and soon stood in the frame, which was five or six inches deep. + +“Come up here,” I whispered to Dan, and helped him to a position beside +me. Once we were in the doorway, we pressed as far back as possible and +waited. + +Soon three soldiers came up, one carrying a lantern and all armed with +rifles. All talked excitedly in Spanish, but it was in a Luzon dialect +and even Dan could not understand them. + +The soldiers searched around the alleyway for fully ten minutes, and +once almost flashed the lantern rays up into our faces. But we remained +undiscovered, and presently they ran out of the _cul-de-sac_, thinking +they had not tracked us aright. + +“Gosh, that was a narrow escape!” I murmured, when they had departed. + +“Don’t crow, Oliver; we are not yet out of the woods. Those fellows may +be waiting for us up there,” and Dan pointed to the alley’s entrance. + +“I wonder what sort of a building this is,” I went on, and turning +around began an examination of the door. Presently my hand touched +a rude wooden latch and the door fell back, sending us flying onto +a floor white with flour and dirty with a dozen other kinds of +merchandise. + +Shutting the door behind us, we pushed our way among numerous boxes and +barrels until we came to the front of the warehouse. Here there was a +long, low shed, extending to a dock fronting the Pasig River. The shed +was also filled with merchandise, and at the end of the dock lay half +a dozen lighters such as the Filipinos use in carrying goods from the +river docks to the large vessels lying in Manila harbor. + +“We are on the Pasig,” announced Dan. He read the inscriptions on +several of the boxes. “This warehouse belongs to an English firm named +Carley & Stewart, and these goods are consigned by them to Hong Kong, +per steamer _Cardigan_.” + +“The _Cardigan_!” I exclaimed. “Why, she sails to-morrow. I saw the +announcement on a card down at the office.” + +“If that’s the case it will be a good chance to get back to Hong Kong, +Oliver.” + +“I don’t want to go to Hong Kong yet, Dan. I want to get my rights.” + +“So do I, but----” + +“But what?” + +“You know how we fared at the prison. Supposing we are caught again? +That spy will swear we are rebel sympathizers, and then it will go hard +with us, you may be certain of that.” + +We talked the matter over for fully an hour, sitting on a couple of +boxes in the long shed. Then both of us grew sleepy and resolved to +remain where we were and let the morrow take care of itself. + +At daylight several workmen put in appearance, among them an Englishman +who looked as if he would prove friendly. Watching our opportunity we +called him to one side, and made a clean breast of the situation. + +“My advice is to get on board of the _Cardigan_ by all means,” he said. +“Don’t you know that you Americans are going to have a lot of trouble +with these Spaniards now the _Maine_ has been blown up?” + +This was the first we had heard of the destruction of the _Maine_, and +we asked him for particulars. The Englishman knew but little, yet he +said that the Americans held to it that the Spaniards had done the +dastardly deed. + +“And I shouldn’t wonder but that may mean war for your country,” he +added. + +“If war come, Spain will get whipped badly,” returned Dan. + +The young Englishman brought us some breakfast, and we at last decided +to go on board of the _Cardigan_. “But don’t tell the captain you +escaped from prison,” he said. “If you do, he won’t dare take you off. +Secure your passages and then turn up missing when the revenue officers +come on board.” + +This we considered excellent advice and followed it out. A lighter, +loaded with hemp bales, took us to the steamer, an ocean “tramp” of +2000 tons’ burden, and we lost no time in presenting ourselves to +Captain Montgomery. + +“Want passage to Hong Kong, eh?” he said. “Why don’t you go on the +regular mail steamers?” + +“We have some private reasons,” answered Dan. “What will the passage +money be?” + +Captain Montgomery studied our faces for a moment. + +“Aren’t criminals, are you?” he said sharply. + +“Do we look like criminals?” I demanded. + +“Can’t go by looks nowaday, lad. Last year I had a man beat me out of +twenty pounds and he looked like a parson, he did indeed.” + +“We are not criminals,” answered Dan. “We want to get out of Manila for +political reasons, if you must know.” + +“Americans, eh?” + +“Yes, sir--and not ashamed to own it.” + +Captain Montgomery held out his hands. + +“I’ll see you through, boys. I’ve got a bit of American blood in me, +too, on my mother’s side. Twelve pounds apiece takes you straight to +our dock in Hong Kong,--and no more questions asked.” + +As we were out of funds we had to consider what would be best to +do about paying the twenty-four pounds. I solved the difficulty by +addressing a note to Harry Longley asking an advance of thirty pounds, +to be put in Captain Montgomery’s care. This would leave Dan and me +three pounds each--about fifteen dollars--until we were safe in Hong +Kong once more. The message was carried by an under-officer of the +_Cardigan_, and the money was obtained from our Manila representative +without trouble, Longley being glad to learn of our escape. + +The _Cardigan_ was to leave her anchorage in front of Manila at four +o’clock in the afternoon, and an hour before that time hatches were +closed and the Spanish revenue officers came on board for a look +around. There was an Englishman, his wife, and three children on the +deck. + +“Who are those?” asked the leading revenue officer. + +“They are to be passengers,” answered Captain Montgomery. “Unless you +say they can’t go.” + +“Who are they?” + +The officer was told and the Englishman was brought up for inspection. +Apparently it was all right, and after a tour of the steamer, the +Spaniards left. + +Dan and I had meanwhile waited in the cabin in much anxiety. We +remained below for the balance of the day, and when we came up late in +the evening, the lights of Corregidor Island shone far behind and we +were standing out boldly into the China Sea. + +“Good-by to Luzon!” I cried. “My stay on that island was short and +bitter.” + +“I wonder if we will ever see the Philippines again?” mused Dan. + +“Perhaps so, Dan. I don’t much care. But I would like to get my things +from the _Dart_.” + +“So would I, Oliver. But even such a loss is preferable to a long term +spent in a Spanish prison.” + +“True, but----” I drew a long breath. “I want to get square with those +Dons, as they call them, and with Captain Kenny.” + +The weather was of the finest, and day after day passed quickly, as the +_Cardigan_ skimmed over the sea on her northwest course. As we sat on +the deck in our camp-chairs I wondered what would happen when we got +to Hong Kong, and if trouble would really come between Spain and the +United States because of the destruction of the _Maine_ and the war in +Cuba. Little did I dream of all the fierce fighting that was so close +at hand, and of the parts Dan and I were to play in the coming contest. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +THE OPENING OF THE WAR. + + +“Here we are at last, Oliver! I declare the place looks like home to +me, after being away so long!” + +It was Dan who spoke, as the _Cardigan_ steamed up to her wharf at +the Chinese-English port for which she had been bound. The voyage had +proved without incident, and we stepped from the ship feeling in the +best of health, despite the many adventures through which we had passed. + +“It certainly looks more friendly than Manila did,” I returned, as I +gazed at the long line of shipping. “I wonder what your folks will say +when they hear our story.” + +“Perhaps Harry Longley has succeeded in getting a cablegram through,” +was the answer. “The Spaniards are cute, but, you know, we have a +secret code.” + +Leaving the _Cardigan_, we walked up the broad wharf and on the street. +Not far away was a booth at which foreign periodicals were sold. +Around this booth a number of men were congregated, talking excitedly. + +“War has been declared between the United States and Spain!” were the +first words which reached my ears. + +“Can that be true?” I burst out. + +Dan did not answer, but pushed his way to the stand, and bought a copy +of the latest paper to be had. + +“Yes, the war is practically on,” he said, scanning the sheet. “Here is +a dispatch from Washington. Havana, Cuba, is about to be blockaded.” + +“And the army is to be called out,” I said, looking over his shoulder. +“Oh, Dan, what about Manila now,--and our business?” + +“Let us hurry to my father’s office,” answered my chum, and thrusting +the paper in his pocket he stalked down the street and I after him. + +The office of Raymond, Holbrook & Smith was a pretentious one of stone, +located on a main corner of Hong Kong. Entering, we found Mr. Holbrook +deep in some accounts. + +“Dan!” he cried, and caught his son by both hands. “I was afraid you +were dead,--that you had gone down with the _Dart_.” + +“Then you have heard of the foundering, father?” + +“Yes, a cablegram came in a few days ago. And you, Oliver, too! I am +thankful to Heaven that you both are safe!” and he shook hands. + +“We had a good many adventures,” said the son, as we seated ourselves. + +“No doubt. Tell me your story.” + +What we had to say occupied the best part of an hour, and then it was +lunch time and the three of us went to eat. Mr. Holbrook was very much +perplexed. + +“This war will upset everything,” he said. “We are already cut off from +Manila.” + +“By cablegram?” I queried. + +“Yes, and by mail, too. A message I offered yesterday was refused, and +I was given to understand that no letter to an American firm would be +delivered.” + +“Is the war to be carried on away out here?” I cried, struck with a +sudden idea. + +“It will be carried on wherever the armies and navies of Spain and +America may meet,” was the serious reply. “This war is to be no child’s +play.” + +“Well, we can’t do much out here,” said Dan. “We have no soldiers +closer than those at San Francisco.” + +“We have a number of warships in these waters, my son--I looked into +that matter last night.” + +“American men-o’-war?” I put in, with interest. + +“Yes, five or six of them, commanded by Commodore Dewey.” + +“Where are the ships?” + +“Here at Hong Kong, presumably awaiting orders from Washington.” + +“And have the Spaniards any war vessels about the Philippines?” asked +Dan. + +“Yes, they have a fleet under the command of a certain Admiral Montojo.” + +“And what if these two fleets meet?” + +“There will be a big fight, my boy, and who will come off victorious +there is no telling.” + +“We’ll win!” I cried. “I don’t believe those Spaniards can whip us.” + +“We mustn’t be over-confident, Oliver, even if we hope for the best. +But this war is a bad thing for our house, and the loss of those +documents you were carrying makes matters still worse.” Mr. Holbrook +scratched his head in perplexity. “I am afraid our Manila connection +will become a total loss to us.” + +“Have we much money invested there?” + +“Something like forty or forty-five thousand dollars. The Spanish sugar +planters who have bought machinery of us won’t pay a dollar now.” + +“Unless we come out ahead in this war--and we will come out ahead,” +put in Dan. “Hang it all, but I feel like fighting myself!” + +“So do I!” I cried. “I wish we had some soldiers out here, I would join +them, and sail for Manila and demand our rights.” + +At this outburst Mr. Holbrook smiled. “You are very enthusiastic. +Soldiering is not such a holiday-making as you may imagine.” + +“We couldn’t have any worse experience than we have had among those +dirty Tagals,” I answered. “I want to get back there, and get square +with those Spaniards, and with that villainous Captain Kenny.” + +The conversation continued for the best part of the afternoon, but +without definite results. As it drew toward evening, Dan and I +accompanied Mr. Holbrook to the latter’s home, where we were warmly +received by Mrs. Holbrook and the other members of the family. + +Mr. Holbrook had expected to go out in the evening, on a matter of +business, but was not feeling well, and presently asked Dan if he would +like to carry a note to a friend’s house for him. + +“Why, certainly I’ll go,” answered the son, and I said I would +accompany him. + +The letter was soon written and handed over, and we started out, down +the broad street and then through half a dozen narrow and crooked +thoroughfares belonging to the ancient portion of Hong Kong. The +friend lived the best part of a mile away, and we did not reach his +residence until after nine o’clock. + +The message delivered, we started on our return. It had been dark and +threatening a storm, but instead of rain a heavy mist crept up from the +China Sea, through which the scattered street lights shone like tiny +yellow candles. + +“It’s beastly,” remarked Dan, as he buttoned up his coat around his +neck. “I shall be glad when we are safe home and in bed. My, how good +it will feel to get back into my own bed again!” + +“It will beat sleeping in a dirty Tagal hut, won’t it?” I laughed. + +“Indeed it will, Oliver. That experience was--” Dan broke off short. +“What’s that?” + +A loud cry came from behind, a man’s voice. + +“Help, help! Murder! help!” + +“Somebody is in trouble!” I ejaculated. + +“What had we best do?” + +The question remained unanswered in words, but both of us broke into a +run, heading as closely as we could for the spot from whence the cry +came. + +The mist confused us not a little, and as the cries ceased we paused in +perplexity. + +“Where are you?” I yelled. + +“What’s up?” added Dan. + +“This way! Help!” came more feebly. “The heathens are trying to murder +me!” + +The words came from the entrance to a narrow alleyway, along which were +situated several Chinese gambling houses. As we sped along, I caught +up a stone that lay handy, and Dan pulled out a pistol he had procured +before starting out, for in Hong Kong it is a common thing to go armed. + +We were but a few feet from the scene of the encounter when a Chinaman +plumped into me, sending me headlong. But as I went down I caught the +Celestial by the foot, and he fell. + +The shock dazed me for an instant, and before I could recover the +Chinaman had me by the throat. + +“Let--let up!” I gasped, and as he did not I grabbed him by the ear, at +which he let out a scream of pain. Then, in a twinkling, a dagger was +flashed before my eyes, and I felt as if my last moment on earth had +come. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +I MEET COMMODORE DEWEY. + + +“Help!” + +That was but the single word I uttered as the sharp blade dangled +before my eyes and burnt itself on my brain. I felt that I was about to +die--that an unknown Chinese assassin was about to slay me. + +But in a twinkling the scene changed. Dan heard me go down, stopped, +and turned back. + +“Let him alone or I will shoot!” he cried, in Chinese, for he had +picked up a good deal of the language while living in Hong Kong. His +pistol came out, and the muzzle was thrust upon the Celestial’s yellow +neck. + +The touch of the cold barrel of steel seemed to paralyze the Chinaman, +and he fell back. “No shoot!” he mumbled. “No shoot!” And picking +himself up, he sped away in the gloom as if a demon was after him. + +“The cowardly sneak!” cried my chum. “If he--come!” + +Another cry ahead had rung out, and away he went, with me behind him. +My heart was in a flutter, not knowing what was coming next. + +But soon the whole cause of the trouble was revealed. An American +naval officer had been waylaid by three Chinese footpads. One had run +away--the fellow I had encountered--but the others remained, and they +had the officer on his back and were going through his pockets. + +“Let up, or I will shoot!” said Dan, and flourished his pistol. At the +same moment I stumbled over the officer’s sword and picked it up. + +“Shoot them! the villains!” moaned the officer. He had received a heavy +cut over the temple from which the blood flowed profusely. + +“Stop, I say,” commanded Dan, and now the two Celestials turned. One +aimed a blow at Dan, but I cut him short with the sword. Then my chum +fired, and the rascal dropped his club, and of a sudden both took to +their heels and disappeared in the darkness and mist. + +We followed the Chinamen for a distance of fifty feet, then returned to +the officer, to find that he had sunk down beside a wall in a heap. His +eyes were closed and he did not move. + +“He looks as if he was dead,” said Dan soberly. “He’s got an awful cut +over the eye.” + +“Perhaps he has only fainted,” I returned. “Let us bind his head up +without delay.” + +We took our handkerchiefs and strips from the linings of our coats and +set to work instantly, meanwhile laying the officer down on a patch of +soft dirt close to the wall. We had just finished binding up the wound, +when the sufferer stirred. + +“Help!” he murmured. “Oh, my poor head!” + +“You are safe, sir,” I said. “The Chinamen have fled.” + +“Is that true? Thank God! They wanted to kill me for the few pounds I +have in my pocket.” + +“Are you wounded otherwise than in the head?” asked Dan. + +“I--yes--one of them hit me in the leg, the left one,--it pains a good +deal. Oh, my head!” And the officer fell back once more. + +I proceeded to make him as comfortable as possible, while Dan scurried +around for some water. In the meantime the houses and shops in the +neighborhood remained closed, having been shut up at the first signs +of an encounter. In Hong Kong, if anything goes wrong, the native +inhabitants always pretend to know nothing about it. + +When the officer felt strong enough to talk connectedly he told us that +he was Clare Todd, belonging to the cruiser _Olympia_, of Commodore +Dewey’s squadron. + +“I am a lieutenant of marines,” he explained. “I am on shore leave, +stopping with my aunt, Mrs. Nelson, on Queen Street. Why these footpads +attacked me I do not know.” + +“One of us had best call a carriage,” said Dan. “You can’t walk to your +aunt’s home.” + +“I do not wish to go back to my aunt’s. I must report for duty on the +flagship without delay, for our squadron has orders to leave Hong Kong +as soon as possible, on account of the war, and this being a neutral +port.” + +“More of the war,” smiled Dan grimly. “Well, supposing we have you +taken to the dock?” + +“That will suit very well. But who are you who have done me such a +great service?” + +“My friend can tell you that, while I hunt up the carriage,” said Dan. +“Look out for more footpads,” he added, and hurried away. + +I soon introduced myself and told Lieutenant Todd about Dan. He had +often heard of the firm of Raymond, Holbrook & Smith, and had met Mr. +Holbrook once, in San Francisco. + +“I shall always remember you for what you have done for me,” he said +warmly. “It was brave.” + +Soon Dan came with the carriage, a curious turnout, which, however, +need not be described here. As the lieutenant was in no condition to +travel alone, we agreed to accompany him to the dock at which he said +one of the small boats belonging to the _Olympia_ was in waiting, not +only for him, but for half a dozen others. + +The drive was a short one through the dark and almost deserted streets. +When the dock was gained, we found that a steam launch was there, in +command of an under-officer and three men. + +“Well, well, Todd, you’ve had quite an adventure!” exclaimed the +officer of the launch, who seemed to be a personal friend of the +marine. “It’s a lucky thing these Yankee lads came to the rescue.” + +“That is true, Porter. They are as brave as lions.” + +“Then they had better enlist with us,” was the laughing reply. “We need +that sort of backbone, now.” + +“I’d like to enlist with you first-rate!” I burst out. “Especially if +you sail for Manila to wake the Spaniards up there.” + +“I reckon we’ll hunt up old Montojo, wherever he is, young man. As soon +as he gets sailing orders, Commodore Dewey won’t give him one bit of +rest.” + +So the talk ran on for several minutes, and then several other officers +arrived, among them Commodore Dewey himself, a well-built gentleman of +about sixty, of fine naval bearing. He looked greatly surprised to see +Clare Todd with his head tied up. + +“You want to be careful in the future,” he said, when the lieutenant of +marines had told his story. “We can’t afford to lose any men just now. +So these lads assisted you?” + +“They did, Commodore, and they are as plucky lads as I ever met.” + +“Oh, our American lads are always plucky!” smiled the commodore, who, +as I afterward learned, was one of the most warm-hearted of commanders. + +“Commodore Dewey, I hope you are going to Manila to settle the +Spaniards there!” I burst out impulsively. + +“Are you particularly interested in having me go to Manila?” was the +somewhat quick question put in return. + +“I am, sir,” and in a few words I explained why. + +“Well, there is no telling where we may get before this war is over, +Raymond,” he said, when I had finished. “I shall certainly do all in +my power to protect American interests, wherever they may be. But we +must be off now.” He turned to the under-officer in charge of the steam +launch. “Cast off from shore!” + +“Good-by!” shouted Clare Todd, and we said good-by in return, and +leaped to the wharf. There we stood still to watch the departure of the +launch, but the craft did not budge. + +“What’s the matter?” demanded the commodore, as he saw the engineer +working over the miniature engine. + +“The valve is out of order, sir,” was the answer. “We ought to have a +new one.” + +“Can’t you run the launch back to the ship?” + +“I’ll try my best, sir.” + +I listened to this bit of conversation with interest, for, as I +mentioned before, I was deeply interested in engines. As the engineer +continued to work over the parts I came closer. + +“Excuse me, but won’t you let me take a look at that engine?” I said. +“I know how these things are built.” + +“Certainly you can look at it,” answered the commodore, and once more I +leaped on board. + +“Can’t do anything with a split part,” growled the engineer, a fellow +named Graves. “A boy like you----” He did not finish, but looked a good +deal disgusted. + +I took the lantern and got down on my knees. The cap over the valve +was split, as he had said, and something had shifted below. It was +certainly a “teasing” breakdown, but, luckily, I had seen such a +fracture remedied before. + +“A clamp over the plate will do the business,” I said. + +“Yes, but there is no clamp on board,” was the answer. + +“Have you a couple of wrenches?” + +“We have one wrench.” + +“And a coil of wire?” + +“Yes, there is wire.” + +“Then that will do. Here, we will clamp up this end first, and bind it +with wire. Then we’ll clamp this end up, and leave the wrench on, and +I’ll wager you can carry a half pressure of steam easily.” + +“I don’t think,” began Graves, when the commodore silenced him. + +“Try the boy’s scheme,” he said, for he had studied a little of steam +engineering himself, at Annapolis, years before. + +It did not take long to put my plan into operation, I looking to it +that the wire was wound just as I wanted it, and the wrench set in +exactly the right place. Steam was all ready, and when I had concluded, +the engine carried a few pounds over half pressure without a sign of +giving way. + +“She’s all right now,” I said. “Only watch that wrench and see that it +doesn’t slip.” + +“I declare, you’re quite a genius!” laughed the commodore. “I think I +had better take you with me.” + +“All right; I’ll go!” I answered, half in jest and half in earnest. “I +know something about guns as well as about engines.” + +“You are certainly the kind we want,” was the pleasant response. +“Good-night, and good-by until we meet again!” And as the steam launch +moved away, the commodore waved his hand pleasantly, and Dan and I +took off our hats to him in return. Soon the darkness swallowed up the +little craft. + +“Dan, I wish I was going with him!” I burst out impulsively. “A cruise +on a man-o’-war, especially in war times, would just suit me.” + +“So say I, Oliver,” answered my chum. “Hurrah for the American Navy!” + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +THE FIGHTING ENGINEER. + + +That night I slept but little. Strange as it may seem, I could not get +Commodore Dewey’s face out of my mind. I thought of him continually, +with his trim naval uniform and well-polished sword and scabbard. He +was certainly a splendid specimen of an American naval gentleman. + +“Why don’t you go to sleep,” asked Dan, who roomed with me at his home. +“You’ve been tumbling and tossing for a couple of hours. Was that +encounter with the Chinamen too much for you.” + +“No, I was thinking of Commodore Dewey, Dan.” + +“What! Why, I was thinking of him myself. Say, do you know, Oliver, +that his flagship, the _Olympia_, is one of the finest cruisers in our +navy?” + +“I have never seen her.” + +“I saw her once, a few months ago. She is immense; and so are the other +ships under his command, especially the _Boston_.” + +“That’s only an aggravation--if a fellow can’t board her.” + +“Do you really and truly want to enlist?” + +“If we are going to have war I would like to see some of it. My +grandfather fought in the Mexican War and my uncle was killed at +Lookout Mountain, in our Civil War. So, you see, I’ve got fighting +blood in me. Besides, if Commodore Dewey goes to the Philippines----” + +“We may get a chance to retrieve our fallen fortunes?” + +“Exactly, Dan. I wouldn’t like any better fun than to give those Manila +Spaniards what they deserve for placing us under arrest.” + +“I am with you there, Oliver. But”--Dan gave a deep yawn--“let’s go to +sleep now,” and in a minute more he was in the land of dreams, while I +was dreaming in another way, of a proud-looking warship, with myself +behind a long gun, in a cloud of smoke, fighting as I had never fought +before, for the honor of the glorious Stars and Stripes. + +The next day was a busy one for Dan and an idle one for myself. In the +afternoon I met several American sailors from the _Boston_, another of +Commodore Dewey’s squadron, and being in a talkative mood they filled +me up with tales of gallantry on shipboard, and sent me back to Mr. +Holbrook’s place more determined than ever to enlist on the _Olympia_ +or the _Boston_. + +That evening Mr. Holbrook, Dan, and I held a long talk, lasting until +midnight. It was on the subject of our being able to join those on +board of the American squadron, provided that squadron sailed for +the Philippines. Mr. Holbrook did not care greatly to let us go, but +thought that perhaps it would do no harm to let each get a taste of +life in the navy. + +“I will take you out to the squadron myself and see if I can gain a +personal interview with either the commodore or the captain,” he said, +and so it was decided. + +My heart bounded wildly over the prospect. Somehow I felt it “in my +bones” that I would join the navy, and so it turned out, to cut a long +story short. We went over in a small boat which Mr. Holbrook hired, +and were accorded a long interview by both the commodore and the +kind-hearted Captain Wildes of the _Boston_. + +As Lieutenant Todd had said, the Asiatic Squadron had orders to leave +Hong Kong, and was bound for Mirs Bay; so, if we were to go along, no +time was to be lost in preparing for our departure. We accordingly +hurried back to Dan’s house with all speed, packed our valises, and +came back by nightfall. + +I had been on a warship before, but the _Boston_, on which we were +placed, with her steel decks, heavy military masts, and long guns +interested me greatly. We soon made ourselves at home, and before we +left Mirs Bay, on that never-to-be-forgotten trip to Manila Bay, both +of us knew the craft from stem to stern. + +We found the crew truly American--“to the backbone”--as Dan expressed +it. One old gunner, named Roundstock, took a great interest in us, and +told us a great deal about the squadron. + +“We’ve got four cruisers and three gunboats,” he said. “They are as +fine as you’ll find ’em anywhere, although, to be sure, we are turning +out ships better and better every day. If we meet those Spaniards we’ll +give ’em a tough tussle, and don’t you forget it!” And he shook his +head to show that he meant what he said. + +As we were not exactly enlisted for the cruise, we had not to attend +the numerous drills on board, although we trained at the guns and with +small-arms, and I took many a trip below to the engine rooms. In the +engine rooms I met Bill Graves again, he having been transferred from +the flagship. He scowled at me silently, and when I attempted to talk +to him, turned his back and walked away. + +“That fellow has no use for you,” observed Dan, when I told him about +Graves. + +“I believe you there. But it is silly for him to get mad simply +because I showed him how to fix up the launch engine.” + +“He is jealous of you, especially as Commodore Dewey complimented you +on your work, Oliver.” + +The second night on board of the man-o’-war proved a nasty one, and +it looked as if we would have to pull up anchors and move out of the +bay, for fear of having a sudden wind send us ashore. Yet Commodore +Dewey hated to get too far from shore, for he was awaiting final orders +before sailing in quest of the Spanish fleet. + +“This is enough to make one sick,” I observed to Dan. “I would rather +sleep on shore to-night.” + +Bill Graves was passing us at the time, and a sneer showed itself on +his lip. + +“You’re a fine landlubber to be on one of Uncle Sam’s men-o’-war,” he +sniffed. + +The remark nettled me, and I swung around quickly and caught him by the +shoulder. + +“See here, Graves,” I said. “I have no quarrel with you, but if you +want to act nasty let me tell you that you had better take care.” + +“Humph! Do you think I am afraid of you?” he blustered. + +“I’ll let you know that you can’t bully me, that’s all. I want you to +keep your remarks to yourself.” + +“I’ll say what I please.” + +“Not about me.” + +“Won’t I? Who will stop me?” + +“I will.” + +“Go and blab, I suppose?” + +“No; I’m not of the blabbing kind.” + +“Do you mean to say you’ll fight?” + +“Perhaps I will.” + +“You whipper-snapper!” he cried in a rage. “Take that for a lesson!” + +He struck out heavily, and had I not been on the alert I would have +caught his fist on my nose and gone down. But I leaped to one side and +his hand merely grazed my shoulder. + +By this time my blood was up, and, leaping in, I landed one blow +on his chest and another on his mouth, which latter drew blood and +loosened two of his teeth. I had taken several lessons in the art of +self-defense and these now stood me in good stead. My blows sent him +staggering up against a gun, where he stood gazing at me in bewildered +astonishment. + +“Wha--what did you do that for?” he spluttered, spitting out some blood. + +“I warned you to take care,” I answered coolly. + +“A mill! A mill!” cried half a dozen jack tars standing by, while Dan +came running up to learn what the row was about. + +“Don’t fight, Oliver,” said my chum, in a low voice. “They’ll lock you +up in the brig, if you do.” + +“He began it, Dan. I only defended myself. If he----” + +I had no time to say more, for, watching his chance, Bill Graves leaped +in again, this time hitting me on the cheek, a blow that almost floored +me. + +“Take that!” he hissed. “I’ll teach you!” + +“A man against a boy! That aint fair!” was the cry from several sailors +and gunners. “Let up, Graves.” + +“I won’t let up. He’s too fresh, and I’m going to teach him his place.” + +By this time I had recovered and was standing my ground once more. +Again the engineer came on, but as he struck out I parried the blow and +let drive first with my right fist and then my left. Both blows landed +on his chin, and over he went like a ten-pin struck down on an alley. + +“Graves is down!” + +“Those were two neat blows, eh?” + +“That boy knows how to take care of himself, I take it.” + +Such were some of the remarks which passed around. Half stunned, Bill +Graves arose slowly to his feet and looked around sheepishly. Without +giving him time to get his second wind I confronted him. + +“Have you had enough, or do you want more?” I demanded. + +“I--I--don’t you hit me again,” he stammered. + +“Have you had enough?” + +“I don’t want to fight--it’s against the rules of the ship.” + +“Then what did you want to start it for?” + +“I didn’t start it; you started it yourself,” he muttered, and before +I could say more hurried away and out of sight in the direction of the +engine rooms. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +“FIRE!” + + +“Oliver, you went at him in great style,” observed Dan, when the +excitement was over and we found ourselves alone. “After this you’ll be +the cock of the walk.” + +“I don’t want to be cock of the walk, Dan. I simply want to be left +alone.” + +“But you pitched into him like a prizefighter. It was--well, simply +immense, it was indeed.” + +“I am glad I can use my fists when it becomes necessary. I hope he’ll +let me alone in the future.” + +“Let you alone? I’ll wager he won’t come within a hundred feet of you +unless it’s absolutely necessary.” + +“He’s a fool to be angry with me. If he had taken things in good part +at first there would have been no trouble.” + +“Oh, there are lots of pig-headed men just like him, Oliver. But I +reckon you’ll have no further trouble with him.” + +There was no room for us at the guns, so both Dan and I were placed, +for convenience’ sake, among the sailors. But on such a steam vessel +as the _Boston_ there is little or nothing for sailors to do, and our +time was, as before, our own. + +We lay in Mirs Bay for several days longer. But early one day some +special dispatches were received, and half an hour later the _Olympia_ +flew the signal: “Up anchors and follow the flagship,” and all hands +knew we were off at last. + +The three cruisers, _Olympia_, _Baltimore_, and _Boston_, were the +first to steam away, and they were shortly followed by the gunboats +_Concord_, _Petrel_, and _McCulloch_, and two colliers, the latter +loaded to the rail with coal for the six warships. + +“What a splendid sight!” I said to Dan, as we stood on deck watching +the column of vessels sweeping out swiftly to sea. “If we meet those +Dons there will be fun.” + +“Pretty serious fun, Oliver, to my way of thinking. Killing +fellow-beings isn’t much play.” + +“That’s right, Dan; but if we have got to have war I hope we come out +on top.” + +“Oh, so do I!” + +The day was an ideal one, and we remained on deck until the intense +heat drove us below. Here we found a great state of confusion, for +orders had been passed around to “clear ship for action,” and all hands +were tearing down unnecessary woodwork, preparatory to heaving it +overboard. + +“It won’t do to have splinters around, you see,” explained Bob +Roundstock, the gunner. “We want everything clear for action, just as +the order says.” + +The woodwork disposed of, ammunition was passed around and fire tubs +were filled with water. Then the great guns, fore and aft, were loaded, +and kept in readiness for instant use. + +Several days passed without anything unusual happening. The weather +remained fair, although the wind blew so strongly that the colliers +were in danger of being swamped, so heavily were they loaded. We might +have run at a greater rate of speed, but the colliers and the _Petrel_ +could not keep up, and Commodore Dewey thought it advisable, now we +were in the enemy’s waters, to keep his squadron and supply boats +together. + +“I wonder where we will find this Admiral Montojo?” I said one evening, +as Dan and I lounged on deck. “Was he at Manila when we were there?” + +“I don’t know, I’m sure. He must be somewhere among the Philippine +Islands.” + +“That’s saying a good deal, when the islands number over a thousand.” + +“Oh, he must be near one or another of the principal cities, Oliver. At +a second-rate place he would have nothing to protect but a collection +of bamboo huts.” + +“Has he much of a fleet?” + +“Supposed to have eight or nine vessels, so Roundstock told me. He is +one of Spain’s best admirals, too, I was told.” + +“Then we won’t have a walk-over. If we--hark!” + +A sudden cry from below reached our ears. Both of us listened intently, +but could make out only a confusion of voices. + +“Something is wrong,” cried Dan. “Let us see what it is,” and he ran +for the stairs. + +We met half a dozen gunners coming up. “Fire! fire!” yelled one of the +number. “There is a fire between decks!” + +“A fire!” The cry was instantly taken up on all sides. “Whereabouts?” + +“Near Jackson’s gun. It caught from some straw that was in a crockery +barrel Gumpers was emptying. It’s close to a lot of ammunition!” + +“Man the fire hose!” put in an officer. “Lively, boys, or we’ll have an +explosion!” + +The cry of fire had by this time aroused the entire ship, and men came +hurrying to the scene from all directions. + +At first all was confusion, but soon discipline reigned supreme, and +the fire drill was put into execution. + +Would they subdue the flames before it reached the loose ammunition +which had just been sent up from below? + +This was the all-important question that I asked myself as I stood by, +watching what was going on. + +I wanted to help and so did Dan, but we could do nothing. + +Presently a dull explosion was heard, followed by another. + +“The ammunition is going up!” + +“Are the steel covers to the magazines closed?” + +Several other cries rang out. In the meantime the firemen continued to +pour two heavy streams of sea water on the flames. + +Thick volumes of smoke rolled up the companion ways, and I felt that +those below were in danger of being choked to death. + +“This is awful!” murmured Dan. “I hope we don’t blow up, as did the +_Maine_.” + +“We won’t, for she blew up from the outside, not the inside,” I +answered grimly. + +“Well, one way would be just as bad as the other, Oliver.” + +“I suppose that is so, as far as we are concerned.” + +The work continued and all watched the labor nervously. + +At last the fire captain came up, blinking his eyes and shaking the +water from his clothing. He looked as black as a negro. + +“It’s out, sir,” he reported, saluting the officer of the deck. + +“All out?” + +“Yes, sir, although we had better watch for sparks when the half-burned +stuff is removed.” + +“Yes, be very careful. We’ll pitch it overboard at once.” + +Extra men were sent below, and they soon came up, carrying the burned +and wet straw in their arms. In ten minutes all was cleared away, and +then followed such a scrubbing and cleaning up as I had never seen +before. + +“The carpenter will have a day’s work here,” observed Dan, as we +surveyed the scene of the fire. “But we can thank God that it was no +worse.” + +“So say I,” was my answer. “I don’t want any more sunken ships in mine. +The _Dart_ was sufficient.” + +The day to follow was uneventful. It was clear and hot, so hot in fact +that, during the noon-day hours, nobody could remain on deck. In the +turrets and conning tower it was suffocating. + +“I feel as if I was half baked,” said Dan, as we lay in a shady corner +on the third day out. “I wonder how far we are from Luzon?” + +“I heard an officer say that we would sight land to-morrow or the day +after.” + +“Did he say where?” + +“He said we were steering for Subig Bay. They think Admiral Montojo may +be found there with his fleet.” + +“I hope they do find him, and give him a good thrashing.” + +“You say they, Dan. Don’t you expect to take a hand in fighting?” + +“To be sure. But then we are not regular sailors you know.” + +“Well, I consider myself a sailor boy,” I answered warmly. + +“Do you? All right, then. Here’s to the sailor boy under Dewey!” cried +my chum, and drank my health in what was left of a glass of lemonade he +had brought up with him. Lemons were plentiful, and in those hot days +everybody spent a good deal of time in making something palatable to +drink. + +In the afternoon, when the sun was low, the squadron was called +together and was put through a number of naval maneuvers by the +commodore. This was both an interesting and instructive sight, and I +watched it from start to finish. + +I had just retired for the night when I heard the sounds of numerous +footsteps on the gun deck. I aroused myself and sat up in my hammock. + +“What’s up?” I asked of Dan. + +“I don’t know,” was his answer. “But something is the matter, that’s +certain.” + +“Let us go and see,” I went on, and hopped to the floor. We soon had +our clothing on, and then we hurried to where Bob Roundstock was +getting his gun crew into order to man the eight-inch monster under his +command. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +IN WHICH ONE SPANISH SHIP IS SUNK. + + +“What is it, Roundstock?” + +“What is it?” repeated the old gunner. “We’ve sighted a Spanish +man-o’-war, that’s what it is!” + +“A man-o’-war!” cried Dan. “Where is she?” + +“Dead ahead, and running away as fast as her steam can carry her.” + +“Can we catch her?” + +“Can’t say as to that, lad. We hope to do it.” + +Dan and I waited to hear no more, but, rushing to the stairs, made our +way to the spar deck. + +It was a cloudy moonlight night and just now too dark to see anything +with the naked eye. + +But presently the moon came out brightly, and then, far ahead, we made +out a dim form, moving along over the ocean like a phantom. + +“Is that the Spanish ship?” I asked of a sailor standing near. + +“So the officers think, lad.” + +“Why don’t they give her a shot to make her heave to?” asked Dan. + +He had scarcely spoken when one of the guns from the _Olympia_ boomed +threateningly, sending a shot to the starboard of the flying craft. + +All expected to see her heave to, but she kept on, and now a dense mass +of clouds covered the moon and all became dark once more. + +The clouds were as long as they were heavy, and it took them all of +twenty minutes to drift over the face of the moon and let that orb +shine out again. How impatiently officers and men waited, my readers +can well imagine. + +“She’s gone!” Such was the cry which rang from a hundred throats, and +it was true. The strange vessel had disappeared from view. + +In a few minutes more the moon was again hidden, and further pursuit of +the flying one was out of the question. + +Everybody was disappointed, and none more so than Bob Roundstock. + +“I’m just achin’ to get a shot at ’em,” he observed. “Oh, if only that +ship had turned to engage us!” + +“I reckon those on board saw we were six to one and didn’t dare to risk +it,” said Dan. “Now if we had been one to one----” + +“Those Dons would have run anyway!” finished Roundstock. He was a +thorough Yankee tar and felt certain that nothing could stand up +against our ships and guns. And he was more than half right, as later +events proved. + +The following day brought us in sight of Subig Bay, and, while we lay +at a distance, several of the smaller war vessels went inside to survey +the situation. + +“I wish we were going in,” observed Dan. “There must be lots of Spanish +vessels there.” + +“We are not making war on the merchantmen, Dan,” I answered. “We are +after warships.” + +“That’s true, but we ought to take some prizes, just for the prize +money.” + +“I only want what is coming to me,--my money and those documents left +on board of the _Dart_,--and I want to bring Captain Kenny to justice.” + +“And give a helping hand to Tom Dawson and the others, if we can,” he +finished, and I nodded. + +Soon the small ships which had been sent into the harbor returned, and +then some of the captains went over to the _Olympia_ to confer with the +commodore. + +“Something is up now, you can bet on that,” said Dan, as the squadron +set sail once more. + +“We are bound southward,” I replied. “That means Manila Bay, I presume.” + +Orders came around to “clear ship for action,” and a busy half hour +followed. + +“Commodore Dewey knows we are getting close to the enemy,” said +Roundstock. “Orders are to keep at the guns.” + +“There isn’t a sail in sight.” + +“No; but how long would it take a heavy steam vessel, under a full head +of steam, to come out from one of yonder headlands and open fire, lad? +Not more than ten or fifteen minutes, if as long.” + +“How far will our heavy guns carry?” + +“Six to eight miles--and more, on a pinch.” + +“A good deal further than a fellow can see, even with an ordinary +glass,” put in Dan. + +“Our telescopes are the finest in the world.” + +The loss of sleep the night before had tired me out, and I soon +retired, and Dan followed. + +But I was not to sleep long, as I soon discovered. + +As I had supposed, the squadron was running for Manila Bay. Commodore +Dewey wanted to get past Corregidor Island unnoticed, if such a thing +was possible. + +But it was not to be, and presently we received half a dozen heavy +shots from the land batteries, one or two of which struck the ships +behind the _Olympia_ and _Boston_. + +Then rockets flared up in the air, and a small-sized engagement was on. + +“This is war and no mistake!” I cried to Roundstock, but he merely +tossed his head. + +“Only children’s play, lad,” he replied. “See, we are already safely +past.” + +The engagement lasted ten minutes, and then the batteries were passed +and we hauled out into Manila Bay proper. + +It was almost full moon, but the clouds made it dark. Far away could be +seen the twinkling lights of Manila city and other places. + +A strange silence prevailed throughout the ships. It was the calm +before the storm. + +The night seemed long, but for all on board sleep was out of the +question. + +The men lay at their guns or on the deck, while the officers paced +about or held long whispering conversations. + +“I’ll wager we have a fight to-morrow,” I said to Dan. “Even if the +Spanish ships are not here I think Commodore Dewey will capture the +city, so as to have a new base of supplies.” + +“If he does that a good deal of our troubles will be over, Oliver.” + +“He won’t touch anything until he has ferreted out old +Monto-what’s-his-name,” broke in Roundstock. + +“Montojo,” corrected Dan. “Well, we’ll have to take what comes, that’s +all.” + +“Correct, lad.” + +At early dawn our squadron crept closer to Manila city. We could now +see the numerous ships in front of the river mouth, but no warships +were among them. + +Below Manila is situated a long peninsula, upon which was located Fort +Cavité, the principal Spanish arsenal along the bay. + +Back of the arsenal was a town of some four thousand inhabitants, and +to one side of the fort was a long, low-lying land battery. + +As the sun came up six warships, flying the Spanish flag, were +discovered lying between Manila and Cavité. Several other warships were +to the rear, half hidden by the arsenal just mentioned. + +“There they are!” was the cry which swept from ship to ship. “Now for a +fight to the death!” + +The words had scarcely been uttered when the flagship opened fire. A +second later the _Boston_ belched forth with her forward guns. + +The shock nearly threw me off my feet, and the noise fairly deafened me. + +“My gracious, Dan, what a racket!” + +“This is war, Oliver!” + +“It sounds more like a hundred thunderstorms rolled into one.” + +All of the warships had now trained their guns on the enemy, and round +after round of gigantic steel projectiles was hurled forth, to deal +death and destruction. + +Soon both sides were enveloped in smoke and but little could be seen, +excepting at close range. + +The _Boston_ was hit several times, but the shots merely passed through +our upper works, doing but little damage. + +For half an hour the battle kept on, and during that time both Dan and +myself helped where we could, resolved to do our duty as Americans even +though we were not duly enlisted. + +“She’s on fire!” came presently. The cry referred to one of the leading +Spanish ships, and proved correct. One of our shells had burst into +a magazine, and a dull explosion was followed by a wild scattering +of burning embers. Soon the ship began to sink, and there followed a +frantic struggle on the part of the Spanish sailors to save their lives. + +“Poor wretches!” I said. “I can’t help but pity them.” + +“War is war, lad,” said Roundstock, who was working like a beaver over +his gun, which was red-hot. “If we didn’t sink them they would sink +us; and since one of us must go down, I’d rather it would be the other +fellow.” + +And I could not help but agree with him. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +A NEVER-TO-BE-FORGOTTEN CONTEST. + + +In this tale of adventures in and around the Island of Luzon it is not +my intention to play the part of a historian and go into all of the +details of the battle of Manila Bay, or, more properly, the battle off +Cavité. + +To be really truthful, but little of the whole battle could be seen +by any one spectator, for the ships were several miles apart, and the +heavy smoke hung everywhere over the bay like a murky pall. Near Cavité +the fire burst up through the smoke at half a dozen points, and these +marked the spots where the enemy’s ships were slowly but surely going +to pieces. + +For the victory was Commodore Dewey’s from the start, and a few hours +sufficed to teach Spain a lesson which she is not likely to forget for +years to come. + +Our gallant commodore had come to Manila with six fighting ships, +including one which was very small, and but indifferently armed. Off +Cavité he engaged eight Spanish warships, and these had the strong +support of the fort and the land battery. + +And yet, when it was all over, what was the result? The Spanish ships +lay along the shore, riddled with shot and shell and burning fiercely. +Hundreds of Spanish sailors had been either shot or drowned, and those +who had escaped to land were hurrying, panic-stricken, toward Manila +and the mountains. More than this, Cavité itself had surrendered, and +the arms and ammunition at the arsenal were our own. + +We had pulled out once from the fight, to learn how matters were faring +with the other ships. Commodore Dewey was afraid that one or another +had been lost, and his delight was without measure when he found that +not a single ship had sustained any serious injury. “Good, boys!” he +said. “Go in and finish them up!” And they went in, with the vigor that +only the Anglo-Saxon race knows. + +Dan had been hurt by a splinter flying from some of the rigging, and I +carried him into the wardroom, where the surgeons waited in readiness +for any demand that might be made upon them. + +He was unconscious, and I looked on anxiously as a surgeon made an +examination. + +“Is it serious?” I asked. + +“Not very; but he must remain quiet for a while,” was the answer. “I +will plaster up the wound and bind it.” + +The battle had started early in the morning. By the middle of the +afternoon it was over and a regular jubilee among the jack tars +followed. They yelled, cheered, sang, and danced, while eating and +drinking went on until nightfall. + +Some of the ships had been sent to other places, but we lay close to +Cavité. We could have taken a great number of prisoners, but Commodore +Dewey had no place to put them. + +“Let them go, poor fellows; they have suffered enough,” said more than +one officer, and in my mind I agreed with them. + +“Didn’t I tell you!” cried Roundstock, coming up. “Nothing can stand up +against the Stars and Stripes, our glorious flag of freedom.” + +“What’s to do, now, Roundstock?” I questioned. + +“That’s for the commodore and our captain to say. As for myself, I feel +as if I could sleep for a week.” + +“Won’t we go in and take Manila?” + +“I suppose we will--later on.” + +“I would like to go in right away. I want to learn how my friends there +are faring.” + +“You’ll have to be patient.” + +Roundstock strode off, and I turned again to Dan, who was moaning. I +found his face very hot, as if he was in a fever. + +The hours of the night passed slowly, and in the morning I was much +gratified to learn that my chum was better. We now received definite +word from the other warships. All were in good condition and not a +single man had been killed. Some were to move in close to Cavité, while +others were to go down and take possession of Corregidor Island, at the +bay’s entrance. + +By good fortune I managed to get permission to go ashore at the +arsenal, and Dan insisted upon going along. Just before we left the +_Boston_ we had a parting word with the captain. + +“Be careful, boys,” he said. “Those Spaniards will shoot you down if +you give them the least chance.” + +I started to say something about getting into Manila again, but +thought better of it and remained silent. Perhaps it might have been +much better had I spoken and had the kind-hearted commander prevented +the movement. But we do not know things beforehand as we know them +afterward. + +It had been supposed by the Spaniards that Commodore Dewey would demand +the immediate surrender of the capital, but no demand came, for the +reason that the commodore was awaiting instructions from Washington, +and because he had no armed force sufficiently large to hold Manila +against our enemies, and against the insurgents, who were gathering +about, ready to rush in and plunder at the first opportunity. + +We went ashore in one of the small boats, manned by eight jack tars, +and landing close to the arsenal, made our way to a deserted church, +which the sailors on shore had turned into a temporary barracks. + +On every hand were the signs of the fierce conflict which had raged but +a few short hours. The bay about Cavité was dotted with the half-burned +wrecks of the Spanish warships, and fort and batteries were torn up as +only a hail of shot and shell can do the work. + +“This is awful,” remarked Dan, as he walked around. “How these poor +wretches must have suffered during the fight!” + +“I reckon they were glad enough to run for it, Dan,” I answered +soberly. “But see, there are some Spanish soldiers approaching!” + +The men referred to were a score in number. They were without arms, +almost without shoes, and their clothing was torn in countless places +by their wild rushes through the brush and cane fields. They came up to +a body of volunteers encamped near the church. + +“They have surrendered and want protection from the insurgents,” said +Dan, after listening to what was said by the Spanish leader. “He states +that the rebels here are worse than wild beasts, and he would rather +go to an American prison than fall into their hands.” + +“I believe him--after my own experience, Dan.” + +“So do I. I’ll tell you, Oliver, the fighting here isn’t half over. +Dewey may try to make friends of the insurgents; but, if so, he will be +sorry for it.” + +We watched the Spaniards and saw that they were starving by the manner +in which they disposed of the food furnished to them by our own +volunteers. I really believe that some of them would have jumped at the +chance of joining our troops had they had the chance. None of them had +received a dollar of pay from Spain for months, and one told Dan that +even their own officers treated them like dogs. “If only I was back in +beautiful Spain again!” he sighed. “Or with my uncle at his tobacco +works in Key West, Florida, in your own nice country!” He was sick of +war. + +As I have said, Cavité lay about eight miles south of Manila. Between +the two places was a low, sandy beach, back of which was a rude +highway, low-lying hills, covered with rice and other plantations, and +thick forests. There were several settlements, but none of especial +importance. + +By careful inquiry we learned that the country between us and Manila +had been almost deserted, but was now filling up with insurgents, who +were awaiting the arrival of their principal leader, General Aguinaldo, +who had gone to Hong Kong on business. If we wanted to get into the +capital, therefore, we must first pass the insurgents’ camps and then +the Spanish pickets at the city walls. + +“It’s a risky thing to do, Oliver,” said Dan. “We don’t want to get +shot.” + +“That is true. But I want to know how Longley is faring and how the +business is faring.” + +“Yes, that is true. And I would like to know if Captain Kenny has shown +up at Manila, too. But still----” + +“You haven’t got to go if you don’t want to, Dan. But I’m going.” + +“Then I’ll go, and that settles it.” + +And it did settle it. But neither of us dreamed of the many dangers in +store for us. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +BETWEEN TWO FIRES. + + +“I don’t know much about this part of the country,” said Dan, as we +drew away from the American camp with great caution. “I wish we could +pick up a native guide. He might save us from a lot of trouble.” + +“There are natives enough around, if only they can be trusted. Let us +strike the first man we meet and see what he has to say.” + +Leaving camp was an easy matter, for as yet military rule was rather +lax. We took a small side trail, that presently brought us in sight of +a collection of rude bamboo huts, one burning and all deserted. Back of +the huts we found a tall negro sitting on a tree stump, his lean chin +resting in the palm of an equally lean hand. + +Dan called to him in Spanish, but the man did not stir until my chum +walked up and shook him by the shoulder. Then he stared at us from eyes +buried deeply in their sockets. + +His tale was soon told. His wife had been shot down in a skirmish +around the bamboo huts on the day that the Spanish soldiers had +retreated from Cavité to Manila, and his only child had been trampled +under the feet of a runaway buffalo cow, a beast quite common in +certain parts of the Philippines. His home was that now being reduced +to ashes. + +“Your lot is certainly a hard one, my man,” said Dan to him soothingly. +“But it will do you no good to sit here and mourn. What is your name?” + +“Wamba, señor.” + +“Would you like to become our guide, Wamba? We will pay you well?” + +At this the eyes of the native brightened somewhat, for he was of the +poorest class. + +“You will pay me well?” he asked slowly. + +“We will.” + +“You will not pay me in _chit_?” went on Wamba. In Manila many large +bills are paid in _chit_, instead of coin, a _chit_ being merely a +personal note. These _chits_ are issued by nearly everyone, and float +around from person to person before being presented to the issuer for +redemption. + +“No, you shall have coin--gold and silver,” and Dan showed the contents +of his purse, which contained several Mexican silver dollars, and some +Spanish gold and copper coins. + +“And where shall I guide you?” + +“We want to go into Manila secretly.” + +“You are soldier spies?” + +“No, we are private citizens and want to learn something of business +matters. Our fathers belong to the firm of Raymond, Holbrook & Smith, +of Manila, Hong Kong, San Francisco, and other cities.” + +“I know the name, señor,” and Wamba nodded. “But the business must be +ruined now,” and he gave a deep sigh. + +“That is what we want to see. Will you undertake to get us into Manila? +Remember, I will pay you well.” + +“I will do what I can, but it will be a dangerous undertaking.” + +The talk between the native and Dan continued for some time, and then +we hurried on, leaving the trail and passing over the wet ground of a +rice field recently flooded. + +It was again hot, and after half an hour of traveling I was glad enough +to cast myself in a shady spot to rest. While Dan did the same Wamba +went off in search of cool water from a nearby spring. + +“I suppose things in Manila are in a state of high excitement,” +observed my chum, as he lay back against a tree. “The Spaniards are in +a box--with the American fleet in front and the rebels behind.” + +“I think they would rather surrender to us than to the rebels, Dan.” + +“I’ve no doubt they would. But they’ll surrender to nobody until forced +to do it. They are as high-minded as ever, if I know anything about it.” + +“Business must be at a complete standstill. Perhaps the Spanish +authorities have confiscated everything at the offices.” + +“I wonder what has become of Tom Dawson, Matt Gory, and the +_Starlight_? I didn’t see anything of the craft while on the _Boston_, +did you?” + +“No. She probably lost no time in slipping past Corregidor Island when +it was known that a fight was in prospect.” + +“And what do you suppose has become of Captain Kenny, Watt Brown, and +Ah Sid, who were captured?” + +“That is for time to tell, if we are ever to know at all.” + +Wamba came back with the water, into which we stirred some sugar-cane +ends to make it more palatable, and we arose to continue our journey. + +“What’s that?” cried Dan, as the crack of a rifle broke the +semitropical stillness. “Some sort of a battle is on, that’s certain!” + +The single report was followed by several others, and then came two +heavy volleys in rapid succession. + +“I’ll wager it is a fight between the insurgents and the Spanish +outposts!” I cried. “Hark, they seem to be coming this way. Wamba, +what had we best do?” + +The native looked at me in perplexity, and Dan repeated the question in +Spanish. Then Wamba pointed off to the woods back of us. “We hide in +hollow,” he said, in his native tongue. + +We lost no time in following him, for the sound of firearms came +closer, and soon a bullet clipped through the leaves over our heads. As +we descended into the hollow to which the guide led us we heard a wild +shouting, and at a distance a hundred or more Tagals burst into sight. + +The natives were armed with rifles secured at Cavité and in Manila, +and were endeavoring to turn the right flank of a company of Spanish +soldiers, who soon came into view on the opposite side of the hollow. +The firing was now incessant, and all three of our party were glad +enough to drop down out of sight in the dense bushes. + +“We are caught between two fires!” announced Dan grimly. “Here’s a +state of things, to say the least. Oliver, how do you like it?” + +“We had better remain quiet, Dan. I have no desire to get a Mauser +bullet through my head.” + +“Nor I. I only hope both sides move off to some other locality.” + +The hollow was of indefinite length and about a hundred feet wide and +ten to twenty feet deep. The Tagals were close to the south bank, while +the Spaniards held a position a hundred and fifty to two hundred yards +away. In fifteen minutes the volley firing ceased, but a steady pop-pop +from one direction or another took its place. + +“Each side is throwing out skirmishers,” said Dan. “If any of them come +down here I don’t know what we had best do!” + +“If it comes to the worst we’ll have to throw our fortunes in with the +rebels,” I answered. “But I have no liking for either side.” + +We were armed with pistols, fine six-shooters, and we held these in +readiness for use, should occasion require. Wamba acted as if he wanted +to leave us, but doubtless the hope of getting money out of us made him +remain. + +As I have said, the natives were closer than the Spanish, and +presently a dozen of them slipped down into the hollow. They were +determined-looking fellows, much superior to the Tagals I had met up at +the locality where the _Dart_ lay stranded. + +“They are coming this way!” whispered Dan. “I’m afraid, if they spot +us, they will fire before we can explain who we are.” + +“We had better--” I began, when pop! went a rifle, and a bullet grazed +my temple, causing me to tumble over my chum and go crashing in the +brush back of him. + +“Oliver! you are hit!” he gasped. “Oh, this is too bad!” and he caught +me up in his arms. + +“I--I guess it’s not much,” I faltered, putting my hand up and +withdrawing it covered with blood. Getting out a large linen +handkerchief, I bound it over the wound, which was but a scratch, even +though fully as deep as was desirable. + +The crash in the brush had attracted the attention of the Spanish +soldiers, and now they saw the Tagals and heavy firing recommenced. We +were in the very midst of this, and several bullets sang alarmingly +close to our ears. We wished that a better shelter than the brush was +at hand, but nothing was in sight and we had to make the best of it. + +Inside of a quarter of an hour it looked as if the rebels would get the +best of the fight, but suddenly some Spanish re-enforcements came up, +and in a twinkling the Tagals were sent flying toward the hills to the +eastward, leaving a score of dead and wounded behind them. + +“They are leaving us!” muttered Dan, when without warning several +Spanish soldiers appeared, running directly toward us. Each had his gun +up ready to shoot, so resistance would have been foolhardy. + +“_Halte!_” came the useless command, since we were not moving. “Throw +down your arms or we will fire,” followed, also in Spanish. + +Dan looked at me and I at him, and then both of us dropped our pistols. +Seeing this, Wamba uttered a grunt of dissatisfaction, turned, and +crawled like a snake out of sight into the bushes. In a moment more the +Spanish soldiers had surrounded us. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +THE ESCAPE FROM THE INN. + + +The soldiers who had made us prisoners were dark, determined-looking +fellows belonging to the Manila Home Guard, a body distinct from the +troops sent to the islands from Spain. + +They were seven in number, including a lieutenant, who, as I afterward +learned, rejoiced in the unique name of Carlos Remondenanez. + +“_Americanos!_” muttered the lieutenant, as he surveyed us. “Where you +come from?” he demanded, in by no means bad English. + +“We came from Cavité,” I answered, glad to know that he would +understand me. + +“Sailors from the American warships?” + +“We are private citizens, on our way to Ma----” Dan checked himself. + +“Ha! private citizens! Bah! You _Americanos_ are all out for a fight, +like a wild bull! But we will show you, here in Luzon and at Cuba, too! +When it is over the pigs will be sorry they took up arms against the +sons of my country,” and he slapped his chest. + +Had the situation been less serious I would have been tempted to laugh +at his pomposity. But as that might have brought on my sudden death, I +resisted the temptation even to smile. + +“Yes, it is too bad to have war with anybody,” I said calmly. “Do you +consider us your prisoners?” + +“And why not, boy, why not? To be sure you are not old enough to be a +regular soldier, but your finger on the trigger of a gun may do as much +damage as the finger of a man of forty. Search them, men!” he added, to +his command, in Spanish. + +Two of the party immediately advanced, and relieved us of the pistols +we had thrown down and also two daggers Dan had brought along from +Hong Kong. I think Lieutenant Remondenanez was strongly tempted to +confiscate our purses also, but did not dare on account of one of the +soldiers, who watched him closely. This man was a new recruit, so +Dan found out later, and was too high-minded to countenance such a +proceeding, even on the part of his officer, without reporting it at +headquarters. + +Having been searched, we were marched out of the hollow to the trail +running down to the highway. Here we were placed in charge of three +soldiers, one of whom marched at either side of us and the other to the +rear. + +Our course was along a series of dense palm trees which sheltered us +somewhat from the sun. Yet the walk was a hot one, and soon the wound I +had received gave me a violent headache. + +“I must rest,” I said to Dan, and sank down almost exhausted. + +“No rest for you!” shouted the corporal in charge of the detail, and +poked me with his bayonet, and sick as I was I had to get up and go on +my way. + +But soon luck stood me in good stead. We arrived at a sort of wayside +inn, where there were two companies of Spanish soldiers, and here we +halted for further orders. + +It was decided to keep us at the place over night, and we were +conducted to a rude stable in the rear, built of bamboo and palm leaves. + +Inside were half a dozen small native ponies, belonging to as many +Spanish officers. It was a foul-smelling resort, and it made me feel +more sick than ever. + +The place was already being used as a prison and outside four guards, +with ready guns, patrolled the sides of the stable at a distance of ten +paces. + +“What a hole!” cried Dan, as we were shoved through the doorway and the +guard left us. “I’ll wager the stable is full of vermin!” + +“Who is that as spakes!” came from the semi-darkness. “Sure an’ th’ +voice sounds remarkably loik that of a friend, so it does!” + +“Matt Gory!” burst out Dan and I simultaneously. + +“An’ it’s Oliver an’ Dan, so it is!” ejaculated the Irish sailor, +rushing to us and catching our hands warmly. “Sure an’ it’s a sorry +place for a mating, aint it now?” + +“How did you get here, Gory?” I asked. “I thought you were on the +_Starlight_?” + +“Sure an thim haythins o’ Spaniards confiscated the ship, so they did. +Oi an’ Tom Dawson thried to escape, an’ here Oi am, as ye can behold if +yez have sharp eyes.” + +“And what of Dawson?” asked Dan. + +“Oi don’t know where he is. He started to join Commodore Dewey’s +marines at Cavité.” + +“When did all this happen?” + +“We lift the _Starlight_ a week ago, but Oi was captured yesterday. Phy +have yez yer head toied up?” he went on, to me. + +I told him of our adventures in the hollow, and Dan related what had +occurred since we had left the _Starlight_. Matt Gory had arranged a +resting place of the cleanest straw to be found, in a corner, and here +I dropped, completely fagged out. + +All told, the stable contained nine prisoners; the others being +Spaniards who sympathized with the insurgents. They were a motley +collection, and filled the already foul air with the noxious fumes of +their ever-present cigarettes. + +While I rested, Dan spoke to one and another of them, and learned +considerable concerning the present situation in Manila. As we had +surmised, all business was at a standstill, the shops were closed, and +the streets were guarded by Spanish soldiers, the native policemen +not being trusted to do the duty. All was in a state of suppressed +excitement, and it was expected that Dewey would shell the city at +his pleasure. Provisions were scarce and there was much suffering, +especially among the poorer classes. + +Strange as it may seem I rested well that night, and Dan also slept +soundly. We were stirring at sunrise, and with us Matt Gory, who had +suffered no injury and was willing at any moment to fight for his +liberty. + +“Oi’ll not go to any dirthy Spanish prison if Oi can hilp it,--an’ Oi +think I can,” were his words. + +“I am with you,” I answered. “But I don’t want to bite my nose off to +spite my face.” + +At seven o’clock we were ordered out into the open air, and we were not +sorry, for the smell in the stable during the night had grown worse +instead of better. All were formed into single file and told to march +to the rear door of the inn and our breakfast would be dealt out to us. + +“Like a lot of tramps getting a hand-out,” laughed Dan, when a Spanish +officer struck him with his sword and ordered him to keep silent. + +Breakfast consisted of some stale bread, a chunk of meat that had been +stewed in rice, and water. We had to eat and drink standing up or let +it alone, and I hardly touched a mouthful. + +The breakfast over, we were about to leave the inn, when without +warning a volley of shots came from a woods behind the hostelry and a +Spanish officer and two privates dropped dead within a dozen feet of +us. Before the Spaniards could recover from their astonishment a second +volley was delivered, and four others went down, including one of the +prisoners, who was struck by accident in the leg. Then came a wild yell +and about fifty Spanish rebels from Manila burst into view. + +The scene that followed beggars my pen to describe. For some minutes +pandemonium reigned supreme, and Spanish officers and privates alike +knew not what to do. Some rushed into the inn and some out, and a +number took to their heels with all the speed of which their legs were +capable. Then a _capitan_ called them to order, and they formed into a +hollow square on the defensive. + +“This is our chance!” yelled Matt Gory, as he seized Dan and me by the +arms. “Come on!” + +“I am with you!” I answered. + +“Let us make for the stable,” said Dan. + +“Aint the woods betther?” queried the Irishman. + +“The ponies!” I interrupted, understanding what my chum meant. “Just +the thing!” + +And away we went for the stable. A Spanish guard tried to block our +way, but we tripped him over and tore his gun from him. + +Dan was the first inside of the structure and he speedily untied three +of the small, but strong, animals and led them to a rear door. Then up +we leaped into the high, uncomfortable Spanish saddles (for the poor +beasts stood there with all their trappings) and off we sped down the +highway, leaving Spaniards, rebels, and the other prisoners to take +care of themselves. + +Of course we did not escape unnoticed, and Spaniards and rebels both +fired on us. But their aim was poor, and the leaden messengers flew +wide of the mark. Soon we were out of sight around a bend, and then +we speedily took to a side trail that looked as if it might afford at +least temporary security. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +ONE WAY OF ENTERING A FORTIFIED CITY. + + +“Now where?” asked Dan, after we had halted and listened with all our +ears to learn if we were being followed. + +“To Manila, as was our original idea,” I answered. “But you may not +want to go that way,” I added, to Matt Gory. + +“Sure an’ Oi’ll go wid youse b’ys,” answered the son of Erin, with a +grin. “Oi’m afther makin’ a soldier of forchune av meself,” and he made +a mocking bow at which both Dan and I laughed. + +“We may be very useful to Longley in Manila,” I continued. “He may be +having more than his hands full to protect the firm’s interests. He +said he had about six thousand dollars in the big safe that he did not +care to place in the Spanish bank, and----” + +“You are right, Oliver, we must get into Manila somehow, to help +Longley, if for no other purpose. The thing of it is, which is the best +way to do it?” + +“Let us get as close to the city walls as we can first and then +arrange our plans,” I suggested, and this was speedily agreed to, for +there was no telling what might happen before we came in sight of the +capital city of Luzon. + +From a distance came a constant firing, which told us that the rebels +and the Spaniards were having a full-fledged fight. But presently, as +we moved along, this died away in the distance. + +Pony riding just suited Dan and me, but it went hard with Matt Gory, +who had never ridden before. “Sure, an’ the hard saddle will be afther +cuttin’ me in two,” he groaned. “An’ the baste prances so he’ll have me +insoides turned out before we come to a halt this avenin’!” + +“Move with the pony,” I suggested, and gave him a practical +illustration, but he was not cut out for saddle riding and made a sorry +figure even when doing his best. + +It had threatened a shower and soon it was raining in torrents. We kept +to the road for half an hour longer, when it grew so deep with water +and mud that we had to draw off to one side. + +“I see a shelter beyond,” said Dan, pointing it out. “And not a soul is +in sight. Come on,” and he led the way. + +It was an open shelter, built of long poles thatched with palm. There +had been a house close by, but this was tumbled down into decay. We +rode our ponies under the shelter and, dismounting, tethered them to +some trees which acted as corner posts. + +The rain continued throughout the noon hour and for some time after, +and it was not until nightfall that we continued our journey. In the +meantime we had refreshed ourselves with some plantains found in the +vicinity, and allowed the ponies to feed upon whatever was to be found +in the neighborhood. + +Nightfall found us close to the Spanish lines, and we resolved to +abandon our steeds, so turned them loose, feeling that they would soon +find new masters. + +We were moving along in the gathering darkness when we heard the +creaking of a water buffalo cart, heavy, awkward-looking things common +to all parts of the Philippines. Soon the cart came in sight, drawn +by two buffalo cows, hitched up tandem. On the seat of the turnout +sat a sleepy-looking native, wearing only a shirt, trousers, and +broad-brimmed straw hat. The cart was partly filled with straw, and on +top rested a pile of yams and other vegetables, and a bag of cocoanuts. + +“I’ll wager he’s bound for Manila!” whispered Dan. “I wonder if he +can’t smuggle us in!” + +“Let us stop him and see,” I returned. “I believe all of these natives +are against the Spaniards, even though they may not like the idea of +American rule.” + +We leaped forward, and while Matt Gory held the leading cow, Dan and +I hurried to the seat of the cart. Roused up, the native was taken +completely by surprise and stared at us in open-mouthed wonder. + +Dan quickly asked him if he was bound for the market place in Manila +and he answered in the affirmative. Then my chum told him of what we +wished to do, at which the native grinned. + +“Get into the cart if you will, and hide,” he said, in Spanish. “But +remember, if Spanish officers find you, I know not that you were there.” + +“We agree,” answered Dan, and the straw was lifted up and all three of +us made places for ourselves. Of course the hiding place was a damp and +by no means pleasant one, but this could not be helped, and as it was +our own choice nobody grumbled. + +The progress of the cart had been slow before, but with the added +weight it crawled along at a snail’s pace. As long as the darkness +served to hide us, we held up our heads for air, but with the first +appearance of the electric lights of Manila, we dove out of sight. + +“We are entering the town,” whispered Dan, as the clumsy cart creaked +over a bridge. “I think we’ll be safe in ten minutes more.” + +He had scarcely finished when there came a loud command to halt, and +the native brought his cart to a standstill. A brief parley followed, +and a couple of Spanish guards came up to the cart and calmly +confiscated several cocoanuts from the bag. Then the turnout was +allowed to proceed in the direction of the market place. + +“Now is your time,” whispered the driver to Dan, as we passed through a +rather dark portion of a thoroughfare. “Drop out and you will be safe.” + +“Here is something for your aid,” whispered my chum in return, and +handed him a Mexican silver dollar, much to the native’s delight, for +such a piece, even though worth but fifty cents, is a good round sum in +the Philippines. + +Dan then dropped from the tail-end of the cart and Matt Gory and I +followed. An alleyway was close at hand and we darted into this, to +plan out our next movement. + +“We are a good half mile from the offices,” said Dan. “And I must +confess I don’t know the way.” + +“Sure an’ mebbe youse would have done better to have stayed in th’ +cart,” said the Irish sailor. “Howsomeever, lead on an’ Oi’ll be afther +followin’ ye!” + +“Let us move on along the streets until we see some signboard,” I +suggested. “We know what street the offices are on, and the number.” + +“That is so, Oliver. All right, come ahead;” and again Dan led the way. + +“It’s a regular Donnybrook Fair town,” said Matt Gory. “Oi’m afther +gittin’ me a club!” and he picked up a stick lying in a gutter. Before +long Dan and I armed ourselves in a similar manner. + +As I have mentioned, Manila was now under military rule, and at every +other street corner we came in sight of a soldier, walking slowly back +and forth or lounging idly against a door-post smoking a cigarette on +the sly and talking to some pretty native damsel. To pass these guards +unobserved was by no means easy. + +“Here is the right street!” exclaimed Dan, after a quarter of an hour +had passed. “The numbers show that we cannot be more than four or five +squares away from the offices.” + +“Does that clerk live be thim offices?” queried Matt Gory. + +“Yes, he has two rooms upstairs,” I answered. “If that money is still +in the safe he must certainly be staying there to guard it.” + +Another block was passed, when Dan clutched me by the shoulder, and +likewise pulled the Irish sailor back. “Look!” he whispered. + +We gazed in the direction he pointed, and saw four men huddled together +in a corner of a rambling business building, not half a block away from +the offices of Raymond, Holbrook & Smith. They were talking earnestly. +Each wore a light, night cloak over his shoulders, and as one of them +raised this covering, we caught the gleam of a dagger handle sticking +from his breast. + +“By Jove! they are up to something; that’s as sure as you are born!” +ejaculated Dan. + +“They be Spanish assassins!” muttered Matt Gory. “Sure an’ they look +loik thim villains we used to see in the ould picture books!” + +“See, they are moving over this way,” I said, a second later. “We must +get out of sight, or we’ll be discovered, and they may hand us over to +the guard.” + +I looked around, and saw a narrow opening between two business +buildings. Into this we crowded, behind a pile of half-broken hogsheads +and other rubbish. Hardly had we settled ourselves than the four +evil-looking fellows took another stand not ten feet away from us. + +An animated conversation ensued, of which I understood only a few +words. But Dan caught the drift of the talk, and grabbed my arm so +tightly that I knew at once that something out of the ordinary was on +the way. Five minutes later, the strangers moved off once more. + +“The villains!” gasped my chum, as soon as he felt safe to speak. “Do +you know what they are planning to do? They are going to break into our +offices, kill Harry Longley if necessary, and then loot the safe!” + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +FOUR WOULD-BE PLUNDERERS. + + +“To break into the offices!” burst from my lips. + +“Th’ haythins!” muttered Matt Gory. “Just let me be afther gittin’ +a-hould of thim! Oi’ll spile their looks so their own mothers won’t +know thim!” and he shook his club determinedly. + +“You are certain there is no mistake, Dan?” + +“Positive, Oliver. It seems one of the rascals once worked for the firm +and he knows all about the affairs. He is certain Longley is sleeping +in an upper front room, and he has a false key to one of the back +doors.” + +“They cannot be doing this by authority, Dan. Hadn’t we better notify +the guard?” + +“And get arrested for our pains? No, let us beat them at their own +game. We are three to four, and Longley will make the count on both +sides even. I am not afraid of them, even if they do carry daggers. +Such cutthroats are generally cowards when cornered.” + +By this time we were out on the street and stalking after the rascally +quartette, who moved on close to the low, overhanging buildings. + +There was an electric light on the corner, but instead of burning +brightly it fizzed and spluttered as such lights often do. The +authorities had great trouble in keeping them lit at all, as many +reckless men tried to turn the whole of Manila in darkness, that they +might plunder the houses and stores with impunity. + +“There are our offices!” whispered Dan, pointing to them. “See, the +four men are moving through the alleyway.” + +“Let us kape ’em out of the buildin’!” whispered Matt Gory. “Come on, +we’ll knock ’em out at the first round, so we will!” + +He started on a run, and before either Dan or I could stop him, had +tackled the first of the would-be plunderers. Crash! down came the +heavy club, and the Spaniard sank down, almost overcome. + +The others turned in surprise and set up a low shout. Then, with +several vile exclamations, they hurled themselves on Matt Gory and bore +him to earth. + +This was more than Dan or I could stand, and we leaped in, and blows +from our sticks rained down thickly. I hit one Spaniard over the head +and another on the shoulder, and then slipped down in a pool of water +which the darkness had hidden from view. + +By this time, however, Matt Gory had again arisen and as one of the +rascals made for me, the Irishman threw him backward with such a shock +that his dagger flew some distance from his hand. In a twinkle Gory had +secured the weapon. + +“Now thin, run, ye haythins, or Oi’ll be afther carvin’ yez into bits!” +he bawled, and made such a determined lunge at one of the Spaniards +that he did run for his very life, leaving his tattered shawl behind +him. + +The racket in the alleyway had aroused Harry Longley, as well as +several others residing in the neighborhood. An upper window was +blocked up, and Longley inquired, in Spanish, as to what was the row. + +“Help us, Longley!” cried Dan. “It is Oliver Raymond, Dan Holbrook, and +an Irish friend. We have been attacked by thieves!” + +“You!” burst out the clerk. “Come to the door and I’ll let you in.” + +The clerk disappeared and we heard him run downstairs, and there +followed the scraping of a key in a lock. As the door fell back Longley +appeared, pistol in hand. + +“Begone, or I’ll fill you full of holes!” he shouted, in Spanish. + +“_Caramba!_ The game is up!” came from one of the Spaniards, and +making final and ineffectual passes at us with their daggers, they ran +out of the alleyway and down the street. + +“Come in! come in before it is too late!” went on the clerk, and we +leaped into the back office. He immediately closed the door and locked +it. All was pitch-dark and we had to feel our way around. + +In a few brief words we explained the situation, to which he listened +impatiently, his ear meanwhile inclined toward a heavily barred window, +which, as is usual in this country, had no glass. + +“Yes, I have the money here still,” he said. “But it is not in the +safe. It is where they cannot find it, even if they search for hours.” + +“You have buried it?” whispered Dan. + +“Yes, and cemented the flooring over it. I was bound to protect our +firm’s interests, no matter what happened.” + +“You shall lose nothing by your actions,” I returned warmly. “Father +and the other partners shall know of your bravery.” + +“It has been a constant excitement ever since Commodore Dewey brought +on that battle,” went on Harry Longley. “It’s a pity he lost so many +men.” + +“Why, he didn’t lose a single man,” said Dan. + +“He didn’t! Why, they have it reported in Manila that he lost two +ships and four hundred sailors.” + +“You ought to know better. Couldn’t you see the battle?” + +“No, the Spanish soldiers drove everybody indoors on penalty of death. +It is also reported that another Spanish fleet will soon come here to +wipe Dewey out.” + +“I don’t know anything about that,” I said. “But if the fleet comes I +reckon our commodore can take care of himself.” + +“So he can, every thrip!” put in Matt Gory. “Oi’ll foight wid him +meself, next toime, so Oi will!” + +“Plundering is becoming a common thing here,” resumed Harry Longley, +as he led the way to his apartments above. “Last night four offices +and six stores were looted. The Spanish authorities try to catch the +offenders when the places belong to the English, French, or Germans, +but if an American is robbed they merely wink the other eye, as the +saying goes.” + +“Do they offer you any protection at all, if you promise to keep out of +the fight?” + +“They do, in words, but that is as far as it goes. An American is not +safe here, no matter if he gives up all his arms and swears to remain +neutral. The Dons hate the very sight of us. They never wanted us here +in the first place and now they are bound to drive us out--if they +can.” + +“But they can’t,” finished Dan. “I’ll tell you all, Uncle Sam is bound +to stay here. Mark my words and see if I am not right.” + +Since we had left him, Longley had had natives working at the offices, +and each window was barred more heavily than ever, while some of those +on the lower floor had been covered entirely. + +“You see, I am bound to hold the fort,” he smiled grimly. “I don’t want +to leave this ground. It is in dispute, as you know, and the Spaniards +would like nothing better than to take possession. This is the ground +mentioned in those documents lost on the _Dart_.” + +“I wish I could find the _Dart_ and get the documents and the money +back,” I answered, somewhat bitterly. + +We were a good deal exhausted and partook eagerly of the hot coffee, +rice cakes, and other things which Longley set before us. He had +stocked up with sufficient provisions to last for a month, and among +his stores were two barrels of water. + +“You see, the rebels may cut off the water supply from the reservoir,” +he explained. “If they do, people in Manila will be in a bad shape all +around.” + +“Cannot the Spanish soldiers protect the water works?” + +“I don’t know. They used to have their hands full with the rebels +alone. Now they have us Americans to fight in addition.” + +Longley had but a single cot at hand, and as all could not sleep on +that, we told him to keep his resting place and proceeded to make +ourselves comfortable on the floor. + +It would have been well had one or another remained on the watch, but +Dan, Gory, and I were thoroughly fagged out, and Longley had been on +guard the night before. + +“We’ll risk it,” said the clerk, as he passed around such blankets as +he possessed, not for coverings, as it was too warm for that, but to be +made up into such couches as our ingenuity could devise. + +We turned in about eleven o’clock and I slept soundly until a little +after three in the morning. I awoke with a start and knew at once that +some noise had aroused me. I listened, but all was as silent as the +grave, excepting for the snoring that came from Matt Gory’s corner. + +“Something is wrong,” I thought, and turned over in the direction of +the barred window, close to Longley’s couch. There was a faint light, +and the sight that I saw filled me with horror. + +A man hung to the bars from the outside. In one hand he held a sharp +dagger tied to a stout stick. The dagger had been passed into the room +and the man was on the point of sticking the dangerous-looking blade +into Longley’s breast! + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +THE FIGHT IN THE OFFICES. + + +“Longley, look out!” + +Such was the cry which broke from my lips, as I leaped to my feet. + +At the same moment, I picked up a chair standing near and hurled it at +the arm thrust through the window bars with all my might. + +By pure good luck my aim was true, and the seat of the chair struck the +Spaniard’s hand such a smart blow that he gave a howl of pain, dropped +stick and dagger, and fell back out of sight. + +“What is the matter?” came from Longley, as he scrambled up from under +the articles just mentioned. At the same time Dan and Matt Gory also +arose. + +“The window--a Spaniard wanted to knife you,” I answered, and turned up +the light. + +“This is the worst yet,” said the clerk, as he picked up the stick and +examined the weapon fastened to it. “By thunder! Ramon Delveraz!” + +“Ramon Delveraz! What do you mean by that?” queried Dan. + +“Here is the name on the dagger handle. Ramon Delveraz is one of the +Spaniards who are trying to drive us into quitting these offices, so +that their land company can take possession of this whole block.” + +“The man was a short, stout fellow with a heavy beard.” + +“It must have been he! The scoundrel! Where is he now?” + +Longley rushed to the window and looked out. Nobody was to be seen. +Then he ran to the front of the room. + +“There he goes!” he cried, pointing to a retreating figure. “Oh, but I +will pay him back for this when the excitement is over.” + +The incident had banished sleep for the balance of the night, and we +talked over the situation until daylight. + +The sun came up clear and hot, but the streets remained deserted, +excepting for the soldiers on guard. One of these came up to the doors +below and tried them to see if they were locked. Longley spoke to him +out of the window, but he did not answer. + +“They are ugly and there is no telling what they will do next,” said +the clerk. “It’s lucky they do not know that you are here.” + +“Won’t those would-be plunderers tell them of our arrival?” + +“They do not know but what you belong here.” + +Slowly the day wore along, growing hotter and hotter, until at two +o’clock the rooms were like a bake oven. + +“This is nothing,” said Longley, after hearing me complain of the heat. +“It is only ninety-six degrees to-day. Sometimes it is a hundred and +ten in the shade.” + +“I wouldn’t want to live here very long,” I answered. “It would take +all the starch out of a fellow. I don’t wonder that the natives are +lazy.” + +“Oh, some of them are no good anyhow,” said he. “They won’t work, but +spend their time in sleeping, smoking, and in attending cockfights and +bullfights. Cockfighting, you know, is the national sport.” + +“And it is a wicked, cruel thing, Longley. I don’t see how a man can +call himself a man and put in his time looking at one rooster trying to +tear another to death with steel spurs.” + +“It is all that you say of it, and so is bullfighting.” + +“I’m glad we haven’t any such national sports,” I went on. “Baseball +and football are good enough for me.” + +“They laugh at baseball and call it baby’s play.” + +“Never mind, it isn’t inhuman, and their fights are.” + +“Fortunes are won and lost on bull- and cockfights. I have heard +of thousands of _pesetas_ changing hands as the result of a single +contest.” + +“That makes it all the worse. I don’t want to see or hear of such +fights,” I concluded, and I meant what I said. I think these contests +an everlasting disgrace to Spain and every other nation that permits +them. + +To fill in our time we helped Longley prepare the mid-day meal and +enjoyed the best the stock of provisions on hand afforded. Our coffee +was native grown, and, seasoned with condensed milk, made as good a +drink as the best of Java. + +“This island could have a splendid coffee trade if it would only wake +up,” said Longley. “Just see what the Dutch have done for Java. The +Spaniards are away behind the times.” + +“Spain is a nation of the past,” said Dan. “I have heard father say +that she will never regain the valuable prestige which she has lost. +Her possessions are dropping away one by one, and in time she won’t be +able to hold even the mother country together.” + +“It’s because she don’t trate the people roight,” broke in Matt Gory. +“She takes ivery cent fer taxes an’ church purposes, and they be +strapped, an’ git nothin’ fer it. A mon as has a constant drain on his +pocketbook wid no recompense, is apt to git mad sooner or later and +rise up an’ swat somebody.” + +We all roared at these quaint remarks, yet recognized their truth. + +“Spain will wake up when it is too late,” said Longley. “The people----” + +He stopped off short as a loud knocking below reached our ears. Going +to the window he reported three Spanish soldiers below. + +“Hide, all of you!” he continued, and rushed to a side wall. Opening a +door, he showed us a secret closet and we entered. + +Slowly the minutes passed as we heard him go below and hold a short and +spirited conversation. Then came a struggle and the report of a pistol. + +“Here, I can’t stand this!” cried Dan. “He is in trouble and----” + +“We must help him,” I finished, and leaped out into the room. Longley +had armed us with pistols, and we descended the stairs on the +double-quick with the weapons in our hands, and Gory tumbling after us. + +Longley stood leaning against a counter in the rear office, the blood +flowing from a wound in his side. Near him stood the three Spaniards, +one with a pistol which still smoked from the discharge. + +Without hesitation we opened fire and as the three pistols rang out +two of the Spaniards went down, one shot in the side and the other in +the breast. At once the office began to fill with smoke. + +“Down with all--of--them!” gasped poor Longley. +“Don’t--let--them--get--away or you are--lost!” and then he fainted +from loss of blood. + +We had seen the two soldiers fall and now all three of us rushed +through the smoke at the third fellow. Again a pistol shot rang out, +and a bullet touched Matt Gory on the arm. But that was the last time +that that Don ever pulled a trigger, for the Irishman fired in return +and he fell headlong, shot through the heart. + +“Lock the door!” I cried, to Dan, and he leaped to do as bidden. Then, +seeing that the two Spaniards on the floor were incapable of doing +further harm, I turned my attention to poor Longley and carried him to +a rattan lounge which stood in a corner. + +It was no easy task to bind up the clerk’s wound. By the time it was +accomplished the two Spaniards who had been knocked over were coming +around. Soon one of them began to yell feebly for assistance. + +“This will never do!” whispered Dan. “We’ll have the guards down on us +in short order. Gag them.” + +“I know a better trick,” I answered, and stepped over both men with my +pistol. “Silence!” I commanded, and pointed the weapon at first one and +then the other. + +My meaning was clear even if my word of command was not, and with a +shiver of terror the fellow who had been calling out relapsed into +silence. + +“Help me!” came faintly from Longley, and he sat up and stared about +him. “Wha--what has occurred? I--I thought I was shot down!” + +“You were,” answered Dan. + +“And those three villains?” + +“Two are wounded and lie yonder and the third is dead.” + +“Thank heaven for that!” And then unable to hold himself up longer, the +clerk sank back again. + +Soon we heard the tramp of a dozen feet outside and there followed a +loud knocking on the door. We became as quiet as death. + +“Open the door!” came the order, in Spanish, but nobody moved, while +Dan and I and even Matt Gory, wounded as he was, kept our pistols ready +for use. + +“Open the door!” came the order a second time. Then a brief discussion +followed. “The shooting must have come from elsewhere,” said a Spanish +officer; and the patrol outside marched on. + +As I could not understand the talk, Dan translated it. “If we keep +quiet for awhile I think we’ll be all right,” he said. + +And we did keep quiet, for an hour or more. But nobody came near the +offices during that time, and at last we considered ourselves, for the +time being, safe. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +A LETTER OF GREAT IMPORTANCE. + + +During the time which passed Dan and I attended to both Longley and +Matt Gory’s wounds, and also did what we could for the two Spaniards. +The dead man was placed in the cellar. + +As I have mentioned, the Irish sailor’s wound was not a serious affair, +and he soon insisted that he was as ready for fighting as ever. +Longley, however, was in bad shape, and I felt he ought to have a +doctor’s attention. + +“Tell me where I can find a doctor and I’ll go for him,” I said, and he +gave me the necessary directions, and I slipped off by a back alleyway. + +Luckily I found the medical man at home. He was an Englishman and +readily consented to come over to the offices and do what he could for +Longley. + +“They should not harm him, since he is not in this fight,” said the +doctor. “Do you imagine they mistreat Spaniards in San Francisco and +New York so? It is against international rules of war and Spain will +gain nothing by such a course.” + +“They are bound to drive our firm from Manila, if they can. This is +more of a personal than a national difficulty.” + +“Still, they should treat you fairly.” + +An examination proved that Longley needed rest and quietness if he was +to recover. The physician said if the clerk was removed to his home he +would take care of him. We debated the matter, and resolved to remove +Longley at nightfall. + +“And as soon as he is gone you had better turn those two wounded +Spaniards over to their own people,” went on the medical man. “I’ll +make sure that they don’t unearth Longley, even if they hunt for him, +which will be doubtful.” + +The removal was made without trouble, the Spaniards having their hands +full at the front, watching Commodore Dewey’s ships and his marines and +the rebel troops, which were pressing closer and closer to Manila. + +As soon as Longley was safe we did as Dr. Harkness advised, turned +the Spaniards out, laying them on a side street, where they were soon +picked up by a guard. The offices were then locked up, and the doctor +said he would place them under the British flag for protection. + +At midnight Dan, Matt Gory, and myself were once again on the streets +of the city, not knowing which way to turn or what to do. + +“Shall we go back to the ship?” queried Dan. + +“Perhaps it might be as well,” I said. “But we may be captured at the +city wall.” + +However, we determined to try our luck, and set off in the midst of +a rising storm. As we moved onward, we heard a number of shots from +a distance, and presently found ourselves in the midst of a mass of +natives who were running for their lives. + +“There has been an uprising!” cried Dan, after questioning a native. +“Let us go along. We can escape better in the crowd than if we keep +alone.” + +We rushed along the street, and presently found ourselves among at +least two hundred Filipinos of all sorts and conditions. Some were +armed with rifles, but the majority carried nothing but clubs, spears, +and long knives, such as were used on the plantations. + +Coming to the river, a rush was made over the bridge, and then began a +flight to the north, up a road that was six inches deep with mud. + +“Now let us get out of this!” whispered Dan, and we gradually drew to +one side, like tame horses withdrawing from a wild herd. + +The rain had now stopped, but it was still pitch-dark, and soon we had +left the natives fleeing to the north of us, while we turned eastward. + +“Listen!” exclaimed Dan, as a strange sound reached our ears, above the +rising wind. “What is that?” + +“It must be a cry for help!” I answered. + +“Let us be afther investigatin’,” put in Matt Gory. “We may be able to +do some feller-critter a big turn.” + +The cries seemed to come from a hillside ahead, and we mounted this +through dense brush that dripped with water. + +“There is a hut ahead,” said Dan. “The cries come from there.” + +“It must be a native in distress,” I returned, and moved on in advance. + +“Help! help!” came suddenly, in an English voice, and we quickened our +pace, feeling that one of our own soldier or sailor boys might be in +distress. + +When we reached the bamboo hut a strange sight met our gaze. On his +back lay a white man of at least seventy years of age. Kneeling on his +breast was a Tagal with drawn knife, while another Tagal knelt at the +old man’s side, trying to pull a money bag from his grasp. + +“Hi! stop that!” I called out, and, rushing in, kicked one of the +Tagals so heavily in his side that he rolled over and over on the +earthen floor. + +At this the second native leaped up and rushed at me with his knife. +But, before the blade could descend, Dan fired at him, and his arm fell +helpless at his side. + +“Help me; they have--have murdered me!” gasped the old man, and +turned over on his side in pain, showing an ugly cut on his neck. +With a fierce mutter the Tagal I had kicked got up and rushed at Dan, +clutching him by the throat and running him up against the wall of the +hut. But now Matt Gory leaped in, and a blow from his pistol stretched +the rascal senseless. Seeing this, the native who had been shot took to +his heels and disappeared into the darkness outside. + +There was a dim lantern burning beneath the roof of the hut, and +this light was now turned up, that we might see more of this strange +situation. + +“I am--am done for,” gasped the old man. “That villain has torn my neck +to pieces!” + +“Let us bind the wound up,” I answered tenderly. “Have you any rags +handy?” + +“Never mind--I know I cannot live. I--I--can I trust you?” + +“You can,” answered Dan. “Have you a message to leave?” + +“I have. You are Americans?” + +“Yes.” + +“So am I. My name is Gaston Brown. I have a son, a sailor, Watterson +Brown, who----” + +“I know him--Watt Brown. He was second mate of the _Dart_,” I +ejaculated. + +“So you know Watt?” The old man’s eyes brightened for an instant. “So +much the better. I have something for my son. If I die will you deliver +it?” + +“I will--if I can.” + +“We will do our best,” added Dan, and Matt Gory nodded. + +“Sure, an’ we were all on the _Dart_ wid yer son,” added the Irishman. + +“I cannot leave Watt much money; but I have a precious letter for him. +That letter must not be lost. Will you defend it while it is in your +keeping?” + +“Yes,” I answered. “But hadn’t you better acquaint me with its +contents, in case it is lost?” + +“It must not be lost. It is--is in the tin box buried in yonder corner. +Give it to Watt with my blessing. Tell him--tell him--water!” + +“He is dying!” whispered Dan, and ran for water, while I raised the +elderly individual up. I wanted to tell him how Watt was situated, but +it was too late. A strange rattle sounded in his throat, and before my +chum could place the cup of water to his lips, his soul had fled. + +“Sure an’ he is gone!” whispered Matt Gory, the first to break the +silence. “God rist him!” + +“This was a strange way to live,” I began, when Dan cut me short. + +“We must not lose time here, Oliver. Let us get that letter and be +going.” + +We hunted in a corner of the hut and began to dig down at a spot where +it looked as if the soil had been recently disturbed. + +“That’s the box,” said Matt Gory, as we heard a metallic click, and +soon the box was brought to light--a square affair, painted black. + +It was unlocked, and, opening it, we found that it contained nothing +but a long, thick envelope, tightly sealed, and addressed to Watterson +Brown, mate, on board the schooner _Dart_. Below were added the words: + +“From his father, with the hope that the fortune may prove a blessing.” + +“A fortune for Watt Brown,” mused Dan. “Well, he deserves it, for he’s +a good fellow.” + +“If only he isn’t dead. In that case I won’t know what to do with the +letter,” I answered, as I tucked the precious document away in my +pocket. Little did I dream of all of the adventures into which that +letter was to one day lead me. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +TREED BY BUFFALO BULLS. + + +“This silent inaction is growing monotonous.” + +It was Dan who spoke, and he addressed me, while both of us and Matt +Gory took it easy in front of a deserted house we had chanced upon on a +side road some miles away from Manila. + +After burying Gaston Brown our flight had taken us to the north, and we +had rested at the house for two days, undecided what to do next. + +“If we try to move past Manila and toward Cavité, we’ll run into both +rebels and Spaniards, and I don’t want to do that,” I said. “I am +rather sick of this fighting.” + +“So am I, Oliver. But we must do something. We can’t sit here and suck +our thumbs.” + +“Let us try to make our way up past Subig Bay to the coast and find out +what has become of the _Dart_.” + +“Sure, an’ that same suits me,” put in Matt Gory. “Oi wants that dudeen +of mine th’ worst way, so Oi do. Bad cess to any haythin’ as has +stholen th’ same!” He spoke of his old pipe constantly, for it had +been his friend for many years. + +“Your dudeen ought to be strong enough to walk to where you are, Matt,” +laughed Dan. Then his face grew thoughtful. “It would be a long trip to +the _Dart_, and we may fall in with lots of Tagals.” + +“Perhaps not, Dan. I have an idea that all of the natives are now +gathering around Manila, and we will find the coast almost clear.” + +“There is something in that. Well, I’m willing. Anything is better than +staying here with hardly anything to eat but cocoanuts and plantains.” + +Nevertheless, we did not move away until twenty-four hours later. Our +rest at the house had done us good, and at the place we had picked up +a new pair of boots for Matt, a coat for Dan, and a new straw hat for +myself, besides some canned goods, which, however, we had not opened, +determined to keep them until we could find nothing else. + +The day we set off it was cooler than it had been for some time, and as +the road was comparatively level, we made good time, and by nightfall +had covered fifteen miles. + +We had met only a few natives, and these of the mild sort, who merely +stared at us in open-mouthed wonder. + +“There is one thing certain,” I said, as we went into camp that night. +“Not all of these people want to fight.” + +“That is true, Oliver. I believe, if they were left alone, a good +portion of the Filipinos would prove absolutely harmless. But the +warlike class keep the others in a constant state of excitement.” + +Several days passed, including a Sunday, when we let up on our travels +and rested. We had now entered the hills, and traveling became more +difficult. We might have lost our way; but from the wreck of the +schooner Matt Gory had saved both a chart and a compass, and these now +stood us in good stead. + +The weather remained clear, but knowing that storms are frequent, we +made the most of our time while it did not rain. We had now struck the +seacoast north of Subig Bay, and we calculated that a week’s added +traveling would see us at the spot where the _Dart_ lay and where we +had had so many adventures on first landing. + +Two days later we came on a plateau overlooking the sea. It was still +clear, and we had hardly reached the place when Matt Gory pointed out a +sail on the horizon. + +“Some ship sailing around, even if there is a war on,” said Dan. “I +wonder what sort of a craft she is?” + +“A Chinese junk,” answered the Irish sailor, “Oi kin tell ’em as far as +Oi kin see ’em.” + +“Well, we don’t want anything to do with their junks,” I answered. “It +was a Chinese craft that knocked that hole in the _Dart_.” + +Soon the sail disappeared from view on its way up the coast, and we +started to continue our journey. We had gone on less than a mile when a +strange tramping behind us brought us to a halt. + +“What is that?” I questioned, as I drew my pistol. + +“Horsemen approaching, I reckon,” murmured Dan. “We had better hide.” + +But hiding was not so easy, as only some tall trees were around, the +ground being too stony for small brush of any thickness. + +“They be comin’ closer!” cried Matt Gory. “Sure an’ we had betther take +to the trees, me b’ys!” + +“We’ll have to help one another up,” I said. “Come on.” + +We chose some mahogany trees, two growing close together. By boosting +and hauling we managed with much difficulty to gain the lower limbs +just as the newcomers came into view around a turn of a hillside. + +“Gracious! Buffalo bulls!” cried Dan. + +“Sure an’ they are no inimies!” cried Matt Gory, and without +thinking twice, dropped to the ground again. + +“Come up here!” roared Dan. “Do you want to be horned to pieces?” + +“Will they horn one?” I queried. + +“Yes, as quickly as a mad bull at home.” + +“Then, Matt, get up, and be quick about it.” + +There was no need to tell the Irish sailor twice. A buffalo bull had +spotted him, and with a wild snort, was coming for him, horns down. + +“Be the powers!” gasped Gory. “Save me! hilp!” and he made a wild dash +for the tree, but slipped and fell. + +[Illustration: “BEFORE THE BUFFALO BULL COULD REACH HIM, DAN’S PISTOL +RANG OUT.”] + +I fully expected to see him gored to death, but, before the buffalo +bull could reach him, Dan’s pistol rang out, and the beast staggered +and dropped back, with an ugly wound just below his left eye. + +“Come, Matt, get up!” I yelled, and as the sailor made for the tree, I +leaned far down and caught his hand. Just as I hauled him up the bull +made another charge, striking the tree trunk with a shock that shook +the tree from end to end. + +In a minute more we found the two mahogany trees surrounded by exactly +eleven bulls, for these curious creatures sometimes congregate in this +fashion, although not always. They were wild-looking beasts, and from +their breathing we felt certain that they had come a long distance. + +“They have been pursued,” said Dan. “Usually they are fairly tame, +although not to be trifled with.” + +“Sure and Oi’ve had a narrow escape!” panted Matt Gory. “See! see! +phwat is up now?” + +He pointed to the wounded bull, that had circled around and, without +warning, charged one of his mates. Instantly there was a counter +charge, and the crashing together of two skulls could be distinctly +heard. Then the wounded bull went down on his knees and several of his +mates fell upon him and tore him into shreds. + +It was a disgusting sight, and I had to turn away, for fear of getting +sick and tumbling from the branch upon which I rested. “Now we have a +sample of bullfighting, I suppose,” I said. + +“Yes, and it’s simply horrible!” murmured Dan. Matt Gory, however, +seemed to enjoy the contest, and let out a hurrah as the bull fell over +dead. + +“It serves the baste roight fer attackin’ me,” he said. “Bad luck to +the rascal!” + +After the killing of the bull, his mates withdrew to a distance of +twenty or thirty yards, in the meantime tossing their heads at us and +giving occasional snorts of anger. + +“They are aching to get at us,” was Dan’s comment. “And just for the +fun of killing us, too, since they won’t touch meat.” + +“We’re in a serious dilemma, Dan,” I answered. “We can’t stay here +forever.” + +“Neither can the bulls.” + +“But some of them may keep coming and going, and thus starve us out.” + +“No; I think if they once make a move to leave, they’ll go in a bunch.” + +After this several hours went by, and still the bulls stayed where they +were. Then came a sudden clatter of ponies’ hoofs on the road and the +yells of half a dozen natives. + +“The Tagals are coming now, beyond a doubt,” I said. + +“And the bulls are running for it,” answered Dan, and he was right; at +the first cries from the natives the buffalo bulls scampered off like +frightened deer, and that was the last we saw of them. + +We had scarcely time to draw up into the topmost branches of the +mahoganies when the pony riders put in an appearance. Six short, +wicked-looking Tagals rode the animals. + +A shout went up when the carcass of the dead bull was discovered. A +jabbering in a native dialect followed, and two Tagals left, presumably +to find out what had become of the rest of the herd. While this hunt +was made, two other natives cut off a number of juicy buffalo steaks +and placed them in leaves bound with vines. + +“I hope they don’t go into camp here,” murmured Dan to me. + +“Or that they don’t discover some trace of us,” I returned. + +“We had better hold ourselves in readiness for an attack,” put in Matt +Gory, and we thought this good advice and followed it. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +CAPTAIN KENNY AGAIN. + + +We were compelled to pass the night in the trees, the Tagals encamping +less than a hundred feet away, and the night proving so light that +escape was out of the question. + +But at dawn our enemies departed, and then we lost no time in dropping +to the ground and moving on, first, however, helping ourselves to all +of the steaks we could conveniently carry. + +Our course lay along the hills, and soon we crossed the canyon where +Captain Kenny had played me such a dastardly trick. Here we paused for +a dinner of the steaks, and I think I can truthfully say that never did +a repast taste sweeter. + +“I only hope I can square accounts with Captain Kenny some time,” I +said. “I shall never feel satisfied until I know he has received his +deserts.” + +“Villains are not always brought to justice, Oliver,” answered Dan. +“But I haven’t any doubt but that we will meet Captain Kenny some time +or another, and if we do----” Dan finished by a determined shake of his +head that meant a good deal. + +We were now approaching those mountains which I mentioned in the +earlier chapters of my tale, and, consequently, our progress was much +slower. + +“It’s a good thing that it remains dry,” said Dan, as we toiled up one +hill and down another. “I don’t want any thunderstorms.” + +“No, especially if the lightning is going to strike close by,” I added. +“I wish we were in sight of the sea.” + +“I think we’ll reach it by to-morrow.” + +My chum’s surmise was correct, for about noon of the day following we +came out upon the shore of the China Sea, close to the point where I +had been cast up in company with Watt Brown and several others. + +“This looks a bit familiar,” I cried, as I ran out on the sand. + +“Hi! be careful,” shouted Dan. “Do you want those Tagals to spot you?” + +“Not much!” I returned, and scampered for shelter with equal alacrity. +After that I proceeded with more caution. + +It was determined to push on without delay to where the _Dart_ had come +ashore. This would bring us in the vicinity of the stranded craft about +nightfall and enable us to take in the situation under cover of the +darkness. + +It was about four o’clock, and we reckoned that we must soon come in +sight of the _Dart_, when Matt Gory suddenly pulled my arm. + +“The Chinese junk!” he ejaculated. “She is heading in shore!” + +“By Jove, Matt is right!” answered Dan. “What can this mean?” + +“It means that they have spotted the _Dart_ and are coming ashore to +investigate,” I replied. “I suppose they think they have discovered a +rich haul.” + +“In that case we must get to the wreck first!” said Dan. “Come, let us +leg it!” + +And run we did, at the best speed at our command, and forgetting all +about the possible proximity of the Tagals. Soon the _Dart_ came +into view, lying exactly as she had before, but now totally deserted +excepting for a single figure that stood on the deck, armed with a gun +and two pistols. + +“Watt Brown!” I yelled, and Dan and Matt Gory also cried out. + +At the sounds of our voices the second mate turned swiftly and fell +back in amazement. + +“Well! well!” he ejaculated, when he could speak. “I thought you +fellows were all dead. Come on board and help me hold the fort.” + +“Hold the fort?” I asked. “Against whom?” + +“Yonder Chinamen, Raymond. I’ve been watching ’em through a glass, and +they are pirates, I’m dead sure on it!” + +“We can’t hold th’ fort agin’ a shipload of ’em,” grumbled Matt Gory. + +“I have a small cannon waiting for them,” answered Watt Brown. “I am +bound to hold the fort until the _Concord_ comes back.” + +“The _Concord_!” I burst out. “Do you mean the gunboat of Dewey’s +fleet?” + +“I do.” + +“And has she been here?” put in Dan, with equal interest. + +“Yes, and she picked up nearly all of our old crew that were alive +excepting Captain Kenny and Ah Sid, the cook. Tom Dawson was on her.” + +“Good fer Tom, I knew he would do somethin’!” cried the Irish sailor. +“But how is it you are keeping the fort, as you call it?” + +“I escaped from the Tagals and fell in with some of the owners of the +_Dart_ at Manila. They are down on Captain Kenny, and they were on the +point of having him arrested for fraud when he got to Manila. They +asked me to come back and claim the property, and the schooner is to +be floated and turned over to the United States Government for coast +service during this war. Now will all of you help me, or won’t you?” + +“Certainly we will!” cried Dan, and Matt Gory and I said the same. + +There was no time to talk further, and we hastened to look about the +_Dart_ to learn how we were to defend the schooner from attack. The +howitzer Watt Brown had mentioned was already loaded, and the second +mate said he would attend to the piece himself if only we would +look after the small-arms; said small-arms being eight muskets, all +loaded, lying in a row by the rail, alongside of a biscuit box full of +cartridges! + +“Sure an ye are afther bein’ a whole company of marines in wan!” +observed Matt Gory, as he surveyed the preparations. “It puts me in +mind o’ the man as used to go around Irish fairs playing a dhrum, +a fife, and fiddle, an’ a hurdy-gurdy all in wan, wid the sweetest +music----” + +“They are coming, and we haven’t a minute to lose,” interrupted Dan, +and took up two of the guns. “Keep out of sight, boys, or they may pick +us off at long range!” + +“I would like to have a look through your glasses,” I said, and he +readily handed them over. My eyes are good, and as I gazed at the junk +I saw she had lowered all of her sails and was dropping a small boat +into the sea. + +“They are coming over here, for sure,” I said. + +“Let me take a look,” said Dan, and took the glasses from my hands. +“By Jove!” he gasped, a minute later. + +“What is it, Dan?” + +“There is a white man in that boat!” + +“A white man, eh?” broke in Watt Brown. “Who can he be?” + +“I can’t make out yet.” + +“And how many yellow fellers?” asked Matt Gory. + +“Six sailors and an officer.” + +“Eight, all told,” mused the second mate. “Well, we ought to prove a +match for ’em.” + +“We ought not to shed blood if it can be avoided,” I said. + +“True for you, Raymond; but you must remember that pirates are pirates +the world over.” + +Slowly the small boat came closer. Watt Brown continued to watch it +through the glass. Then of a sudden he gave a gasp. + +“Captain Kenny!” + +“What?” we ejaculated in chorus. + +“The white man is Captain Kenny--and one of the men at the oars is Ah +Sid!” + +“What in the world are they doing among those pirates?” I asked. + +“That remains to be seen. More than likely Captain Kenny has heard what +the other owners of the _Dart_ want to do, and he is going to turn the +craft over to those Chinamen,” answered the second mate. + +“Has he a right to do that?” + +“I don’t think he has--and whether he has or not, I’m not going to let +him do it,” and Watt Brown shook his head determinedly. “He’s a bad +egg.” + +“He is that,” I went on. “I want to bring him to justice myself. Why, +he tried to take my life!” + +“We’ll hold the fort, as Brown says,” put in Dan. “The question is, how +are we going to do it?” + +“I’ll show you!” cried the second mate, and snatching up one of the +muskets he shot it off in the air. + +As the report rolled out to sea the rowers in the small boat dropped +their blades, while Captain Kenny leaped to his feet. The former +commander waved his hand, as Watt Brown came into view. + +“Ahoy, there!” he cried, at the top of his lungs. + +For reply the second mate seized a speaking trumpet with which he had +supplied himself. “Keep off!” he yelled. “Keep off, or we’ll blow you +and your boat to kingdom come!” + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + +A FIGHT AT LONG RANGE. + + +There is no doubt but that Captain Kenny was taken completely by +surprise. As a matter of fact he had expected to find nobody on board +or near the _Dart_, knowing that all of the Tagals of that territory +had moved away to join the insurgent forces operating around Manila. + +For a minute after Watt Brown had delivered his warning there was a +silence, broken only by the soft lapping of the waves as they broke +against the _Dart’s_ sides. + +“What is that you say?” demanded the captain at length. + +“I warn you to keep off,” shouted Watt Brown. “Come closer at your +peril!” + +“What right have you to talk to me in this fashion, Brown?” + +“A good deal of right, Captain Kenny. I have found you out, and so have +others; and you are a thorough villain.” + +“What have you found out?” + +“Found out that you were trying to defraud the other owners, for one +thing.” + +“It aint so!” stormed the former skipper of the schooner. + +“It is so.” + +“And you tried to take my life!” I called out, as I showed myself for +the first time. + +“Raymond!” he ejaculated, and for the instant he could say no more. + +“I have a good body of men with me,” continued Watt Brown, “and I warn +you to keep off.” + +“The ship is mine, and I intend to have her,” was the reckless return. + +Captain Kenny turned to Ah Sid and spoke to the Chinaman. In return the +former cook of the _Dart_ interpreted his remarks for his countrymen. + +A short discussion took place, and then Captain Kenny called out once +more. + +“We are coming on board, Brown, and the best thing you can do is to +make a peaceful surrender.” + +“We won’t surrender, and if you come ten feet nearer we’ll open fire on +you.” + +“You won’t dare!” + +“We will dare. Do you know who this boat belongs to?” + +“She belongs to me.” + +“She belongs to the United States Government--or will belong to the +government very soon.” + +“On the contrary, she belongs to the captain of yonder Chinese junk.” + +“Not much! Now keep off! I have warned you for the last time. If you +don’t--” + +Watt Brown got no further. While he had been speaking Captain Kenny had +drawn his pistol, and now, taking sudden aim, he let drive, the bullet +clipping the second mate’s forelock. + +“The rascal!” I burst out, and was on the point of firing when the +howitzer roared out, sending a shot cutting over the small boat’s bow. +A splinter planted itself in Ah Sid’s shoulder and we were glad to see +that unworthy Celestial squirm with pain. + +The discharge of the ship’s cannon alarmed the Chinamen more than all +threats would have done, and catching up their oars, they turned the +battered small boat about and made for the junk. + +“That scared them,” cried Dan. + +“Can’t Oi have a shot at ’em?” queried Matt Gory disappointedly. + +“You may get more shots than you want before we have done with ’em,” +smiled Watt Brown grimly. + +“You think they will come back?” said Dan. + +“Most certainly Captain Kenny will be back. He’s not the fellow to give +up so readily.” + +We watched the small boat until it was out of range, then dropped our +weapons and sought shelter from the fierce rays of the setting sun. +During the excitement I had forgotten about Watt Brown’s packet, but +now I brought it forth and handed it to him, and in as gentle a way as +I could, told him of his parent’s death. + +“Poor father!” he murmured, and tears stood on his rough cheeks. “He +was a good man, even if he was queer. I wish I could have been with him +when he died.” + +He then proceeded to tell us something of his parent’s history, how he +had been first a sailor, then a doctor, and then a rover of the earth +in search of adventure. + +“He has been to nearly every country on the globe,” he continued. “He +was always wanting to see the unknown and the strange. He did not +travel so much when my mother was living, but after she died he could +not content himself in one place for more than six months or a year at +the most. He came to Manila with me on my last trip and intended to +look for a Kanaka whom he had once met in the Hawaiian Islands.” + +“He said the document was of great value,” I answered. “I hope it +proves so.” + +“I’ll look it over the first chance I get. Now is no time to think of +anything like that, since those heathens are coming our way a second +time,” concluded Watt Brown. + +He was right about the Chinamen. The small boat had left the junk +and was moving up the shore as swiftly as the oarsmen could drive it +through the surf. Captain Kenny was again on board, but Ah Sid was +missing. + +“They are going to make for the beach and attack us from land,” +exclaimed Dan. + +“Can’t we hit him with the howitzer?” asked Matt Gory. “You are afther +bein’ a foine shot, Brown.” + +“I’ll try it,” answered the mate, and once again the cannon was loaded. +To sight the piece was difficult, as the small boat danced up and down +on the waves incessantly. + +When the howitzer was touched off it was seen that the shot had passed +over the small boat. That it had come close, however, was proven by the +consternation on board, several of the Celestials having dropped their +oars in terror. + +“Missed!” muttered Watt Brown. “Try the muskets.” + +We at once complied, the mate firing with us. But the distance was too +great for those who were not sharpshooters, and none of the bullets +took effect, excepting upon the small boat. + +Before the howitzer could be loaded again the party landed and, hauling +the rowboat up on the sands, they ran for the shelter of the trees and +rocks. + +“Take the small-arms over to port,” ordered Watt Brown. “They’ll be +coming out through the woods in less than ten minutes.” + +“Another boat is putting off from the junk!” exclaimed Dan, who had +picked up the glasses. + +“Six, seven, eight, nine men are coming over in her! And they have a +small gun on board!” + +“Seven and nine make sixteen,” I said. “Sixteen to four are pretty big +odds.” + +“Yis, but we are afther havin’ the advantage of position,” returned +Matt Gory. “Brown, can’t ye be afther blowin’ that second boat +sky-hoigh wid th’ howitzer?” + +“I can try,” answered the second mate. + +He had already reloaded the piece, and as the second small boat came +closer he began to sight the gun. + +“There is a flag of truce!” cried Dan, as an officer in the boat held +up a white handkerchief by two of the corners. + +“We don’t recognize any flag of truce!” cried Watt Brown. “I’ll show +’em that none o’ their dirty Chinese tricks will work on me!” + +And rushing around he found a big red blanket and swung it defiantly to +the breeze. For several seconds the Chinamen refused to recognize the +return signal, but then the white handkerchief dropped and the second +small boat came to a lazy roll on the long waves. + +“Watch the woods!” sang out Watt Brown. “I’ll keep these fellows at +bay, never fear.” + +“I see some forms behind yonder trees,” said Dan, a second later. “They +are coming on as fast as they can, and each man has a pistol and a +rifle! They mean fight!” + +“Take that, ye villain!” came from Matt Gory, and taking a quick aim, +he fired, and the foremost of the Celestials went down, hit in the side. + +This serious shot brought the crowd under Captain Kenny to a halt, and +in a twinkle all disappeared again from view. + +“They are gone,” said the Irish sailor. + +“They’ll be coming on again, soon,” said the second mate. And his words +proved only too true. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +THE WRECKING OF THE HOWITZER. + + +For fully five minutes the situation remained unchanged, and during +that time we took the opportunity to reload the empty weapons and bring +out several others that had been hidden in a secret closet of the cabin. + +It must not be supposed that I had forgotten my money belt and the +documents belonging to our firm. I had thought of them several times, +but, as yet, had not dared to go below to see if they were safe. + +Now, however, both Dan and I hurried to the stateroom which we had +occupied. The door was closed, but not locked, and we entered, to find +all pitch-dark, the port-hole having become covered with mud. + +Striking a match, we lit a lantern and proceeded to make an +investigation. Trunks and lockers had been broken open, and clothing +and other things lay around in confusion. + +“Not a money belt in sight!” I groaned, after a search. “And the +documents are gone, too!” + +“We haven’t looked everywhere, yet,” answered Dan. “Turn over the bed +mattresses.” + +“How could they get into the beds?” I asked. “If those rascally +Tagals----” + +A shout from the deck interrupted me, and dropping everything I flew +through the cabin and up the companion-way stairs, with Dan behind me. + +“The second boat is coming on again!” announced Watt Brown. “Watch the +woods, for there may be some understanding between the two attacking +parties.” + +“Sure an’ thim rascals are coming on, too!” burst in Matt Gory. “Down, +all of yez!” and he dropped flat on the deck. + +We did the same, and just then a volley of rifle shots rang out, and +one of the bullets tore its way through the top of Dan’s straw hat, +while all came alarmingly close. + +“On and at them!” shouted Captain Kenny, forgetful, no doubt, that the +Celestials could not understand a word. And he led the way in a rush +for the ship. + +By this time the second small boat was less than two hundred feet +off and coming forward with all the speed that the eight sturdy +oarsmen could command. The officer in the bow was at the small cannon +mentioned, and at what he deemed a favorable moment touched off the +piece. + +His aim was certainly a good one, for the ball hit the howitzer and +sent it flying from its carriage and rolling over the deck to port. A +portion of the block was splintered, and a bit of woodwork flew up and +hit Watt Brown in the breast, inflicting an ugly and dangerous wound. + +“Brown is killed!” burst out Dan in horror, and knelt down at his side. + +“Never mind--m--e,” came in a gasp from the second mate. “Repel +boarders, or w--we are--lo--lost!” and then he fainted dead away. + +He spoke the truth, for now the second boat was almost alongside, while +Captain Kenny and his command were less than fifty feet away. + +“Gory, cover the boat!” I yelled. “Dan, fire with me at the captain’s +crowd!” and I blazed away, and had the satisfaction of seeing another +Celestial go down. + +Dan followed my command and succeeded in hitting Captain Kenny in the +leg. It was not a serious wound, but it made the rascal drop on his +breast, uttering loud cries of pain and terror. “Don’t hit me again! +Don’t!” he screamed, and crawled over the sands to where there was a +rock, behind which he hid himself, muttering bitter imprecations at +what he termed his hard luck. + +The fall of their leader disconcerted the Chinamen, and again they +halted. In the meantime Matt Gory had picked out the officer in the +second boat and laid him low with a bullet through the chest. + +“Hurrah fer Uncle Sam!” roared the Irish sailor enthusiastically. +“Hurrah fer another Dewey victory!” and he discharged an additional +musket and a second Celestial fell over among his companions. + +But now the fighting became general and to go into all of the details +would be impossible. I fired three shots and then saw three Chinamen +coming up over the stern of the _Dart_, where those from shore and +those from the second small boat had joined forces. + +“They are coming aboard!” cried Dan. “Fire at them! Give it to them +hot!” and he blazed away, and one of the Celestials fell back among his +friends. + +But now five of the enemy came up, firing several rounds as they +advanced, and the deck became filled with smoke. Soon it was a +hand-to-hand encounter, and we found ourselves gradually forced back to +the companion way. + +“We can’t stand up against ’em!” panted Matt Gory, as he shouldered +up to me with the blood streaming from a cut in his cheek. “They are +afther bein’ too many for us, bad cess to ’em!” + +“Let us take a final stand in the cabin,” I answered. “Remember, +possession is nine points of the law.” + +Matt Gory was willing and tumbled down the companion way, followed by +Dan and myself. As we burst into the cabin we shut the door behind us +and locked it. + +The Celestials were now baffled for the moment and we heard them +running around the deck, speculating upon what they had best do next. +We used this time to barricade the door and to reload our pistols, our +guns having been left behind us. + +Soon came a hammering and a demand in Chinese, probably to open the +door. For an answer, Matt Gory stepped close, and before we could stop +him, fired a shot through a panel. A yell of pain followed, and we +heard the staggering footsteps of the wounded man as he hurried on deck +again. + +“That was a bad move, Matt,” I said. “They’ll do something awful in +revenge; you see if they don’t!” + +“I couldn’t hilp it, the ould Nick take ’em!” was the reply. “If thim +haythins oncet gain--hark, phat’s that!” + +A loud booming of a big cannon over the waters had reached all of our +ears. We listened intently and presently another report followed. + +“It is a shot from a man-o’-war!” I burst out. + +“If it’s an American ship we are saved!” + +“Perhaps it is the _Concord_!” came from Dan. “Don’t you remember what +Watt Brown said?” + +“Yes; but could she come in here?” + +“There would be no need. She has that Chinese junk at her mercy.” + +“Sure an’ if it’s wan of our warships we must be afther flyin’ a signal +of distress!” exclaimed Matt Gory. + +“That is true, Matt; but how can we do it?” + +“Here is a flag,” answered Dan, hauling it from the case in the closet. +“If we can get that up----” + +“Oi’ll put it up!” cried the Irishman, who was too excited to even +think of the danger. “Here goes!” and he hurried to a passageway +leading through to the forecastle. + +I could not resist the temptation to follow him, and Dan did the +same. We entered the forecastle to find it as much disordered as our +stateroom had been, for the Tagals had used it as a shelter during +their brief stay on the _Dart_. + +“Now to get up the mast unobserved!” whispered the Irish sailor, and +moving cautiously out upon the forward deck, he started to carry out +his design, the flag under his arm. + +He had taken less than a dozen steps when there came a Chinese yell and +the crack of a rifle, and poor Gory pitched headlong. A rush to the +forecastle followed. + +“Back, Dan, it’s our only chance,” I cried. “They won’t grant us any +mercy if they catch us!” and we flew back into the passageway and to +the cabin, locking the second door and barricading it like the first. + +The Chinamen followed us along the passage and we heard them pounding +on the doors for several seconds. But then came a call from the deck +and the dull booming of the cannon we had before heard. + +“That shooting means something,” said Dan. “Oh if only the _Concord_ +has arrived!” + +“With Tom Dawson and the rest of our friends on board!” I added. + +The rush of footsteps on the deck continued, and we heard several +Celestials in earnest consultation. + +“They are up to something,” whispered Dan. “Poor Brown! I wonder if he +and Matt Gory are dead?” + +“Captain Kenny will have much to answer for,” I answered. “He is +responsible for the whole muss.” + +We waited for a few minutes more. Then came another rush of footsteps +and we heard the Chinamen leaving the _Dart_ by the side nearest to +shore. + +“They are going to take to the woods!” yelled Dan. “Hurrah! the battle +is ours!” And he started to unlock the cabin door leading to the +companion way. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +GOOD-BY TO THE PHILIPPINES. + + +“We must be careful,” I said to my chum, as he began to mount the +steps. “Remember poor Gory’s rashness.” + +“I’ll be careful enough,” he replied, and peered over the combing to +see if the coast was clear. + +To his gratification every Celestial had fled, taking the wounded along. + +“They are gone, Oliver!” + +“I’m glad of it,” I said, and scrambled out on the deck with him. “What +of the junk?” + +“She is making up the coast with all speed. And there is a warship, +true enough!” + +“We can fly that flag of distress now,” I continued, and ran back +for the article. Soon I was on my way to the top, where I placed the +glorious Stars and Stripes with the Stars downward. + +A shot from the warship told us that our signal was seen, and through +the glasses we saw a boat put off in command of one of the officers. +Feeling that we were now safe I turned my attention to Watt Brown, +while Dan went to look after Matt Gory. + +I found the second mate lying close to where he had fallen. He was now +conscious, but it was easy to see that death was hovering close to +his soul. He tried to smile as I took his hand, but the effort was a +failure. + +“We whipped ’em,” he gasped. “I’m glad--of--it.” + +“You had better not talk, Brown,” I returned. “You are too weak. Let me +bind up your wounds and give you a drink of something.” + +“It aint no use, Raymond, I’m knocked out and I know it. But we whipped +’em,” and he tried to smile again. A second later he fainted once more. + +I bound up his wound and tried to force some liquor down his throat. I +was in the midst of these labors when the small boat from the warship +came alongside and the officer and several others hurried to the deck. + +“Tom Dawson!” I cried joyfully, and caught the first mate by the hand. + +“Poor Brown!” were his first words. “Is it serious?” and as I nodded in +the affirmative he looked very sober. + +It took some little time to explain the situation and hear what +the officer from the _Concord_ and Tom Dawson had to say, and in +the meantime Watt Brown and Matt Gory were taken below and made as +comfortable as circumstances permitted. There was hope for the Irish +sailor, but none for poor Watt Brown, much to the sorrow of all of us, +for everyone loved the open-hearted second mate. + +Soon a second boatload of sailors came to the _Dart_ and I was asked to +go ashore with them, to point out the direction the fleeing Celestials +had taken. I went, and at the rock came upon Captain Kenny’s body, +terribly mutilated by knife-cuts. The Chinamen had fallen upon him, and +in their rage over the failure of the expedition had literally hacked +him to death. We buried him where he had fallen. + +The search for the fleeing pirates, for I can call them nothing less, +lasted far into the night, but availed nothing. At last I returned to +the _Dart_, utterly fagged out. A surgeon had been sent for and he was +attending the wounded ones, and I asked him about both. + +“The Irish sailor will live,” was the answer, “but Brown is mortally +wounded.” + +On the _Concord_ were the two men who had owned the _Dart_ in company +with Captain Kenny. Their stock in the craft was in the majority, and +they turned her over to the government, Uncle Sam to keep the money +which was coming to the late captain’s heirs, until it was properly +claimed. + +Our tales were listened to with keen interest the next day by the +warm-hearted commander of the _Concord_. + +“We will do our best for you,” he said to Dan and me. “I imagine you +have nothing to fear so long as you are on board with me.” + +Watt Brown’s death occurred the following afternoon and was a most +affecting scene. He and I had got to know each other pretty well since +we had been cast ashore, and he called me to him before he breathed his +last. + +“Good-by to you, Raymond,” he whispered. “I am alone in the world, +and that being so I leave my father’s legacy to you. It relates to a +treasure said to be buried somewhere on the Hawaiian Islands. I hope +you find it. Good-by,” and he died in my arms as peacefully as a child. +They buried him on the shore, and I nailed together a rude cross for a +headstone. + +During the day following I made another search of the stateroom and the +cabin in quest of my missing money belt and the documents belonging to +Raymond, Holbrook & Smith. For a long while I discovered nothing, but +at last I turned over some clothing lying in an out-of-the-way corner, +and there the articles lay revealed, along with Dan’s pocketbook and +belt and a number of other things of lesser importance. + +“They are found at last!” I cried, and a great weight was lifted from +my shoulders. “Now let those Spaniards confiscate that land in Manila +if they dare!” + +“It was worth coming to the _Dart_ after all,” smiled Dan. “Our mission +is now ended.” + +And he spoke the truth. + +Here I think I can properly bring to a close my tale of adventures +while serving in the navy and battling for my rights in the Philippines. + +The _Dart_ was turned over to the government as before mentioned, and +the proper parties raised and repaired her and gave her an equipment +for coast service. + +How Manila fell into the hands of Uncle Sam at last is a matter of +history. Dan, I, and several of our old friends were present when this +event occurred, and at the first opportunity my chum and I went ashore +to learn how Harry Longley was faring. + +We found him sitting up and glad to learn that everything had turned +out so well. With the United States authorities in the city to protect +him, Longley unearthed the money belonging to our firm and placed it +in the safe, along with the documents I had rescued. To-day business +is booming with Raymond, Holbrook & Smith, and no more is heard of +disputing our claim to the land upon which our offices in Manila stand. + +As soon as we could do so, we sent a cablegram to Mr. Holbrook, telling +him of what had occurred. Later on we took passage back to Hong Kong on +the _Starlight_, in company with Tom Dawson and several other of our +friends, including Matt Gory, who was now almost well. + +Both Dan and I had seen enough of war, and instead of thinking about +going back to the Philippines, I took passage on a steamer for San +Francisco, and Dan accompanied me. + +When I reached the Golden Gate I found that my father was still in +Cuba, and with the war going on, I grew very anxious concerning him. +But, as my friends who have read “When Santiago Fell” know, he escaped +from grave perils without injury, and he soon came on to the West, +followed, a month later, by Mark Carter, a first-rate young fellow who +had shared his adventures. Mark, Dan, and I soon became warm friends, +and it was while making a tour of California that we concocted a plan +for going to the Hawaiian Islands, so recently annexed to the United +States, in quest of the treasure mentioned in the strange document left +by Watt Brown’s father. What our future adventures were Mark will tell, +in another volume, to be called “Off for Hawaii; Or, The Mystery of a +Great Volcano.” + +And now let me say good-by, kind reader, with the hope that if you ever +have such stirring adventures as have fallen to my lot, they will end +in equal good fortune. + + + + +TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES: + + + Italicized text is surrounded by underscores: _italics_. + + Perceived typographical errors have been corrected. + + Inconsistencies in hyphenation have been standardized. + + Archaic or variant spelling has been retained. + + Some illustrations have been moved to be near the text to which they + refer. + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77081 *** diff --git a/77081-h/77081-h.htm b/77081-h/77081-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6467f1c --- /dev/null +++ b/77081-h/77081-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,8985 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html> +<html lang="en"> +<head> + <meta charset="UTF-8"> + <title> + A sailor boy with Dewey | Project Gutenberg + </title> + <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover"> + <style> + +body { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + + h1,h2 { + text-align: center; + clear: both; +} + +p { + margin-top: .51em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .49em; +} + +hr { + width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: 33.5%; + margin-right: 33.5%; + clear: both; +} + +hr.tb {width: 45%; margin-left: 27.5%; margin-right: 27.5%;} +hr.tiny {width: 10%; margin-left: 45%; margin-right: 45%; margin-top: 0; margin-bottom: 0;} +hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} +@media print { hr.chap {display: none; visibility: hidden;} } + +div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} +h2.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} + +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; +} + +td {padding-left: 0.5em;} +.tdr {text-align: right;} + +.pagenum { + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; + font-style: normal; + font-weight: normal; + font-variant: normal; + text-indent: 0; +} + +.bbox {border: 2px solid; padding: 1em;} + +.center {text-align: center;} + +.right {text-align: right;} + +.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + +.allsmcap {font-variant: small-caps; text-transform: lowercase;} + +.ph1 {text-align: center; font-size: large; font-weight: bold;} +.ph2 {text-align: center; font-size: xx-large; font-weight: bold;} +.ph3 {text-align: center; font-size: x-large; font-weight: bold;} + +div.titlepage {text-align: center; page-break-before: always; page-break-after: always;} +div.titlepage p {text-align: center; font-weight: bold; line-height: 1.5; margin-top: 2em;} + +.large {font-size: 125%;} + +.caption {font-weight: bold; text-align: center;} + +img { + max-width: 100%; + height: auto; +} + +.x-ebookmaker .hide {display: none; visibility: hidden;} + +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; + page-break-inside: avoid; + max-width: 100%; +} + +.poetry-container {text-align: center;} +.poetry {display: inline-block; text-align: left;} + +@media print { .poetry {display: block;} } +.x-ebookmaker .poetry-container {display: flex; justify-content: center;} + +.padleft {padding-left: 4em;} +.padright {padding-right: 4em;} + +.indentleft {padding-left: 1em;} + +.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; + color: black; + font-size:smaller; + margin-left: 17.5%; + margin-right: 17.5%; + padding: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em; + font-family:sans-serif, serif; } + + </style> +</head> +<body> +<div style='text-align:center'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77081 ***</div> + +<div class="figcenter hide"><img src="images/coversmall.jpg" width="450" alt=""></div> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<figure class="figcenter" style="width: 450px;"> + <img src="images/i_f000.jpg" width="450" height="678" alt=""> + <figcaption> + <p class="caption">“YOU MUST BE MORE CAREFUL IN THE FUTURE,” SAID COMMODORE + DEWEY. “WE CAN’T AFFORD TO LOSE ANY MEN JUST + NOW.”</p> + </figcaption> +</figure> +</div> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_f001.jpg" alt="title page"></div> +</div> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="titlepage"> +<h1><span class="padright">A SAILOR BOY</span><br> +<span class="padleft">WITH DEWEY</span></h1> + +<p>OR</p> + +<p><i>AFLOAT IN THE PHILIPPINES</i></p> + +<p><small>BY</small><br> +<span class="large">CAPTAIN RALPH BONEHILL</span><br> + +<small>AUTHOR OF “WHEN SANTIAGO FELL,” “OFF FOR HAWAII,”<br> + “GUN AND SLED,” “RIVAL BICYCLISTS,” “YOUNG<br> + OARSMEN OF LAKEVIEW,” “LEO, THE<br> + CIRCUS BOY,” ETC.</small></p> + +<div class="figcenter"><img src="images/i_f001a.jpg" alt=""></div> + +<p><span class="large">CHATTERTON-PECK COMPANY</span><br> + NEW YORK, N. Y.</p> +</div> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="poetry-container"> +<div class="poetry"> +<div class="bbox"> +<p class="ph3">BY THE SAME AUTHOR</p> + + +<p>WITH CUSTER IN THE BLACK HILLS;<br> +<span class="indentleft">Or, A Young Scout among the Indians.</span><br> + <br> + BOYS OF THE FORT;<br> +<span class="indentleft">Or, A Young Captain’s Pluck.</span><br> + <br> + THE YOUNG BANDMASTER;<br> +<span class="indentleft">Or, Concert Stage and Battlefield.</span><br> + <br> + WHEN SANTIAGO FELL;<br> +<span class="indentleft">Or, The War Adventures of Two Chums.</span><br> + <br> + A SAILOR BOY WITH DEWEY;<br> +<span class="indentleft">Or, Afloat in the Philippines.</span><br> + <br> + OFF FOR HAWAII;<br> +<span class="indentleft">Or, The Mystery of a Great Volcano.</span></p> + +<hr class="tiny"> +<p class="center"><i>12mo, finely illustrated and bound in cloth. +Price, per volume, 60 cents.</i></p> +<hr class="tiny"> +<p class="center">NEW YORK<br> +<span class="large">CHATTERTON-PECK COMPANY</span><br> + 1905</p> +</div> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Copyright, 1899, by</span><br> + THE MERSHON COMPANY</p> +</div></div></div> +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> + +<div class="chapter"> +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_iii">[iii]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">PREFACE.</h2> +</div> + +<p>“A Sailor Boy with Dewey,” while a complete +story in itself, forms the second volume of +a line of works issued under the general title of +the “Flag of Freedom Series.”</p> + +<p>In writing this tale of adventure I had in mind +to acquaint our boys with something of the +strange sights and scenes which come to light +daily in Uncle Sam’s new possessions in the far +East, or far West, as you will. The Philippines +are but little understood by the average reader, +and if I have served to make the picture of them +a little clearer my object will have been accomplished.</p> + +<p>Some may argue that the adventures introduced +in the volume are overdrawn, but I can +assure all that the incidents are underdrawn +rather than otherwise. Many savage and barbarous +natives still inhabit the Philippines, and +to bring these people to genuine civilization will +take many years of patient labor and encouragement. +In the past Spain had accomplished +something, but not much; what our own nation +will do remains still to be seen. Let us hope for +the best.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_iv">[iv]</span>Again thanking my young friends for the +kindness with which they have perused my +stories in the past, I place this book in their +hands with my best wishes for their future welfare.</p> + +<p class="right"><span class="smcap">Captain Ralph Bonehill.</span></p> + +<p><i>April 15, 1899.</i></p> + + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_v">[v]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CONTENTS.</h2> +</div> + +<table> +<tr><td class="tdr"><span class="allsmcap">CHAPTER</span></td><td class="tdr" colspan="2"><span class="allsmcap">PAGE</span></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">I.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Off for Manila Bay</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_1"> 1</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">II.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Collision in the Hurricane</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_10"> 10</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">III.</td><td> <span class="smcap">In which Dan and I Become Separated</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_19"> 19</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">IV.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Rescue of the Unworthy One</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_27"> 27</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">V.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Cast Ashore on Luzon</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_34"> 34</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">VI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Adventures in the Forest</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_43"> 43</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">VII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Wreck on the Shore</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_52"> 52</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">VIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Attacked by the Tagals</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_59"> 59</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">IX.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Flight from Bumwoga</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_67"> 67</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">X.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Battle at a Distance</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_74"> 74</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Off for Subig Bay</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_82"> 82</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Attacked in the Canyon</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_91"> 91</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">My First Adventure in Manila</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_99"> 99</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XIV.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Escape from the Prison</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_107"> 107</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XV.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Back to Hong Kong</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_115"> 115</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XVI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Opening of the War</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_123"> 123</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XVII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">I Meet Commodore Dewey</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_130"> 130</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XVIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Fighting Engineer</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_139"> 139</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XIX.</td><td> “<span class="smcap">Fire!</span>”</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_147"> 147</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XX.</td><td> <span class="smcap">In which One Spanish Ship Is Sunk</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_155"> 155</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Never-to-be-Forgotten Contest</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_162"> 162</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Between Two Fires</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_169"> 169</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Escape from the Inn</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_177"> 177</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXIV.</td><td> <span class="smcap">One Way of Entering a Fortified City</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_184"> 184</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXV.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Four Would-be Plunderers</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_192"> 192</a><span class="pagenum" id="Page_vi">[vi]</span> </td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXVI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Fight in the Offices</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_200"> 200</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXVII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Letter of Great Importance</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_208"> 208</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXVIII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Treed by Buffalo Bulls</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_215"> 215</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXIX.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Captain Kenny Again</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_223"> 223</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXX.</td><td> <span class="smcap">A Fight at Long Range</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_230"> 230</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXXI.</td><td> <span class="smcap">The Wrecking of the Howitzer</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_237"> 237</a></td></tr> + +<tr><td class="tdr">XXXII.</td><td> <span class="smcap">Good-by to the Philippines</span>,</td><td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_245"> 245</a></td></tr> +</table> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1">[1]</span> + +<p class="ph2">A SAILOR BOY WITH DEWEY</p> +<hr class="tiny"> +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER I.<br> + +<small>OFF FOR MANILA BAY.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“What do you think of this storm, Oliver?”</p> + +<p>“I think it is going to be a heavy one, Dan,” +I answered. “Just look at those black clouds +rolling up from the southeast. We’ll catch it +before midnight.”</p> + +<p>“Just what I think,” answered my chum, Dan +Holbrook. “Where is Captain Kenny?”</p> + +<p>“Where he always is, in his cabin, more than +half intoxicated. I tell you, Dan, I would never +have taken passage on the <i>Dart</i> had I known +what sort of a man Captain Kenny was. Why, +our lives are not safe in his hands.”</p> + +<p>“Humph! I don’t know as they are safe out +of his hands, Oliver,” returned Dan, with a toss +of his handsome head. “Since we left China +we’ve struck two heavy hurricanes,—perhaps +that coming on will finish us.”</p> + +<p>“Gracious! don’t say that!” I cried, with a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_2">[2]</span>shiver. “We don’t want to be finished—at +least, I don’t.”</p> + +<p>“Neither do I. But when a storm comes, +it comes, that is all there is to it.”</p> + +<p>“True, but we might do something toward +meeting it,” I went on, with a grave shake of my +head, for I did not altogether like Dan’s light-hearted +way of looking at things. “In my opinion +Captain Kenny ought to be on deck this +instant, watching this storm.”</p> + +<p>“Supposing you tell him that?”</p> + +<p>“I’ve a good mind to.”</p> + +<p>“You’ll get a belaying pin over your head, as +Dawson, the mate, got. Captain Kenny is not +a man to be talked to. He is bad enough when +he is sober, and when he isn’t he is simply terrible.”</p> + +<p>“But he has no right to imperil the lives of +twenty or more people by his drunkenness,” I +rejoined warmly. “If I had my way, I’d put the +captain in irons and place Dawson in command +of the <i>Dart</i>. He knows enough to keep sober, +and——”</p> + +<p>“Ye would do thet, would ye?” roared a +hoarse voice at my shoulder, and turning swiftly +I found myself confronted by Captain Kenny. +“I’ll teach ye how to talk ag’in the master o’ +this vessel, an’ don’t ye forgit it!” And he +grabbed me by the arm.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_3">[3]</span>Captain Kenny’s face was as red as a beet. +Usually it was far from being handsome, now it +was positively hideous. His breath was heavily +laden with the odor of rum, showing that he had +been imbibing more than usual.</p> + +<hr class="tb"> + +<p>I was a boy of sixteen, tall and strong for my +age. I was not a poor, down-trodden lad, +knocking about from pillar to post, trying to +earn my living. My father, Samuel Raymond, +was a rich merchant of San Francisco, owning +interests in several lines of trade, with offices at +San Francisco, Hong Kong, Manila in the +Philippine Islands, and several other points.</p> + +<p>Just six months before I had graduated at a +business college in California. As I was to follow +my father into trade, it was not thought +worth while to give me a term at the University, +or any similar institute of learning. Instead, +my father called me into his library and said to +me:</p> + +<p>“Oliver, I believe you understand that you +are to go into business with me.”</p> + +<p>“I do, sir,” had been my reply. “I wish for +nothing better.”</p> + +<p>“Usually I do not believe in letting boys remain +idle after their school days are over, but in +this case I think an exception should be made. +You have worked hard, and come out at the top +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_4">[4]</span>of your class. You deserve a good, long holiday. +How will you take it?”</p> + +<p>To answer this question puzzled me at first, +for I knew I had the whole world before me. I +had been as far east as New York and as far +south as St. Louis, and had even taken a trip on +Lake Michigan. I concluded that I had gone +eastward far enough.</p> + +<p>“If it’s all the same, I’ll go to Hong Kong +and get acquainted with our branch out there,” +was my answer, and the use of the words, “our +branch,” made my father laugh.</p> + +<p>“That will suit me exactly,” was his return. +“You shall go from San Francisco direct to +Hong Kong, and you can return by way of the +Philippines and see how our place of business +is doing at Manila. The place at Manila is running +down—the Spaniards are doing their best +to drive us out altogether, and if you can see any +way of improving conditions, now or later on, +so much the better.”</p> + +<p>In less than two weeks I was ready to start, +but I did not leave home even then as quickly +as did my father, who received word which took +him to the east and then to Cuba. What happened +to my parent in Cuba has been excellently +told by my friend, Mark Carter, in his story +which has been printed under the title of “When +Santiago Fell.” At that time I did not know +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_5">[5]</span>Mark at all, but since then we have become +very intimately acquainted, as my readers will +soon learn.</p> + +<p>The voyage from the Golden Gate to Hong +Kong was made without anything unusual happening. +On landing at the Chinese-English +port I was immediately met by Dan Holbrook, +whose father was one of my parent’s partners. +Dan had put in two years at Hong Kong and the +vicinity, and he took me around, and talked +Chinese for me whenever it was required.</p> + +<p>At last came the time when I thought I ought +to think of returning to San Francisco by way +of Manila, or at least to run over to the Philippines +and back and then start for home. “If +only you could go to Manila with me!” had been +my words to Dan, to whom I was warmly attached.</p> + +<p>“I will go,” had been the ready answer, which +surprised me not a little. Soon I learned that +Dan had been talking the matter over with his +father and mother. Mr. Holbrook was as anxious +as my father to have the business connection +at Manila improved, and he thought that +both of us ought to be able to do something, +even though I was but a boy and Dan was +scarcely a young man.</p> + +<p>Manila, the principal city of the Philippines, is +located but four or five days’ sail from Hong +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_6">[6]</span>Kong and there is a regular service of steamers +between the two ports. But both Dan and I +had seen a good deal of ocean travel on steamers, +and we decided to make the trip to Manila Bay +in a sailing craft, and, accordingly, took passage +on the <i>Dart</i>, a three-masted schooner, carrying +a miscellaneous cargo for Manila, Iloilo, and +other points.</p> + +<p>When we secured our berths we did not see +Captain Kenny, only the first and second mates +of the vessel. Had we seen the captain with his +tough-looking and bloated face, it is quite likely +that we would have endeavored to secure passage +to the Philippines elsewhere.</p> + +<p>Yet for several days all went well. The +weather was not all that it should have been, for +we were sailing in a portion of our globe where +hurricanes and earthquakes are of frequent occurrence. +Our course had been set directly for +Corregidor Island at the entrance to Manila +Bay, but it had begun to blow harder and harder, +we drove up in the direction of Subig Bay.</p> + +<p>The weather kept growing fouler and fouler, +and with this Captain Kenny gave himself over +to liquor until he was totally unfit to command +the <i>Dart</i>. He was a man to allow sails to be set +when they should have been furled, and already +had he lost one sheet through his foolishness.</p> + +<p>The mate, Tom Dawson, was a first-rate fellow, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_7">[7]</span>as kind and considerate as the captain was +rough and brutal. How he had shipped with +such a beast was a mystery, but it did not concern +me and I did not bother my head about it. +On three occasions I had seen the captain attack +Dawson, but each time the mate had escaped +and refused to take up the quarrel. In the +meantime the second mate and the men grumbled +a good deal, but so far no open rupture +had occurred among the forecastle hands.</p> + +<hr class="tb"> + +<p>“You let go of that arm,” I said, as I found +Captain Kenny’s harsh face poked out close to +my cheek.</p> + +<p>“I’ll let go when I’m done with you, not +afore!” he went on, with increasing wrath. +“Call me a drunkard, will ye!” And he gave +the arm a savage twist that hurt not a little. +“On board o’ my own ship, too!”</p> + +<p>“If I did I only spoke the truth,” I said +steadily. “You drink altogether too much for +the good of those on board. We are going to +have a big storm soon, and you ought to have +your wits about you, if you want to save the +<i>Dart</i> from going down.”</p> + +<p>“I know my business, boy—ye can’t teach it +me nohow! Take thet fer talkin’ to me in this +fashion!”</p> + +<p>Releasing my arm, he aimed a heavy blow at +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_8">[8]</span>my head. But I was on the alert and dodged, +and the blow nearly carried the irate skipper off +his feet. Then, as he came on again, I shoved +him backward, and down he went in a heap on +the deck.</p> + +<p>“By Jove, now you’ve done it!” whispered +Dan.</p> + +<p>“I don’t care, it serves him right,” I answered. +“He had no right to touch me.”</p> + +<p>“That’s true. But you must remember that +a captain is king on his own deck, on the high +seas.”</p> + +<p>“A brute can never be a king—and make me +submit, Dan.”</p> + +<p>By this time Captain Kenny was scrambling +up, his face full of rage. Instantly he made for +me again.</p> + +<p>“I’ll teach ye!” he screamed. “You good-fer-nuthin +landlubber! I’ve had it in fer ye +ever since ye took passage. Maybe my ship +aint good enough fer ye! If thet’s so, I’ll pitch +ye overboard!” And he tried to grab me once +more.</p> + +<p>But now Dan stepped between us. “Captain +Kenny, you let Raymond alone,” he ordered +sternly.</p> + +<p>“I won’t—he’s called me a drunkard, and—”</p> + +<p>“He told the truth. You attend to your +business and we’ll attend to ours.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_9">[9]</span>“I’ll—I’ll put him in irons. He shan’t talk +so afore my crew!” fumed the captain.</p> + +<p>“You shan’t touch him.”</p> + +<p>“Shan’t I?” The half-drunken man glared at +both of us. Then he backed away, shaking his +fist. “Just wait a minute and I’ll show you a +trick or two—just wait!” And still shaking +his fist, he reeled off to the companion way, almost +fell down the stairs, and disappeared into +the cabin.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_10">[10]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER II.<br> +<small>THE COLLISION IN THE HURRICANE.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“Now, what is he going to do?” I murmured, +turning to my companion.</p> + +<p>“Something out of the ordinary, that’s certain,” +answered Dan. “He has just enough +in him to be thoroughly ugly.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t believe he’ll let this matter drop, +storm or no storm.”</p> + +<p>“Not he, Oliver. I’m afraid we have got +ourselves into a scrape. I wish we were in +sight of Manila.”</p> + +<p>“So do I. But I haven’t done anything +wrong. Somebody ought to tell the man that +he is drinking too much, Dan.”</p> + +<p>At that instant Dawson, the mate, came up. +He had been standing behind the mainmast and +had heard every word uttered. His face showed +plainly that he was greatly troubled.</p> + +<p>“This is too bad,” he observed. “The cap’n +bad enough, but you have made him wuss, ten +times over, lads.”</p> + +<p>“He hasn’t any right to drink, Dawson.”</p> + +<p>“We won’t talk about thet—seein’ as how +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_11">[11]</span>he’s in command and I’m only the fust mate. +I’m sorry you quarreled, with the end o’ the +voyage almost in sight.”</p> + +<p>“What will he do?” put in Dan.</p> + +<p>“I dunno. Drink more, I reckon, an’ then +come up twict as ugly.”</p> + +<p>“What about this storm that is coming up?” +I questioned.</p> + +<p>“I notified him of that half an hour ago.”</p> + +<p>“And he didn’t pay any attention? It’s a +shame! I don’t want to go to the bottom of +the China Sea, whether the captain drinks or +not.”</p> + +<p>“None o’ us want to go to the bottom, lad. +But then——” Tom Dawson ended with a +shrug of his shoulders. He realized more than +I did what a responsibility would rest upon him +did he dare to issue orders contrary to Captain +Kenny’s wishes.</p> + +<p>It was about three o’clock in the afternoon, +and the day had been unusually oppressive, even +for this latitude, which, as most of my readers +must know, never boasts of cold weather, but +can easily break the record for scorchers. During +the morning, when the sun had shone, the +seams of the deck had run with tar, and no one +had exposed himself more than was absolutely +necessary. But now the sun was hidden by +clouds that kept growing darker and darker, and +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_12">[12]</span>the wind was so strong it could not be otherwise +than refreshing.</p> + +<p>Captain Kenny had left positive orders that +the main and mizzen courses be left as they were, +fully set, and both sheets were straining and tugging +as though ready to lift the two masts out +of their resting places. The forecourse had been +taken in, also the jib, but so far this had had no +effect on the riding of the <i>Dart</i>, and she dipped +her nose into every fourth or fifth wave that +came along.</p> + +<p>“If I was you I’d take in more sail,” remarked +Dan, after a pause. “Even if you don’t lose a +mast, you’re running the risk of opening more +than one seam. If we founder——”</p> + +<p>He did not finish, for at that moment Captain +Kenny’s head reappeared above the combing of +the companion way. He came staggering toward +us with his right hand in his jacket pocket +and a sickly grin on his unshaven face.</p> + +<p>“Now we’ll come to terms,” he began, with +a hiccough.</p> + +<p>“Captain Kenny, how about that mainsail?” +interrupted the mate. “The wind is freshening +rapidly, sir.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll take care o’ the—hic—mainsail, when +I’ll through which these—hic—young rascals,” +was the answer. “Yarson! Carden!” he +bawled out. “Come here, you’re wanted.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_13">[13]</span>At once two of the sailors, a Swede and an +American, came aft and touched their forelocks.</p> + +<p>“Do you know what I’m—hic—going to +do?” went on the captain, closing one eye suggestively. +“I’m going to place both of you +under arrest until we arrive at Manila.”</p> + +<p>“Arrest!” cried Dan and I simultaneously.</p> + +<p>“You shall not arrest me,” I added, and my +companion said something very similar.</p> + +<p>“I said—hic—arrest, and I mean it. Throw +up your hands, both of you.”</p> + +<p>“I refuse to obey the order.”</p> + +<p>“Do you know that I am the—hic—commander +of this ship?”</p> + +<p>“You are when you are sober,” returned Dan.</p> + +<p>“I am sober now—I never get—hic—drunk. +I place you under arrest. Yarson, Carden, conduct +the two passengers to the—hic—brig and +lock ’em in.”</p> + +<p>“Keep your hands off!” I exclaimed. +“Don’t you dare to touch me!”</p> + +<p>“And don’t you dare to touch me,” added +Dan.</p> + +<p>We had scarcely spoken than Captain Kenny +withdrew his right hand from his pocket and +showed us the muzzle of a revolver.</p> + +<p>“You’ll—hic—obey or take the consequences,” +he hiccoughed. “I’m a peaceful man +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_14">[14]</span>until I’m aroused, and then——” Another hiccough +ended the sentence.</p> + +<p>I must say that I was both alarmed and disgusted, +but my disgust was greater than my +alarm, for I knew I had right on my side and was +willing to wager that in his present condition +Captain Kenny could not hit the broadside of +a barn, excepting by accident.</p> + +<p>The two sailors advanced, but they came on +slowly, evidently having no relish for the job at +hand. When the Swede attempted to take hold +of me I flung him off.</p> + +<p>“Stand back!” I said, and at the same time +Dan motioned Carden to keep his distance.</p> + +<p>“Are you going to do as I ordered?” fumed +the captain.</p> + +<p>“I vos reatty to opey orders, captain,” said +Yarson.</p> + +<p>“So am I, cap’n, if you say it’s all right,” +added Carden.</p> + +<p>“It is all—hic—right. Arrest ’em—arrest +’em on the spot!” vociferated the skipper of the +<i>Dart</i>.</p> + +<p>“You keep your distance,” I ordered. “If +you don’t it will be the worse for you.”</p> + +<p>“The first man who touches me will get +knocked down,” said Dan, and caught up a +marline spike which hung by the mast.</p> + +<p>“Captain, I think we really ought to look to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_15">[15]</span>those sails,” pleaded Dawson, taking hold of his +chief’s arm. “It won’t do to lose ’em, you +know.”</p> + +<p>“Didn’t I say I’d take care of ’em when I’m—hic—through +with these fellows?” was the +surly return. “Stand back, Dawson!” and +now the captain rushed forward and leveled his +pistol at my head. “You march to the brig, +and be quick about it, or I’ll——”</p> + +<p>What Captain Kenny would have done, had I +refused to march as ordered, I never learned, +for while he was speaking Dan made a rush forward +and caught the pistol from his hand and +sent him flat on his back, in the bargain. Then +my companion stepped to my side, and both of +us backed up toward the companion way.</p> + +<p>For fully a minute Captain Kenny lay where +he had fallen, nobody caring to go to his assistance. +Then he cried loudly to the sailors to +help him get up, and they did so. In the meantime +Tom Dawson stood by, scratching his head +in perplexity.</p> + +<p>“Captain, we must attend to the sails,” +he began, when there came a sudden puff of air, +and the <i>Dart</i> seemed to fairly stand up on ends. +I had to catch hold of the companion-way rail to +keep from falling, and Dan held on, too. Captain +Kenny collapsed and went sliding into the +mainmast, and then toward the lee rail.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_16">[16]</span>“Save me!” he yelled, when he felt that he +could not help himself. “Save me!” And +Dawson and the American sailor immediately +ran to his assistance.</p> + +<p>It was all I could do now to save myself from +being thrown down the companion way, and for +the time being I lost interest in Captain Kenny. +“This is awful!” I said to Dan. “I believe we +are in for another hurricane.”</p> + +<p>“The fools ought to take in every rag of canvas,” +was the reply. “Tom Dawson hasn’t any +backbone, or he’d take matters in his own +hands.”</p> + +<p>“Let us go below,” I went on, as a wave +swept the deck, drenching us both. “There is +no use of remaining here.”</p> + +<p>Dan tumbled down the companion way and +into the cabin, and I came after him, stumbling +over an empty rum bottle which was rolling +over the floor. From the cabin we went to our +stateroom, to see that the port was tightly +closed.</p> + +<p>“I think I’ll keep this pistol until we reach +Manila,” observed my companion. “You know +I haven’t any weapon of my own. I wish I had +some extra cartridges.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps the caliber of my pistol is the same +as Captain Kenny’s weapon,” I suggested, and +produced my little six-shooter. Both pistols +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_17">[17]</span>used the same size of cartridge, and I divided a +box of those articles between us, and shoved my +share and my revolver in my pocket.</p> + +<p>We now heard a hurried tramping on deck, +and soon the creaking of blocks as the main +and mizzen courses came down on the run. +Soon every rag of canvas was furled, this being +done by Dawson’s directions, as I afterward +learned, Captain Kenny having been knocked +partly unconscious by his tumble upon the lee +rail.</p> + +<p>A half hour went by, a time that to Dan and +I seemed an age. The <i>Dart</i> tumbled and tossed, +and it was all we could do to keep from having +our brains dashed out against the stateroom +walls.</p> + +<p>“We would have done much better had we +taken a steamer to Manila,” I remarked, when +the hurricane seemed to be at its height. “If +we get out of this storm we have still our row +with the captain to be settled up.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind, Oliver, we ought to reach +Manila in a couple of days. If the captain attempts +to arrest us again, I’ll give him warning +that I’ll have him up before the court at the first +landing we make.”</p> + +<p>“He ought to have his vessel taken away from +him. Do you suppose the owners would keep +him in command if they knew of his habits?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_18">[18]</span>“As it happens he owns a one-fourth interest +in the <i>Dart</i>, and his contract says he shall be +skipper, so Dawson told me,” answered Dan. +“I’ll wager Dawson will have a story to tell +when he comes below. My, what a sea must be +running!” And my companion swung forward +and back with the motion of the schooner. +“And see how dark it is getting!”</p> + +<p>It was so gloomy we could scarcely see each +other. It had now begun to lighten and +thunder, while the rain came down in perfect +sheets. We huddled together, as if feeling instinctively +that something out of the ordinary +was about to occur.</p> + +<p>And it did occur a moment later. A clap of +thunder had just rolled away when there came a +cry from the deck, so appalling that it could be +distinctly heard above the fury of the elements.</p> + +<p>“Ship, ahoy! Don’t run us down!”</p> + +<p>The cry was followed by a tearing, grinding, +sickening crash that I shall never forget. The +crash threw me headlong and I lay at Dan’s feet +for several seconds, completely dazed.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_19">[19]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER III.<br> +<small>IN WHICH DAN AND I BECOME SEPARATED.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“We are struck, Oliver, get up!”</p> + +<p>“Oh, my head!” I groaned, for I had struck +the stateroom wall a blow by no means gentle.</p> + +<p>“We must get on deck!” urged my companion. +“We have run into another ship and may +be sinking!”</p> + +<p>Collecting my scattered senses as best I could, +I arose and caught Dan by the arm. Soon we +were mounting the companion-way stairs, two +steps at a time. As we emerged into the +open the downpour of rain and flying spray +nearly drowned us.</p> + +<p>A vivid flash of lightning lit up the scene, and +looking to port we saw a big Chinese vessel +bearing away, with a broken bowsprit and a big +hole in her side, well forward. We also saw that +our own deck was filled with fallen rigging and +wooden splinters.</p> + +<p>“Sound the pumps!” was the cry, coming +from Tom Dawson. “Quigley, see if you can +make out the damage”—the last words to the +ship’s carpenter.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_20">[20]</span>“We got it pretty heavily,” gasped Dan, who +was about as much winded as myself. “Pray +heaven we may outride the shock and the +storm.”</p> + +<p>Several sailors had sprung to the pumps and +were pumping up sea water in great quantities. +“A foot and four inches,” cried one. “And +gaining rapidly!” he announced, a minute later.</p> + +<p>Those last words caused every cheek to +blanch. For the time there was almost a panic. +But now Tom Dawson showed what was really +in him.</p> + +<p>“Keep your wits about you, men!” he called +out. “We may yet be able to stop the leak and +pump her out. Keep to the work for all you are +worth!” And the men at the pumps obeyed, +while the mate hurried forward to obtain the +carpenter’s report.</p> + +<p>It was soon forthcoming. The blow had been +so severe that a gaping hole, four feet in diameter, +had been stove in the <i>Dart’s</i> bow. It was +partly above and partly below the water line, +but in such a sea the water was coming in by the +hundreds of gallons at every lurch of the +schooner.</p> + +<p>“I’ll try to stop it up,” said Quigley, but +shook his head as he spoke. “You had better +order the small boats out, and stock ’em with +water and grub,” and he ran off.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_21">[21]</span>By this time Captain Kenny was up once +more, but in his condition could do little but +find fault and use language not fit to transcribe +to these pages. Once he tried to take the command +from Tom Dawson, but the mate would +not listen.</p> + +<p>“We’re sinking, Captain Kenny,” said Dawson. +“I must do what I can for the men and +myself.”</p> + +<p>“Sinking!” gasped the unreasonable one. +“Sinking!”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sinking. Keep your wits about you or +you’ll go to Davy Jones’ locker,” concluded +Tom Dawson. His remarks so frightened the +captain that he ran to the cabin, there to plunder +his trunks and lockers in a drunken and vain +effort to stow what he owned of value about his +person.</p> + +<p>The carpenter was as good as his word, but +although he labored manfully and had all the aid +that could be used, the water could not be +stopped from coming in. The shock had opened +up half a dozen seams and the water in the hold +had reached four feet and a half.</p> + +<p>“She can’t stand that!” cried Dan, as he +heard the announcement. “She’ll go to the +bottom inside of a quarter of an hour. Oliver, +we are lost, unless we get into one of the small +boats.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_22">[22]</span>“The life-preservers!” I ejaculated. “Let +us each get one of those on, if nothing else!” +and I led the way to where the articles were +stored. While we were adjusting them, the +mate passed us.</p> + +<p>“That’s right,” he cried. “You two shall go +in our boat. We’ll leave in about five minutes, +if we can catch the sea right.” And then he +disappeared from sight once more.</p> + +<p>I must confess that my heart was in my throat, +and Dan has since told me that he felt just as +awed. “Come down and get what we must +have,” he whispered hoarsely, and once again +we tumbled below to our stateroom, passing +Captain Kenny as he tore around his cabin like +a man bereft of his reason.</p> + +<p>“You are responsible for this!” he growled. +“If it hadn’t been for you no accident would +have happened.” For a wonder, his fright had +quite sobered him, even though he was half +crazy as before mentioned.</p> + +<p>There was not much to get, for we knew that +trunks or even traveling bags would not be taken +into the small boats. I donned a little extra +clothing and was about to get out my money +belt, containing some gold and silver and a draft +on a Manila banking institution, when a call from +above reached us.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_23">[23]</span>“To the boats! To the boats!” came the cry +from the deck, and a scurry of footsteps followed. +Grabbing each other by the hand we +leaped for the companion way, to find our passage +blocked by Captain Kenny.</p> + +<p>“Let us up!” cried Dan, and tried to get past +the man, but the captain merely shoved him +back.</p> + +<p>“I’m the one to go—you can stay here, hang +ye!” he hissed.</p> + +<p>“Stay here? Not much!” I burst out, and +catching him by the legs, I shot him up on deck +as if he had been fired from a spring gun. He +tried to turn and strike me, but I avoided the +blow with ease.</p> + +<p>The <i>Dart</i> had now settled so much that every +wave washed her deck from stem to stern. +“Look out, or you’ll go down!” roared Dan in +my ear, but the caution was not needed, for I +was already exercising all the care possible in +making my way to the boat Tom Dawson was to +command.</p> + +<p>There were four small craft and twenty of us +all told. This gave five persons to a boat, the +first being in command of Captain Kenny, the +second in command of Tom Dawson, while the +second mate and the boatswain had the others +under their care.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_24">[24]</span>“I reckon you two want to keep together,” +said Dawson, as we reached his side. “I can’t +blame you, but——”</p> + +<p>“Don’t put those two landlubbers in one +boat!” roared Captain Kenny. “It’s bad +enough to have ’em at all. Put one in your +boat and one in Brown’s,” indicating the second +mate.</p> + +<p>“Oh, can’t we go together?” I whispered to +Dawson.</p> + +<p>“We ought to have at least four experienced +sailors in each boat,” was the mate’s reply. +“Do as the captain commanded, and we’ll see +if we can’t keep the small boats together.”</p> + +<p>And with this he shoved Dan into his own +boat and turned me back to join the party under +Watt Brown, the second mate.</p> + +<p>My heart now beat more painfully than ever. +“Good-by, Dan, if we don’t meet again!” I +said huskily.</p> + +<p>“Good-by, Oliver,” he answered. “Oh, if +only we could go together!” And then we +parted in the darkness, and I scuttled for the +boat that was already awaiting me.</p> + +<p>How we ever got over the <i>Dart’s</i> side and +away from the settling schooner I cannot describe +to this day. Amid the roar of thunder +and the flashing of lightning, the small boat was +swung out. Three sailors were at the oars, while +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_25">[25]</span>the mate stood ready with a hatchet to cut the +davit ropes. Down we went, to strike the rolling +sea with a resounding smack that almost +pitched me overboard. “Steady now! Pull! +pull!” came the command, and away the sailors +pulled, while a bit of rope snapped down and hit +me across the cheek, nearly blinding me. For +the next few minutes I felt as if I was roller-coasting +up one mountain side and down another.</p> + +<p>When I was able to look around me another +flash of lightning lit up the scene. Behind us +rested the <i>Dart</i>, well over on her port side, as +though getting ready to take her final plunge +beneath the waves of the sea. To the left of us +was one small boat and to the right the others.</p> + +<p>“Are we away all right?” I asked of the +second mate.</p> + +<p>“Can’t say—yet,” was his laconic answer, and +I felt that he did not wish to be questioned further. +I wanted to aid in handling the boat, but +was not allowed to do anything. “Just wait, +lad, your time may come,” said one of the sailors +grimly, and I shuddered, for I knew what he +meant—that it might be many a weary day before +we would sight land, if land were sighted at +all. Perhaps that very sea upon which we were +riding would prove our open grave.</p> + +<p>Five minutes passed in painful suspense and +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_26">[26]</span>then the lightning lit up the firmament again. +“Look! look!” yelled Watt Brown, and at the +sound of the second mate’s voice all in the boat +turned, to see one of the craft to our starboard +founder beneath a curling wave that looked +higher than a six-story office building.</p> + +<p>“What boat is that?” I cried.</p> + +<p>“Don’t know exactly, but it looked like Tom +Dawson’s,” was the answer, which almost prostrated +me. Was it possible that Dan had been +lost thus quickly?</p> + +<p>“Won’t you try to pick them up?” I went on, +when I could speak. “Surely you won’t forsake +them!”</p> + +<p>“We’ll try it,—but it’s wuss nor looking for +a pin in a haystack,” was the second mate’s reply. +“To starboard, boys, but don’t get caught +under a capper, or it will be all up with us.” +And then our own craft veered around and +moved slowly and painfully over the billows to +the spot where the other small boat had gone +down.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_27">[27]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER IV.<br> +<small>THE RESCUE OF THE UNWORTHY ONE.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>I was in a tremble of excitement, and for the +moment forgot all about my own peril. Since +coming to the far East, or West, as you will, I +had become greatly attached to Dan Holbrook; +indeed he seemed like a brother to me. If he +was lost, what would I do, even if we were fortunate +to reach some part of the Island of Luzon, +upon which the city of Manila is located?</p> + +<p>But a treacherous wave, mountain-high, +brought me to a sudden realization of my own +condition. “Hold hard!” I heard Watt Brown +yell, and I held to the seat with all of my might, +and this was all that prevented me from being +swept overboard.</p> + +<p>We had shipped a good deal of water, and I +was ordered to bail out the small craft, while the +sailors continued at the oars, assisted by the +second mate. There was a big dipper handy +and I think I can truthfully say that I never +worked harder in my life than I did then, meanwhile +continuing to hold on with one hand.</p> + +<p>It was fully ten minutes ere we reached the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_28">[28]</span>locality where the small boat had foundered. In +the meanwhile flash after flash of lightning had +lit up the scene, showing the <i>Dart</i> far to the +northward, driving rapidly before the fury of the +storm. But at last distance and the steady +downpour of rain hid the vessel from view, and +we could not tell if she sunk or not.</p> + +<p>“A man!” It was the second mate who +uttered the words, and a head bobbed up just +alongside of our bow. At once the mate +dropped his oar and seized the individual by his +hair. Then he caught hold of an arm and in a +trice the fellow was on board, where he fell in a +heap at the bottom of our craft. It was Captain +Kenny.</p> + +<p>“The captain’s boat,” observed Watt Brown, +and I breathed a long sigh of relief, thinking that +Dan might yet be safe. “I wonder if Yarson, +Betts, Camar, and Dilwoddy are floating +around?”</p> + +<p>He referred to the four sailors that had accompanied +the captain in the first boat. Standing +up as best he could, he waited for another flash +of lightning and gazed around hurriedly. Not +another soul was in sight.</p> + +<p>“They are gone, I am afraid,” he murmured. +“Keep her head up, lads, and I’ll take another +look.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind the others,” growled Captain +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_29">[29]</span>Kenny, struggling to a seat. “We must save +ourselves. Pull on, or we’ll be swamped.”</p> + +<p>“You wretch!” I cried indignantly. “Supposing +we had left you to shift for yourself?”</p> + +<p>“Shut up, boy, or——”</p> + +<p>“The lad is right, captain,” interrupted Watt +Brown. “It was no more to us to save you than +it is to save Betts and the rest. Remember, the +<i>Dart</i> has been abandoned and now one man is as +good as another.”</p> + +<p>“Do you mean to say I am not still in command?” +roared Captain Kenny in a fury that was +positively silly.</p> + +<p>“No, you’re not!” spoke up one of the men +at the oars. “Sit still, or I’ll be in for heaving +you overboard again,” and this was said so +harshly that the captain sunk back without another +word.</p> + +<p>The long hours of the night which followed +were filled with an anxiety which words cannot +describe. The sailors at the oars could do nothing +but keep the small boat head up to the waves +and at times they became so exhausted, as the +sea ran stronger and stronger, that more than +one was ready to drop in a faint. I took an oar +for two hours and then had to relinquish the +blade, for fear it would be torn from my grasp +and lost.</p> + +<p>It was about five o’clock in the morning when +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_30">[30]</span>the hurricane abated. As is usual in this locality, +the storm let up as quickly as it had gathered. +The rain stopped and the wind dropped +all in a few minutes, and in less than an hour the +sun was shining down upon us from a cloudless +sky. The sea, however, still ran dangerously +high.</p> + +<p>“Do you see anything?” I asked of the second +mate, as he balanced himself on one of the middle +seats and took a careful look about the horizon.</p> + +<p>“Nothing,” was his disheartening answer. +“Not a sail or a small boat in sight.”</p> + +<p>“Then the other boats must be lost,” and my +heart sank again.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not. The wind during the night +may have carried us miles apart.”</p> + +<p>We knew we must be a good distance from +land, but we also knew that we were somewhere +to the westward of Luzon, so the only thing to +do was to steer a course due east and trust to +sight the shore before our provisions gave out.</p> + +<p>We had on board but two articles, a keg of +ship’s biscuits and a keg of water. Several other +things had been put into the small craft, but +these had either been washed overboard or +ruined by the salt water which I had bailed out.</p> + +<p>“By close economy we can make the biscuits +last three days, and the water about as long,” announced +the second mate. “We ought to make +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_31">[31]</span>shore long before that time expires.” And he +proceeded to deal out a breakfast of two biscuits +and one cup of water to each person.</p> + +<p>“I want more than two biscuits and I am +bound to have them!” cried Captain Kenny and +leaped for the biscuit keg. But instantly Watt +Brown and two of the sailors confronted him, +one with an upraised oar, and again he subsided. +After that all of the others watched him carefully.</p> + +<p>As I have said, the sea still ran high, and we +soon learned that to steer in a due east course +was impossible. We had to head to the northeast +and at times almost due north.</p> + +<p>“This will take us a good many miles to the +north of Manila Bay, even if we strike shore,” +observed Watt Brown to me. “I calkerlate we +are already some miles north of Subig Bay.”</p> + +<p>“Well, I hardly care where we land, if only we +escape the sea,” I returned. “I have no desire +to fill a watery grave, as Betts and the others +have done.”</p> + +<p>“I think we are safe on making shore—providing +we don’t strike another hurricane, Raymond.” +Then the second mate leaned close to +me. “Watch out for the captain, he has it in +for you,” he whispered. “He’s a bad man when +he’s got a spell on.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll be on my guard,” I replied. I almost +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_32">[32]</span>wished we had saved somebody else in place of +the unreasonable skipper of the <i>Dart</i>.</p> + +<p>The morning passed away slowly. By eleven +o’clock the sun was almost directly overhead and +it was so hot that all craved a shelter that could +not be had. The cup of water dealt out at noon +seemed pitiably small, but nobody but the captain +complained, understanding only too well +what the horrors of thirst would be should our +supply give out.</p> + +<p>Toward night another storm came up, principally +of wind. Again the waves increased in +height, sending us up to a very mountain top +one moment and then letting us down into a +gigantic hollow which looked ready to engulf us +forever. We still drove northward at a rate of +ten to twelve miles an hour.</p> + +<p>Having had no sleep for forty-eight hours I +was utterly worn out, and when the storm let up +a bit, sometime after midnight, I sank in a bunch +on my seat and closed my eyes. “It’s all right, +catch a nap if you can,” said the second mate. +Soon I was sleeping as soundly as if in my bed at +home, although disturbed by the wildest of +dreams.</p> + +<p>I awoke with a start, to find a firm hand on my +shoulder and Captain Kenny glaring into my +face. “You’re to be number two, lad!” he +hissed. “We’ll save the water and biscuits for a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_33">[33]</span>better mouth!” And then he lifted me up and +attempted to hurl me into the sea!</p> + +<p>For the fraction of a second my tongue was +too paralyzed to utter a sound; then I let out an +ear-splitting yell that brought Watt Brown and +one of the sailors to my immediate aid. “Let +go of me!” I cried. “He wants to heave me +overboard!”</p> + +<p>“Let him alone!” commanded Brown, and +hauled Captain Kenny backward. The sailor hit +him a heavy crack on the head, and down went +the captain on the boat’s bottom unconscious.</p> + +<p>“I told ye to be watchful of him,” said the +second mate, when it was all over. “If Captain +Kenny is your enemy onct he’s your enemy +allers, don’t forgit that.”</p> + +<p>“He said something to me about being number +two,” I said. “What did he—a man is +gone!”</p> + +<p>I had glanced around hastily, to discover that +one of the oar hands was missing. Watt Brown +followed my gaze.</p> + +<p>“Garwell!” murmured the second mate. His +face grew dark, and in justifiable indignation he +leaped to where Captain Kenny lay and shook +the unconscious man vigorously. “Where is +Garwell!” he cried out. “Tell me, captain, or +I’ll pitch ye overboard! Where is Garwell?”</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_34">[34]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER V.<br> +<small>CAST ASHORE ON LUZON.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>To Watt Brown’s vigorous questioning Captain +Kenny returned not a word. Either he was +still unconscious or he had recovered and come +to the conclusion that he had best remain quiet +and answer nothing. The mate had caught the +captain up, now he flung him down on the hard +bottom of the boat as one unworthy of being +touched. “I’ll settle with him later,” he muttered +and shut his teeth hard, for the missing +man had been one of his best friends.</p> + +<p>“Hadn’t we better stay around here until daylight +and look for Garwell?” asked Sandram, +the sailor who had used his fist so effectually +upon Captain Kenny’s skull.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said the second mate. “Poor Garwell! +He was a fine fellow.”</p> + +<p>“None better, Brown,” put in Vincent, the +second sailor. “Captain Kenny will have +a score to settle when this ill-fated cruise comes +to an end.”</p> + +<p>Slowly the remainder of the night dragged by. +With the coming of daylight we gazed around +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_35">[35]</span>eagerly for the body of Garwell and for the other +small boats. Nothing came to light but the +bluish-green and never-quiet sea, which rose and +fell to the edge of the horizon.</p> + +<p>“I want water,” was Captain Kenny’s demand, +as he roused up while the scanty breakfast +was being dealt out.</p> + +<p>“Not a drop until you account for Garwell,” +returned Watt Brown.</p> + +<p>“Account for Garwell? What do you +mean?”</p> + +<p>“You know well enough. You heaved the +poor man overboard.”</p> + +<p>“I did not,” roared the captain, but his telltale +face belied his words. “This is a put-up +job against me. Give me the water.”</p> + +<p>A wordy war followed. Captain Kenny would +confess nothing, but that he was guilty there +could be no doubt. All that the second mate +would allow him was one biscuit and half a cupful +of the water, now so warm it was scarcely +palatable. The captain continued to grumble, +but it availed him nothing, and at last he had to +stop, for all of us threatened to send him forth as +food for the fishes.</p> + +<p>The second day was coming to an end when +far to the eastward we heard a curious booming +sound, not unlike a cannonading at a distance.</p> + +<p>“What is that?” I questioned.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_36">[36]</span>“It’s the surf, lad!” cried the second mate. +“It’s rolling up on a shore or over a hidden +reef.”</p> + +<p>“I hope it’s ashore. Any kind of land in +preference to this never-ending sea,” I said. +“Can you see anything?”</p> + +<p>I asked the latter question, for Watt Brown +was already on his feet. Now Vincent followed, +and both gazed eastward a long time.</p> + +<p>“I think I see something,” announced the +second mate. “But it looks like smoke more +than anything.”</p> + +<p>“It is smoke, blowing from off shore,” put in +Vincent. “We must be about ten miles from +land.”</p> + +<p>This announcement filled us with hope, and +all, even Captain Kenny, took their turns at the +oars with renewed vigor. Inside of an hour the +booming of the surf could be heard quite distinctly, +while some of the smoke the others had +noticed floated almost overhead.</p> + +<p>“I see land!” was the second mate’s welcome +cry presently. “There is a long, low-lying +shore and a mountain behind it. We must +be at least a hundred miles north of Subig +Bay.”</p> + +<p>We continued to pull until the land could be +seen with ease. There was a wide stretch of +sandy beach, backed up by tall rocks and a heavy +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_37">[37]</span>tropical growth. In the distance the mountain +loomed up, surrounded by a veil-like mist.</p> + +<p>“To port!” cried Watt Brown. “The breakers +are too heavy here!” And we moved up the +coast for a quarter of a mile further. Here there +was something of a bay and the breakers came to +an end. Nearer and nearer we crept to land +until the first row of stately palms could be seen +with ease. The mate was on the watch, and +finally ordered us to port again, and five minutes +later, we shot past a tiny coral reef and into +the bay mentioned. Here the boat ran up upon +the sands, and, throwing down our oars, we all +leaped out and hauled her up still further.</p> + +<p>“Thank God we’re safe!” murmured Watt +Brown, and took off his cap reverently. I did +the same, and offered up a silent prayer for my +safe deliverance from the perils of the deep.</p> + +<p>The bay we had entered was pear-shaped and +probably five hundred feet deep by a hundred +and fifty feet wide. The sandy beach at either +side was many yards wide, but at the inner end +the rocks and trees overhung the water. From +a tropical standpoint it was an ideal spot for a +painter, and I could not help but take in its +beauty, even at such a trying time as this. Captain +Kenny, however, “stuck up his nose” at it.</p> + +<p>“A regular jungle,” he snorted. “We can’t +live here.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_38">[38]</span>“Then you had better take to the water +again,” returned Watt Brown sharply. “You +haven’t got to stay with us, you know.” And +this again silenced the unreasonable man for the +time being.</p> + +<p>It was decided that Vincent should walk up +the shore on the lookout for the other boats, +while Sandram was to skirt the bay and try his +luck in the opposite direction. In the meantime +the captain, second mate, and myself were to do +what we could toward building a fire and finding +something to eat beside ship’s biscuits.</p> + +<p>“You go find something to eat,” grumbled +Captain Kenny to Watt Brown and me, and +threw himself under the nearest tree to rest.</p> + +<p>“All right, we’ll go,” answered the second +mate. “But remember, Kenny, if you haven’t +got a good fire started for us when we come +back, so we can cook whatever we find, you’ll not +partake of our supper.” And with this pointed +remark Brown withdrew and I followed.</p> + +<p>“He’s a beast,” I said, when we were out of +hearing. “I would rather have Ah Sid in the +crowd.”</p> + +<p>Ah Sid had been the <i>Dart’s</i> cook, a little dried-up +Chinaman, but a fellow who had always tried +to make himself agreeable.</p> + +<p>“If he doesn’t behave himself I’ll bounce him +out of camp,” was the second mate’s answer. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_39">[39]</span>“Remember, he is absolutely nothing to us, now +we are on land.”</p> + +<p>“Where do you suppose we are?”</p> + +<p>“Somewhere north of Subig Bay, or Port +Subig, as the English call it. We were making +for Point Capones when that dirty hurricane +struck our ship and sent us into that Chinese +junk. I think we must be somewhere in the +neighborhood of Iba, a settlement something +like a hundred miles northwest of Manila. But +we may be still further away.”</p> + +<p>“And what of the natives around here?”</p> + +<p>“They are treacherous people, so I’ve been +told. The majority of them are Tagals, or +<i>Tagaloes</i>, as the Spanish call ’em. You know all +of these islands belong to Spain.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, I know that only too well, for the Spaniards +at Manila have caused our business firm no +end of trouble. They want to drive the Americans +out, if they can.”</p> + +<p>“They would like to drive all foreigners out, +so that they can have the wealth of the Philippines +to themselves,” went on the second mate, +who was, as I soon discovered, a well-read man. +“You see the islands pay an immense sum of +money into Spain’s treasury every year.”</p> + +<p>“But what of this rebellion here, that I heard +of at Hong Kong?”</p> + +<p>“Oh, the natives are continually fighting +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_40">[40]</span>among themselves and against the Spanish tax-gatherers, +who have their offices located everywhere. +You see there is a terribly mixed population, +of Tagals, Malays, Papuan negroes, +Chinese, Japanese, and Caucasians, with half- +and quarter-breeds without number. I understand +the Spaniards can count over a hundred +different kinds of natives alone, and in the islands +over a hundred and fifty different languages and +dialects are spoken. It’s a great country. But, +come, we must rouse up something to eat.”</p> + +<p>“I have my pistol and some cartridges,” I +said, and showed my weapon.</p> + +<p>“Keep your ammunition until you actually +need it, lad. We can knock over something +alive, as the natives do, with clubs.”</p> + +<p>In such a tropical forest clubs were soon +found, and, holding these ready for use, we +tramped on, through thick, dank moss and under +masses of trailing vines.</p> + +<p>“There they go!” shouted Watt Brown suddenly, +as a whir sounded out ahead. A dozen +or more good-sized birds had arisen and his club +brought down two. Then came another whir +to our right, and I let fly and brought down a +beautiful white pigeon that weighed all of two +pounds. Another pigeon was wounded and I +managed to catch it alive and wring its neck. +With this haul we returned to the beach.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_41">[41]</span>The second mate’s warning had had its effect +upon Captain Kenny, and a roaring blaze +greeted us, which, in the gathering twilight +looked quite homelike. The captain had also +kicked up about a bucketful of shell-fish in the +shallow water of the cove.</p> + +<p>By the time the fish and other things were +cooked, Vincent and Sandram came back, each +having traveled a good mile out and return. +Both brought back with them some nearly ripe +plantains, commonly called bananas in America. +All were hungry, and never did a meal taste better +than did that to me, although I have dined at +some of our leading hotels.</p> + +<p>“I saw nothing but some driftwood,” reported +Sandram. “The wood looked as if it +might have belonged to the <i>Dart</i>, but I couldn’t +get close enough to make sure, as it was out on +a reef, among the breakers.”</p> + +<p>Vincent had seen nothing of boats or crews, +but had made a most grewsome discovery.</p> + +<p>“I thought at a distance they might be big +cocoanuts, lying upon the sand,” he said. +“But when I came closer I discovered that they +were the heads of seven negroes, all of whom +had been buried in a circle in the sand up to +their necks.”</p> + +<p>“Negroes’ heads!” I ejaculated. “And +were the poor fellows dead?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_42">[42]</span>“Yes, and had been for some time, for the +birds had pecked out their eyes and carried off +parts of their flesh.”</p> + +<p>“This is awful, Brown,” I said. “Persons +who would do that cannot be short of—of——”</p> + +<p>“Cannibals, eh, lad?” returned the mate. +“Well, some savages around here are cannibals +yet, Spanish reports to the contrary notwithstanding. +But I don’t like that ring of heads. +It is an old sign among the Malays, and signifies +that one tribe of people have made war on another +tribe.”</p> + +<p>“If that’s the case, I hope they don’t make +war on us,” put in Sandram.</p> + +<p>“So do I,” I added; and there the talk +dropped, for at that moment a sight far out on +the ocean thrilled us to the core.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_43">[43]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VI.<br> +<small>ADVENTURES IN THE FOREST.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>The sight that met our gaze was a small boat +dancing far out beyond the breakers. It contained +three men, and as it came in closer, +through the opening by which we had entered, +we made out Tom Dawson, Ah Sid, the Chinese +cook, and Matt Gory, an Irish sailor.</p> + +<p>“It is Dawson’s craft,” murmured Watt +Brown. “But it’s only got three men aboard +instead of five.”</p> + +<p>“Dan Holbrook is missing!” I gasped, and +once again my heart sank like a lump of lead +within my bosom.</p> + +<p>“Boat ahoy!” yelled Vincent and the others, +and the cry was speedily returned. Then Tom +Dawson noted where we had run in, and ten +minutes later beached his craft beside our own.</p> + +<p>“Glad to see ye!” he cried, as he caught one +after another by the hand. “I was afraid all of +the other boats had gone to the bottom.”</p> + +<p>“The captain’s boat went down,” answered +Watt Brown soberly. “We saved Captain +Kenny, but could see nothing of the rest.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_44">[44]</span>“And where is Dan Holbrook?” I put in +impatiently.</p> + +<p>“It’s a sorry tale to tell, lad,” answered the +first mate of the ill-fated <i>Dart</i>.</p> + +<p>“He was—was drowned?” I could scarcely +speak the words.</p> + +<p>“He was. You see it was this way. We +were running along during the night and all +hands were utterly worn out and half asleep. +Suddenly a wave as big as a church bore down +on us and nearly swamped our craft. I went +overboard and so did Dan Holbrook and Casey. +All of us went under, and when I came up and +clambered aboard again, Holbrook and Casey +were missing.”</p> + +<p>“Yis, poor Casey was missin’, God rist his +sowl!” murmured Matt Gory, who was the missing +man’s cousin. He turned to me. “Was +you an’ Mister Holbrook related, me b’y?” he +questioned tenderly.</p> + +<p>“No, but—but Dan was almost like a +brother,” I answered, in a voice that choked me, +and then I had to turn away to hide the tears +that would come.</p> + +<p>The only man who seemed to enjoy my sorrow +was Captain Kenny, who leered at me in a manner +that made me feel like leaping upon him and +hurling him under my feet to be trampled upon. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_45">[45]</span>He was my enemy now, and I felt he would be +my enemy as long as both of us lived.</p> + +<p>The only grain of comfort that I could give +myself was the fact that Tom Dawson’s craft had +struck the big wave not far from the coast line. +It was barely possible that Dan had kept himself +afloat until cast up on the beach, although, to +be sure, this was far from likely.</p> + +<p>The night was spent under the palm trees +which lined the beach. As Vincent had made +such a ghastly discovery, it was decided that all +hands should take an hour at watching. I was +awake from one o’clock to two on my own watch +and also from five to six, when Captain Kenny +stood guard, but nothing happened to disturb +the improvised camp.</p> + +<p>It was easy to obtain birds, and shell and other +fish, and by eight o’clock an appetizing breakfast +was in preparation. While eating we discussed +our situation and decided to remain where +we were for one day more, hoping to learn what +had become of the fourth small boat and those +who were still missing.</p> + +<p>As I had had such luck in knocking over the +two pigeons I was delegated to go out again to +replenish our larder and was accompanied this +time by Tom Dawson and Gory, the Irish sailor, +who had visited the island of Luzon twice before. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_46">[46]</span>In the meantime the others made an even longer +tour than before, up and down the shore.</p> + +<p>“It’s a great counthry, so it is,” observed Matt +Gory, as the three of us strode into the forest. +“They have a mixed-up population, as you was +sayin’, and the foightin’ is worse tin toimes over +nor a Donnybrook Fair. Thim Spaniards be +afther thinkin’ they kin control the nagers an’ +other haythins, but they can’t. They are a +thavin’, lyin’ set, an’ would be afther stabbin’ +yez in the back fer a tin-cint piece.”</p> + +<p>“But the Spaniards control Manila and the +other large cities.”</p> + +<p>“So they do, me b’y. But that’s not a drop +in the bucket, so to spake, wid millions o’ haythins +living on a thousand or more islands, some +of which have niver yit been visited by white +men. It will take two or three cinturies to make +these nagers half dasent, so it will!” And Matt +Gory shook his head to show that he meant all +that he said.</p> + +<p>Our talking, and the fire on the beach, had evidently +caused an alarm among the feathered +denizens of the forest, for we had to walk a considerable +distance before we roused up any game +worth bringing down. All of us had provided +ourselves with clubs and in about an hour we had +secured eight birds and a small squirrel, which I +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_47">[47]</span>had dislodged from a hollow tree quite by accident.</p> + +<p>“There’s a foin birrud!” cried Gory presently. +“Hould back, both of yez, an’ Oi’ll bring +him down!” And he crept off to our left.</p> + +<p>He was gone fully three minutes, when we +heard the crash of his club among some tree +branches, followed by a yell of wonder and then +a scream of fright. “He has stirred up the +wrong hornet!” ejaculated Tom Dawson. +“Come on!” And away he bounded, with I following.</p> + +<p>When we reached the Irish sailor he was leaning +against a tree, trying to knock from his +shoulder a bat that we afterward found measured +three feet from one wing tip to the other. The +bat had clutched him firmly and was dealing blow +after blow, first with one wing and then the +other.</p> + +<p>“Save me! Hilp! Save me!” gasped Gory, +whose wind was almost gone, and now a blow on +his forehead sent him to the foot of the tree.</p> + +<p>Tom Dawson threw his club, but missed his +mark. While he was running to secure his +weapon once more, I leaped forward and hit the +bat over the head. Instantly he came for me, +and I received a crack on the cheek that left its +mark for several hours. But now another blow +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_48">[48]</span>from my club finished him, and away he sailed +with a half-broken wing. I was afraid he would +return, but he passed out of sight among the +overhanging vines, not to come back.</p> + +<p>“Be jabers, that was a birrud I didn’t calculate +on!” gasped Matt Gory when he could +speak. “Phat was it—a floyin’ windmill?”</p> + +<p>“It was a bat, Gory,” I answered. “A +tropical bat—and a whopper.”</p> + +<p>“I want no more such birruds,” was the Irishman’s +response. “Oi reckon Oi’ll be more +careful of phat Oi tackle in the future,” and he +was.</p> + +<p>We walked on for half a mile further, for it was +a clear day and we were not likely to miss our +way. The undergrowth was thick and we moved +with caution, not caring to rouse up some deadly +reptile. On all sides were stately palm, mahogany, +ebony, and other trees of a tropical nature, +and everywhere hung the ponderous vines, some +of them hundreds of feet long and as thick as a +man’s wrist.</p> + +<p>“A snake!” yelled Tom Dawson, of a sudden, +and we all fell back, while I drew my pistol, not +satisfied to trust to a club in such an emergency. +Matt Gory, who had no use for snakes, took to +his heels, and that was the last we saw of him +for fully a quarter of an hour.</p> + +<p>Our alarm proved of short duration, for I soon +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_49">[49]</span>saw what the supposed snake was: the bat we +had previously wounded. It was more than half +dead, and a single blow from Dawson’s stick +finished it, and then we yelled for Gory to return.</p> + +<p>“The Philippine bats knock ours all to pieces,” +observed the first mate. “We had best take him +along.”</p> + +<p>“For eating?” I queried.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps——” Dawson paused. “You +don’t like the idea? Very well, let him go then,” +and he threw the creature into the brush. I +have since heard that among certain of the natives +these bats are considered a great delicacy.</p> + +<p>We had begun to ascend a small hill located +about a quarter of a mile in advance of the mountain +I have mentioned several times. I now +suggested that we push on to the top.</p> + +<p>“We can get a good look around from there,” +I continued. “And it may be that we will see +more than the parties that went up and down +the shore.”</p> + +<p>“Sure an that’s a good idee,” said Matt Gory. +“Let us go to the top by all means.”</p> + +<p>The first mate was willing. “If you don’t +find it a tougher climb than ye calculate on,” he +cautioned.</p> + +<p>The first part of the journey was comparatively +easy, but the nearer we got to the top of the hill +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_50">[50]</span>the steeper became the side, until we could only +progress by pulling ourselves up on one vine +after another. “Sure an if a feller had to do it, +he could be afther makin’ step-ladders of the +voines,” grinned Gory.</p> + +<p>Noon found us at the topmost point, at a +spot where a bit of table land was surrounded by +a score of stately palms many yards in height. +“We can’t see much after all, not unless we +climb a tree,” I observed disappointedly. +“And how we are going to get to the top of one +of those palms is a conundrum to me.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll show you a native trick,” answered Tom +Dawson, and cast around for a suitable vine. +Soon one was found, and he cut off a piece +several yards long. Throwing this around a tree +trunk, he twisted the ends about his hands and +then began to ascend by bracing his feet against +the trunk one after another, at the same time +leaning his weight back so that it was held by the +vine, which was slipped up in company with each +footstep.</p> + +<p>“Yez ought to introduce that sthoyle in +Americky, among the telephone linemen,” observed +Gory, with a twinkle in his eye. “Oi +only trust the vine proves sthrong enough to +hold yez until yez reach the top.”</p> + +<p>Gory’s hope was fulfilled; indeed the bit of +green would have held the weight of a dozen +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_51">[51]</span>men, and once the branches of the palm were +gained, the first mate of the <i>Dart</i> found it an easy +matter to reach the crown of the tree. From +this point a wide expanse of land and sea came +into view, and he scrutinized every point of the +compass with care.</p> + +<p>“There is a native village to the northeast of +here,” he announced. “I can see forty or fifty +bamboo huts and the smoke from several fires. +There is a road running from the village to a +river which winds in behind the mountain back +of us.”</p> + +<p>“And what can you see down to the beach?” +I called up.</p> + +<p>“Nothing to the south of us.” Tom Dawson +turned to look up the coast. “By ginger!” we +heard him exclaim, in a low voice.</p> + +<p>“Phat now?” queried Matt Gory.</p> + +<p>“I see—yes, it is—the wreck of the <i>Dart</i>, cast +up high and dry on the shore!”</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_52">[52]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VII.<br> +<small>THE WRECK ON THE SHORE.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>Tom Dawson’s discovery filled us with amazement +and satisfaction: amazement because all of +us had thought that the schooner lay at the bottom +of the China Sea and satisfaction for the reason +that all thought we might now have a chance +to obtain such of our belongings as still remained +on board of the vessel.</p> + +<p>“You are sure it is the <i>Dart</i>?” I queried, as +the first mate took another long look.</p> + +<p>“Sure, my lad; I know that craft among a +thousand,” was the answer.</p> + +<p>“It’s great news,” put in Matt Gory. “Oi +haven’t much on board, but phat Oi have Oi +want, especially that ould dudeen of mine which +same Oi have smoked these fifteen years.” +Since landing he had bewailed the loss of his +pipe a dozen times.</p> + +<p>“If the <i>Dart</i> is up to the north of here, the +party that went that way must have discovered +her too,” I said, as Tom Dawson descended the +tree.</p> + +<p>“That’s likely, lad. Still, now we have located +her, there is no use in staying here. We +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_53">[53]</span>want our things, and I reckon the boat will furnish +us with all we will need to eat until we get +back to civilized parts again.”</p> + +<p>“We don’t want to lose a minit,” burst out +Gory. “If we do, thim haythins livin’ in these +parts will be afther claimin’ the wreck, an’ thin +they won’t lit us touch a thing.”</p> + +<p>“Can they do that?” I asked of the first mate.</p> + +<p>“They can if they have the power,” was Dawson’s +answer. “In this part of our globe, might +is right in nine cases out of ten. We’ll hurry +all we can, and move directly for the wreck instead +of going down to the old camp.”</p> + +<p>Apparently this was good advice, but in the +end it proved to be just the opposite. We found +that getting down the hill was more difficult +than getting up, and once I took a tumble that +landed me directly in the midst of a clump of +nasty thorns. Matt Gory came after me, and +both of us were stuck and scratched in more +places than I care to mention.</p> + +<p>“Oi’m stabbed!” he moaned. “Hilp me out +av here! Ouch, be the powers, did anywan iver +see such a hole as this fer darnin’ nadles, now?”</p> + +<p>The first mate helped us both, and after that +we proceeded with more caution. Halfway +down the hill we came upon a beautiful spring +of water which was almost as cold as ice, and +here drank our fill.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_54">[54]</span>I must confess that I was very anxious to get +back to the <i>Dart</i>, for, as will be remembered, I +had left my money belt with its precious contents +behind. This belt I had secreted in a hollow +between my stateroom and that next to it, +and I felt it would be safe so long as the elements +did not utterly destroy the ship. Besides +the belt with my gold, silver, and the Manila +draft, I had left behind a large packet of business +papers of great value to our house. If these +were lost, I felt our firm would have more trouble +than ever in the Philippines.</p> + +<p>“It’s queer the <i>Dart</i> didn’t sink in the middle +of the sea,” I observed, as we hurried on +through the forest skirting the shore. “How +do you account for it?”</p> + +<p>“Well, we had a light cargo, for one thing, +and it was packed pretty tightly forward. +Maybe some the boxes got jammed in the hole +that was stove in her,” answered Tom Dawson, +and later on, this proved to be correct.</p> + +<p>The sun was beating down fiercely and the +moment we left the shade of the trees we felt its +full force. But we had now but a short distance +further to go, so we did not slacken our pace.</p> + +<p>“Stop!” cried Tom Dawson suddenly, and +held me back, while he motioned to Matt Gory +to halt.</p> + +<p>“What’s up?” I whispered.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_55">[55]</span>“A dozen natives are in possession of the <i>Dart</i>. +I can see them running all over her!”</p> + +<p>“That’s too bad, so it is!” groaned the Irish +sailor. “To think sech a noble vessel should +become the prize av sech haythins!”</p> + +<p>“Will she really be their prize?” I asked.</p> + +<p>For reply the first mate shrugged his shoulders. +“I don’t know what the law is down +here,” he ventured.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps you can buy them off for a trifle.”</p> + +<p>“Not much! There was a time when natives +like these could be bought off for a string of +beads, a roll of calico or a six-inch looking glass, +but that time is past. They know the value of +gold and silver, even if paper money is beyond +them.”</p> + +<p>“What do you propose to do?”</p> + +<p>“Oh, we’ll go ahead and claim the ship. But +I want to give you a bit of advice. Don’t be +rash, or it may cost you your life.”</p> + +<p>“Thrue fer you,” put in Gory. “Them +nagers aint to be thrusted, as I said before. Go +slow, and be on your guard.”</p> + +<p>“I will be cautious,” I answered, and as the +memory of the circle of heads on the beach +flashed across my mind I shuddered. Certainly +these people, even if they did live but a few miles +from the Spanish settlements, were far from civilized.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_56">[56]</span>Looking to it that my pistol was ready for +use, I followed Dawson out on the wide stretch +of beach which separated us from the ill-fated +vessel which we had left but a few days before. +The <i>Dart</i> lay high out of the water, and a brief +glance showed that she had lost none of her +masts and but little of her rigging. “I’ll wager +that five hundred dollars will put her into as +good a condition as ever,” remarked Tom Dawson, +and Matt Gory agreed with him.</p> + +<p>As the first mate had said, there were a number +of natives on the craft’s deck, and now we +noted another batch of the negroes on the +shore.</p> + +<p>“They are a hard looking-crowd,” I whispered, +as I gazed at them. They were all men, +tall, slim, and wearing little but shirts and loin-cloths +and head-coverings made of Manila straw. +The crowd on the beach was chattering away at +a lively rate, in a language none of us could +understand, although I soon became convinced +that it was not Spanish.</p> + +<p>We had covered half the distance to the <i>Dart</i>, +when one of the natives discovered us and +pointed us out to his companions. At once the +whole party ran forward and surrounded us, asking +a dozen questions at once.</p> + +<figure class="figcenter" style="width: 450px;"> + <img src="images/i_p066a.jpg" width="450" height="710" alt=""> + <figcaption> + <p class="caption">“AT ONCE THE WHOLE PARTY RAN FORWARD AND SURROUNDED US, + ASKING A DOZEN QUESTIONS AT ONCE.”</p> + </figcaption> +</figure> + +<p>“Don’t understand you,” shouted Tom Dawson. +“Don’t you speak United States?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_57">[57]</span>“Don’t you speak English?” I added.</p> + +<p>The crowd stared at us and all shook their +heads. It is doubtful if any of them had ever +heard the English tongue before, for the majority +of foreigners in the Philippines take up +Spanish as the language of commerce when dealing +with the natives.</p> + +<p>“Here’s a rum go!” whispered Dawson. +Then a happy idea struck him and he pointed at +Gory, me and himself, and then at the <i>Dart</i>.</p> + +<p>Instead of nodding to show that they understood, +the natives scowled at us. Then, while +the others continued to surround us, one ran off +to summon those on the ship’s deck. Soon he +returned with a fellow who was several inches +taller than his companions and who showed by +his bearing that he was some sort of a chief.</p> + +<p>Again Dawson went through the pantomime +previously described, and again the crowd +scowled, the chief harder than any of his followers. +At once, a light burst in upon me.</p> + +<p>“I’ll tell you what they are mad about,” I explained +to my companions. “They think we +want to take possession of the <i>Dart</i>.”</p> + +<p>“Well, that’s jest wot we do want,” growled +the first mate.</p> + +<p>“Let us try to push our way to the ship,” I +went on, and endeavored to break away from the +Tagals, for such the natives were.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_58">[58]</span>What followed surprised me beyond measure. +The chief rushed up, put out his foot, gave me +a shove, and hurled me flat on the sand. Before +I could arise he had motioned to another native, +and this fellow promptly came and sat on my +back, thus holding me down!</p> + +<p>I might have stood such treatment, rather +than risk bloodshed, but the attack was more +than Matt Gory could stand. His hot Irish +blood boiled instantly, and raising his club he hit +the fellow on top of me a blow that all but +knocked him senseless.</p> + +<p>“Yez will sit on him, will yez?” he cried. +“Take that, an’ look out that yez don’t git another +that’s worse, bedad!” and he stepped back +and stood at bay.</p> + +<p>A fierce, blood-curdling yell went up, and +almost a score of war clubs and spears were +brandished in the air.</p> + +<p>“Now you’ve put your foot into it!” ejaculated +Tom Dawson. “Come, let us retreat, before +it is too late!”</p> + +<p>By pure good luck, we tore ourselves free from +the natives who sought to hold us back. Dawson +was already running for the forest. Gory +now followed, and I came behind. With another +yell, twice as loud as before, the Tagals +came after us, launching several spears as they +did so.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_59">[59]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VIII.<br> +<small>ATTACKED BY THE TAGALS.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“<i>Woora camba, woora!</i>”</p> + +<p>Such was the war cry which was raised,—or, at +least, that is how it sounded to me. Then came +the spears, and Gory gave a yell.</p> + +<p>“Oi’m kilt!” he gasped. “Oi’m a dead +mon!”</p> + +<p>“No, you’re not!” I answered. “That spear +only nipped your ear. Hurry up, or you will be +killed, for certain!” and I grabbed him by the +arm.</p> + +<p>We had a lead of fifty feet and the Tagals were +lessening this steadily, when, to frighten them, +Tom Dawson turned and fired a pistol shot over +their heads.</p> + +<p>The effect was instantaneous. All of the +natives came to a standstill and several began to +retreat.</p> + +<p>“I thought that would fetch ’em,” puffed the +first mate. “I reckon they don’t know much +about firearms.”</p> + +<p>But Dawson was mistaken, as we found out +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_60">[60]</span>later. During the past the natives had known +but little of pistols and guns, but now for several +years they had seen them in the hands of both +the Spanish soldiers and those who were in rebellion +against the Spanish crown, and had even +stood up in battle, on the side of those who +wanted to make the Philippines free and independent +of the rest of the world, be that movement, +under General Aguinaldo, for good or for +evil.</p> + +<p>The natives had halted and some had sought +safety in flight, but now the chief issued several +orders, and they came on again, more determined +than ever. Soon they divided, and entered the +forest to the north and south of us.</p> + +<p>The division gave the first mate a good deal of +concern. “It’s a splendid move—for them,” +he muttered. “I reckon they know the woods +like a book, too.”</p> + +<p>“Can they have made prisoners of the party +who came up here this morning?” I ventured.</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ that’s more than loikely,” put in +Matt Gory. “If they catch us I’m afther thinkin’ +we’ll be ristin’ in a circle in the sand, too. +Come on.” And he tried to increase his speed.</p> + +<p>But our previous climb had made us tired and +soon I became so exhausted I felt ready to drop. +Tom Dawson was puffing painfully, his face the +color of a beet.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_61">[61]</span>“I—I can’t keep it up—no use of tryin’!” he +gasped.</p> + +<p>“Neither can I,” I returned. “But if we are +caught——”</p> + +<p>“I don’t believe they will dare do much to +us.”</p> + +<p>“We must go on!” urged Gory. “Thim +haythins—listen to that!”</p> + +<p>The Irish sailor broke off short, as a cry from +the beach reached our ears. A yell followed, +and then came several pistol shots.</p> + +<p>“The other party has arrived, or is trying to +break away,” I burst out. “Maybe we had better +go back.”</p> + +<p>“I think so myself,” answered the first mate. +“We count three and if there are three more +that will give us six, and six white men ought to +be able to subdue four times that number of +such wretches.”</p> + +<p>We turned on our tracks, just as a crashing in +the brush to our left came to our ears. Soon we +were making for the beach with all of the +strength left to us.</p> + +<p>When we came out into the open we found +Watt Brown, Vincent, and Sandram in a hand-to-hand +fight with four natives that had been left +to watch the wreck. So far the contest had been +an even one, but more natives were hurrying in +the direction, and soon the second mate and his +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_62">[62]</span>men found themselves surrounded. As I came +closer I saw Sandram go down, a spear through +his left shoulder.</p> + +<p>“Messmates ahoy!” shouted Matt Gory. +“Hould th’ fort until we git there!” and coming +closer, he let fly his club, taking one native +in the head and landing him on the sand with a +cracked skull.</p> + +<p>In another moment we were all mixed up, and +each one fighting along as he saw best. I was +struck twice, once on the head, and this blow +dazed me and made me stagger to the edge of +the woods and sink down on a rock. I tried to +get up, but found myself too weak to do so and +had to content myself with taking shots at long +range with my revolver, until a Tagal came up +and kicked the weapon from my hand and made +me a close prisoner by binding my arms behind +me with twisted vines.</p> + +<p>In less than a quarter of an hour the fight +was over, and two natives and poor Sandram lay +dead on the beach, while several on both sides +were walking around trying to deaden the pain +of wounds which were more or less serious. An +ear-splitting whistle from the chief of the Tagals +had brought twenty or thirty others to the scene, +and now our party of five were all made prisoners, +Sandram being cast out into the waves +which lapped the <i>Dart’s</i> sides.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_63">[63]</span>“Here’s a pickle, truly!” growled Tom Dawson. +“I wonder what they intend to do with +us?”</p> + +<p>“Mebbe they’ll eat us, hang ’em!” answered +Watt Brown.</p> + +<p>“No, they are no longer cannibals,” put in +Vincent. “But you can make up your minds +that we won’t sleep on a bed of roses to-night.”</p> + +<p>“They have no right to make us prisoners,” +went on the first mate. “I wonder if there is +any Spanish officer near here. I know there is +one at Iba.”</p> + +<p>“We could find out if only some of them understood +English,” said I. “Let me see. The +Spanish name for a Spaniard is <i>Un Español</i>. +I’ll try them on that.”</p> + +<p>Walking up to the chief, I repeated the words, +“<i>Un Español</i>,” several times. At this he gave a +sickly grin, then shook his head decidedly.</p> + +<p>“If he knows any Spaniard in authority here +he is not going to take us to him,” was Tom +Dawson’s comment. “My private opinion is +that they know perfectly well that this ship belongs +to us, but they mean to keep the prize for +themselves, and rather than have any trouble +with the Spanish authorities about her, they’ll +put us all out of the way.”</p> + +<p>“That’s not unlikely,” added Watt Brown. +“You must remember that all of the people in +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_64">[64]</span>this part of the world used to be nateral-born +pirates—those with Malay blood especially.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t believe in giving up the ship, not if +it can be helped,” said I.</p> + +<p>“Neither do I!” answered Tom Dawson, and +the others nodded in agreement.</p> + +<p>“The only question is,” continued Watt +Brown, “now that we abandoned the <i>Dart</i>, +doesn’t she belong to whoever finds her?”</p> + +<p>“What can these nagers do wid a ship like +her?” burst out Matt Gory. “Sure an’ they +wouldn’t know how to manage her, even if they +sthopped up the lake in her bow!”</p> + +<p>At this point the chief of the natives came forward +and motioned for us to be silent, and when +Gory attempted to go on, slapped the Irish sailor +on the cheek. Gory was “boiling mad,” as the +saying goes, but could do nothing with his hands +bound behind him; and so the conversation had +to be dropped.</p> + +<p>The <i>Dart</i> had stranded at the mouth of a fair-sized +stream flowing into the ocean, or to be +more correct, the China Sea, and lay secure from +any ordinary storm which might come up. I +wondered how she had gotten in past the breakers +so well, and so did Tom Dawson, as he told +me later. It was easily explained when we +learned the truth, which now was not long in +being revealed.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_65">[65]</span>We had been joined in pairs and were now made +to march away from the seacoast and toward the +native village of Bumwoga, a collection of ramshackle +bamboo huts, the same we had seen from +the top of the hill at the time the <i>Dart</i> was located. +We were in the custody of one-half of +the chief’s guard, the other natives moving off +for the vessel, to loot her of whatever came +handy.</p> + +<p>At the village we met the first Tagal women, +creatures by no means bad-looking. They were +almost as simply dressed as their husbands and +brothers. There were also a great number of +little children, who stared at us with eyes as big +as moons and then dove into the huts out of +sight, fearful that the <i>nooga-nu</i>, or bogie-men, +had come to carry them away.</p> + +<p>The sun still beat down fiercely, and by the +time the center of the village was gained I was +ready to drop from exhaustion. Indeed, I did +stagger. Seeing this, Tom Dawson, who had +been bound to me, braced me up, and then we +sank on a grassy mound close to a tall mahogany +tree. As we remained quiet, no one, for the +time being, disturbed us.</p> + +<p>The village of Bumwoga was certainly a +curious-looking place, and under other circumstances +I would have viewed all that it contained +with much interest. But just now my interest +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_66">[66]</span>was centered in myself and my companions, and +I constantly speculated upon the fate which +awaited us.</p> + +<p>We had been in the village about an hour, and +the chief was in earnest conversation with his +followers, when there came several pistol shots +from the direction of the seacoast. “Captain +Kenny and the others have come up,” murmured +Tom Dawson. “I hope the natives get the +worst of it.” He was right, the captain had come +up, but the natives overcame him by sheer force +of numbers, and he and his men, including the +Chinese cook, were bound and placed on the +<i>Dart</i>. What this turn of affairs led to we will see +in the later chapters of my tale.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_67">[67]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER IX.<br> +<small>THE FLIGHT FROM BUMWOGA.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“This is slow, lad.”</p> + +<p>“It is trying, Dawson. I wonder how long +they expect to keep us here?”</p> + +<p>“I’m sure I can’t guess, lad,—perhaps until +we die of old age.”</p> + +<p>“And what do you suppose they have done +with the others?”</p> + +<p>“Can’t say as to that either—maybe killed +’em all off and stewed ’em in the pot,” and with +a voluminous sigh the first mate of the <i>Dart</i> +turned over and fell into a light doze.</p> + +<p>Dawson and I had been confined in one of the +bamboo huts. We were tied fast to a thin palm +tree, the top of which waved far above the hut +roof. The place was about twelve feet square +and was open at two sides. The floor was +covered with broken palm leaves and refuse of all +sorts, and the whole place was vile-smelling and +alive with vermin.</p> + +<p>We had been prisoners in the village for three +days, and the time seemed like so many years. +Twice a day an ugly old negro woman came in +to give us meals of rice cakes, fish, and native +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_68">[68]</span>fruits, and to leave us an earthen jug full of +brackish water.</p> + +<p>“This is a good place to catch a fever,” I had +said to Dawson, the day before, and since that +time he had declared that the fever was slowly +but surely getting into his system.</p> + +<p>I had tried to talk to the old woman and to +several of the natives that had dropped in upon +us out of curiosity, but nobody understood me +and none were able or willing to give us aid.</p> + +<p>The night to follow brought on a heavy storm, +almost as severe as that which had caused us to +abandon our ship. About half the men of Bumwoga +were away and the remainder, with the +women and children, huddled in the huts to +escape the fury of the elements. The rain came +down “by the bucketful,” and soon the single +street of the village was six inches deep with +water, which flowed around the spot where Tom +Dawson and I were held close prisoners.</p> + +<p>“If this keeps on, we’ll be drowned,” I remarked +dismally. “One thing is certain, if we +want to catch any sleep to-night we’ll have to do +it standing up.”</p> + +<p>“Who could sleep with such a racket!” +growled Dawson. “Why, just listen to that!”</p> + +<p>“That” was a fearful crack of thunder, which +rolled and roared among the hills and mountains +to the east and north of the village. The thunder +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_69">[69]</span>was followed by another downpour, and outside +all remained pitch-black.</p> + +<p>“I’ll tell you what, Dawson!” I cried, after +a pause, for the crash had taken away my breath. +“If we want to get away, to-night is the time to +do it!”</p> + +<p>“That’s true, Oliver. But how are we to +manage the trick? I’ve turned and twisted until +my wrists are so sore they are ready to run +blood. This vine-rope is as tough as a steel +cable.”</p> + +<p>“I think I see a way,” I answered. “I was +afraid somebody would spot us if I mentioned +it before. When the old woman brought us in +that shell-fish this afternoon, I managed to save +a bit of shell and hide it in my pocket. The +edge is sharp, and by sawing on the vines I think +I can cut them. The question is, can we escape +even after the vines are cut? I rather think we’ll +run the risk of our lives.”</p> + +<p>“Let us try it anyway, lad; anything is better +than staying here,” said Dawson.</p> + +<p>I immediately produced the bit of shell and set +to work. I could not reach my own bonds very +well, but I could reach those of my companion, +and after fifteen minutes of hard labor, the first +mate was liberated. Then he took the shell and +began upon my wrists.</p> + +<p>The storm kept up, and of a sudden came a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_70">[70]</span>blinding flash of lightning and an electrical +shock that pitched Dawson headlong. The top +of the palm tree had been hit and knocked off, +leaving the stump above the hut burning like a +gigantic torch.</p> + +<p>I was too dazed for several minutes to speak +or move, and my companion was scarcely less +affected. Then, however, Dawson leaped up to +finish his work.</p> + +<p>“Free!” I cried, as the vines snapped asunder, +and hand in hand we ran for one of the hut openings. +A dozen feet away lay the top of the palm +tree, blazing furiously and spluttering in the +never-ending downpour. By this uncertain +light we saw that the village street was deserted.</p> + +<p>Where to go? was now the burning question. +I looked at the first mate and he looked at me. +Both of us realized only too well what a false +move might mean.</p> + +<p>“That’s south—the way we want to go,” he +said, throwing out his hand. “Come on,” and +off we set, among the huts and across a patch of +low brush. We were less than a hundred yards +off when a savage yell told us that our escape +had been discovered.</p> + +<p>“We’ve got to leg it now, my boy!” ejaculated +Tom Dawson. “Oh, if only I had that +pistol of mine!”</p> + +<p>“And if I only had mine too,” I added. All +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_71">[71]</span>of our belongings, excepting our clothing, had +been confiscated.</p> + +<p>At the further side of the brush we came to a +small stream, which we plunged into ere we had +time to draw back.</p> + +<p>“Look out, it may be over your head!” +shouted Dawson; but the warning was not +needed, as the watercourse proved to be less +than a yard deep at any point. The bottom was +of sand and small stones, and both sides were +overhung with brush, moss, and the ever-present +vines.</p> + +<p>“Hold on,” whispered my companion, as I +was about to step out of the stream. “It may +be safer here than anywhere, for water leaves no +trail. Let us keep to the middle of the stream +and see where it brings us.”</p> + +<p>I thought this was good advice, and we hurried +on in silence, but both on guard for fear of +plunging into some deep hole. A hundred feet +were covered and we heard the shout again, but +this time closer, showing that the Tagals were +indeed on the trail.</p> + +<p>“If it comes to the worst we can sit down in +the water and only keep our mouths and noses +out,” remarked Dawson. “I’m not going to be +captured again if I can prevent it—no, sirree!”</p> + +<p>We moved along with added caution, for we +could now hear the natives shouting one to another +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_72">[72]</span>from several different points. The storm +still continued, and both of us were wet to the +skin, so a slip to the bottom of the shallow river +would have proved no hardship.</p> + +<p>“Stop!” The command came in a soft whisper, +and instantly I halted. Both of us listened +intently, and I heard what had caused Dawson +to stop me—a splashing of water ahead.</p> + +<p>“Somebody is moving around ahead of us!” +he whispered into my ear. “Those Tagals are +regular imps for following a fellow!”</p> + +<p>“Their one study is bush and forest life,” I +answered. “But what shall we do—leave the +stream?”</p> + +<p>“Let us wait a moment and listen.”</p> + +<p>We did so, and the splashing came nearer. +But now it did not sound altogether like footsteps, +and I told the first mate so.</p> + +<p>“I agree with you,” he said. “But it’s something, +that’s certain, a wild beast, or—Great +Scott! lad, make for the bank—quick!”</p> + +<p>Tom Dawson caught me by the arm and made +a furious leap, and I followed. Both of us +floundered down, but were up in a trice, and +none too soon, for even in the gloom we presently +beheld the ugly head of a cayman stuck up +close to the river bank.</p> + +<p>“An alligator!” I screamed, and ran still further +away. Dawson did not hesitate to follow +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_73">[73]</span>me, and at the same time screamed as loudly as +I did. Then of a sudden he paused, screamed +again and gave a sudden loud moan and shriek +as if in mortal agony.</p> + +<p>“Now, don’t make a sound,” he whispered, as +the shriek came to an end. “Ten to one those +natives will think the alligators have eaten us.”</p> + +<p>“I hope they do,” I answered, understanding +his ruse and delighted with it. “But which way +now?”</p> + +<p>“We seem to be moving up a hill. Let us +keep on until the top is gained. I am sure that +will take us away from the village, and that is +what we want.”</p> + +<p>On and on we went, the wet brush slashing +in our faces. Often we sank into muddy holes +up to our knees, but each time one would help +the other out. Whenever a flash of lightning +lit up the firmament we tried to look about us, +but the forest cut off the view.</p> + +<p>“I can’t go much further,” I gasped, at last, +when Dawson announced a big cliff ahead. +“We ought to find some sort of shelter there,” +he said, and he was not mistaken. Under a portion +of the cliff was a cave-like opening several +yards in depth, and into this we crowded, out of +the fury of the storm. We listened intently, but +for the balance of that night saw or heard no +more of the Tagals.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_74">[74]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER X.<br> +<small>THE BATTLE AT A DISTANCE.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>Morning dawned as mornings do in the tropics. +There is no gradual coming on of daylight. +The sun came up in all of its fiery splendor, and +day was at hand, hot, oppressive, and enervating. +To look around one would have thought +that it had not rained for a week, yet there was a +steam in the air—a steam that by noon gave place +to a peculiar vapor laden with that smell which, +once experienced, is not easily forgotten, the +smell of rank vegetation mingled with the delicious +odor of spices.</p> + +<p>“And how do you feel, Oliver?” asked the +first mate, as I sat up and rubbed my eyes. +“Perhaps you forget where you are?”</p> + +<p>“No, I don’t forget, but I am tremendously +sleepy yet,” I answered, as I stretched myself. +“What time is it, do you think?”</p> + +<p>“Not seven yet.”</p> + +<p>“Then I haven’t slept very long, after all. I +thought by the light it must be close upon +noon.” I paused. “I wish I had something to +eat.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_75">[75]</span>“So do I, lad; but we’ll have to stay our +stomachs until we are further away from those +Tagals, I’m thinking. I’ve been looking around +and I don’t think the top of this hill is far off. +Let us get to there and take in the lay of the +land.”</p> + +<p>As there seemed nothing better to do, I +agreed, and we began the ascent of the cliff, +which was composed of lava principally, for the +Philippine Islands are largely of volcanic origin, +and have numerous volcanoes which are in constant +operation. The cliff passed, we began another +trudge through the woods.</p> + +<p>I had noticed butterflies, small and big, before, +but now these beautiful creatures became +more plentiful than ever, until at one point our +way was almost blinded by them.</p> + +<p>“It’s like a snow-storm of ’em, aint it?” remarked +Dawson, and his picture was about correct, +excepting that, while a portion of them +were milky white, the others were of every shade +imaginable.</p> + +<p>We had hoped to gain the top of the hill by +ten o’clock, but it was afternoon before we came +out on the stretch of tableland that was its highest +point. As before, the tableland was surrounded +by palms, so both Dawson and I had +to climb into the trees to get a look around.</p> + +<p>We first turned our eyes toward the China +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_76">[76]</span>Sea, which rolled and glistened like molten gold +in the bright sunlight. Far away two sails were +visible, mere specks upon the horizon. At the +beach the breakers rolled and broke, sending the +white spume almost up to the roots of the palms +that fringed the sand. From the point we occupied +the mouth of the river where the <i>Dart</i> +lay was concealed from view.</p> + +<p>“Nothing of interest in that direction,” observed +Dawson, and turned carefully to take a +look inland. Soon he uttered a cry of astonishment.</p> + +<p>“What do you see?” I queried.</p> + +<p>“What do I see?” he repeated. “Hang me +if I don’t see about the biggest battle on +record!”</p> + +<p>“A battle?” I cried, and turned among the +branches to get a view myself.</p> + +<p>“Yes, a battle. Don’t you hear the guns?”</p> + +<p>I listened, and sure enough from a great distance +I heard the crack and roll of musketry. +At first I could not locate the sounds, but presently +saw the thin white smoke ascending from +a valley far to our east, a valley hedged in between +two tall mountains.</p> + +<p>“Can you make out who is fighting?” I +asked, straining my eyes to the utmost.</p> + +<p>“It looks to me like soldiers on one side and +natives on the other,” answered the first mate. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_77">[77]</span>“The soldiers are driving the other fellows up +the valley. There must be about five hundred +men fighting on each side.”</p> + +<p>“Can the Tagals be waging war on the +Spaniards?”</p> + +<p>“I reckon they are rebels under General Aguinaldo, +who has been their acknowledged leader +for over a year.”</p> + +<p>“And do they expect to win their freedom?”</p> + +<p>“I suppose so, although, even if they do +throw off the yoke of Spain, I don’t believe they +are capable of governing themselves.”</p> + +<p>“They certainly are not, if they are all like +the fellows who made us prisoners.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, the better class of Tagals are not like +these, lad. Why, I’ve been told that, in Manila, +some of them are quite ladies and gentlemen. +They can read and write, and affect the +Spanish fashions.”</p> + +<p>The tide of battle had now swept up the valley, +and we heard and saw nothing more of the contest. +We gave the surroundings another good +look, and then descended to mother earth.</p> + +<p>“I’ve got an idea,” said Dawson. “If we +can find one of the small boats, why not stock +her up with provisions and water and then sail +down the coast to the nearest seaport settlement +to Manila—say Port Subig? That will save us +a tedious and perhaps dangerous trip overland.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_78">[78]</span>“That’s a good idea, especially as we don’t +want to get mixed up in this fight between the +insurgents and the Spanish. But what of the +<i>Dart</i> and our things on board of her?”</p> + +<p>“Ten to one the natives have already looted +the ship, Oliver. As it is, we can do nothing +but notify those in Manila who were interested +in her cargo. Perhaps they’ll help us in the +matter, for their own sakes.”</p> + +<p>“And what of the others who were made +prisoners?”</p> + +<p>“Alone and without weapons what can we do +for them? If we can organize a party in Manila +to come here and straighten out matters we’ll be +doing well.”</p> + +<p>Both of us were tremendously hungry, and +now we cast about for something to eat. But +little could be found on the hill outside of a few +cocoanuts, and soon we were on our way to the +seacoast, taking care to give the Tagal settlement +a wide berth.</p> + +<p>We had just stepped out upon the sand when +we saw a figure clad in a flowing frock coming +toward us at top speed.</p> + +<p>“Ah Sid, as I’m a sinner!” burst out Tom +Dawson, as he recognized the Chinese cook of +the <i>Dart</i>. “Hi! hi! where are you running +to?” he called out.</p> + +<p>At the sound of the first mate’s voice the little +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_79">[79]</span>Chinaman came to a dead halt. “Who callee?” +he yelled. “Who callee Ah Sid?”</p> + +<p>“I called you, you monkey. Come here,” answered +Dawson, and now Ah Sid saw us and +reached our side on the double-quick.</p> + +<p>“Me gittee away flom bad man,” he puffed. +“Hide in tree woods, or him cochee all flee—lun! +lun!” And he lost no time in diving into +the forest, and we came after him.</p> + +<p>We had scarcely concealed ourselves when +two Tagals burst into view, skipping along the +sands with long spears in their hands, ready to +be launched forth at the first sight of the terror-stricken +Celestial. Ah Sid’s footprints were +plainly visible, so they lost no time in following +him into the forest.</p> + +<p>“We must down them!” whispered Dawson +excitedly, and as one of the Tagals passed him +he leaped out, caught hold of the man’s spear, +and threw him headlong. Seeing this, I threw +myself on the second copper-colored rascal, and +a fierce, all-around struggle ensued.</p> + +<p>It was little Ah Sid who turned the tide of battle +in our favor. Paralyzed at first with fear, he +quickly recovered, and picking up a big stone, +approached and struck first one enemy and then +the other on the head. The blows were well directed +and heavy, and each Tagal went down insensible.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_80">[80]</span>“Good for you, Ah Sid!” cried Tom Dawson. +“You can fight, even if you are a heathen.”</p> + +<p>“Shall me finish um?” asked the cook, as he +still held the stone which had done such good +work.</p> + +<p>“No, no, that would be murder!” I ejaculated +in horror. “They are both pretty badly done +for and won’t get over this for an hour or more. +Come on, unless there are more coming.”</p> + +<p>“Only dese two, Mlister Raymond. Where +you goee?”</p> + +<p>“We thought we might find one of the small +boats,” answered the mate.</p> + +<p>“Little boatee dlis way.” Ah Sid pointed +down the beach. “Hurry if wantee him, or bad +man git um.”</p> + +<p>Away we went, the Chinaman leading the +party. As he ran he managed to tell us that he +had escaped from the Tagals two days before, +but had been unable to get away from the territory. +“Watt Brown, Matt Gory, and um captain +gittee away, too,” he concluded. “No +knowee where them goee dough.”</p> + +<p>It did not take long to reach the small boat, +which lay in the cove where we had originally +landed. The second small boat was gone, the +natives having carried it off.</p> + +<p>“Now for a stock of provisions,” I said. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_81">[81]</span>“We will have to thresh around the woods at a +lively rate, if we want to get away before night.”</p> + +<p>“We won’t hunt for any more than we actually +need,” answered Tom Dawson. “And Ah +Sid will help us, I know,” and he explained to +the cook what we proposed to do.</p> + +<p>“Me catchee blirds very soon,” answered Ah +Sid, and procured a long, thin switch. With +this he entered the forest, and soon brought +down several birds, including three pigeons. +He would stir them up from the grass, and a +lightning-like crack of the switch would finish +them.</p> + +<p>“Hold hard!” cried Tom Dawson, while we +were in the midst of our labors. “Hold hard, +somebody is coming!”</p> + +<p>We instantly became silent and listened. The +first mate was right, three persons were coming +through the forest, and they were heading directly +for the spot where the boat lay.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_82">[82]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XI.<br> +<small>OFF FOR SUBIG BAY.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>Slowly the footsteps came closer, as though +the three persons were approaching with extreme +caution.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps they heard us,” I whispered to Tom +Dawson, and he nodded. “If they are natives +what shall we do?”</p> + +<p>“We’ll have to trust to luck, lad. I would +rather fight to the end than become a prisoner +again.”</p> + +<p>“So will I fight.”</p> + +<p>I had a club which I had been using in knocking +over game, and this I held ready for any +emergency which might present itself. Slowly +the three newcomers came closer, then stopped +short, and we heard not another sound.</p> + +<p>I must confess that my heart leaped into my +throat, as I had a mental vision of a tall Tagal +sneaking up behind me and running me through +with his cruel spear. Were the newcomers trying +to surround us?</p> + +<p>Five minutes passed,—it was more than an age +to me,—and still the silence continued, broken +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_83">[83]</span>only by the birds as they fluttered from tree to +brush. From a distance came the incessant hum +of millions of tropical insects, but to this sound +I had long since become accustomed.</p> + +<p>“Begorra, Oi don’t see nothin at all, at all!” +came in a rich Irish voice not a dozen yards away +from me. “If they be haythins, where are +they?”</p> + +<p>“Matt Gory!” I burst out. “Matt Gory, is +that you?”</p> + +<p>“The saints be praised, it’s Oliver Raymond!” +came from the delighted Irishman, and +now he rushed forward and literally embraced +me. “I was afther thinkin’ ye was one av thim +villainous Tagals!”</p> + +<p>Gory was followed by Watt Brown and Captain +Kenny. The second mate was also delighted +to see me. Captain Kenny, however, +merely scowled, and then turned to Dawson and +Ah Sid.</p> + +<p>Our various stories were soon told, and we +learned that the newcomers had also intended +to hunt up a small boat. “I intended to cut +down a sapling and hoist some kind of a sail,” +said Watt Brown. “Sailing down to Subig +Bay will be far better than to make the journey +overland, especially during these trying times.”</p> + +<p>Watt Brown had had one advantage over us. +He had met a Spaniard who could speak a little +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_84">[84]</span>English, and from this man had learned a good +deal that was decidedly interesting.</p> + +<p>“The natives have made war on the Spaniards +tooth and nail,” he said. “Not only the neighborhood +around Manila, but the whole of the +island of Luzon is up in arms. General Aguinaldo +had under him something like forty to +fifty thousand Tagals, Philippine Spaniards, and +others, and they have declared for independence. +They swear they will pay no further taxes to the +Spanish.”</p> + +<p>“But all people have to pay taxes,” I ventured.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but not as the Filipinos do, my boy. +They are taxed for about everything they eat +and everything they drink, and they pay a tax +for doing business. They can’t cut down a tree, +or shear a sheep, or pull down cocoanuts without +paying a tax to the government. Besides +this, they have also to pay large sums of money +to the Church, and so they are kept poverty-stricken +from year to year. I don’t blame ’em +for revolting, as it is called.”</p> + +<p>“Spain is having her hands full just now,” remarked +Tom Dawson. “The war in Cuba is +ten times worse than the war here, I’m thinking.”</p> + +<p>“That Spaniard I met was very angry against +us Americans,” resumed Watt Brown. “He +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_85">[85]</span>said Americans are aiding the Cubans, and if we +didn’t look out Spain would punish us for it.”</p> + +<p>This caused Dawson to laugh. “Ha! ha! +The idea of Spain doing anything to Uncle +Sam,” he said. “I reckon we can take care of +ourselves, every trip.”</p> + +<p>How right he was later events proved.</p> + +<p>As there were now six of us, we worked with +more confidence. Each of us had a good club, +and we provided ourselves with stones that were +jagged of edge, to use in case of sudden attack. +Ah Sid also made himself a sling shot out of a +pliable tree branch and showed us what he could +do with this weapon by bringing down a pigeon +with a stone at a distance of fifty yards.</p> + +<p>It was nearly nightfall by the time we had +brought in our birds, pigeons, and fish and +cooked them. In the meantime Watt Brown +had been as good as his word and had rigged up +a small mast and a sail on the <i>Mollie</i>, as he had +dubbed the craft. The sky was clear and it +promised to be moonlight, and we decided to +leave the coast as soon as we had eaten supper, +which would be our last meal on shore for probably +three or four days, if not a week.</p> + +<p>“We must keep our eyes peeled for those +Tagals,” remarked Tom Dawson, as we squatted +around the camp-fire. “If we don’t they may +surprise us, and then our cake will be dough.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_86">[86]</span>The <i>Mollie</i> lay ready for shoving off, so we +could leave at the first sign of danger. As we +ate we discussed the situation and what the future +was likely to bring forth.</p> + +<p>“I shall demand that the Spanish government +give me protection to take the <i>Dart</i> into a proper +harbor,” said Captain Kenny, who was now, perforce, +perfectly sober. “Those Tagals have no +legal claim to the wreck.”</p> + +<p>“But they must have some claim,” I answered.</p> + +<p>“No claim whatever—and I can prove it,” returned +the captain, as he glared at me.</p> + +<p>“How can you prove that, captain?” asked +Tom Dawson. “Every man of us left her—there +is no gainsaying that.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind; I can prove they have no claim +upon her,” was the captain’s answer, but further +than that he would not say.</p> + +<p>Our supper was scarcely concluded when the +moon came up over the rim of the sea, as white +as new silver. We began our preparations to +embark without further delay. As we worked +I saw Captain Kenny eye me in a strange manner +that gave me a cold chill, and I resolved to +be more than ever on my guard against him.</p> + +<p>Our provisions and ourselves made as much +of a load as the <i>Mollie</i> could safely carry, and at +the last moment some cocoanuts had to be left +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_87">[87]</span>behind. Water was stored away in the bucket +which had been used for bailing out the craft +and in hollow stalks of bamboo, the latter making +first-class receptacles. The cooked things +were wrapped in palm leaves and covered with +damp seaweed.</p> + +<p>The captain, the two mates, and Matt Gory +took the oars, and a few well-directed strokes +took the <i>Mollie</i> out of the cove and well on toward +the opening in the line of breakers. +“We’ll have to row and watch out, too, since +the boy can’t do anything,” grumbled Captain +Kenny. I firmly believe, had he had his way, +he would have left me behind.</p> + +<p>“Watch for the opening, Oliver,” said Tom +Dawson. “You can do that as well as anyone.” +I did as directed, and before long the dangerous +line of coral was passed and we were riding the +long stretches of the China Sea as safely as +though crossing the Bay of San Francisco.</p> + +<p>Fortunately, not only Captain Kenny, but also +Dawson and Brown, could read the stars with +ease, so but little trouble was experienced in +holding to a course which was certain to bring +us down to Subig Bay sooner or later. The +wind was favorable, and the sail being hoisted +the oars were shipped, and we took it easy under +the pale gleaming of the Southern Cross.</p> + +<p>“We may as well divide up into watches,” +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_88">[88]</span>suggested Tom Dawson, and after some talk it +was decided that he, Matt Gory, and myself +should stand the first watch of four hours, while +the captain, Watt Brown, and Ah Sid took the +second watch of equal length.</p> + +<p>In this manner the night passed without incident, +for when I slept I did so between my two +friends, so I was safe from any evil designs that +Captain Kenny might have upon me, even had +he dared to carry them out while the second +mate was on watch with him.</p> + +<p>Sunrise found us still in sight of land, at a +point where the mountains of Luzon ran directly +down into the sea. The air was filled +with a bluish mist, and by ten o’clock was oppressive +to the last degree.</p> + +<p>“It’s a good thing we have the sail,” I remarked. +“Nobody could possibly row in this +awful heat.”</p> + +<p>“The sail may not do us any good presently,” +answered Watt Brown.</p> + +<p>“Why not?”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you see how the wind is dying +down?”</p> + +<p>The second mate was right, and presently the +sail flapped idly against the stumpy mast. Tom +Dawson looked at the oars, picked up one of the +blades, let it fall again, and shook his head. +“Too blasted hot, no use of talking.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_89">[89]</span>“I think I would rather lay under the shadow +of yonder mountain than out here all day,” said +Brown. “What do you say, boys; shall we pull +for the shore?”</p> + +<p>A vote was taken, and it was found that even +Captain Kenny preferred land to that boiling +and sizzling sea. But he declined to row. +“Let the boy take a hand,” he said.</p> + +<p>I was willing, and I think I can safely say that +I made fairly good progress. “I can run an +engine or a steam launch, but I never had much +of a chance at a row- or sail-boat,” I explained.</p> + +<p>“By the way, what is taking you to Manila, if +I may ask?” questioned the second mate +curiously.</p> + +<p>“It’s partly business and partly pleasure. +You know my father is a member of the firm of +Raymond, Holbrook & Smith, manufacturers of +engines and sugar-making machinery. I wanted +a vacation and was sent to Hong Kong and Manila, +to get the fresh air and learn the business at +the same time.”</p> + +<p>“You say you can run an engine?”</p> + +<p>“Oh, yes, I can run almost anything that goes +by steam,” I laughed. “I take to it naturally, +although I don’t intend to become an engineer. +Now if the <i>Dart</i> had only carried a steam or +naphtha launch, we would have been all right,” +and here this talk came to an end.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_90">[90]</span>Finding a landing at the mountain side was +not easy, for the waves ran up strongly against +those rocks, which, in some places, were a hundred +feet in height. But we discovered a small +canyon, or split, and ran into this, a delightful +locality, as shady as it was cool and inviting. +Again the boat was beached, and we hopped +ashore, I, however, never dreaming that that was +to be my last trip in the little craft.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_91">[91]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XII.<br> +<small>ATTACKED IN THE CANYON.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>A good sleep during the night had rested me +thoroughly; so, while the others sat around, +talking or smoking “home-made” cigars, made +out of some native tobacco which Matt Gory had +secured during his wanderings, I started up the +canyon on a short tour of exploration.</p> + +<p>“I’ve heard that there is gold on this island,” +I laughed, when Tom Dawson asked me where +I was bound. “I’m going to strike a bonanza.”</p> + +<p>“Look out that you don’t stir up some wild +animal big enough to chew you up,” he yelled +after me.</p> + +<p>The canyon was filled with brushwood and +vines, with here and there heavy clusters of +tropical flowers, so odoriferous that they were +positively sickening. Some of these flowers, I +afterward learned, can readily put one to sleep +if you sit by them long enough.</p> + +<p>I found an easy path to the top of the canyon, +at a point where the walls were fifty to sixty feet +high and three times as far apart. At the top +was a patch of smooth ground, back of which +began the upward slope of the mountain.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_92">[92]</span>I kept my eyes open for wild animals, but +nothing of size presented itself, although I detected +something moving near the mountain +top, probably some Philippine goats. There +were countless birds, and in a dark corner of the +canyon I roused up half a dozen bats, none of +which, however, offered to molest me.</p> + +<p>Coming to a truly beautiful spot, where a tiny +mountain stream formed a waterfall that leaped +and danced in the sunshine striking through +some flowered brushwood, I threw myself down +and gave myself up to reflection.</p> + +<p>What a variety of adventures had I passed +through since leaving home! In Hong Kong +the days had not passed without incident, and +now here I was, cast away on the island of Luzon, +minus my money and the documents I had +been intrusted to deliver, and in a land that was +practically in a state of war.</p> + +<p>And yet I knew absolutely nothing of the important +events which were transpiring in what +might be called the outer world. I did not know +that the war between Spain and the inhabitants of +Cuba had reached its height and that the relations +between Spain and the United States had +culminated in the total destruction of the battleship +<i>Maine</i> in Havana harbor, and that we were +on the verge of war with the Spaniards in consequence. +Nor did I know how my father was +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_93">[93]</span>suffering in Cuban wilds, as related in “When +Santiago Fell.” Perhaps it is a good thing +that I did not know about my parent’s condition, +for I would have worried a good deal, and +worrying would have done no good.</p> + +<p>From day-dreaming over the present I began +to speculate on the past, on my schoolboy days, +and on the great interest I had taken for several +years in steam engines, machinery of all sorts, +and in big guns. Guns, such as were used in the +forts on our Pacific seacoast, had particularly +interested me, and I had studied them in all of +their details, never once dreaming how useful +this knowledge was to be to me.</p> + +<p>From day-dreaming I fell into a light doze, +from which I awoke with a start to find the form +of a man leaning over me. The man had +clutched my arm and this had aroused me. One +glance showed that the man was Captain Kenny.</p> + +<p>“Now I’ve got the chance I’ll serve you as I +served Holbrook!” he hissed into my ear, and +hurled me over the edge of the canyon down to +where the mountain torrent struck the rocks far +below.</p> + +<p>“Don’t!” I managed to gasp; but that was all. +I felt myself dropping through space, made a +vain clutch at some brush which scraped my +cheek, and then struck heavily on the rocks—and +knew no more. When I recovered my +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_94">[94]</span>senses it was pitch-dark around me and a light +rain was falling. At first I could not collect myself +and did not attempt to stir. Where was I, +and what had happened?</p> + +<p>The flowing of water over one arm aroused +me, and, making examination, I found that I was +lying half in and half out of the mountain torrent. +Had I fallen into a little different position +I must surely have drowned. As a matter of +fact my hair showed that I had fallen head first +into the water, but had by some unconscious +movement saved myself from a watery grave.</p> + +<p>It was fully a quarter of an hour before I felt +able to sit up, much less stand on my feet. I +ached in every joint, and my head was in such a +whirl that I could scarcely see.</p> + +<p>“Oh, what a villain Captain Kenny is!” were +the first words that crossed my lips. “I’ll get +square with him as soon as I can join the others +again!” Alas! little did I then realize that my +companions had hunted for me in vain, and that +a band of Tagals had made it necessary for them +to set off in their boat without me, taking with +them the guilty captain, who had never opened +his lips concerning his perfidy.</p> + +<p>By the darkness I knew it was night, but what +part of the night I could not determine. Yet I +thought it could not be late, and that I must +try to get back to the shore, no matter how much +pain it cost me.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_95">[95]</span>I arose to my feet to make a disheartening discovery. +My left ankle was badly wrenched and +much swollen, and to walk on it was out of the +question. Here was a new difficulty, and I must +confess that I could scarcely hold back the tears +as I felt my helplessness. Perhaps this may +seem childish to some of my readers, but they +must remember that it is no fun to be cast away +in a savage land, away from your friends, and in +the condition in which I found myself.</p> + +<p>Not without considerable pain and exertion, +I dragged myself to a place of shelter beneath +the overhanging rocks of the canyon. Here it +was dry, and the winds had swept in a quantity +of dried leaves which made a fairly comfortable +couch. The exertion necessary to reach this +place caused me to swoon.</p> + +<p>When I was again myself, it was daylight, but +still raining—a fine drizzle that was little more +than a mist. Looking at my ankle I saw that +the swelling had gone down a bit, and I presently +found that I could stand upon it, although +the operation was far from a pleasure. The rain +had collected in a hollow close at hand, and here +I got a drink and bathed my bruised head and +lower extremity. I might have eaten some light +food, but nothing was at hand, excepting some +berries which were strange to me, and which I +did not dare to touch for fear they might prove +poisonous.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_96">[96]</span>Slowly the hours came and went and still I +remained under the cliff, a prey to many disturbing +thoughts. What were my companions doing? +Would they come up the canyon in search +of me, or would they sail off and leave me to +my fate?</p> + +<p>Toward nightfall several shots in the distance +disturbed me. They did not come from the +shore, but from still further up the canyon. I +listened intently, but nothing but silence succeeded +the discharge of firearms.</p> + +<p>The night which followed proved a long one. +For several hours I could not get to sleep for +thinking of my position, but finally I fell into a +deep slumber that lasted far into the next day.</p> + +<p>The sun was now shining brightly and the +birds and insects had again taken up their songs +and hummings. I arose and stretched myself, +and was pleased to note that I could walk fairly +well and that my brain was clear, even though +my head still felt sore.</p> + +<p>I directed my footsteps down the canyon to +the seashore, coming out at the spot where I +had left Dawson and the others encamped. +Nothing remained but the charred embers of a +camp-fire, which had been built to cook some +fish.</p> + +<p>I say nothing remained. There was something +else there that filled me with horror. It +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_97">[97]</span>was a long Tagal spear, and its barb was covered +with blood. The sands were filled with +countless tracks of bare feet.</p> + +<p>“There has been a fight here,” I murmured, +and ran to the water’s edge. The <i>Mollie</i> was +gone, but whether taken by friends or the enemy +there was no telling.</p> + +<p>For a long while I stood on the sands speculating +upon the new turn of affairs. I was now +left utterly alone, that was clear. What should +I do?</p> + +<p>Without a boat a journey by water was out of +the question. If I tried to gain Manila by a trip +overland I felt that I would either become lost +in the mountains or else fall into the hands of the +warlike Tagals.</p> + +<p>“I’ll follow the shore to Subig Bay,” I concluded, +and in an hour was on my slow and painful +way, after a morning meal of half-ripe plantains +which were far from palatable.</p> + +<p>By noon I concluded that I had covered four +or five miles, having had considerable difficulty +in getting past the mountain which cut off the +beach for the space of two or three furlongs. It +was now growing so hot I was compelled to seek +shelter in the forest, and here put in the time by +bringing down half a dozen birds, which afforded +me nearly as many meals.</p> + +<p>The next four days were very much alike. I +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_98">[98]</span>continued on my way, past Iba and several other +settlements. At the place named, I almost ran +into the lines of the native rebels and saw a +pitched battle from afar, in which, as I afterward +ascertained, ten insurgents and six Spaniards +were killed and twice that many were wounded.</p> + +<p>The end of the fourth day found me at the +entrance to Subig Bay, and here I rested for several +hours. Lying on the north shore I saw half +a dozen ships at anchor, one of which, a two-masted +schooner, flew the Stars and Stripes.</p> + +<p>“If I can get to that craft I’ll be safe,” I said +to myself. “I’ll watch her and see if anybody +comes ashore.”</p> + +<p>On the following morning I saw the schooner +move slowly for the entrance to Subig Bay. +Running with all speed for the point of land between +the bay and the China Sea, I waved my +hands frantically and was at last gratified to see +that somebody on board had noticed me. Presently +the schooner came to anchor again, and a +small boat put out for the beach.</p> + +<p>As the boat came closer I uttered a cry of +amazement and delight, for at one of the oars +sat a person I had not expected to see for many +days to come. It was Tom Dawson.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_99">[99]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIII.<br> +<small>MY FIRST ADVENTURE IN MANILA.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“Oliver Raymond, is it possible!” exclaimed +the first mate of the <i>Dart</i>, as he leaped ashore +and almost embraced me.</p> + +<p>“Tom Dawson!” I ejaculated, and wrung his +hand over and over again. “And how did you +get on that craft out there?”</p> + +<p>“It’s a long story, lad. But where have you +been these five or six days? You don’t mean +to say you left our party on purpose? Or did +those rascally natives capture you?”</p> + +<p>“Neither, Tom. After I left you I walked up +the canyon to where there was a high cliff, and +there Captain Kenny tried to do me to death.” +I gave him a few of the particulars. “Where is +the captain now? If he’s on that vessel I’ll soon +have him up before the court at the first civilized +seaport comes to hand.”</p> + +<p>“I reckon Captain Kenny has got his deserts, +Oliver. After you left us the Tagals +made an unexpected attack, and Captain Kenny, +Watt Brown, and Ah Sid were captured, while I +and Matt Gory escaped to the boat. We didn’t +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_100">[100]</span>make any more landings until we reached this +port and rowed to the <i>Starlight</i>.”</p> + +<p>“Was Watt Brown killed or injured?”</p> + +<p>“He was wounded, but how badly I can’t say. +Captain Kenny gave himself up instead of fighting, +and so did that Chinaman.”</p> + +<p>“I wish it had been Captain Kenny who had +been wounded,” I said bluntly.</p> + +<p>“So does somebody else,” went on Dawson, +and a smile flitted over his face. “Come on +board, and you’ll find a surprise awaiting you.”</p> + +<p>I gladly accepted the offer to come on board +of the <i>Starlight</i>, which was seconded by Captain +Mason, who was in charge of the jolly-boat. +The row was a short one, and I was just mounting +the rope ladder to the deck when a voice as +from the grave hailed me.</p> + +<p>“Is it possible that it is you, Oliver?”</p> + +<p>“Dan!” I gasped, and stumbled over the rail. +“I—I thought you were dead—drowned!”</p> + +<p>The next moment I was in Dan Holbrook’s +arms and we were hugging each other like a +couple of schoolgirls, while Tom Dawson and +Matt Gory looked on, well pleased. The Irishman +soon after shook hands.</p> + +<p>“But, Dan, how came you here?” I questioned, +when I could recover from my amazement. +“Weren’t you lost overboard from that +small boat?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_101">[101]</span>“To be sure I was, and I came pretty close to +drowning, too,” answered Dan. “But I floated +around and a high wave landed me right back on +board of the <i>Dart</i> and there I remained, satisfied +that it was as good a place as any so long as the +schooner floated.”</p> + +<p>“And were you on her when the <i>Dart</i> was +carried ashore?”</p> + +<p>“I was, and what is more I did what I could +toward steering her into the river mouth, where +she now lies. The steering gear was all right, +and I thought I might be able to save her from +becoming a total wreck.”</p> + +<p>“But—but, didn’t Captain Kenny attack +you?”</p> + +<p>“Did he? Indeed he did and tried to kill me +by throwing me into the sea. But a Tagal saved +me and made me a prisoner. I was kept in custody +two days, when the Tagals had a fight with +some Spanish soldiers, and I escaped in the confusion +and struck out for Manila. I thought I +was completely lost, when I ran across a scouting +party from the <i>Starlight</i> and was taken on +board by them. I had some little tropical fever, +and I’m not very well yet.”</p> + +<p>This was the outline of Dan’s story, which he +later on told in all of its details. The story +proved two things: that Captain Kenny was even +a worse villain than I had supposed him to be, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_102">[102]</span>and that affairs in the Philippines were more +than interesting.</p> + +<p>“The excitement at Manila is growing every +day,” said the captain of the <i>Starlight</i>. “I feel +certain there will be a bloody war there before +many months are over. I don’t see how you can +do any business there at present.”</p> + +<p>“I must look to some matters,” I answered, +and Dan said the same.</p> + +<p>The <i>Starlight</i> was bound for Manila with a +mixed cargo consigned to a Spanish firm, so +Captain Mason considered himself fairly safe for +the time being, as the Spaniards were strong in +the town and had thus far kept the insurgents +at bay. He readily agreed to take us with him, +knowing the firm to which my father belonged +very well.</p> + +<p>We soon learned that both Tom Dawson and +Matt Gory had shipped temporarily on the +schooner, the captain being somewhat short of +hands, several being sick with scurvy. An hour +after I was on board the <i>Starlight</i> was moving +down the coast to Manila Bay, and I was taking +it easy in a hammock, satisfied that, for a few +days, at least, my troubles were at an end.</p> + +<p>The run to Manila proved without incident +worthy of mention. The weather was ideal and +two days after leaving Subig Bay we sailed past +the grim fortress on Corregidor Island, through +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_103">[103]</span>the narrow channel up to the strip of land upon +which is built Fort Cavité, and dropped anchor +before Manila proper.</p> + +<p>We had hardly taken our place in the shipping +before a Spanish revenue cutter came dashing +up, and a dark-skinned Castilian came aboard +and examined our papers and made a tour of inspection +about the schooner. Then we received +passes to visit the city.</p> + +<p>“Not much of a town,” remarked Dan to me, +as he surveyed the long line of tumble-down +wharves which met our eyes, but as we got closer +we beheld a good-sized city back of the wharves.</p> + +<p>We had anchored near the mouth of the Pasig +River, which divides Manila into two parts. To +the south side of the river is the old town, now +almost abandoned, saving for some Spanish government +buildings and the like.</p> + +<p>To the north side of the river are two districts +called Binondo and Tondo, and here is where the +business is done and where all of the best homes +and clubs are located.</p> + +<p>My father’s firm had its offices on Escolta +Street, one of the main thoroughfares of Manila, +and to this we now directed our footsteps.</p> + +<p>Our walk took us past many quaint shops, not +unlike those I had seen in Hong Kong and in the +Chinatown districts of San Francisco, some of +which were so small that the trading had to be +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_104">[104]</span>done out on the sidewalk. Many of the shopkeepers +were Spanish, but there were a fair +sprinkling of Germans and Englishmen, intermixed +with a large number of Chinese and Japanese +and native Filipinos. At this time the +city had a population of something less than a +hundred thousand, and of these less than five +thousand were Europeans and less than five hundred +Americans.</p> + +<p>The streets were filled with Spanish soldiers +who eyed us sharply as we passed them.</p> + +<p>“It doesn’t look peaceful-like, does it?” remarked +Dan, as we hurried along.</p> + +<p>“Not much!” I returned. “It looks as if +everybody was waiting for somebody else to +knock the chip off of his shoulder, so to speak.”</p> + +<p>“If the natives were thoroughly organized in +this rebellion they could wipe the Spaniards out +in no time, to my way of thinking,” I said. “I +reckon they don’t know their power.”</p> + +<p>“You are right, Oliver, the Tagals can whip +the Spaniards, I am sure of that. And I think +they ought to be free.”</p> + +<p>“So do I. The islands belong to them.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, and——” Dan broke off short. +“Hurry up, it looks as if it was going to rain,” +and he caught me by the arm.</p> + +<p>I understood perfectly well why he had so +quickly changed the subject. Both of us had +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_105">[105]</span>noted that a villainous-looking Spaniard was following +us and drinking in every word we said. +His face showed that he understood English and +now he clung to us closer than ever, as we turned +a corner and came to the long, low building in +which were situated the offices of Raymond, +Holbrook & Smith.</p> + +<p>“Dan Holbrook, how do you do!” cried a tall +young man as he rushed forward and caught my +companion by the hand. “Why, I thought you +had gone down with the wreck of the <i>Dart</i>.”</p> + +<p>The clerk of our firm, for such he proved to be, +was named Harry Longley, and I was speedily +introduced to him, and both Dan and I told our +stories. Longley had heard of the wrecking of +the <i>Dart</i> twenty-four hours before.</p> + +<p>“It’s too bad you lost your money and those +documents,” he said to me. “We ought to have +those papers, they will settle a case over some +land which has been in litigation here for two +years. You see, these Spaniards are trying to +squeeze us out if they possibly can.”</p> + +<p>“But what of this rebellion here?” I questioned.</p> + +<p>“We haven’t felt much of it so far, but I expect +we will before long. All of our time has +been taken up in our difficulties with the Spaniards, +who are trying to force us out of business. +They are taxing us in a way that is outrageous.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_106">[106]</span>“But where is Mr. Cass?” asked Dan, referring +to the manager at Manila.</p> + +<p>“He has gone to one of the other islands on +business.”</p> + +<p>Our talk on business and other matters lasted +for fully an hour. My main concern was for the +papers and money left on board of the <i>Dart</i>, but +Harry Longley could give me no advice as to +how I might get them back.</p> + +<p>“The Spaniards cannot control the natives up +the coast,” he said. “And the only thing I can +see is for Captain Kenny to organize a large +body of men and take the vessel away by force.”</p> + +<p>At that instant the door to the office opened, +and the Spaniard who had followed us up from +the wharf came in, followed by four soldiers.</p> + +<p>“There they are,” he said in Spanish, pointing +to Dan and me. “Arrest them as rebel sympathizers!”</p> + +<p>And then the four soldiers advanced upon my +companion and me to make us prisoners.</p> + +<figure class="figcenter" style="width: 450px;"> + <img src="images/i_p114a.jpg" width="450" height="678" alt=""> + <figcaption> + <p class="caption">“THERE THEY ARE,” HE SAID IN SPANISH, POINTING TO DAN AND + ME, “ARREST THEM AS REBEL SYMPATHIZERS.”</p> + </figcaption> +</figure> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_107">[107]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIV.<br> +<small>THE ESCAPE FROM THE PRISON.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“What does this mean?” demanded Dan, who +understood what was said, even though I did +not.</p> + +<p>“What is up, Dan?” I queried.</p> + +<p>“They want to arrest us as rebel sympathizers.”</p> + +<p>“Great Caesar’s ghost! Why, we——”</p> + +<p>“We talked too much on the street. Don’t +you remember?”</p> + +<p>By this time the four soldiers had advanced +upon us until we were penned in one corner of +the office.</p> + +<p>In vain Harry Longley expostulated. The +Spanish spy who had followed us would not +listen and demanded our immediate arrest.</p> + +<p>I must confess that the sudden turn of affairs +confused me. I had yet to learn the real blessings +of “free speech,” as we understand it in the +United States.</p> + +<p>“You are in a pickle, truly,” said the clerk. +“I hope they can’t prove anything against you.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_108">[108]</span>“I suppose we did talk a little too much,” I +answered bitterly. “What will they do with +us?”</p> + +<p>“They’ll do what they please, from fining you +a dollar or two to shooting you over in the Lunetta,” +answered Longley. The Lunetta is a +public park, and here more than one rebel had +already been executed.</p> + +<p>“Supposing I decline to be arrested?” I went +on.</p> + +<p>“You’ll run the risk of being shot on the +spot.”</p> + +<p>By this time two of the soldiers had caught me +by the arms. The other two made Dan their +prisoner.</p> + +<p>We tried to argue, but all to no purpose, the +Spaniard who had made the charge stating that +we could do our talking when brought up before +the court.</p> + +<p>“We may as well march along,” said Dan +helplessly. “These fellows evidently mean +business.”</p> + +<p>“I’m not going to prison if I can help it,” I +answered desperately.</p> + +<p>“We will see about zat!” cried the Spanish +spy. “March, or I order ze men to shoot!”</p> + +<p>“I shall escape the first chance I get,” I whispered +to Dan.</p> + +<p>“So will I,” answered my companion, and a +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_109">[109]</span>look passed between us which each understood +thoroughly.</p> + +<p>“I’ll help you if I can,” whispered Harry +Longley.</p> + +<p>He was permitted to say no more, indeed, it +was hardly safe to say anything, the Spanish +spy being half of a mind to arrest the clerk, +too.</p> + +<p>We were marched from the office by a back +way and across a narrow street lined with warehouses. +Here we came in contact with a number +of native and Chinese laborers, who eyed us +curiously, but said nothing. As a matter of fact, +arrests of foreigners were becoming frequent in +Manila.</p> + +<p>Ten minutes of walking brought us to a fine +building—at least fine in comparison to those +which surrounded it. This was the jail in which +we were to be confined until brought up for a +hearing.</p> + +<p>We entered the jail yard through a gate to a +tall iron fence. Beyond was a wide, gloomy +corridor, the lower floor of the jail being on a +level with the street. A guard passed us after +hearing what the spy had to say, and we were +conducted to a room in the rear.</p> + +<p>“What a horrible place,” were my first words +to Dan, as I gazed around at our surroundings. +The room was filled with the smoke of the ever-present +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_110">[110]</span>cigarette, for it must be remembered +that in the Philippines women as well as men +smoke. To this smell of tobacco was added that +of cooking with garlic, for garlic is the one vegetable +that is never missing from the pot.</p> + +<p>A dozen prisoners stood and sat around, some +in deep anger and others in sullen silence. +One, an Englishman, was nearly crazy.</p> + +<p>“Hi’ll show them who Hi am!” he bawled. +“Hi’ll sue them for a ’undred thousand punds +damages, so Hi will!”</p> + +<p>“What did they arrest you for?” I asked.</p> + +<p>“What for? Nothing, young man, absolutely +nothing. Hi said it was a beastly country, not +fit for a ’og to live in, and then they collared me. +But Hi’ll show them, blast me hif Hi don’t!” +and he began to pace the floor at a ten-mile-an-hour +gait. Soon a guard came in and threatened +him with a club, and he collapsed in a +corner.</p> + +<p>There were no seats vacant, and Dan and I +took up our places near a window, which was +barred with half a dozen rusty-looking iron +sticks set in mortar which was decidedly crumbly. +As we stood there I tried one of the bars +and found I could wrench it loose with ease. I +mentioned the fact to Dan.</p> + +<p>“Look out of the window and tell me what +you see,” he returned, and I looked.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_111">[111]</span>“I see a guard at the corner of the jail and +another near the fence.”</p> + +<p>“Exactly, and both armed with Mauser rifles, +eh?”</p> + +<p>“They are certainly armed.”</p> + +<p>“Then what chance would we stand to escape, +even if we pulled those bars from the window?”</p> + +<p>“A good chance—at night, when they +couldn’t see us.”</p> + +<p>“By Jove, Oliver, that’s an idea worth remembering. +But we must be careful, or——”</p> + +<p>Dan did not finish, for he had noticed that a +fellow prisoner was listening intently to all which +was said.</p> + +<p>“He may not be a prisoner at all,” he said +later on. “He may be another Spanish spy. +My idea is that the woods are full of them.”</p> + +<p>“I’ve no doubt but that you are right,” I +returned.</p> + +<p>The day passed slowly and so did that which +followed. We had expected an immediate hearing, +but it did not come.</p> + +<p>“I don’t like this,” growled my companion. +“Every prisoner is entitled to appear before the +court. I shall demand a hearing at once, or appeal +to the American consul for aid.”</p> + +<p>Accordingly he notified the jailer that we +wanted to see somebody in authority without +delay.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_112">[112]</span>For reply the Spaniard grinned meaningly +and shrugged his shoulders.</p> + +<p>“Señor must wait,” he said, in broken English. +“All de court verra busy; no can hear you +till next week.”</p> + +<p>“But I demand a hearing,” insisted Dan. +“If I don’t get it I shall write to our American +consul about it.”</p> + +<p>“Write to consul, eh? Who carry de lettair, +señor? Not me surely,” and with another grin +the jailer walked away and left us to ourselves. +We now realized how it was—we were in the +hands of enemies who would do with us just as +they saw fit.</p> + +<p>The next day it began to rain and by nightfall +it was pouring down steadily. There was +neither thunder nor lightning and the firmament +was, to use an old simile, as black as ink. Supper +was served to us at seven o’clock, a beef, rice, +and garlic stew that neither of us could touch. +“I’ll rather starve,” was Dan’s comment.</p> + +<p>By ten o’clock the majority of the prisoners +were sound asleep, the Englishman snoring +loudly and several others keeping in chorus with +him. “Let them snore,” said I, “it will help +drown any noise we may make.”</p> + +<p>Dan and I had secured our places directly beneath +the window previously mentioned, and +now, standing on tiptoes, we worked at the bars +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_113">[113]</span>with an old fork and a rusty spoon we had managed +to secrete from our jailer.</p> + +<p>Ten minutes of twisting and turning and I had +one iron bar loose, and using this as a pry we +soon forced three others, and then the opening +thus afforded was large enough to admit the passage +of a man’s body.</p> + +<p>“Now out we go!” I whispered. “I’ll drop +first and, if the coast is clear, I’ll whisper to you +and you come, but wake the others first, so that +they can have a chance to escape. The more +get away the better it will be for us to escape +recapture.”</p> + +<p>I leaped to the window sill, turned and +dropped outside. All was deserted around the +window and I gave a soft whistle. Instantly +Dan followed me, after kicking half a dozen in +their sides to wake them up. “Out of the +window, all of you!” I heard him cry, and +then he landed beside me, and both of us ran +for the high iron fence I have previously described.</p> + +<p>“<i>Halte!</i>” came the sudden command, in +Spanish, and from out of the gloom emerged a +guard, with pointed gun. He must have seen +Dan, for he ran full tilt at my companion.</p> + +<p>Seeing this I made a circle and came up in his +rear. With a quick leap I was on him, placed +my hands over his mouth and bore him to the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_114">[114]</span>ground. Then Dan leaped in and we tore his +gun from his grasp.</p> + +<p>“Silence, on your life!” said Dan, and the fellow +must have understood, for he did not utter +a sound. Then we continued to the fence, and, +not without some trouble, leaped over.</p> + +<p>By this time the alarm had broken out in the +jail and several lights flared up. The other prisoners +must have tried to escape, for we heard a +wild yelling and half a dozen shots. The latter +aroused the entire neighborhood, and citizens +and soldiers came running in from all directions.</p> + +<p>“We’ve got to leg it now!” I cried. “Come, +on, Dan.”</p> + +<p>“But in what direction?” he gasped, for +climbing the tall fence had deprived him of his +wind.</p> + +<p>“Any direction is better than staying here. +Come,” and I caught him by the hand. By this +time we heard several soldiers making after us, +and away we went at the best speed at our command.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_115">[115]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XV.<br> +<small>BACK TO HONG KONG.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>The main streets of Manila are but few in number. +There are two devoted largely to business, +and three or four that have some handsome residences +and public buildings upon them. But all +of the other highways, so-styled, are simply what +in a United States city would be styled alleyways, +the sidewalks being but two or three feet wide +and the wagon way just about broad enough for +two hand carts to pass each other. On each +side, the ramshackle dwellings project over the +walks, cutting off light and air that are absolutely +essential to health and cleanliness.</p> + +<p>Dan and I had to cross one of the main streets, +but this passed, we lost no time in diving into an +alleyway that was as dark as Erebus. On and +on we went until we brought up plump against +the broadside of a warehouse.</p> + +<p>“We can’t go any further,” I exclaimed.</p> + +<p>“Can it be possible that we’ve got into a blind +pocket?” queried Dan. “Come over here.”</p> + +<p>I did as requested, and soon learned that we +had indeed entered what the French call a <i>cul-de-sac</i>. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_116">[116]</span>On all sides were warehouses, and the +only opening to the narrow highway was that by +which we had entered.</p> + +<p>“The soldiers are coming!” I whispered, after +listening. “Can’t you hear their footsteps?”</p> + +<p>“I can, Oliver. Hang me if I know what to +do. I wish I had that gun,” Dan went on, for +he had thrown the Mauser rifle away.</p> + +<p>I ran up to the warehouse and felt of the +boards. Soon I came to the casement of an +upper doorway, an opening used for hoisting +goods in and out of the warehouse. I snatched +at the lower edge, pulled myself up, and soon +stood in the frame, which was five or six inches +deep.</p> + +<p>“Come up here,” I whispered to Dan, and +helped him to a position beside me. Once we +were in the doorway, we pressed as far back as +possible and waited.</p> + +<p>Soon three soldiers came up, one carrying a +lantern and all armed with rifles. All talked excitedly +in Spanish, but it was in a Luzon dialect +and even Dan could not understand them.</p> + +<p>The soldiers searched around the alleyway for +fully ten minutes, and once almost flashed the +lantern rays up into our faces. But we remained +undiscovered, and presently they ran out +of the <i>cul-de-sac</i>, thinking they had not tracked +us aright.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_117">[117]</span>“Gosh, that was a narrow escape!” I murmured, +when they had departed.</p> + +<p>“Don’t crow, Oliver; we are not yet out of the +woods. Those fellows may be waiting for us up +there,” and Dan pointed to the alley’s entrance.</p> + +<p>“I wonder what sort of a building this is,” I +went on, and turning around began an examination +of the door. Presently my hand touched a +rude wooden latch and the door fell back, sending +us flying onto a floor white with flour and +dirty with a dozen other kinds of merchandise.</p> + +<p>Shutting the door behind us, we pushed our +way among numerous boxes and barrels until +we came to the front of the warehouse. Here +there was a long, low shed, extending to a dock +fronting the Pasig River. The shed was also +filled with merchandise, and at the end of the +dock lay half a dozen lighters such as the Filipinos +use in carrying goods from the river docks +to the large vessels lying in Manila harbor.</p> + +<p>“We are on the Pasig,” announced Dan. +He read the inscriptions on several of the +boxes. “This warehouse belongs to an English +firm named Carley & Stewart, and these goods +are consigned by them to Hong Kong, per +steamer <i>Cardigan</i>.”</p> + +<p>“The <i>Cardigan</i>!” I exclaimed. “Why, she +sails to-morrow. I saw the announcement on a +card down at the office.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_118">[118]</span>“If that’s the case it will be a good chance to +get back to Hong Kong, Oliver.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t want to go to Hong Kong yet, Dan. +I want to get my rights.”</p> + +<p>“So do I, but——”</p> + +<p>“But what?”</p> + +<p>“You know how we fared at the prison. +Supposing we are caught again? That spy will +swear we are rebel sympathizers, and then it will +go hard with us, you may be certain of that.”</p> + +<p>We talked the matter over for fully an hour, +sitting on a couple of boxes in the long shed. +Then both of us grew sleepy and resolved to remain +where we were and let the morrow take +care of itself.</p> + +<p>At daylight several workmen put in appearance, +among them an Englishman who looked as +if he would prove friendly. Watching our opportunity +we called him to one side, and made a +clean breast of the situation.</p> + +<p>“My advice is to get on board of the <i>Cardigan</i> +by all means,” he said. “Don’t you know +that you Americans are going to have a lot of +trouble with these Spaniards now the <i>Maine</i> has +been blown up?”</p> + +<p>This was the first we had heard of the destruction +of the <i>Maine</i>, and we asked him for particulars. +The Englishman knew but little, yet he +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_119">[119]</span>said that the Americans held to it that the Spaniards +had done the dastardly deed.</p> + +<p>“And I shouldn’t wonder but that may mean +war for your country,” he added.</p> + +<p>“If war come, Spain will get whipped badly,” +returned Dan.</p> + +<p>The young Englishman brought us some +breakfast, and we at last decided to go on board +of the <i>Cardigan</i>. “But don’t tell the captain +you escaped from prison,” he said. “If you do, +he won’t dare take you off. Secure your passages +and then turn up missing when the revenue +officers come on board.”</p> + +<p>This we considered excellent advice and followed +it out. A lighter, loaded with hemp bales, +took us to the steamer, an ocean “tramp” of +2000 tons’ burden, and we lost no time in presenting +ourselves to Captain Montgomery.</p> + +<p>“Want passage to Hong Kong, eh?” he said. +“Why don’t you go on the regular mail +steamers?”</p> + +<p>“We have some private reasons,” answered +Dan. “What will the passage money be?”</p> + +<p>Captain Montgomery studied our faces for a +moment.</p> + +<p>“Aren’t criminals, are you?” he said sharply.</p> + +<p>“Do we look like criminals?” I demanded.</p> + +<p>“Can’t go by looks nowaday, lad. Last year +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_120">[120]</span>I had a man beat me out of twenty pounds and +he looked like a parson, he did indeed.”</p> + +<p>“We are not criminals,” answered Dan. +“We want to get out of Manila for political +reasons, if you must know.”</p> + +<p>“Americans, eh?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir—and not ashamed to own it.”</p> + +<p>Captain Montgomery held out his hands.</p> + +<p>“I’ll see you through, boys. I’ve got a bit of +American blood in me, too, on my mother’s side. +Twelve pounds apiece takes you straight to our +dock in Hong Kong,—and no more questions +asked.”</p> + +<p>As we were out of funds we had to consider +what would be best to do about paying the +twenty-four pounds. I solved the difficulty by +addressing a note to Harry Longley asking an +advance of thirty pounds, to be put in Captain +Montgomery’s care. This would leave Dan and +me three pounds each—about fifteen dollars—until +we were safe in Hong Kong once more. +The message was carried by an under-officer of +the <i>Cardigan</i>, and the money was obtained from +our Manila representative without trouble, +Longley being glad to learn of our escape.</p> + +<p>The <i>Cardigan</i> was to leave her anchorage in +front of Manila at four o’clock in the afternoon, +and an hour before that time hatches were closed +and the Spanish revenue officers came on board +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_121">[121]</span>for a look around. There was an Englishman, +his wife, and three children on the deck.</p> + +<p>“Who are those?” asked the leading revenue +officer.</p> + +<p>“They are to be passengers,” answered Captain +Montgomery. “Unless you say they can’t +go.”</p> + +<p>“Who are they?”</p> + +<p>The officer was told and the Englishman was +brought up for inspection. Apparently it was +all right, and after a tour of the steamer, the +Spaniards left.</p> + +<p>Dan and I had meanwhile waited in the cabin +in much anxiety. We remained below for the +balance of the day, and when we came up late in +the evening, the lights of Corregidor Island +shone far behind and we were standing out +boldly into the China Sea.</p> + +<p>“Good-by to Luzon!” I cried. “My stay on +that island was short and bitter.”</p> + +<p>“I wonder if we will ever see the Philippines +again?” mused Dan.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps so, Dan. I don’t much care. +But I would like to get my things from the +<i>Dart</i>.”</p> + +<p>“So would I, Oliver. But even such a loss is +preferable to a long term spent in a Spanish +prison.”</p> + +<p>“True, but——” I drew a long breath. “I +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_122">[122]</span>want to get square with those Dons, as they call +them, and with Captain Kenny.”</p> + +<p>The weather was of the finest, and day after +day passed quickly, as the <i>Cardigan</i> skimmed +over the sea on her northwest course. As we +sat on the deck in our camp-chairs I wondered +what would happen when we got to Hong Kong, +and if trouble would really come between Spain +and the United States because of the destruction +of the <i>Maine</i> and the war in Cuba. Little did I +dream of all the fierce fighting that was so close +at hand, and of the parts Dan and I were to play +in the coming contest.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_123">[123]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XVI.<br> +<small>THE OPENING OF THE WAR.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“Here we are at last, Oliver! I declare the +place looks like home to me, after being away +so long!”</p> + +<p>It was Dan who spoke, as the <i>Cardigan</i> +steamed up to her wharf at the Chinese-English +port for which she had been bound. The +voyage had proved without incident, and we +stepped from the ship feeling in the best of +health, despite the many adventures through +which we had passed.</p> + +<p>“It certainly looks more friendly than Manila +did,” I returned, as I gazed at the long line of +shipping. “I wonder what your folks will say +when they hear our story.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps Harry Longley has succeeded in +getting a cablegram through,” was the answer. +“The Spaniards are cute, but, you know, we +have a secret code.”</p> + +<p>Leaving the <i>Cardigan</i>, we walked up the broad +wharf and on the street. Not far away was a +booth at which foreign periodicals were sold. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_124">[124]</span>Around this booth a number of men were congregated, +talking excitedly.</p> + +<p>“War has been declared between the United +States and Spain!” were the first words which +reached my ears.</p> + +<p>“Can that be true?” I burst out.</p> + +<p>Dan did not answer, but pushed his way to +the stand, and bought a copy of the latest paper +to be had.</p> + +<p>“Yes, the war is practically on,” he said, scanning +the sheet. “Here is a dispatch from Washington. +Havana, Cuba, is about to be blockaded.”</p> + +<p>“And the army is to be called out,” I said, +looking over his shoulder. “Oh, Dan, what +about Manila now,—and our business?”</p> + +<p>“Let us hurry to my father’s office,” answered +my chum, and thrusting the paper in his pocket +he stalked down the street and I after him.</p> + +<p>The office of Raymond, Holbrook & Smith +was a pretentious one of stone, located on a main +corner of Hong Kong. Entering, we found Mr. +Holbrook deep in some accounts.</p> + +<p>“Dan!” he cried, and caught his son by both +hands. “I was afraid you were dead,—that you +had gone down with the <i>Dart</i>.”</p> + +<p>“Then you have heard of the foundering, +father?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, a cablegram came in a few days ago. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_125">[125]</span>And you, Oliver, too! I am thankful to +Heaven that you both are safe!” and he shook +hands.</p> + +<p>“We had a good many adventures,” said the +son, as we seated ourselves.</p> + +<p>“No doubt. Tell me your story.”</p> + +<p>What we had to say occupied the best part of +an hour, and then it was lunch time and the +three of us went to eat. Mr. Holbrook was +very much perplexed.</p> + +<p>“This war will upset everything,” he said. +“We are already cut off from Manila.”</p> + +<p>“By cablegram?” I queried.</p> + +<p>“Yes, and by mail, too. A message I offered +yesterday was refused, and I was given to understand +that no letter to an American firm would +be delivered.”</p> + +<p>“Is the war to be carried on away out here?” +I cried, struck with a sudden idea.</p> + +<p>“It will be carried on wherever the armies and +navies of Spain and America may meet,” was the +serious reply. “This war is to be no child’s +play.”</p> + +<p>“Well, we can’t do much out here,” said Dan. +“We have no soldiers closer than those at San +Francisco.”</p> + +<p>“We have a number of warships in these +waters, my son—I looked into that matter last +night.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_126">[126]</span>“American men-o’-war?” I put in, with interest.</p> + +<p>“Yes, five or six of them, commanded by +Commodore Dewey.”</p> + +<p>“Where are the ships?”</p> + +<p>“Here at Hong Kong, presumably awaiting +orders from Washington.”</p> + +<p>“And have the Spaniards any war vessels +about the Philippines?” asked Dan.</p> + +<p>“Yes, they have a fleet under the command of +a certain Admiral Montojo.”</p> + +<p>“And what if these two fleets meet?”</p> + +<p>“There will be a big fight, my boy, and who +will come off victorious there is no telling.”</p> + +<p>“We’ll win!” I cried. “I don’t believe those +Spaniards can whip us.”</p> + +<p>“We mustn’t be over-confident, Oliver, even +if we hope for the best. But this war is a bad +thing for our house, and the loss of those documents +you were carrying makes matters still +worse.” Mr. Holbrook scratched his head in +perplexity. “I am afraid our Manila connection +will become a total loss to us.”</p> + +<p>“Have we much money invested there?”</p> + +<p>“Something like forty or forty-five thousand +dollars. The Spanish sugar planters who have +bought machinery of us won’t pay a dollar +now.”</p> + +<p>“Unless we come out ahead in this war—and +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_127">[127]</span>we will come out ahead,” put in Dan. “Hang +it all, but I feel like fighting myself!”</p> + +<p>“So do I!” I cried. “I wish we had some +soldiers out here, I would join them, and sail for +Manila and demand our rights.”</p> + +<p>At this outburst Mr. Holbrook smiled. +“You are very enthusiastic. Soldiering is not +such a holiday-making as you may imagine.”</p> + +<p>“We couldn’t have any worse experience +than we have had among those dirty Tagals,” I +answered. “I want to get back there, and get +square with those Spaniards, and with that villainous +Captain Kenny.”</p> + +<p>The conversation continued for the best part +of the afternoon, but without definite results. +As it drew toward evening, Dan and I accompanied +Mr. Holbrook to the latter’s home, where +we were warmly received by Mrs. Holbrook and +the other members of the family.</p> + +<p>Mr. Holbrook had expected to go out in the +evening, on a matter of business, but was not +feeling well, and presently asked Dan if he would +like to carry a note to a friend’s house for him.</p> + +<p>“Why, certainly I’ll go,” answered the son, +and I said I would accompany him.</p> + +<p>The letter was soon written and handed over, +and we started out, down the broad street and +then through half a dozen narrow and crooked +thoroughfares belonging to the ancient portion +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_128">[128]</span>of Hong Kong. The friend lived the best part +of a mile away, and we did not reach his residence +until after nine o’clock.</p> + +<p>The message delivered, we started on our return. +It had been dark and threatening a storm, +but instead of rain a heavy mist crept up from the +China Sea, through which the scattered street +lights shone like tiny yellow candles.</p> + +<p>“It’s beastly,” remarked Dan, as he buttoned +up his coat around his neck. “I shall be glad +when we are safe home and in bed. My, how +good it will feel to get back into my own bed +again!”</p> + +<p>“It will beat sleeping in a dirty Tagal hut, +won’t it?” I laughed.</p> + +<p>“Indeed it will, Oliver. That experience +was—” Dan broke off short. “What’s that?”</p> + +<p>A loud cry came from behind, a man’s voice.</p> + +<p>“Help, help! Murder! help!”</p> + +<p>“Somebody is in trouble!” I ejaculated.</p> + +<p>“What had we best do?”</p> + +<p>The question remained unanswered in words, +but both of us broke into a run, heading as +closely as we could for the spot from whence the +cry came.</p> + +<p>The mist confused us not a little, and as the +cries ceased we paused in perplexity.</p> + +<p>“Where are you?” I yelled.</p> + +<p>“What’s up?” added Dan.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_129">[129]</span>“This way! Help!” came more feebly. +“The heathens are trying to murder me!”</p> + +<p>The words came from the entrance to a narrow +alleyway, along which were situated several +Chinese gambling houses. As we sped along, I +caught up a stone that lay handy, and Dan +pulled out a pistol he had procured before starting +out, for in Hong Kong it is a common thing +to go armed.</p> + +<p>We were but a few feet from the scene of the +encounter when a Chinaman plumped into me, +sending me headlong. But as I went down I +caught the Celestial by the foot, and he fell.</p> + +<p>The shock dazed me for an instant, and before +I could recover the Chinaman had me by the +throat.</p> + +<p>“Let—let up!” I gasped, and as he did not I +grabbed him by the ear, at which he let out a +scream of pain. Then, in a twinkling, a dagger +was flashed before my eyes, and I felt as if my +last moment on earth had come.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_130">[130]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XVII.<br> +<small>I MEET COMMODORE DEWEY.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“Help!”</p> + +<p>That was but the single word I uttered as the +sharp blade dangled before my eyes and burnt itself +on my brain. I felt that I was about to die—that +an unknown Chinese assassin was about to +slay me.</p> + +<p>But in a twinkling the scene changed. Dan +heard me go down, stopped, and turned back.</p> + +<p>“Let him alone or I will shoot!” he cried, +in Chinese, for he had picked up a good deal of +the language while living in Hong Kong. His +pistol came out, and the muzzle was thrust upon +the Celestial’s yellow neck.</p> + +<p>The touch of the cold barrel of steel seemed +to paralyze the Chinaman, and he fell back. +“No shoot!” he mumbled. “No shoot!” And +picking himself up, he sped away in the gloom +as if a demon was after him.</p> + +<p>“The cowardly sneak!” cried my chum. “If +he—come!”</p> + +<p>Another cry ahead had rung out, and away he +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_131">[131]</span>went, with me behind him. My heart was in a +flutter, not knowing what was coming next.</p> + +<p>But soon the whole cause of the trouble was +revealed. An American naval officer had been +waylaid by three Chinese footpads. One had +run away—the fellow I had encountered—but +the others remained, and they had the officer on +his back and were going through his pockets.</p> + +<p>“Let up, or I will shoot!” said Dan, and +flourished his pistol. At the same moment I +stumbled over the officer’s sword and picked it +up.</p> + +<p>“Shoot them! the villains!” moaned the officer. +He had received a heavy cut over the +temple from which the blood flowed profusely.</p> + +<p>“Stop, I say,” commanded Dan, and now the +two Celestials turned. One aimed a blow at +Dan, but I cut him short with the sword. Then +my chum fired, and the rascal dropped his club, +and of a sudden both took to their heels and disappeared +in the darkness and mist.</p> + +<p>We followed the Chinamen for a distance of +fifty feet, then returned to the officer, to find that +he had sunk down beside a wall in a heap. His +eyes were closed and he did not move.</p> + +<p>“He looks as if he was dead,” said Dan soberly. +“He’s got an awful cut over the eye.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps he has only fainted,” I returned. +“Let us bind his head up without delay.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_132">[132]</span>We took our handkerchiefs and strips from +the linings of our coats and set to work instantly, +meanwhile laying the officer down on a patch of +soft dirt close to the wall. We had just finished +binding up the wound, when the sufferer stirred.</p> + +<p>“Help!” he murmured. “Oh, my poor +head!”</p> + +<p>“You are safe, sir,” I said. “The Chinamen +have fled.”</p> + +<p>“Is that true? Thank God! They wanted +to kill me for the few pounds I have in my +pocket.”</p> + +<p>“Are you wounded otherwise than in the +head?” asked Dan.</p> + +<p>“I—yes—one of them hit me in the leg, the +left one,—it pains a good deal. Oh, my head!” +And the officer fell back once more.</p> + +<p>I proceeded to make him as comfortable as +possible, while Dan scurried around for some +water. In the meantime the houses and shops +in the neighborhood remained closed, having +been shut up at the first signs of an encounter. +In Hong Kong, if anything goes wrong, the +native inhabitants always pretend to know nothing +about it.</p> + +<p>When the officer felt strong enough to talk +connectedly he told us that he was Clare Todd, +belonging to the cruiser <i>Olympia</i>, of Commodore +Dewey’s squadron.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_133">[133]</span>“I am a lieutenant of marines,” he explained. +“I am on shore leave, stopping with my aunt, +Mrs. Nelson, on Queen Street. Why these footpads +attacked me I do not know.”</p> + +<p>“One of us had best call a carriage,” said Dan. +“You can’t walk to your aunt’s home.”</p> + +<p>“I do not wish to go back to my aunt’s. I +must report for duty on the flagship without delay, +for our squadron has orders to leave Hong +Kong as soon as possible, on account of the war, +and this being a neutral port.”</p> + +<p>“More of the war,” smiled Dan grimly. +“Well, supposing we have you taken to the +dock?”</p> + +<p>“That will suit very well. But who are you +who have done me such a great service?”</p> + +<p>“My friend can tell you that, while I hunt up +the carriage,” said Dan. “Look out for more +footpads,” he added, and hurried away.</p> + +<p>I soon introduced myself and told Lieutenant +Todd about Dan. He had often heard of the +firm of Raymond, Holbrook & Smith, and had +met Mr. Holbrook once, in San Francisco.</p> + +<p>“I shall always remember you for what you +have done for me,” he said warmly. “It was +brave.”</p> + +<p>Soon Dan came with the carriage, a curious +turnout, which, however, need not be described +here. As the lieutenant was in no condition to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_134">[134]</span>travel alone, we agreed to accompany him to the +dock at which he said one of the small boats belonging +to the <i>Olympia</i> was in waiting, not only +for him, but for half a dozen others.</p> + +<p>The drive was a short one through the dark +and almost deserted streets. When the dock +was gained, we found that a steam launch was +there, in command of an under-officer and three +men.</p> + +<p>“Well, well, Todd, you’ve had quite an adventure!” +exclaimed the officer of the launch, +who seemed to be a personal friend of the +marine. “It’s a lucky thing these Yankee lads +came to the rescue.”</p> + +<p>“That is true, Porter. They are as brave as +lions.”</p> + +<p>“Then they had better enlist with us,” was the +laughing reply. “We need that sort of backbone, +now.”</p> + +<p>“I’d like to enlist with you first-rate!” I +burst out. “Especially if you sail for Manila to +wake the Spaniards up there.”</p> + +<p>“I reckon we’ll hunt up old Montojo, wherever +he is, young man. As soon as he gets sailing +orders, Commodore Dewey won’t give him +one bit of rest.”</p> + +<p>So the talk ran on for several minutes, and +then several other officers arrived, among them +Commodore Dewey himself, a well-built gentleman +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_135">[135]</span>of about sixty, of fine naval bearing. He +looked greatly surprised to see Clare Todd with +his head tied up.</p> + +<p>“You want to be careful in the future,” he +said, when the lieutenant of marines had told his +story. “We can’t afford to lose any men just +now. So these lads assisted you?”</p> + +<p>“They did, Commodore, and they are as +plucky lads as I ever met.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, our American lads are always plucky!” +smiled the commodore, who, as I afterward +learned, was one of the most warm-hearted of +commanders.</p> + +<p>“Commodore Dewey, I hope you are going to +Manila to settle the Spaniards there!” I burst +out impulsively.</p> + +<p>“Are you particularly interested in having me +go to Manila?” was the somewhat quick question +put in return.</p> + +<p>“I am, sir,” and in a few words I explained +why.</p> + +<p>“Well, there is no telling where we may get +before this war is over, Raymond,” he said, when +I had finished. “I shall certainly do all in my +power to protect American interests, wherever +they may be. But we must be off now.” He +turned to the under-officer in charge of the +steam launch. “Cast off from shore!”</p> + +<p>“Good-by!” shouted Clare Todd, and we said +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_136">[136]</span>good-by in return, and leaped to the wharf. +There we stood still to watch the departure of +the launch, but the craft did not budge.</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter?” demanded the commodore, +as he saw the engineer working over +the miniature engine.</p> + +<p>“The valve is out of order, sir,” was the answer. +“We ought to have a new one.”</p> + +<p>“Can’t you run the launch back to the ship?”</p> + +<p>“I’ll try my best, sir.”</p> + +<p>I listened to this bit of conversation with interest, +for, as I mentioned before, I was deeply +interested in engines. As the engineer continued +to work over the parts I came closer.</p> + +<p>“Excuse me, but won’t you let me take a look +at that engine?” I said. “I know how these +things are built.”</p> + +<p>“Certainly you can look at it,” answered the +commodore, and once more I leaped on +board.</p> + +<p>“Can’t do anything with a split part,” growled +the engineer, a fellow named Graves. “A boy +like you——” He did not finish, but looked a +good deal disgusted.</p> + +<p>I took the lantern and got down on my knees. +The cap over the valve was split, as he had said, +and something had shifted below. It was certainly +a “teasing” breakdown, but, luckily, I +had seen such a fracture remedied before.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_137">[137]</span>“A clamp over the plate will do the business,” +I said.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but there is no clamp on board,” was +the answer.</p> + +<p>“Have you a couple of wrenches?”</p> + +<p>“We have one wrench.”</p> + +<p>“And a coil of wire?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, there is wire.”</p> + +<p>“Then that will do. Here, we will clamp up +this end first, and bind it with wire. Then we’ll +clamp this end up, and leave the wrench on, and +I’ll wager you can carry a half pressure of steam +easily.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t think,” began Graves, when the +commodore silenced him.</p> + +<p>“Try the boy’s scheme,” he said, for he had +studied a little of steam engineering himself, at +Annapolis, years before.</p> + +<p>It did not take long to put my plan into operation, +I looking to it that the wire was wound just +as I wanted it, and the wrench set in exactly the +right place. Steam was all ready, and when I +had concluded, the engine carried a few pounds +over half pressure without a sign of giving way.</p> + +<p>“She’s all right now,” I said. “Only watch +that wrench and see that it doesn’t slip.”</p> + +<p>“I declare, you’re quite a genius!” laughed +the commodore. “I think I had better take you +with me.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_138">[138]</span>“All right; I’ll go!” I answered, half in jest +and half in earnest. “I know something about +guns as well as about engines.”</p> + +<p>“You are certainly the kind we want,” was the +pleasant response. “Good-night, and good-by +until we meet again!” And as the steam +launch moved away, the commodore waved his +hand pleasantly, and Dan and I took off our hats +to him in return. Soon the darkness swallowed +up the little craft.</p> + +<p>“Dan, I wish I was going with him!” I burst +out impulsively. “A cruise on a man-o’-war, +especially in war times, would just suit me.”</p> + +<p>“So say I, Oliver,” answered my chum. +“Hurrah for the American Navy!”</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_139">[139]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XVIII.<br> +<small>THE FIGHTING ENGINEER.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>That night I slept but little. Strange as it +may seem, I could not get Commodore Dewey’s +face out of my mind. I thought of him continually, +with his trim naval uniform and well-polished +sword and scabbard. He was certainly +a splendid specimen of an American naval gentleman.</p> + +<p>“Why don’t you go to sleep,” asked Dan, +who roomed with me at his home. “You’ve +been tumbling and tossing for a couple of hours. +Was that encounter with the Chinamen too +much for you.”</p> + +<p>“No, I was thinking of Commodore Dewey, +Dan.”</p> + +<p>“What! Why, I was thinking of him myself. +Say, do you know, Oliver, that his flagship, the +<i>Olympia</i>, is one of the finest cruisers in our +navy?”</p> + +<p>“I have never seen her.”</p> + +<p>“I saw her once, a few months ago. She is +immense; and so are the other ships under his +command, especially the <i>Boston</i>.”</p> + +<p>“That’s only an aggravation—if a fellow can’t +board her.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_140">[140]</span>“Do you really and truly want to enlist?”</p> + +<p>“If we are going to have war I would like to +see some of it. My grandfather fought in the +Mexican War and my uncle was killed at Lookout +Mountain, in our Civil War. So, you see, +I’ve got fighting blood in me. Besides, if +Commodore Dewey goes to the Philippines——”</p> + +<p>“We may get a chance to retrieve our fallen +fortunes?”</p> + +<p>“Exactly, Dan. I wouldn’t like any better +fun than to give those Manila Spaniards what +they deserve for placing us under arrest.”</p> + +<p>“I am with you there, Oliver. But”—Dan +gave a deep yawn—“let’s go to sleep now,” +and in a minute more he was in the land of +dreams, while I was dreaming in another way, +of a proud-looking warship, with myself behind +a long gun, in a cloud of smoke, fighting as I +had never fought before, for the honor of the +glorious Stars and Stripes.</p> + +<p>The next day was a busy one for Dan and an +idle one for myself. In the afternoon I met several +American sailors from the <i>Boston</i>, another +of Commodore Dewey’s squadron, and being in +a talkative mood they filled me up with tales of +gallantry on shipboard, and sent me back to Mr. +Holbrook’s place more determined than ever to +enlist on the <i>Olympia</i> or the <i>Boston</i>.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_141">[141]</span>That evening Mr. Holbrook, Dan, and I held +a long talk, lasting until midnight. It was on +the subject of our being able to join those on +board of the American squadron, provided that +squadron sailed for the Philippines. Mr. Holbrook +did not care greatly to let us go, but +thought that perhaps it would do no harm to let +each get a taste of life in the navy.</p> + +<p>“I will take you out to the squadron myself +and see if I can gain a personal interview with +either the commodore or the captain,” he said, +and so it was decided.</p> + +<p>My heart bounded wildly over the prospect. +Somehow I felt it “in my bones” that I would +join the navy, and so it turned out, to cut a long +story short. We went over in a small boat +which Mr. Holbrook hired, and were accorded +a long interview by both the commodore and +the kind-hearted Captain Wildes of the <i>Boston</i>.</p> + +<p>As Lieutenant Todd had said, the Asiatic +Squadron had orders to leave Hong Kong, and +was bound for Mirs Bay; so, if we were to go +along, no time was to be lost in preparing for +our departure. We accordingly hurried back to +Dan’s house with all speed, packed our valises, +and came back by nightfall.</p> + +<p>I had been on a warship before, but the <i>Boston</i>, +on which we were placed, with her steel +decks, heavy military masts, and long guns interested +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_142">[142]</span>me greatly. We soon made ourselves +at home, and before we left Mirs Bay, on that +never-to-be-forgotten trip to Manila Bay, both +of us knew the craft from stem to stern.</p> + +<p>We found the crew truly American—“to the +backbone”—as Dan expressed it. One old +gunner, named Roundstock, took a great interest +in us, and told us a great deal about the +squadron.</p> + +<p>“We’ve got four cruisers and three gunboats,” +he said. “They are as fine as you’ll find +’em anywhere, although, to be sure, we are turning +out ships better and better every day. If we +meet those Spaniards we’ll give ’em a tough tussle, +and don’t you forget it!” And he shook +his head to show that he meant what he said.</p> + +<p>As we were not exactly enlisted for the cruise, +we had not to attend the numerous drills on +board, although we trained at the guns and with +small-arms, and I took many a trip below to the +engine rooms. In the engine rooms I met Bill +Graves again, he having been transferred from +the flagship. He scowled at me silently, and +when I attempted to talk to him, turned his back +and walked away.</p> + +<p>“That fellow has no use for you,” observed +Dan, when I told him about Graves.</p> + +<p>“I believe you there. But it is silly for him +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_143">[143]</span>to get mad simply because I showed him how +to fix up the launch engine.”</p> + +<p>“He is jealous of you, especially as Commodore +Dewey complimented you on your work, +Oliver.”</p> + +<p>The second night on board of the man-o’-war +proved a nasty one, and it looked as if we would +have to pull up anchors and move out of the +bay, for fear of having a sudden wind send us +ashore. Yet Commodore Dewey hated to get +too far from shore, for he was awaiting final +orders before sailing in quest of the Spanish +fleet.</p> + +<p>“This is enough to make one sick,” I observed +to Dan. “I would rather sleep on shore +to-night.”</p> + +<p>Bill Graves was passing us at the time, and a +sneer showed itself on his lip.</p> + +<p>“You’re a fine landlubber to be on one of +Uncle Sam’s men-o’-war,” he sniffed.</p> + +<p>The remark nettled me, and I swung around +quickly and caught him by the shoulder.</p> + +<p>“See here, Graves,” I said. “I have no quarrel +with you, but if you want to act nasty let me +tell you that you had better take care.”</p> + +<p>“Humph! Do you think I am afraid of +you?” he blustered.</p> + +<p>“I’ll let you know that you can’t bully me, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_144">[144]</span>that’s all. I want you to keep your remarks to +yourself.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll say what I please.”</p> + +<p>“Not about me.”</p> + +<p>“Won’t I? Who will stop me?”</p> + +<p>“I will.”</p> + +<p>“Go and blab, I suppose?”</p> + +<p>“No; I’m not of the blabbing kind.”</p> + +<p>“Do you mean to say you’ll fight?”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps I will.”</p> + +<p>“You whipper-snapper!” he cried in a rage. +“Take that for a lesson!”</p> + +<p>He struck out heavily, and had I not been on +the alert I would have caught his fist on my nose +and gone down. But I leaped to one side and +his hand merely grazed my shoulder.</p> + +<p>By this time my blood was up, and, leaping +in, I landed one blow on his chest and another +on his mouth, which latter drew blood and +loosened two of his teeth. I had taken several +lessons in the art of self-defense and these now +stood me in good stead. My blows sent him +staggering up against a gun, where he stood +gazing at me in bewildered astonishment.</p> + +<p>“Wha—what did you do that for?” he spluttered, +spitting out some blood.</p> + +<p>“I warned you to take care,” I answered +coolly.</p> + +<p>“A mill! A mill!” cried half a dozen jack +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_145">[145]</span>tars standing by, while Dan came running up to +learn what the row was about.</p> + +<p>“Don’t fight, Oliver,” said my chum, in a low +voice. “They’ll lock you up in the brig, if you +do.”</p> + +<p>“He began it, Dan. I only defended myself. +If he——”</p> + +<p>I had no time to say more, for, watching his +chance, Bill Graves leaped in again, this time +hitting me on the cheek, a blow that almost +floored me.</p> + +<p>“Take that!” he hissed. “I’ll teach you!”</p> + +<p>“A man against a boy! That aint fair!” was +the cry from several sailors and gunners. “Let +up, Graves.”</p> + +<p>“I won’t let up. He’s too fresh, and I’m going +to teach him his place.”</p> + +<p>By this time I had recovered and was standing +my ground once more. Again the engineer +came on, but as he struck out I parried the blow +and let drive first with my right fist and then my +left. Both blows landed on his chin, and over +he went like a ten-pin struck down on an alley.</p> + +<p>“Graves is down!”</p> + +<p>“Those were two neat blows, eh?”</p> + +<p>“That boy knows how to take care of himself, +I take it.”</p> + +<p>Such were some of the remarks which passed +around. Half stunned, Bill Graves arose slowly +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_146">[146]</span>to his feet and looked around sheepishly. Without +giving him time to get his second wind I +confronted him.</p> + +<p>“Have you had enough, or do you want +more?” I demanded.</p> + +<p>“I—I—don’t you hit me again,” he stammered.</p> + +<p>“Have you had enough?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t want to fight—it’s against the rules +of the ship.”</p> + +<p>“Then what did you want to start it for?”</p> + +<p>“I didn’t start it; you started it yourself,” he +muttered, and before I could say more hurried +away and out of sight in the direction of the +engine rooms.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_147">[147]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIX.<br> +<small>“FIRE!”</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“Oliver, you went at him in great style,” observed +Dan, when the excitement was over and +we found ourselves alone. “After this you’ll be +the cock of the walk.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t want to be cock of the walk, Dan. I +simply want to be left alone.”</p> + +<p>“But you pitched into him like a prizefighter. +It was—well, simply immense, it was indeed.”</p> + +<p>“I am glad I can use my fists when it becomes +necessary. I hope he’ll let me alone in the +future.”</p> + +<p>“Let you alone? I’ll wager he won’t come +within a hundred feet of you unless it’s absolutely +necessary.”</p> + +<p>“He’s a fool to be angry with me. If he had +taken things in good part at first there would +have been no trouble.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, there are lots of pig-headed men just +like him, Oliver. But I reckon you’ll have no +further trouble with him.”</p> + +<p>There was no room for us at the guns, so both +Dan and I were placed, for convenience’ sake, +among the sailors. But on such a steam vessel +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_148">[148]</span>as the <i>Boston</i> there is little or nothing for sailors +to do, and our time was, as before, our own.</p> + +<p>We lay in Mirs Bay for several days longer. +But early one day some special dispatches were +received, and half an hour later the <i>Olympia</i> flew +the signal: “Up anchors and follow the flagship,” +and all hands knew we were off at last.</p> + +<p>The three cruisers, <i>Olympia</i>, <i>Baltimore</i>, and +<i>Boston</i>, were the first to steam away, and they +were shortly followed by the gunboats <i>Concord</i>, +<i>Petrel</i>, and <i>McCulloch</i>, and two colliers, the latter +loaded to the rail with coal for the six warships.</p> + +<p>“What a splendid sight!” I said to Dan, as +we stood on deck watching the column of vessels +sweeping out swiftly to sea. “If we meet +those Dons there will be fun.”</p> + +<p>“Pretty serious fun, Oliver, to my way of +thinking. Killing fellow-beings isn’t much +play.”</p> + +<p>“That’s right, Dan; but if we have got to +have war I hope we come out on top.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, so do I!”</p> + +<p>The day was an ideal one, and we remained on +deck until the intense heat drove us below. +Here we found a great state of confusion, for +orders had been passed around to “clear ship +for action,” and all hands were tearing down unnecessary +woodwork, preparatory to heaving it +overboard.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_149">[149]</span>“It won’t do to have splinters around, you +see,” explained Bob Roundstock, the gunner. +“We want everything clear for action, just as +the order says.”</p> + +<p>The woodwork disposed of, ammunition was +passed around and fire tubs were filled with +water. Then the great guns, fore and aft, +were loaded, and kept in readiness for instant +use.</p> + +<p>Several days passed without anything unusual +happening. The weather remained fair, +although the wind blew so strongly that the colliers +were in danger of being swamped, so +heavily were they loaded. We might have run +at a greater rate of speed, but the colliers and +the <i>Petrel</i> could not keep up, and Commodore +Dewey thought it advisable, now we were in +the enemy’s waters, to keep his squadron and +supply boats together.</p> + +<p>“I wonder where we will find this Admiral +Montojo?” I said one evening, as Dan and I +lounged on deck. “Was he at Manila when we +were there?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, I’m sure. He must be somewhere +among the Philippine Islands.”</p> + +<p>“That’s saying a good deal, when the islands +number over a thousand.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, he must be near one or another of the +principal cities, Oliver. At a second-rate place +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_150">[150]</span>he would have nothing to protect but a collection +of bamboo huts.”</p> + +<p>“Has he much of a fleet?”</p> + +<p>“Supposed to have eight or nine vessels, so +Roundstock told me. He is one of Spain’s best +admirals, too, I was told.”</p> + +<p>“Then we won’t have a walk-over. If we—hark!”</p> + +<p>A sudden cry from below reached our ears. +Both of us listened intently, but could make out +only a confusion of voices.</p> + +<p>“Something is wrong,” cried Dan. “Let us +see what it is,” and he ran for the stairs.</p> + +<p>We met half a dozen gunners coming up. +“Fire! fire!” yelled one of the number. “There +is a fire between decks!”</p> + +<p>“A fire!” The cry was instantly taken up on +all sides. “Whereabouts?”</p> + +<p>“Near Jackson’s gun. It caught from some +straw that was in a crockery barrel Gumpers was +emptying. It’s close to a lot of ammunition!”</p> + +<p>“Man the fire hose!” put in an officer. +“Lively, boys, or we’ll have an explosion!”</p> + +<p>The cry of fire had by this time aroused the +entire ship, and men came hurrying to the scene +from all directions.</p> + +<p>At first all was confusion, but soon discipline +reigned supreme, and the fire drill was put into +execution.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_151">[151]</span>Would they subdue the flames before it +reached the loose ammunition which had just +been sent up from below?</p> + +<p>This was the all-important question that I +asked myself as I stood by, watching what was +going on.</p> + +<p>I wanted to help and so did Dan, but we could +do nothing.</p> + +<p>Presently a dull explosion was heard, followed +by another.</p> + +<p>“The ammunition is going up!”</p> + +<p>“Are the steel covers to the magazines +closed?”</p> + +<p>Several other cries rang out. In the meantime +the firemen continued to pour two heavy +streams of sea water on the flames.</p> + +<p>Thick volumes of smoke rolled up the companion +ways, and I felt that those below were in +danger of being choked to death.</p> + +<p>“This is awful!” murmured Dan. “I hope +we don’t blow up, as did the <i>Maine</i>.”</p> + +<p>“We won’t, for she blew up from the outside, +not the inside,” I answered grimly.</p> + +<p>“Well, one way would be just as bad as the +other, Oliver.”</p> + +<p>“I suppose that is so, as far as we are concerned.”</p> + +<p>The work continued and all watched the labor +nervously.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_152">[152]</span>At last the fire captain came up, blinking his +eyes and shaking the water from his clothing. +He looked as black as a negro.</p> + +<p>“It’s out, sir,” he reported, saluting the officer +of the deck.</p> + +<p>“All out?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir, although we had better watch +for sparks when the half-burned stuff is removed.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, be very careful. We’ll pitch it overboard +at once.”</p> + +<p>Extra men were sent below, and they soon +came up, carrying the burned and wet straw in +their arms. In ten minutes all was cleared away, +and then followed such a scrubbing and cleaning +up as I had never seen before.</p> + +<p>“The carpenter will have a day’s work here,” +observed Dan, as we surveyed the scene of the +fire. “But we can thank God that it was no +worse.”</p> + +<p>“So say I,” was my answer. “I don’t want +any more sunken ships in mine. The <i>Dart</i> was +sufficient.”</p> + +<p>The day to follow was uneventful. It was +clear and hot, so hot in fact that, during the +noon-day hours, nobody could remain on deck. +In the turrets and conning tower it was suffocating.</p> + +<p>“I feel as if I was half baked,” said Dan, as +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_153">[153]</span>we lay in a shady corner on the third day out. +“I wonder how far we are from Luzon?”</p> + +<p>“I heard an officer say that we would sight +land to-morrow or the day after.”</p> + +<p>“Did he say where?”</p> + +<p>“He said we were steering for Subig Bay. +They think Admiral Montojo may be found +there with his fleet.”</p> + +<p>“I hope they do find him, and give him a good +thrashing.”</p> + +<p>“You say they, Dan. Don’t you expect to +take a hand in fighting?”</p> + +<p>“To be sure. But then we are not regular +sailors you know.”</p> + +<p>“Well, I consider myself a sailor boy,” I answered +warmly.</p> + +<p>“Do you? All right, then. Here’s to the +sailor boy under Dewey!” cried my chum, and +drank my health in what was left of a glass of +lemonade he had brought up with him. Lemons +were plentiful, and in those hot days everybody +spent a good deal of time in making something +palatable to drink.</p> + +<p>In the afternoon, when the sun was low, the +squadron was called together and was put +through a number of naval maneuvers by the +commodore. This was both an interesting and +instructive sight, and I watched it from start to +finish.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_154">[154]</span>I had just retired for the night when I heard +the sounds of numerous footsteps on the gun +deck. I aroused myself and sat up in my hammock.</p> + +<p>“What’s up?” I asked of Dan.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know,” was his answer. “But something +is the matter, that’s certain.”</p> + +<p>“Let us go and see,” I went on, and hopped +to the floor. We soon had our clothing on, and +then we hurried to where Bob Roundstock was +getting his gun crew into order to man the eight-inch +monster under his command.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_155">[155]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XX.<br> +<small>IN WHICH ONE SPANISH SHIP IS SUNK.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“What is it, Roundstock?”</p> + +<p>“What is it?” repeated the old gunner. +“We’ve sighted a Spanish man-o’-war, that’s +what it is!”</p> + +<p>“A man-o’-war!” cried Dan. “Where is +she?”</p> + +<p>“Dead ahead, and running away as fast as her +steam can carry her.”</p> + +<p>“Can we catch her?”</p> + +<p>“Can’t say as to that, lad. We hope to do it.”</p> + +<p>Dan and I waited to hear no more, but, rushing +to the stairs, made our way to the spar deck.</p> + +<p>It was a cloudy moonlight night and just now +too dark to see anything with the naked eye.</p> + +<p>But presently the moon came out brightly, +and then, far ahead, we made out a dim form, +moving along over the ocean like a phantom.</p> + +<p>“Is that the Spanish ship?” I asked of a sailor +standing near.</p> + +<p>“So the officers think, lad.”</p> + +<p>“Why don’t they give her a shot to make her +heave to?” asked Dan.</p> + +<p>He had scarcely spoken when one of the guns +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_156">[156]</span>from the <i>Olympia</i> boomed threateningly, sending +a shot to the starboard of the flying craft.</p> + +<p>All expected to see her heave to, but she kept +on, and now a dense mass of clouds covered the +moon and all became dark once more.</p> + +<p>The clouds were as long as they were heavy, +and it took them all of twenty minutes to drift +over the face of the moon and let that orb shine +out again. How impatiently officers and men +waited, my readers can well imagine.</p> + +<p>“She’s gone!” Such was the cry which rang +from a hundred throats, and it was true. The +strange vessel had disappeared from view.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes more the moon was again +hidden, and further pursuit of the flying one was +out of the question.</p> + +<p>Everybody was disappointed, and none more +so than Bob Roundstock.</p> + +<p>“I’m just achin’ to get a shot at ’em,” he observed. +“Oh, if only that ship had turned to +engage us!”</p> + +<p>“I reckon those on board saw we were six to +one and didn’t dare to risk it,” said Dan. “Now +if we had been one to one——”</p> + +<p>“Those Dons would have run anyway!” +finished Roundstock. He was a thorough Yankee +tar and felt certain that nothing could stand +up against our ships and guns. And he was +more than half right, as later events proved.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_157">[157]</span>The following day brought us in sight of Subig +Bay, and, while we lay at a distance, several +of the smaller war vessels went inside to survey +the situation.</p> + +<p>“I wish we were going in,” observed Dan. +“There must be lots of Spanish vessels there.”</p> + +<p>“We are not making war on the merchantmen, +Dan,” I answered. “We are after warships.”</p> + +<p>“That’s true, but we ought to take some +prizes, just for the prize money.”</p> + +<p>“I only want what is coming to me,—my +money and those documents left on board of the +<i>Dart</i>,—and I want to bring Captain Kenny to +justice.”</p> + +<p>“And give a helping hand to Tom Dawson +and the others, if we can,” he finished, and +I nodded.</p> + +<p>Soon the small ships which had been sent into +the harbor returned, and then some of the captains +went over to the <i>Olympia</i> to confer with +the commodore.</p> + +<p>“Something is up now, you can bet on that,” +said Dan, as the squadron set sail once more.</p> + +<p>“We are bound southward,” I replied. +“That means Manila Bay, I presume.”</p> + +<p>Orders came around to “clear ship for action,” +and a busy half hour followed.</p> + +<p>“Commodore Dewey knows we are getting +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_158">[158]</span>close to the enemy,” said Roundstock. “Orders +are to keep at the guns.”</p> + +<p>“There isn’t a sail in sight.”</p> + +<p>“No; but how long would it take a heavy +steam vessel, under a full head of steam, to come +out from one of yonder headlands and open fire, +lad? Not more than ten or fifteen minutes, if +as long.”</p> + +<p>“How far will our heavy guns carry?”</p> + +<p>“Six to eight miles—and more, on a pinch.”</p> + +<p>“A good deal further than a fellow can see, +even with an ordinary glass,” put in Dan.</p> + +<p>“Our telescopes are the finest in the world.”</p> + +<p>The loss of sleep the night before had tired me +out, and I soon retired, and Dan followed.</p> + +<p>But I was not to sleep long, as I soon discovered.</p> + +<p>As I had supposed, the squadron was running +for Manila Bay. Commodore Dewey wanted to +get past Corregidor Island unnoticed, if such a +thing was possible.</p> + +<p>But it was not to be, and presently we received +half a dozen heavy shots from the land +batteries, one or two of which struck the ships +behind the <i>Olympia</i> and <i>Boston</i>.</p> + +<p>Then rockets flared up in the air, and a small-sized +engagement was on.</p> + +<p>“This is war and no mistake!” I cried to +Roundstock, but he merely tossed his head.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_159">[159]</span>“Only children’s play, lad,” he replied. +“See, we are already safely past.”</p> + +<p>The engagement lasted ten minutes, and then +the batteries were passed and we hauled out into +Manila Bay proper.</p> + +<p>It was almost full moon, but the clouds made +it dark. Far away could be seen the twinkling +lights of Manila city and other places.</p> + +<p>A strange silence prevailed throughout the +ships. It was the calm before the storm.</p> + +<p>The night seemed long, but for all on board +sleep was out of the question.</p> + +<p>The men lay at their guns or on the deck, +while the officers paced about or held long +whispering conversations.</p> + +<p>“I’ll wager we have a fight to-morrow,” I +said to Dan. “Even if the Spanish ships are not +here I think Commodore Dewey will capture the +city, so as to have a new base of supplies.”</p> + +<p>“If he does that a good deal of our troubles +will be over, Oliver.”</p> + +<p>“He won’t touch anything until he has ferreted +out old Monto-what’s-his-name,” broke in +Roundstock.</p> + +<p>“Montojo,” corrected Dan. “Well, we’ll +have to take what comes, that’s all.”</p> + +<p>“Correct, lad.”</p> + +<p>At early dawn our squadron crept closer to +Manila city. We could now see the numerous +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_160">[160]</span>ships in front of the river mouth, but no warships +were among them.</p> + +<p>Below Manila is situated a long peninsula, +upon which was located Fort Cavité, the principal +Spanish arsenal along the bay.</p> + +<p>Back of the arsenal was a town of some four +thousand inhabitants, and to one side of the fort +was a long, low-lying land battery.</p> + +<p>As the sun came up six warships, flying the +Spanish flag, were discovered lying between +Manila and Cavité. Several other warships +were to the rear, half hidden by the arsenal just +mentioned.</p> + +<p>“There they are!” was the cry which swept +from ship to ship. “Now for a fight to the +death!”</p> + +<p>The words had scarcely been uttered when +the flagship opened fire. A second later the +<i>Boston</i> belched forth with her forward guns.</p> + +<p>The shock nearly threw me off my feet, and +the noise fairly deafened me.</p> + +<p>“My gracious, Dan, what a racket!”</p> + +<p>“This is war, Oliver!”</p> + +<p>“It sounds more like a hundred thunderstorms +rolled into one.”</p> + +<p>All of the warships had now trained their guns +on the enemy, and round after round of gigantic +steel projectiles was hurled forth, to deal death +and destruction.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_161">[161]</span>Soon both sides were enveloped in smoke and +but little could be seen, excepting at close range.</p> + +<p>The <i>Boston</i> was hit several times, but the shots +merely passed through our upper works, doing +but little damage.</p> + +<p>For half an hour the battle kept on, and during +that time both Dan and myself helped where +we could, resolved to do our duty as Americans +even though we were not duly enlisted.</p> + +<p>“She’s on fire!” came presently. The cry referred +to one of the leading Spanish ships, and +proved correct. One of our shells had burst +into a magazine, and a dull explosion was followed +by a wild scattering of burning embers. +Soon the ship began to sink, and there followed +a frantic struggle on the part of the Spanish sailors +to save their lives.</p> + +<p>“Poor wretches!” I said. “I can’t help but +pity them.”</p> + +<p>“War is war, lad,” said Roundstock, who was +working like a beaver over his gun, which was +red-hot. “If we didn’t sink them they would +sink us; and since one of us must go down, I’d +rather it would be the other fellow.”</p> + +<p>And I could not help but agree with him.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_162">[162]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXI.<br> +<small>A NEVER-TO-BE-FORGOTTEN CONTEST.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>In this tale of adventures in and around the +Island of Luzon it is not my intention to play +the part of a historian and go into all of the +details of the battle of Manila Bay, or, more +properly, the battle off Cavité.</p> + +<p>To be really truthful, but little of the whole +battle could be seen by any one spectator, +for the ships were several miles apart, and the +heavy smoke hung everywhere over the bay like +a murky pall. Near Cavité the fire burst up +through the smoke at half a dozen points, and +these marked the spots where the enemy’s ships +were slowly but surely going to pieces.</p> + +<p>For the victory was Commodore Dewey’s +from the start, and a few hours sufficed to teach +Spain a lesson which she is not likely to forget +for years to come.</p> + +<p>Our gallant commodore had come to Manila +with six fighting ships, including one which was +very small, and but indifferently armed. Off +Cavité he engaged eight Spanish warships, and +these had the strong support of the fort and the +land battery.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_163">[163]</span>And yet, when it was all over, what was the +result? The Spanish ships lay along the shore, +riddled with shot and shell and burning fiercely. +Hundreds of Spanish sailors had been either shot +or drowned, and those who had escaped to land +were hurrying, panic-stricken, toward Manila +and the mountains. More than this, Cavité itself +had surrendered, and the arms and ammunition +at the arsenal were our own.</p> + +<p>We had pulled out once from the fight, to +learn how matters were faring with the other +ships. Commodore Dewey was afraid that one +or another had been lost, and his delight was +without measure when he found that not a single +ship had sustained any serious injury. +“Good, boys!” he said. “Go in and finish +them up!” And they went in, with the vigor +that only the Anglo-Saxon race knows.</p> + +<p>Dan had been hurt by a splinter flying from +some of the rigging, and I carried him into the +wardroom, where the surgeons waited in readiness +for any demand that might be made upon +them.</p> + +<p>He was unconscious, and I looked on anxiously +as a surgeon made an examination.</p> + +<p>“Is it serious?” I asked.</p> + +<p>“Not very; but he must remain quiet for a +while,” was the answer. “I will plaster up the +wound and bind it.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_164">[164]</span>The battle had started early in the morning. +By the middle of the afternoon it was over and a +regular jubilee among the jack tars followed. +They yelled, cheered, sang, and danced, while +eating and drinking went on until nightfall.</p> + +<p>Some of the ships had been sent to other +places, but we lay close to Cavité. We could +have taken a great number of prisoners, but +Commodore Dewey had no place to put them.</p> + +<p>“Let them go, poor fellows; they have suffered +enough,” said more than one officer, and +in my mind I agreed with them.</p> + +<p>“Didn’t I tell you!” cried Roundstock, coming +up. “Nothing can stand up against the +Stars and Stripes, our glorious flag of freedom.”</p> + +<p>“What’s to do, now, Roundstock?” I questioned.</p> + +<p>“That’s for the commodore and our captain +to say. As for myself, I feel as if I could sleep +for a week.”</p> + +<p>“Won’t we go in and take Manila?”</p> + +<p>“I suppose we will—later on.”</p> + +<p>“I would like to go in right away. I want +to learn how my friends there are faring.”</p> + +<p>“You’ll have to be patient.”</p> + +<p>Roundstock strode off, and I turned again to +Dan, who was moaning. I found his face very +hot, as if he was in a fever.</p> + +<p>The hours of the night passed slowly, and in +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_165">[165]</span>the morning I was much gratified to learn that +my chum was better. We now received definite +word from the other warships. All were in good +condition and not a single man had been killed. +Some were to move in close to Cavité, while +others were to go down and take possession of +Corregidor Island, at the bay’s entrance.</p> + +<p>By good fortune I managed to get permission +to go ashore at the arsenal, and Dan insisted +upon going along. Just before we left the +<i>Boston</i> we had a parting word with the captain.</p> + +<p>“Be careful, boys,” he said. “Those Spaniards +will shoot you down if you give them the +least chance.”</p> + +<p>I started to say something about getting into +Manila again, but thought better of it and remained +silent. Perhaps it might have been +much better had I spoken and had the kind-hearted +commander prevented the movement. +But we do not know things beforehand as we +know them afterward.</p> + +<p>It had been supposed by the Spaniards that +Commodore Dewey would demand the immediate +surrender of the capital, but no demand +came, for the reason that the commodore was +awaiting instructions from Washington, and because +he had no armed force sufficiently large +to hold Manila against our enemies, and against +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_166">[166]</span>the insurgents, who were gathering about, ready +to rush in and plunder at the first opportunity.</p> + +<p>We went ashore in one of the small boats, +manned by eight jack tars, and landing close to +the arsenal, made our way to a deserted church, +which the sailors on shore had turned into a temporary +barracks.</p> + +<p>On every hand were the signs of the fierce +conflict which had raged but a few short hours. +The bay about Cavité was dotted with the half-burned +wrecks of the Spanish warships, and fort +and batteries were torn up as only a hail of shot +and shell can do the work.</p> + +<p>“This is awful,” remarked Dan, as he walked +around. “How these poor wretches must have +suffered during the fight!”</p> + +<p>“I reckon they were glad enough to run for +it, Dan,” I answered soberly. “But see, there +are some Spanish soldiers approaching!”</p> + +<p>The men referred to were a score in number. +They were without arms, almost without shoes, +and their clothing was torn in countless places +by their wild rushes through the brush and cane +fields. They came up to a body of volunteers +encamped near the church.</p> + +<p>“They have surrendered and want protection +from the insurgents,” said Dan, after listening +to what was said by the Spanish leader. +“He states that the rebels here are worse than +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_167">[167]</span>wild beasts, and he would rather go to an +American prison than fall into their hands.”</p> + +<p>“I believe him—after my own experience, +Dan.”</p> + +<p>“So do I. I’ll tell you, Oliver, the fighting +here isn’t half over. Dewey may try to make +friends of the insurgents; but, if so, he will be +sorry for it.”</p> + +<p>We watched the Spaniards and saw that they +were starving by the manner in which they disposed +of the food furnished to them by our own +volunteers. I really believe that some of them +would have jumped at the chance of joining our +troops had they had the chance. None of them +had received a dollar of pay from Spain for +months, and one told Dan that even their own +officers treated them like dogs. “If only I was +back in beautiful Spain again!” he sighed. “Or +with my uncle at his tobacco works in Key West, +Florida, in your own nice country!” He was +sick of war.</p> + +<p>As I have said, Cavité lay about eight miles +south of Manila. Between the two places was a +low, sandy beach, back of which was a rude +highway, low-lying hills, covered with rice and +other plantations, and thick forests. There were +several settlements, but none of especial importance.</p> + +<p>By careful inquiry we learned that the country +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_168">[168]</span>between us and Manila had been almost deserted, +but was now filling up with insurgents, +who were awaiting the arrival of their principal +leader, General Aguinaldo, who had gone to +Hong Kong on business. If we wanted to get +into the capital, therefore, we must first pass the +insurgents’ camps and then the Spanish pickets +at the city walls.</p> + +<p>“It’s a risky thing to do, Oliver,” said Dan. +“We don’t want to get shot.”</p> + +<p>“That is true. But I want to know how +Longley is faring and how the business is faring.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, that is true. And I would like to know +if Captain Kenny has shown up at Manila, too. +But still——”</p> + +<p>“You haven’t got to go if you don’t want to, +Dan. But I’m going.”</p> + +<p>“Then I’ll go, and that settles it.”</p> + +<p>And it did settle it. But neither of us dreamed +of the many dangers in store for us.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_169">[169]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXII.<br> +<small>BETWEEN TWO FIRES.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“I don’t know much about this part of the +country,” said Dan, as we drew away from the +American camp with great caution. “I wish we +could pick up a native guide. He might save us +from a lot of trouble.”</p> + +<p>“There are natives enough around, if only +they can be trusted. Let us strike the first man +we meet and see what he has to say.”</p> + +<p>Leaving camp was an easy matter, for as yet +military rule was rather lax. We took a small +side trail, that presently brought us in sight of a +collection of rude bamboo huts, one burning and +all deserted. Back of the huts we found a tall +negro sitting on a tree stump, his lean chin resting +in the palm of an equally lean hand.</p> + +<p>Dan called to him in Spanish, but the man did +not stir until my chum walked up and shook him +by the shoulder. Then he stared at us from +eyes buried deeply in their sockets.</p> + +<p>His tale was soon told. His wife had been +shot down in a skirmish around the bamboo +huts on the day that the Spanish soldiers had retreated +from Cavité to Manila, and his only child +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_170">[170]</span>had been trampled under the feet of a runaway +buffalo cow, a beast quite common in certain +parts of the Philippines. His home was that +now being reduced to ashes.</p> + +<p>“Your lot is certainly a hard one, my man,” +said Dan to him soothingly. “But it will do +you no good to sit here and mourn. What is +your name?”</p> + +<p>“Wamba, señor.”</p> + +<p>“Would you like to become our guide, +Wamba? We will pay you well?”</p> + +<p>At this the eyes of the native brightened somewhat, +for he was of the poorest class.</p> + +<p>“You will pay me well?” he asked slowly.</p> + +<p>“We will.”</p> + +<p>“You will not pay me in <i>chit</i>?” went on +Wamba. In Manila many large bills are paid +in <i>chit</i>, instead of coin, a <i>chit</i> being merely a personal +note. These <i>chits</i> are issued by nearly +everyone, and float around from person to person +before being presented to the issuer for redemption.</p> + +<p>“No, you shall have coin—gold and silver,” +and Dan showed the contents of his purse, which +contained several Mexican silver dollars, and +some Spanish gold and copper coins.</p> + +<p>“And where shall I guide you?”</p> + +<p>“We want to go into Manila secretly.”</p> + +<p>“You are soldier spies?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_171">[171]</span>“No, we are private citizens and want to learn +something of business matters. Our fathers belong +to the firm of Raymond, Holbrook & +Smith, of Manila, Hong Kong, San Francisco, +and other cities.”</p> + +<p>“I know the name, señor,” and Wamba +nodded. “But the business must be ruined +now,” and he gave a deep sigh.</p> + +<p>“That is what we want to see. Will you undertake +to get us into Manila? Remember, I +will pay you well.”</p> + +<p>“I will do what I can, but it will be a dangerous +undertaking.”</p> + +<p>The talk between the native and Dan continued +for some time, and then we hurried on, +leaving the trail and passing over the wet ground +of a rice field recently flooded.</p> + +<p>It was again hot, and after half an hour of +traveling I was glad enough to cast myself in a +shady spot to rest. While Dan did the same +Wamba went off in search of cool water from a +nearby spring.</p> + +<p>“I suppose things in Manila are in a state of +high excitement,” observed my chum, as he lay +back against a tree. “The Spaniards are in a +box—with the American fleet in front and the +rebels behind.”</p> + +<p>“I think they would rather surrender to us +than to the rebels, Dan.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_172">[172]</span>“I’ve no doubt they would. But they’ll surrender +to nobody until forced to do it. They +are as high-minded as ever, if I know anything +about it.”</p> + +<p>“Business must be at a complete standstill. +Perhaps the Spanish authorities have confiscated +everything at the offices.”</p> + +<p>“I wonder what has become of Tom Dawson, +Matt Gory, and the <i>Starlight</i>? I didn’t see anything +of the craft while on the <i>Boston</i>, did you?”</p> + +<p>“No. She probably lost no time in slipping +past Corregidor Island when it was known that +a fight was in prospect.”</p> + +<p>“And what do you suppose has become of +Captain Kenny, Watt Brown, and Ah Sid, who +were captured?”</p> + +<p>“That is for time to tell, if we are ever to +know at all.”</p> + +<p>Wamba came back with the water, into which +we stirred some sugar-cane ends to make it more +palatable, and we arose to continue our journey.</p> + +<p>“What’s that?” cried Dan, as the crack of a +rifle broke the semitropical stillness. “Some +sort of a battle is on, that’s certain!”</p> + +<p>The single report was followed by several +others, and then came two heavy volleys in rapid +succession.</p> + +<p>“I’ll wager it is a fight between the insurgents +and the Spanish outposts!” I cried. “Hark, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_173">[173]</span>they seem to be coming this way. Wamba, what +had we best do?”</p> + +<p>The native looked at me in perplexity, and +Dan repeated the question in Spanish. Then +Wamba pointed off to the woods back of us. +“We hide in hollow,” he said, in his native +tongue.</p> + +<p>We lost no time in following him, for the +sound of firearms came closer, and soon a bullet +clipped through the leaves over our heads. As +we descended into the hollow to which the guide +led us we heard a wild shouting, and at a distance +a hundred or more Tagals burst into sight.</p> + +<p>The natives were armed with rifles secured at +Cavité and in Manila, and were endeavoring to +turn the right flank of a company of Spanish +soldiers, who soon came into view on the opposite +side of the hollow. The firing was now incessant, +and all three of our party were glad +enough to drop down out of sight in the dense +bushes.</p> + +<p>“We are caught between two fires!” announced +Dan grimly. “Here’s a state of things, +to say the least. Oliver, how do you like it?”</p> + +<p>“We had better remain quiet, Dan. I have +no desire to get a Mauser bullet through my +head.”</p> + +<p>“Nor I. I only hope both sides move off to +some other locality.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_174">[174]</span>The hollow was of indefinite length and about +a hundred feet wide and ten to twenty feet deep. +The Tagals were close to the south bank, while +the Spaniards held a position a hundred and fifty +to two hundred yards away. In fifteen minutes +the volley firing ceased, but a steady pop-pop +from one direction or another took its place.</p> + +<p>“Each side is throwing out skirmishers,” said +Dan. “If any of them come down here I don’t +know what we had best do!”</p> + +<p>“If it comes to the worst we’ll have to throw +our fortunes in with the rebels,” I answered. +“But I have no liking for either side.”</p> + +<p>We were armed with pistols, fine six-shooters, +and we held these in readiness for use, should occasion +require. Wamba acted as if he wanted to +leave us, but doubtless the hope of getting +money out of us made him remain.</p> + +<p>As I have said, the natives were closer than +the Spanish, and presently a dozen of them +slipped down into the hollow. They were determined-looking +fellows, much superior to the +Tagals I had met up at the locality where the +<i>Dart</i> lay stranded.</p> + +<p>“They are coming this way!” whispered Dan. +“I’m afraid, if they spot us, they will fire before +we can explain who we are.”</p> + +<p>“We had better—” I began, when pop! went +a rifle, and a bullet grazed my temple, causing +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_175">[175]</span>me to tumble over my chum and go crashing in +the brush back of him.</p> + +<p>“Oliver! you are hit!” he gasped. “Oh, this +is too bad!” and he caught me up in his arms.</p> + +<p>“I—I guess it’s not much,” I faltered, putting +my hand up and withdrawing it covered with +blood. Getting out a large linen handkerchief, +I bound it over the wound, which was but a +scratch, even though fully as deep as was desirable.</p> + +<p>The crash in the brush had attracted the attention +of the Spanish soldiers, and now they saw +the Tagals and heavy firing recommenced. We +were in the very midst of this, and several bullets +sang alarmingly close to our ears. We wished +that a better shelter than the brush was at hand, +but nothing was in sight and we had to make +the best of it.</p> + +<p>Inside of a quarter of an hour it looked as if +the rebels would get the best of the fight, but +suddenly some Spanish re-enforcements came +up, and in a twinkling the Tagals were sent flying +toward the hills to the eastward, leaving a +score of dead and wounded behind them.</p> + +<p>“They are leaving us!” muttered Dan, when +without warning several Spanish soldiers appeared, +running directly toward us. Each had +his gun up ready to shoot, so resistance would +have been foolhardy.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_176">[176]</span>“<i>Halte!</i>” came the useless command, since we +were not moving. “Throw down your arms or +we will fire,” followed, also in Spanish.</p> + +<p>Dan looked at me and I at him, and then both +of us dropped our pistols. Seeing this, Wamba +uttered a grunt of dissatisfaction, turned, and +crawled like a snake out of sight into the bushes. +In a moment more the Spanish soldiers had surrounded +us.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_177">[177]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXIII.<br> +<small>THE ESCAPE FROM THE INN.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>The soldiers who had made us prisoners were +dark, determined-looking fellows belonging to +the Manila Home Guard, a body distinct from +the troops sent to the islands from Spain.</p> + +<p>They were seven in number, including a lieutenant, +who, as I afterward learned, rejoiced in +the unique name of Carlos Remondenanez.</p> + +<p>“<i>Americanos!</i>” muttered the lieutenant, as he +surveyed us. “Where you come from?” he demanded, +in by no means bad English.</p> + +<p>“We came from Cavité,” I answered, glad to +know that he would understand me.</p> + +<p>“Sailors from the American warships?”</p> + +<p>“We are private citizens, on our way to +Ma——” Dan checked himself.</p> + +<p>“Ha! private citizens! Bah! You <i>Americanos</i> +are all out for a fight, like a wild bull! +But we will show you, here in Luzon and at +Cuba, too! When it is over the pigs will be +sorry they took up arms against the sons of my +country,” and he slapped his chest.</p> + +<p>Had the situation been less serious I would +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_178">[178]</span>have been tempted to laugh at his pomposity. +But as that might have brought on my sudden +death, I resisted the temptation even to smile.</p> + +<p>“Yes, it is too bad to have war with anybody,” +I said calmly. “Do you consider us your prisoners?”</p> + +<p>“And why not, boy, why not? To be sure +you are not old enough to be a regular soldier, +but your finger on the trigger of a gun may do +as much damage as the finger of a man of forty. +Search them, men!” he added, to his command, +in Spanish.</p> + +<p>Two of the party immediately advanced, and +relieved us of the pistols we had thrown down +and also two daggers Dan had brought along +from Hong Kong. I think Lieutenant Remondenanez +was strongly tempted to confiscate our +purses also, but did not dare on account of one +of the soldiers, who watched him closely. This +man was a new recruit, so Dan found out later, +and was too high-minded to countenance such a +proceeding, even on the part of his officer, without +reporting it at headquarters.</p> + +<p>Having been searched, we were marched out +of the hollow to the trail running down to the +highway. Here we were placed in charge of +three soldiers, one of whom marched at either +side of us and the other to the rear.</p> + +<p>Our course was along a series of dense palm +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_179">[179]</span>trees which sheltered us somewhat from the sun. +Yet the walk was a hot one, and soon the wound +I had received gave me a violent headache.</p> + +<p>“I must rest,” I said to Dan, and sank down +almost exhausted.</p> + +<p>“No rest for you!” shouted the corporal in +charge of the detail, and poked me with his bayonet, +and sick as I was I had to get up and go on +my way.</p> + +<p>But soon luck stood me in good stead. We +arrived at a sort of wayside inn, where there were +two companies of Spanish soldiers, and here we +halted for further orders.</p> + +<p>It was decided to keep us at the place over +night, and we were conducted to a rude +stable in the rear, built of bamboo and palm +leaves.</p> + +<p>Inside were half a dozen small native ponies, +belonging to as many Spanish officers. It was +a foul-smelling resort, and it made me feel more +sick than ever.</p> + +<p>The place was already being used as a prison +and outside four guards, with ready guns, patrolled +the sides of the stable at a distance of ten +paces.</p> + +<p>“What a hole!” cried Dan, as we were shoved +through the doorway and the guard left us. +“I’ll wager the stable is full of vermin!”</p> + +<p>“Who is that as spakes!” came from the semi-darkness. +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_180">[180]</span>“Sure an’ th’ voice sounds remarkably +loik that of a friend, so it does!”</p> + +<p>“Matt Gory!” burst out Dan and I simultaneously.</p> + +<p>“An’ it’s Oliver an’ Dan, so it is!” ejaculated +the Irish sailor, rushing to us and catching our +hands warmly. “Sure an’ it’s a sorry place for +a mating, aint it now?”</p> + +<p>“How did you get here, Gory?” I asked. “I +thought you were on the <i>Starlight</i>?”</p> + +<p>“Sure an thim haythins o’ Spaniards confiscated +the ship, so they did. Oi an’ Tom Dawson +thried to escape, an’ here Oi am, as ye can +behold if yez have sharp eyes.”</p> + +<p>“And what of Dawson?” asked Dan.</p> + +<p>“Oi don’t know where he is. He started to +join Commodore Dewey’s marines at Cavité.”</p> + +<p>“When did all this happen?”</p> + +<p>“We lift the <i>Starlight</i> a week ago, but Oi was +captured yesterday. Phy have yez yer head +toied up?” he went on, to me.</p> + +<p>I told him of our adventures in the hollow, +and Dan related what had occurred since we had +left the <i>Starlight</i>. Matt Gory had arranged a +resting place of the cleanest straw to be found, +in a corner, and here I dropped, completely +fagged out.</p> + +<p>All told, the stable contained nine prisoners; +the others being Spaniards who sympathized +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_181">[181]</span>with the insurgents. They were a motley collection, +and filled the already foul air with the noxious +fumes of their ever-present cigarettes.</p> + +<p>While I rested, Dan spoke to one and another +of them, and learned considerable concerning +the present situation in Manila. As we had surmised, +all business was at a standstill, the shops +were closed, and the streets were guarded by +Spanish soldiers, the native policemen not being +trusted to do the duty. All was in a state of suppressed +excitement, and it was expected that +Dewey would shell the city at his pleasure. +Provisions were scarce and there was much suffering, +especially among the poorer classes.</p> + +<p>Strange as it may seem I rested well that +night, and Dan also slept soundly. We were +stirring at sunrise, and with us Matt Gory, who +had suffered no injury and was willing at any +moment to fight for his liberty.</p> + +<p>“Oi’ll not go to any dirthy Spanish prison if +Oi can hilp it,—an’ Oi think I can,” were his +words.</p> + +<p>“I am with you,” I answered. “But I +don’t want to bite my nose off to spite my +face.”</p> + +<p>At seven o’clock we were ordered out into the +open air, and we were not sorry, for the smell in +the stable during the night had grown worse +instead of better. All were formed into single +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_182">[182]</span>file and told to march to the rear door of the inn +and our breakfast would be dealt out to us.</p> + +<p>“Like a lot of tramps getting a hand-out,” +laughed Dan, when a Spanish officer struck him +with his sword and ordered him to keep silent.</p> + +<p>Breakfast consisted of some stale bread, a +chunk of meat that had been stewed in rice, and +water. We had to eat and drink standing up or +let it alone, and I hardly touched a mouthful.</p> + +<p>The breakfast over, we were about to leave the +inn, when without warning a volley of shots +came from a woods behind the hostelry and a +Spanish officer and two privates dropped dead +within a dozen feet of us. Before the Spaniards +could recover from their astonishment a second +volley was delivered, and four others went down, +including one of the prisoners, who was struck +by accident in the leg. Then came a wild yell +and about fifty Spanish rebels from Manila burst +into view.</p> + +<p>The scene that followed beggars my pen to +describe. For some minutes pandemonium +reigned supreme, and Spanish officers and privates +alike knew not what to do. Some rushed +into the inn and some out, and a number took to +their heels with all the speed of which their legs +were capable. Then a <i>capitan</i> called them to +order, and they formed into a hollow square on +the defensive.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_183">[183]</span>“This is our chance!” yelled Matt Gory, as he +seized Dan and me by the arms. “Come on!”</p> + +<p>“I am with you!” I answered.</p> + +<p>“Let us make for the stable,” said Dan.</p> + +<p>“Aint the woods betther?” queried the Irishman.</p> + +<p>“The ponies!” I interrupted, understanding +what my chum meant. “Just the thing!”</p> + +<p>And away we went for the stable. A Spanish +guard tried to block our way, but we tripped him +over and tore his gun from him.</p> + +<p>Dan was the first inside of the structure and +he speedily untied three of the small, but strong, +animals and led them to a rear door. Then up +we leaped into the high, uncomfortable Spanish +saddles (for the poor beasts stood there with all +their trappings) and off we sped down the highway, +leaving Spaniards, rebels, and the other +prisoners to take care of themselves.</p> + +<p>Of course we did not escape unnoticed, and +Spaniards and rebels both fired on us. But their +aim was poor, and the leaden messengers flew +wide of the mark. Soon we were out of sight +around a bend, and then we speedily took to a +side trail that looked as if it might afford at least +temporary security.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_184">[184]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXIV.<br> +<small>ONE WAY OF ENTERING A FORTIFIED CITY.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“Now where?” asked Dan, after we had +halted and listened with all our ears to learn if +we were being followed.</p> + +<p>“To Manila, as was our original idea,” I answered. +“But you may not want to go that +way,” I added, to Matt Gory.</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ Oi’ll go wid youse b’ys,” answered +the son of Erin, with a grin. “Oi’m afther +makin’ a soldier of forchune av meself,” and he +made a mocking bow at which both Dan and I +laughed.</p> + +<p>“We may be very useful to Longley in Manila,” +I continued. “He may be having more +than his hands full to protect the firm’s interests. +He said he had about six thousand dollars in the +big safe that he did not care to place in the +Spanish bank, and——”</p> + +<p>“You are right, Oliver, we must get into Manila +somehow, to help Longley, if for no other +purpose. The thing of it is, which is the best +way to do it?”</p> + +<p>“Let us get as close to the city walls as we can +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_185">[185]</span>first and then arrange our plans,” I suggested, +and this was speedily agreed to, for there was no +telling what might happen before we came in +sight of the capital city of Luzon.</p> + +<p>From a distance came a constant firing, which +told us that the rebels and the Spaniards were +having a full-fledged fight. But presently, as +we moved along, this died away in the distance.</p> + +<p>Pony riding just suited Dan and me, but it +went hard with Matt Gory, who had never ridden +before. “Sure, an’ the hard saddle will be +afther cuttin’ me in two,” he groaned. “An’ +the baste prances so he’ll have me insoides +turned out before we come to a halt this avenin’!”</p> + +<p>“Move with the pony,” I suggested, and gave +him a practical illustration, but he was not cut +out for saddle riding and made a sorry figure +even when doing his best.</p> + +<p>It had threatened a shower and soon it was +raining in torrents. We kept to the road for +half an hour longer, when it grew so deep with +water and mud that we had to draw off to one +side.</p> + +<p>“I see a shelter beyond,” said Dan, pointing +it out. “And not a soul is in sight. Come on,” +and he led the way.</p> + +<p>It was an open shelter, built of long poles +thatched with palm. There had been a house +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_186">[186]</span>close by, but this was tumbled down into decay. +We rode our ponies under the shelter and, dismounting, +tethered them to some trees which +acted as corner posts.</p> + +<p>The rain continued throughout the noon hour +and for some time after, and it was not until +nightfall that we continued our journey. In the +meantime we had refreshed ourselves with some +plantains found in the vicinity, and allowed the +ponies to feed upon whatever was to be found in +the neighborhood.</p> + +<p>Nightfall found us close to the Spanish lines, +and we resolved to abandon our steeds, so turned +them loose, feeling that they would soon find +new masters.</p> + +<p>We were moving along in the gathering darkness +when we heard the creaking of a water +buffalo cart, heavy, awkward-looking things +common to all parts of the Philippines. Soon +the cart came in sight, drawn by two buffalo +cows, hitched up tandem. On the seat of the +turnout sat a sleepy-looking native, wearing only +a shirt, trousers, and broad-brimmed straw hat. +The cart was partly filled with straw, and on top +rested a pile of yams and other vegetables, and +a bag of cocoanuts.</p> + +<p>“I’ll wager he’s bound for Manila!” whispered +Dan. “I wonder if he can’t smuggle us in!”</p> + +<p>“Let us stop him and see,” I returned. “I +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_187">[187]</span>believe all of these natives are against the Spaniards, +even though they may not like the idea of +American rule.”</p> + +<p>We leaped forward, and while Matt Gory held +the leading cow, Dan and I hurried to the seat of +the cart. Roused up, the native was taken completely +by surprise and stared at us in open-mouthed +wonder.</p> + +<p>Dan quickly asked him if he was bound for the +market place in Manila and he answered in the +affirmative. Then my chum told him of what +we wished to do, at which the native grinned.</p> + +<p>“Get into the cart if you will, and hide,” he +said, in Spanish. “But remember, if Spanish +officers find you, I know not that you were +there.”</p> + +<p>“We agree,” answered Dan, and the straw +was lifted up and all three of us made places for +ourselves. Of course the hiding place was a +damp and by no means pleasant one, but this +could not be helped, and as it was our own choice +nobody grumbled.</p> + +<p>The progress of the cart had been slow before, +but with the added weight it crawled along at a +snail’s pace. As long as the darkness served to +hide us, we held up our heads for air, but with +the first appearance of the electric lights of Manila, +we dove out of sight.</p> + +<p>“We are entering the town,” whispered Dan, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_188">[188]</span>as the clumsy cart creaked over a bridge. “I +think we’ll be safe in ten minutes more.”</p> + +<p>He had scarcely finished when there came a +loud command to halt, and the native brought +his cart to a standstill. A brief parley followed, +and a couple of Spanish guards came up to the +cart and calmly confiscated several cocoanuts +from the bag. Then the turnout was allowed to +proceed in the direction of the market place.</p> + +<p>“Now is your time,” whispered the driver to +Dan, as we passed through a rather dark portion +of a thoroughfare. “Drop out and you will be +safe.”</p> + +<p>“Here is something for your aid,” whispered +my chum in return, and handed him a Mexican +silver dollar, much to the native’s delight, for +such a piece, even though worth but fifty cents, +is a good round sum in the Philippines.</p> + +<p>Dan then dropped from the tail-end of the cart +and Matt Gory and I followed. An alleyway +was close at hand and we darted into this, to plan +out our next movement.</p> + +<p>“We are a good half mile from the offices,” +said Dan. “And I must confess I don’t know +the way.”</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ mebbe youse would have done better +to have stayed in th’ cart,” said the Irish +sailor. “Howsomeever, lead on an’ Oi’ll be +afther followin’ ye!”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_189">[189]</span>“Let us move on along the streets until we +see some signboard,” I suggested. “We know +what street the offices are on, and the number.”</p> + +<p>“That is so, Oliver. All right, come ahead;” +and again Dan led the way.</p> + +<p>“It’s a regular Donnybrook Fair town,” said +Matt Gory. “Oi’m afther gittin’ me a club!” +and he picked up a stick lying in a gutter. Before +long Dan and I armed ourselves in a similar +manner.</p> + +<p>As I have mentioned, Manila was now under +military rule, and at every other street corner we +came in sight of a soldier, walking slowly back +and forth or lounging idly against a door-post +smoking a cigarette on the sly and talking to +some pretty native damsel. To pass these +guards unobserved was by no means easy.</p> + +<p>“Here is the right street!” exclaimed Dan, +after a quarter of an hour had passed. “The +numbers show that we cannot be more than four +or five squares away from the offices.”</p> + +<p>“Does that clerk live be thim offices?” +queried Matt Gory.</p> + +<p>“Yes, he has two rooms upstairs,” I answered. +“If that money is still in the safe he must certainly +be staying there to guard it.”</p> + +<p>Another block was passed, when Dan clutched +me by the shoulder, and likewise pulled the Irish +sailor back. “Look!” he whispered.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_190">[190]</span>We gazed in the direction he pointed, and saw +four men huddled together in a corner of a +rambling business building, not half a block +away from the offices of Raymond, Holbrook & +Smith. They were talking earnestly. Each +wore a light, night cloak over his shoulders, and +as one of them raised this covering, we caught +the gleam of a dagger handle sticking from his +breast.</p> + +<p>“By Jove! they are up to something; +that’s as sure as you are born!” ejaculated +Dan.</p> + +<p>“They be Spanish assassins!” muttered Matt +Gory. “Sure an’ they look loik thim villains +we used to see in the ould picture books!”</p> + +<p>“See, they are moving over this way,” I said, +a second later. “We must get out of sight, or +we’ll be discovered, and they may hand us over +to the guard.”</p> + +<p>I looked around, and saw a narrow opening +between two business buildings. Into this we +crowded, behind a pile of half-broken hogsheads +and other rubbish. Hardly had we settled ourselves +than the four evil-looking fellows took another +stand not ten feet away from us.</p> + +<p>An animated conversation ensued, of which I +understood only a few words. But Dan caught +the drift of the talk, and grabbed my arm so +tightly that I knew at once that something out +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_191">[191]</span>of the ordinary was on the way. Five minutes +later, the strangers moved off once more.</p> + +<p>“The villains!” gasped my chum, as soon as +he felt safe to speak. “Do you know what they +are planning to do? They are going to break +into our offices, kill Harry Longley if necessary, +and then loot the safe!”</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_192">[192]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXV.<br> +<small>FOUR WOULD-BE PLUNDERERS.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“To break into the offices!” burst from my +lips.</p> + +<p>“Th’ haythins!” muttered Matt Gory. +“Just let me be afther gittin’ a-hould of thim! +Oi’ll spile their looks so their own mothers won’t +know thim!” and he shook his club determinedly.</p> + +<p>“You are certain there is no mistake, Dan?”</p> + +<p>“Positive, Oliver. It seems one of the rascals +once worked for the firm and he knows all about +the affairs. He is certain Longley is sleeping in +an upper front room, and he has a false key to +one of the back doors.”</p> + +<p>“They cannot be doing this by authority, +Dan. Hadn’t we better notify the guard?”</p> + +<p>“And get arrested for our pains? No, let us +beat them at their own game. We are three to +four, and Longley will make the count on both +sides even. I am not afraid of them, even if they +do carry daggers. Such cutthroats are generally +cowards when cornered.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_193">[193]</span>By this time we were out on the street and +stalking after the rascally quartette, who moved +on close to the low, overhanging buildings.</p> + +<p>There was an electric light on the corner, but +instead of burning brightly it fizzed and spluttered +as such lights often do. The authorities +had great trouble in keeping them lit at all, as +many reckless men tried to turn the whole of +Manila in darkness, that they might plunder the +houses and stores with impunity.</p> + +<p>“There are our offices!” whispered Dan, +pointing to them. “See, the four men are moving +through the alleyway.”</p> + +<p>“Let us kape ’em out of the buildin’!” whispered +Matt Gory. “Come on, we’ll knock ’em +out at the first round, so we will!”</p> + +<p>He started on a run, and before either Dan or +I could stop him, had tackled the first of the +would-be plunderers. Crash! down came the +heavy club, and the Spaniard sank down, almost +overcome.</p> + +<p>The others turned in surprise and set up a low +shout. Then, with several vile exclamations, +they hurled themselves on Matt Gory and bore +him to earth.</p> + +<p>This was more than Dan or I could stand, and +we leaped in, and blows from our sticks rained +down thickly. I hit one Spaniard over the head +and another on the shoulder, and then slipped +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_194">[194]</span>down in a pool of water which the darkness had +hidden from view.</p> + +<p>By this time, however, Matt Gory had again +arisen and as one of the rascals made for me, the +Irishman threw him backward with such a shock +that his dagger flew some distance from his hand. +In a twinkle Gory had secured the weapon.</p> + +<p>“Now thin, run, ye haythins, or Oi’ll be afther +carvin’ yez into bits!” he bawled, and made such +a determined lunge at one of the Spaniards that +he did run for his very life, leaving his tattered +shawl behind him.</p> + +<p>The racket in the alleyway had aroused Harry +Longley, as well as several others residing in the +neighborhood. An upper window was blocked +up, and Longley inquired, in Spanish, as to what +was the row.</p> + +<p>“Help us, Longley!” cried Dan. “It is +Oliver Raymond, Dan Holbrook, and an Irish +friend. We have been attacked by thieves!”</p> + +<p>“You!” burst out the clerk. “Come to the +door and I’ll let you in.”</p> + +<p>The clerk disappeared and we heard him run +downstairs, and there followed the scraping of a +key in a lock. As the door fell back Longley appeared, +pistol in hand.</p> + +<p>“Begone, or I’ll fill you full of holes!” he +shouted, in Spanish.</p> + +<p>“<i>Caramba!</i> The game is up!” came from one +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_195">[195]</span>of the Spaniards, and making final and ineffectual +passes at us with their daggers, they ran out +of the alleyway and down the street.</p> + +<p>“Come in! come in before it is too late!” +went on the clerk, and we leaped into the back +office. He immediately closed the door and +locked it. All was pitch-dark and we had to feel +our way around.</p> + +<p>In a few brief words we explained the situation, +to which he listened impatiently, his ear +meanwhile inclined toward a heavily barred window, +which, as is usual in this country, had no +glass.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I have the money here still,” he said. +“But it is not in the safe. It is where they cannot +find it, even if they search for hours.”</p> + +<p>“You have buried it?” whispered Dan.</p> + +<p>“Yes, and cemented the flooring over it. I +was bound to protect our firm’s interests, no +matter what happened.”</p> + +<p>“You shall lose nothing by your actions,” I +returned warmly. “Father and the other partners +shall know of your bravery.”</p> + +<p>“It has been a constant excitement ever since +Commodore Dewey brought on that battle,” +went on Harry Longley. “It’s a pity he lost +so many men.”</p> + +<p>“Why, he didn’t lose a single man,” said Dan.</p> + +<p>“He didn’t! Why, they have it reported in +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_196">[196]</span>Manila that he lost two ships and four hundred +sailors.”</p> + +<p>“You ought to know better. Couldn’t you +see the battle?”</p> + +<p>“No, the Spanish soldiers drove everybody +indoors on penalty of death. It is also reported +that another Spanish fleet will soon come here to +wipe Dewey out.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know anything about that,” I said. +“But if the fleet comes I reckon our commodore +can take care of himself.”</p> + +<p>“So he can, every thrip!” put in Matt Gory. +“Oi’ll foight wid him meself, next toime, so Oi +will!”</p> + +<p>“Plundering is becoming a common thing +here,” resumed Harry Longley, as he led the +way to his apartments above. “Last night four +offices and six stores were looted. The Spanish +authorities try to catch the offenders when the +places belong to the English, French, or Germans, +but if an American is robbed they merely +wink the other eye, as the saying goes.”</p> + +<p>“Do they offer you any protection at all, if +you promise to keep out of the fight?”</p> + +<p>“They do, in words, but that is as far as it +goes. An American is not safe here, no matter +if he gives up all his arms and swears to remain +neutral. The Dons hate the very sight of us. +They never wanted us here in the first place +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_197">[197]</span>and now they are bound to drive us out—if they +can.”</p> + +<p>“But they can’t,” finished Dan. “I’ll tell +you all, Uncle Sam is bound to stay here. Mark +my words and see if I am not right.”</p> + +<p>Since we had left him, Longley had had natives +working at the offices, and each window +was barred more heavily than ever, while some +of those on the lower floor had been covered entirely.</p> + +<p>“You see, I am bound to hold the fort,” he +smiled grimly. “I don’t want to leave this +ground. It is in dispute, as you know, and the +Spaniards would like nothing better than to take +possession. This is the ground mentioned in +those documents lost on the <i>Dart</i>.”</p> + +<p>“I wish I could find the <i>Dart</i> and get the documents +and the money back,” I answered, somewhat +bitterly.</p> + +<p>We were a good deal exhausted and partook +eagerly of the hot coffee, rice cakes, and other +things which Longley set before us. He had +stocked up with sufficient provisions to last for +a month, and among his stores were two barrels +of water.</p> + +<p>“You see, the rebels may cut off the water +supply from the reservoir,” he explained. “If +they do, people in Manila will be in a bad shape +all around.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_198">[198]</span>“Cannot the Spanish soldiers protect the +water works?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know. They used to have their +hands full with the rebels alone. Now they have +us Americans to fight in addition.”</p> + +<p>Longley had but a single cot at hand, and as +all could not sleep on that, we told him to keep +his resting place and proceeded to make ourselves +comfortable on the floor.</p> + +<p>It would have been well had one or another +remained on the watch, but Dan, Gory, and I +were thoroughly fagged out, and Longley had +been on guard the night before.</p> + +<p>“We’ll risk it,” said the clerk, as he passed +around such blankets as he possessed, not for +coverings, as it was too warm for that, but to be +made up into such couches as our ingenuity +could devise.</p> + +<p>We turned in about eleven o’clock and I slept +soundly until a little after three in the morning. +I awoke with a start and knew at once that some +noise had aroused me. I listened, but all was as +silent as the grave, excepting for the snoring +that came from Matt Gory’s corner.</p> + +<p>“Something is wrong,” I thought, and turned +over in the direction of the barred window, close +to Longley’s couch. There was a faint light, +and the sight that I saw filled me with horror.</p> + +<p>A man hung to the bars from the outside. In +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_199">[199]</span>one hand he held a sharp dagger tied to a stout +stick. The dagger had been passed into the +room and the man was on the point of sticking +the dangerous-looking blade into Longley’s +breast!</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_200">[200]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXVI.<br> +<small>THE FIGHT IN THE OFFICES.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“Longley, look out!”</p> + +<p>Such was the cry which broke from my lips, +as I leaped to my feet.</p> + +<p>At the same moment, I picked up a chair +standing near and hurled it at the arm thrust +through the window bars with all my might.</p> + +<p>By pure good luck my aim was true, and the +seat of the chair struck the Spaniard’s hand such +a smart blow that he gave a howl of pain, +dropped stick and dagger, and fell back out of +sight.</p> + +<p>“What is the matter?” came from Longley, +as he scrambled up from under the articles just +mentioned. At the same time Dan and Matt +Gory also arose.</p> + +<p>“The window—a Spaniard wanted to knife +you,” I answered, and turned up the light.</p> + +<p>“This is the worst yet,” said the clerk, as he +picked up the stick and examined the weapon +fastened to it. “By thunder! Ramon Delveraz!”</p> + +<p>“Ramon Delveraz! What do you mean by +that?” queried Dan.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_201">[201]</span>“Here is the name on the dagger handle. +Ramon Delveraz is one of the Spaniards who are +trying to drive us into quitting these offices, so +that their land company can take possession of +this whole block.”</p> + +<p>“The man was a short, stout fellow with a +heavy beard.”</p> + +<p>“It must have been he! The scoundrel! +Where is he now?”</p> + +<p>Longley rushed to the window and looked +out. Nobody was to be seen. Then he ran to +the front of the room.</p> + +<p>“There he goes!” he cried, pointing to a retreating +figure. “Oh, but I will pay him back +for this when the excitement is over.”</p> + +<p>The incident had banished sleep for the balance +of the night, and we talked over the situation +until daylight.</p> + +<p>The sun came up clear and hot, but the streets +remained deserted, excepting for the soldiers on +guard. One of these came up to the doors below +and tried them to see if they were locked. +Longley spoke to him out of the window, but +he did not answer.</p> + +<p>“They are ugly and there is no telling what +they will do next,” said the clerk. “It’s lucky +they do not know that you are here.”</p> + +<p>“Won’t those would-be plunderers tell them +of our arrival?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_202">[202]</span>“They do not know but what you belong +here.”</p> + +<p>Slowly the day wore along, growing hotter +and hotter, until at two o’clock the rooms were +like a bake oven.</p> + +<p>“This is nothing,” said Longley, after hearing +me complain of the heat. “It is only ninety-six +degrees to-day. Sometimes it is a hundred and +ten in the shade.”</p> + +<p>“I wouldn’t want to live here very long,” I +answered. “It would take all the starch out of +a fellow. I don’t wonder that the natives are +lazy.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, some of them are no good anyhow,” +said he. “They won’t work, but spend their +time in sleeping, smoking, and in attending +cockfights and bullfights. Cockfighting, you +know, is the national sport.”</p> + +<p>“And it is a wicked, cruel thing, Longley. I +don’t see how a man can call himself a man and +put in his time looking at one rooster trying to +tear another to death with steel spurs.”</p> + +<p>“It is all that you say of it, and so is bullfighting.”</p> + +<p>“I’m glad we haven’t any such national +sports,” I went on. “Baseball and football are +good enough for me.”</p> + +<p>“They laugh at baseball and call it baby’s +play.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_203">[203]</span>“Never mind, it isn’t inhuman, and their +fights are.”</p> + +<p>“Fortunes are won and lost on bull- and cockfights. +I have heard of thousands of <i>pesetas</i> +changing hands as the result of a single contest.”</p> + +<p>“That makes it all the worse. I don’t want +to see or hear of such fights,” I concluded, and +I meant what I said. I think these contests an +everlasting disgrace to Spain and every other +nation that permits them.</p> + +<p>To fill in our time we helped Longley prepare +the mid-day meal and enjoyed the best the stock +of provisions on hand afforded. Our coffee was +native grown, and, seasoned with condensed +milk, made as good a drink as the best of Java.</p> + +<p>“This island could have a splendid coffee +trade if it would only wake up,” said Longley. +“Just see what the Dutch have done for Java. +The Spaniards are away behind the times.”</p> + +<p>“Spain is a nation of the past,” said Dan. “I +have heard father say that she will never regain +the valuable prestige which she has lost. Her +possessions are dropping away one by one, and +in time she won’t be able to hold even the +mother country together.”</p> + +<p>“It’s because she don’t trate the people +roight,” broke in Matt Gory. “She takes ivery +cent fer taxes an’ church purposes, and they be +strapped, an’ git nothin’ fer it. A mon as has +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_204">[204]</span>a constant drain on his pocketbook wid no recompense, +is apt to git mad sooner or later and +rise up an’ swat somebody.”</p> + +<p>We all roared at these quaint remarks, yet recognized +their truth.</p> + +<p>“Spain will wake up when it is too late,” said +Longley. “The people——”</p> + +<p>He stopped off short as a loud knocking below +reached our ears. Going to the window he +reported three Spanish soldiers below.</p> + +<p>“Hide, all of you!” he continued, and rushed +to a side wall. Opening a door, he showed us +a secret closet and we entered.</p> + +<p>Slowly the minutes passed as we heard him go +below and hold a short and spirited conversation. +Then came a struggle and the report of a pistol.</p> + +<p>“Here, I can’t stand this!” cried Dan. “He +is in trouble and——”</p> + +<p>“We must help him,” I finished, and leaped +out into the room. Longley had armed us with +pistols, and we descended the stairs on the +double-quick with the weapons in our hands, +and Gory tumbling after us.</p> + +<p>Longley stood leaning against a counter in +the rear office, the blood flowing from a wound +in his side. Near him stood the three Spaniards, +one with a pistol which still smoked from the discharge.</p> + +<p>Without hesitation we opened fire and as the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_205">[205]</span>three pistols rang out two of the Spaniards went +down, one shot in the side and the other in the +breast. At once the office began to fill with +smoke.</p> + +<p>“Down with all—of—them!” gasped poor +Longley. “Don’t—let—them—get—away or +you are—lost!” and then he fainted from loss of +blood.</p> + +<p>We had seen the two soldiers fall and now all +three of us rushed through the smoke at the +third fellow. Again a pistol shot rang out, and +a bullet touched Matt Gory on the arm. But +that was the last time that that Don ever pulled +a trigger, for the Irishman fired in return and +he fell headlong, shot through the heart.</p> + +<p>“Lock the door!” I cried, to Dan, and he +leaped to do as bidden. Then, seeing that +the two Spaniards on the floor were incapable of +doing further harm, I turned my attention to +poor Longley and carried him to a rattan lounge +which stood in a corner.</p> + +<p>It was no easy task to bind up the clerk’s +wound. By the time it was accomplished the +two Spaniards who had been knocked over were +coming around. Soon one of them began to +yell feebly for assistance.</p> + +<p>“This will never do!” whispered Dan. +“We’ll have the guards down on us in short +order. Gag them.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_206">[206]</span>“I know a better trick,” I answered, and +stepped over both men with my pistol. “Silence!” +I commanded, and pointed the weapon +at first one and then the other.</p> + +<p>My meaning was clear even if my word of command +was not, and with a shiver of terror the fellow +who had been calling out relapsed into +silence.</p> + +<p>“Help me!” came faintly from Longley, and +he sat up and stared about him. “Wha—what +has occurred? I—I thought I was shot down!”</p> + +<p>“You were,” answered Dan.</p> + +<p>“And those three villains?”</p> + +<p>“Two are wounded and lie yonder and the +third is dead.”</p> + +<p>“Thank heaven for that!” And then unable +to hold himself up longer, the clerk sank back +again.</p> + +<p>Soon we heard the tramp of a dozen feet outside +and there followed a loud knocking on the +door. We became as quiet as death.</p> + +<p>“Open the door!” came the order, in Spanish, +but nobody moved, while Dan and I and even +Matt Gory, wounded as he was, kept our pistols +ready for use.</p> + +<p>“Open the door!” came the order a second +time. Then a brief discussion followed. “The +shooting must have come from elsewhere,” said +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_207">[207]</span>a Spanish officer; and the patrol outside marched +on.</p> + +<p>As I could not understand the talk, Dan translated +it. “If we keep quiet for awhile I think +we’ll be all right,” he said.</p> + +<p>And we did keep quiet, for an hour or more. +But nobody came near the offices during that +time, and at last we considered ourselves, for the +time being, safe.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_208">[208]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXVII.<br> +<small>A LETTER OF GREAT IMPORTANCE.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>During the time which passed Dan and I attended +to both Longley and Matt Gory’s +wounds, and also did what we could for the two +Spaniards. The dead man was placed in the +cellar.</p> + +<p>As I have mentioned, the Irish sailor’s wound +was not a serious affair, and he soon insisted that +he was as ready for fighting as ever. Longley, +however, was in bad shape, and I felt he ought +to have a doctor’s attention.</p> + +<p>“Tell me where I can find a doctor and I’ll +go for him,” I said, and he gave me the necessary +directions, and I slipped off by a back alleyway.</p> + +<p>Luckily I found the medical man at home. +He was an Englishman and readily consented to +come over to the offices and do what he could for +Longley.</p> + +<p>“They should not harm him, since he is not +in this fight,” said the doctor. “Do you imagine +they mistreat Spaniards in San Francisco +and New York so? It is against international +rules of war and Spain will gain nothing by such +a course.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_209">[209]</span>“They are bound to drive our firm from Manila, +if they can. This is more of a personal than +a national difficulty.”</p> + +<p>“Still, they should treat you fairly.”</p> + +<p>An examination proved that Longley needed +rest and quietness if he was to recover. The +physician said if the clerk was removed to his +home he would take care of him. We debated +the matter, and resolved to remove Longley at +nightfall.</p> + +<p>“And as soon as he is gone you had better +turn those two wounded Spaniards over to their +own people,” went on the medical man. “I’ll +make sure that they don’t unearth Longley, even +if they hunt for him, which will be doubtful.”</p> + +<p>The removal was made without trouble, the +Spaniards having their hands full at the front, +watching Commodore Dewey’s ships and his +marines and the rebel troops, which were pressing +closer and closer to Manila.</p> + +<p>As soon as Longley was safe we did as Dr. +Harkness advised, turned the Spaniards out, +laying them on a side street, where they were +soon picked up by a guard. The offices were +then locked up, and the doctor said he would +place them under the British flag for protection.</p> + +<p>At midnight Dan, Matt Gory, and myself were +once again on the streets of the city, not knowing +which way to turn or what to do.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_210">[210]</span>“Shall we go back to the ship?” queried Dan.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps it might be as well,” I said. “But +we may be captured at the city wall.”</p> + +<p>However, we determined to try our luck, and +set off in the midst of a rising storm. As we +moved onward, we heard a number of shots from +a distance, and presently found ourselves in the +midst of a mass of natives who were running for +their lives.</p> + +<p>“There has been an uprising!” cried Dan, +after questioning a native. “Let us go along. +We can escape better in the crowd than if we +keep alone.”</p> + +<p>We rushed along the street, and presently +found ourselves among at least two hundred +Filipinos of all sorts and conditions. Some were +armed with rifles, but the majority carried nothing +but clubs, spears, and long knives, such as +were used on the plantations.</p> + +<p>Coming to the river, a rush was made over the +bridge, and then began a flight to the north, up +a road that was six inches deep with mud.</p> + +<p>“Now let us get out of this!” whispered Dan, +and we gradually drew to one side, like tame +horses withdrawing from a wild herd.</p> + +<p>The rain had now stopped, but it was still +pitch-dark, and soon we had left the natives fleeing +to the north of us, while we turned eastward.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_211">[211]</span>“Listen!” exclaimed Dan, as a strange sound +reached our ears, above the rising wind. +“What is that?”</p> + +<p>“It must be a cry for help!” I answered.</p> + +<p>“Let us be afther investigatin’,” put in Matt +Gory. “We may be able to do some feller-critter +a big turn.”</p> + +<p>The cries seemed to come from a hillside +ahead, and we mounted this through dense brush +that dripped with water.</p> + +<p>“There is a hut ahead,” said Dan. “The +cries come from there.”</p> + +<p>“It must be a native in distress,” I returned, +and moved on in advance.</p> + +<p>“Help! help!” came suddenly, in an English +voice, and we quickened our pace, feeling that +one of our own soldier or sailor boys might be +in distress.</p> + +<p>When we reached the bamboo hut a strange +sight met our gaze. On his back lay a white +man of at least seventy years of age. Kneeling +on his breast was a Tagal with drawn knife, while +another Tagal knelt at the old man’s side, trying +to pull a money bag from his grasp.</p> + +<p>“Hi! stop that!” I called out, and, rushing +in, kicked one of the Tagals so heavily in his +side that he rolled over and over on the earthen +floor.</p> + +<p>At this the second native leaped up and rushed +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_212">[212]</span>at me with his knife. But, before the blade +could descend, Dan fired at him, and his arm +fell helpless at his side.</p> + +<p>“Help me; they have—have murdered me!” +gasped the old man, and turned over on his side +in pain, showing an ugly cut on his neck. With +a fierce mutter the Tagal I had kicked got up +and rushed at Dan, clutching him by the throat +and running him up against the wall of the hut. +But now Matt Gory leaped in, and a blow from +his pistol stretched the rascal senseless. Seeing +this, the native who had been shot took to his +heels and disappeared into the darkness outside.</p> + +<p>There was a dim lantern burning beneath the +roof of the hut, and this light was now turned +up, that we might see more of this strange situation.</p> + +<p>“I am—am done for,” gasped the old man. +“That villain has torn my neck to pieces!”</p> + +<p>“Let us bind the wound up,” I answered tenderly. +“Have you any rags handy?”</p> + +<p>“Never mind—I know I cannot live. I—I—can +I trust you?”</p> + +<p>“You can,” answered Dan. “Have you a +message to leave?”</p> + +<p>“I have. You are Americans?”</p> + +<p>“Yes.”</p> + +<p>“So am I. My name is Gaston Brown. I +have a son, a sailor, Watterson Brown, +who——”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_213">[213]</span>“I know him—Watt Brown. He was second +mate of the <i>Dart</i>,” I ejaculated.</p> + +<p>“So you know Watt?” The old man’s eyes +brightened for an instant. “So much the better. +I have something for my son. If I die +will you deliver it?”</p> + +<p>“I will—if I can.”</p> + +<p>“We will do our best,” added Dan, and Matt +Gory nodded.</p> + +<p>“Sure, an’ we were all on the <i>Dart</i> wid yer +son,” added the Irishman.</p> + +<p>“I cannot leave Watt much money; but I +have a precious letter for him. That letter must +not be lost. Will you defend it while it is in your +keeping?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” I answered. “But hadn’t you better +acquaint me with its contents, in case it is lost?”</p> + +<p>“It must not be lost. It is—is in the tin box +buried in yonder corner. Give it to Watt with +my blessing. Tell him—tell him—water!”</p> + +<p>“He is dying!” whispered Dan, and ran for +water, while I raised the elderly individual up. +I wanted to tell him how Watt was situated, but +it was too late. A strange rattle sounded in his +throat, and before my chum could place the cup +of water to his lips, his soul had fled.</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ he is gone!” whispered Matt Gory, +the first to break the silence. “God rist +him!”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_214">[214]</span>“This was a strange way to live,” I began, +when Dan cut me short.</p> + +<p>“We must not lose time here, Oliver. Let us +get that letter and be going.”</p> + +<p>We hunted in a corner of the hut and began +to dig down at a spot where it looked as if the +soil had been recently disturbed.</p> + +<p>“That’s the box,” said Matt Gory, as we +heard a metallic click, and soon the box was +brought to light—a square affair, painted black.</p> + +<p>It was unlocked, and, opening it, we found +that it contained nothing but a long, thick envelope, +tightly sealed, and addressed to Watterson +Brown, mate, on board the schooner <i>Dart</i>. Below +were added the words:</p> + +<p>“From his father, with the hope that the fortune +may prove a blessing.”</p> + +<p>“A fortune for Watt Brown,” mused Dan. +“Well, he deserves it, for he’s a good fellow.”</p> + +<p>“If only he isn’t dead. In that case I won’t +know what to do with the letter,” I answered, as +I tucked the precious document away in my +pocket. Little did I dream of all of the adventures +into which that letter was to one day lead +me.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_215">[215]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXVIII.<br> +<small>TREED BY BUFFALO BULLS.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“This silent inaction is growing monotonous.”</p> + +<p>It was Dan who spoke, and he addressed me, +while both of us and Matt Gory took it easy in +front of a deserted house we had chanced upon +on a side road some miles away from Manila.</p> + +<p>After burying Gaston Brown our flight had +taken us to the north, and we had rested at the +house for two days, undecided what to do next.</p> + +<p>“If we try to move past Manila and toward +Cavité, we’ll run into both rebels and Spaniards, +and I don’t want to do that,” I said. “I +am rather sick of this fighting.”</p> + +<p>“So am I, Oliver. But we must do something. +We can’t sit here and suck our thumbs.”</p> + +<p>“Let us try to make our way up past Subig +Bay to the coast and find out what has become +of the <i>Dart</i>.”</p> + +<p>“Sure, an’ that same suits me,” put in Matt +Gory. “Oi wants that dudeen of mine th’ worst +way, so Oi do. Bad cess to any haythin’ as has +stholen th’ same!” He spoke of his old pipe +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_216">[216]</span>constantly, for it had been his friend for many +years.</p> + +<p>“Your dudeen ought to be strong enough to +walk to where you are, Matt,” laughed Dan. +Then his face grew thoughtful. “It would be +a long trip to the <i>Dart</i>, and we may fall in with +lots of Tagals.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not, Dan. I have an idea that all +of the natives are now gathering around Manila, +and we will find the coast almost clear.”</p> + +<p>“There is something in that. Well, I’m willing. +Anything is better than staying here with +hardly anything to eat but cocoanuts and plantains.”</p> + +<p>Nevertheless, we did not move away until +twenty-four hours later. Our rest at the house +had done us good, and at the place we had +picked up a new pair of boots for Matt, a coat +for Dan, and a new straw hat for myself, besides +some canned goods, which, however, we had not +opened, determined to keep them until we could +find nothing else.</p> + +<p>The day we set off it was cooler than it had +been for some time, and as the road was comparatively +level, we made good time, and by +nightfall had covered fifteen miles.</p> + +<p>We had met only a few natives, and these of +the mild sort, who merely stared at us in open-mouthed +wonder.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_217">[217]</span>“There is one thing certain,” I said, as we +went into camp that night. “Not all of these +people want to fight.”</p> + +<p>“That is true, Oliver. I believe, if they were +left alone, a good portion of the Filipinos would +prove absolutely harmless. But the warlike +class keep the others in a constant state of excitement.”</p> + +<p>Several days passed, including a Sunday, when +we let up on our travels and rested. We had +now entered the hills, and traveling became more +difficult. We might have lost our way; but from +the wreck of the schooner Matt Gory had saved +both a chart and a compass, and these now stood +us in good stead.</p> + +<p>The weather remained clear, but knowing that +storms are frequent, we made the most of our +time while it did not rain. We had now struck +the seacoast north of Subig Bay, and we calculated +that a week’s added traveling would see us +at the spot where the <i>Dart</i> lay and where we had +had so many adventures on first landing.</p> + +<p>Two days later we came on a plateau overlooking +the sea. It was still clear, and we had +hardly reached the place when Matt Gory +pointed out a sail on the horizon.</p> + +<p>“Some ship sailing around, even if there is +a war on,” said Dan. “I wonder what sort of a +craft she is?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_218">[218]</span>“A Chinese junk,” answered the Irish sailor, +“Oi kin tell ’em as far as Oi kin see ’em.”</p> + +<p>“Well, we don’t want anything to do with +their junks,” I answered. “It was a Chinese +craft that knocked that hole in the <i>Dart</i>.”</p> + +<p>Soon the sail disappeared from view on its +way up the coast, and we started to continue our +journey. We had gone on less than a mile when +a strange tramping behind us brought us to a +halt.</p> + +<p>“What is that?” I questioned, as I drew my +pistol.</p> + +<p>“Horsemen approaching, I reckon,” murmured +Dan. “We had better hide.”</p> + +<p>But hiding was not so easy, as only some tall +trees were around, the ground being too stony +for small brush of any thickness.</p> + +<p>“They be comin’ closer!” cried Matt Gory. +“Sure an’ we had betther take to the trees, me +b’ys!”</p> + +<p>“We’ll have to help one another up,” I said. +“Come on.”</p> + +<p>We chose some mahogany trees, two growing +close together. By boosting and hauling we +managed with much difficulty to gain the lower +limbs just as the newcomers came into view +around a turn of a hillside.</p> + +<p>“Gracious! Buffalo bulls!” cried Dan.</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ they are no inimies!” cried Matt +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_219">[219]</span>Gory, and without thinking twice, dropped to +the ground again.</p> + +<p>“Come up here!” roared Dan. “Do you +want to be horned to pieces?”</p> + +<p>“Will they horn one?” I queried.</p> + +<p>“Yes, as quickly as a mad bull at home.”</p> + +<p>“Then, Matt, get up, and be quick about it.”</p> + +<p>There was no need to tell the Irish sailor twice. +A buffalo bull had spotted him, and with a wild +snort, was coming for him, horns down.</p> + +<p>“Be the powers!” gasped Gory. “Save me! +hilp!” and he made a wild dash for the tree, but +slipped and fell.</p> + +<figure class="figcenter" style="width: 450px;"> + <img src="images/i_p218a.jpg" width="450" height="670" alt=""> + <figcaption> + <p class="caption">“BEFORE THE BUFFALO BULL COULD REACH HIM, DAN’S PISTOL + RANG OUT.”</p> + </figcaption> +</figure> + +<p>I fully expected to see him gored to death, +but, before the buffalo bull could reach him, +Dan’s pistol rang out, and the beast staggered +and dropped back, with an ugly wound just below +his left eye.</p> + +<p>“Come, Matt, get up!” I yelled, and as the +sailor made for the tree, I leaned far down and +caught his hand. Just as I hauled him up the +bull made another charge, striking the tree trunk +with a shock that shook the tree from end to +end.</p> + +<p>In a minute more we found the two mahogany +trees surrounded by exactly eleven bulls, for +these curious creatures sometimes congregate in +this fashion, although not always. They were +wild-looking beasts, and from their breathing +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_220">[220]</span>we felt certain that they had come a long distance.</p> + +<p>“They have been pursued,” said Dan. “Usually +they are fairly tame, although not to be trifled +with.”</p> + +<p>“Sure and Oi’ve had a narrow escape!” +panted Matt Gory. “See! see! phwat is up +now?”</p> + +<p>He pointed to the wounded bull, that had circled +around and, without warning, charged one +of his mates. Instantly there was a counter +charge, and the crashing together of two skulls +could be distinctly heard. Then the wounded +bull went down on his knees and several of his +mates fell upon him and tore him into shreds.</p> + +<p>It was a disgusting sight, and I had to turn +away, for fear of getting sick and tumbling from +the branch upon which I rested. “Now we +have a sample of bullfighting, I suppose,” I said.</p> + +<p>“Yes, and it’s simply horrible!” murmured +Dan. Matt Gory, however, seemed to enjoy the +contest, and let out a hurrah as the bull fell over +dead.</p> + +<p>“It serves the baste roight fer attackin’ me,” +he said. “Bad luck to the rascal!”</p> + +<p>After the killing of the bull, his mates withdrew +to a distance of twenty or thirty yards, in +the meantime tossing their heads at us and giving +occasional snorts of anger.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_221">[221]</span>“They are aching to get at us,” was Dan’s +comment. “And just for the fun of killing us, +too, since they won’t touch meat.”</p> + +<p>“We’re in a serious dilemma, Dan,” I answered. +“We can’t stay here forever.”</p> + +<p>“Neither can the bulls.”</p> + +<p>“But some of them may keep coming and going, +and thus starve us out.”</p> + +<p>“No; I think if they once make a move to +leave, they’ll go in a bunch.”</p> + +<p>After this several hours went by, and still the +bulls stayed where they were. Then came a sudden +clatter of ponies’ hoofs on the road and the +yells of half a dozen natives.</p> + +<p>“The Tagals are coming now, beyond a +doubt,” I said.</p> + +<p>“And the bulls are running for it,” answered +Dan, and he was right; at the first cries from the +natives the buffalo bulls scampered off like +frightened deer, and that was the last we saw of +them.</p> + +<p>We had scarcely time to draw up into the topmost +branches of the mahoganies when the pony +riders put in an appearance. Six short, wicked-looking +Tagals rode the animals.</p> + +<p>A shout went up when the carcass of the dead +bull was discovered. A jabbering in a native +dialect followed, and two Tagals left, presumably +to find out what had become of the rest of the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_222">[222]</span>herd. While this hunt was made, two other natives +cut off a number of juicy buffalo steaks and +placed them in leaves bound with vines.</p> + +<p>“I hope they don’t go into camp here,” murmured +Dan to me.</p> + +<p>“Or that they don’t discover some trace of +us,” I returned.</p> + +<p>“We had better hold ourselves in readiness +for an attack,” put in Matt Gory, and we thought +this good advice and followed it.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_223">[223]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXIX.<br> +<small>CAPTAIN KENNY AGAIN.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>We were compelled to pass the night in the +trees, the Tagals encamping less than a hundred +feet away, and the night proving so light that +escape was out of the question.</p> + +<p>But at dawn our enemies departed, and then +we lost no time in dropping to the ground and +moving on, first, however, helping ourselves to +all of the steaks we could conveniently carry.</p> + +<p>Our course lay along the hills, and soon we +crossed the canyon where Captain Kenny had +played me such a dastardly trick. Here we +paused for a dinner of the steaks, and I think I +can truthfully say that never did a repast taste +sweeter.</p> + +<p>“I only hope I can square accounts with Captain +Kenny some time,” I said. “I shall never +feel satisfied until I know he has received his +deserts.”</p> + +<p>“Villains are not always brought to justice, +Oliver,” answered Dan. “But I haven’t any +doubt but that we will meet Captain Kenny some +time or another, and if we do——” Dan finished +by a determined shake of his head that +meant a good deal.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_224">[224]</span>We were now approaching those mountains +which I mentioned in the earlier chapters of my +tale, and, consequently, our progress was much +slower.</p> + +<p>“It’s a good thing that it remains dry,” said +Dan, as we toiled up one hill and down another. +“I don’t want any thunderstorms.”</p> + +<p>“No, especially if the lightning is going to +strike close by,” I added. “I wish we were in +sight of the sea.”</p> + +<p>“I think we’ll reach it by to-morrow.”</p> + +<p>My chum’s surmise was correct, for about +noon of the day following we came out upon the +shore of the China Sea, close to the point where +I had been cast up in company with Watt Brown +and several others.</p> + +<p>“This looks a bit familiar,” I cried, as I ran +out on the sand.</p> + +<p>“Hi! be careful,” shouted Dan. “Do you +want those Tagals to spot you?”</p> + +<p>“Not much!” I returned, and scampered for +shelter with equal alacrity. After that I proceeded +with more caution.</p> + +<p>It was determined to push on without delay to +where the <i>Dart</i> had come ashore. This would +bring us in the vicinity of the stranded craft +about nightfall and enable us to take in the situation +under cover of the darkness.</p> + +<p>It was about four o’clock, and we reckoned +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_225">[225]</span>that we must soon come in sight of the <i>Dart</i>, +when Matt Gory suddenly pulled my arm.</p> + +<p>“The Chinese junk!” he ejaculated. “She +is heading in shore!”</p> + +<p>“By Jove, Matt is right!” answered Dan. +“What can this mean?”</p> + +<p>“It means that they have spotted the <i>Dart</i> +and are coming ashore to investigate,” I replied. +“I suppose they think they have discovered a +rich haul.”</p> + +<p>“In that case we must get to the wreck first!” +said Dan. “Come, let us leg it!”</p> + +<p>And run we did, at the best speed at our command, +and forgetting all about the possible proximity +of the Tagals. Soon the <i>Dart</i> came into +view, lying exactly as she had before, but now +totally deserted excepting for a single figure that +stood on the deck, armed with a gun and two +pistols.</p> + +<p>“Watt Brown!” I yelled, and Dan and Matt +Gory also cried out.</p> + +<p>At the sounds of our voices the second mate +turned swiftly and fell back in amazement.</p> + +<p>“Well! well!” he ejaculated, when he could +speak. “I thought you fellows were all dead. +Come on board and help me hold the fort.”</p> + +<p>“Hold the fort?” I asked. “Against +whom?”</p> + +<p>“Yonder Chinamen, Raymond. I’ve been +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_226">[226]</span>watching ’em through a glass, and they are pirates, +I’m dead sure on it!”</p> + +<p>“We can’t hold th’ fort agin’ a shipload of +’em,” grumbled Matt Gory.</p> + +<p>“I have a small cannon waiting for them,” answered +Watt Brown. “I am bound to hold the +fort until the <i>Concord</i> comes back.”</p> + +<p>“The <i>Concord</i>!” I burst out. “Do you mean +the gunboat of Dewey’s fleet?”</p> + +<p>“I do.”</p> + +<p>“And has she been here?” put in Dan, with +equal interest.</p> + +<p>“Yes, and she picked up nearly all of our old +crew that were alive excepting Captain Kenny +and Ah Sid, the cook. Tom Dawson was on +her.”</p> + +<p>“Good fer Tom, I knew he would do somethin’!” +cried the Irish sailor. “But how is it +you are keeping the fort, as you call it?”</p> + +<p>“I escaped from the Tagals and fell in with +some of the owners of the <i>Dart</i> at Manila. They +are down on Captain Kenny, and they were on +the point of having him arrested for fraud when +he got to Manila. They asked me to come back +and claim the property, and the schooner is to be +floated and turned over to the United States +Government for coast service during this +war. Now will all of you help me, or won’t +you?”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_227">[227]</span>“Certainly we will!” cried Dan, and Matt +Gory and I said the same.</p> + +<p>There was no time to talk further, and we +hastened to look about the <i>Dart</i> to learn how we +were to defend the schooner from attack. The +howitzer Watt Brown had mentioned was already +loaded, and the second mate said he would +attend to the piece himself if only we would look +after the small-arms; said small-arms being eight +muskets, all loaded, lying in a row by the rail, +alongside of a biscuit box full of cartridges!</p> + +<p>“Sure an ye are afther bein’ a whole company +of marines in wan!” observed Matt Gory, as he +surveyed the preparations. “It puts me in mind +o’ the man as used to go around Irish fairs playing +a dhrum, a fife, and fiddle, an’ a hurdy-gurdy +all in wan, wid the sweetest music——”</p> + +<p>“They are coming, and we haven’t a minute +to lose,” interrupted Dan, and took up two of the +guns. “Keep out of sight, boys, or they may +pick us off at long range!”</p> + +<p>“I would like to have a look through your +glasses,” I said, and he readily handed them +over. My eyes are good, and as I gazed at the +junk I saw she had lowered all of her sails and +was dropping a small boat into the sea.</p> + +<p>“They are coming over here, for sure,” I +said.</p> + +<p>“Let me take a look,” said Dan, and took the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_228">[228]</span>glasses from my hands. “By Jove!” he gasped, +a minute later.</p> + +<p>“What is it, Dan?”</p> + +<p>“There is a white man in that boat!”</p> + +<p>“A white man, eh?” broke in Watt Brown. +“Who can he be?”</p> + +<p>“I can’t make out yet.”</p> + +<p>“And how many yellow fellers?” asked Matt +Gory.</p> + +<p>“Six sailors and an officer.”</p> + +<p>“Eight, all told,” mused the second mate. +“Well, we ought to prove a match for ’em.”</p> + +<p>“We ought not to shed blood if it can be +avoided,” I said.</p> + +<p>“True for you, Raymond; but you must remember +that pirates are pirates the world over.”</p> + +<p>Slowly the small boat came closer. Watt +Brown continued to watch it through the glass. +Then of a sudden he gave a gasp.</p> + +<p>“Captain Kenny!”</p> + +<p>“What?” we ejaculated in chorus.</p> + +<p>“The white man is Captain Kenny—and one +of the men at the oars is Ah Sid!”</p> + +<p>“What in the world are they doing among +those pirates?” I asked.</p> + +<p>“That remains to be seen. More than likely +Captain Kenny has heard what the other owners +of the <i>Dart</i> want to do, and he is going to +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_229">[229]</span>turn the craft over to those Chinamen,” answered +the second mate.</p> + +<p>“Has he a right to do that?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t think he has—and whether he has or +not, I’m not going to let him do it,” and Watt +Brown shook his head determinedly. “He’s a +bad egg.”</p> + +<p>“He is that,” I went on. “I want to bring +him to justice myself. Why, he tried to take +my life!”</p> + +<p>“We’ll hold the fort, as Brown says,” put in +Dan. “The question is, how are we going to +do it?”</p> + +<p>“I’ll show you!” cried the second mate, and +snatching up one of the muskets he shot it off +in the air.</p> + +<p>As the report rolled out to sea the rowers in +the small boat dropped their blades, while Captain +Kenny leaped to his feet. The former commander +waved his hand, as Watt Brown came +into view.</p> + +<p>“Ahoy, there!” he cried, at the top of his +lungs.</p> + +<p>For reply the second mate seized a speaking +trumpet with which he had supplied himself. +“Keep off!” he yelled. “Keep off, or +we’ll blow you and your boat to kingdom +come!”</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_230">[230]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXX.<br> +<small>A FIGHT AT LONG RANGE.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>There is no doubt but that Captain Kenny was +taken completely by surprise. As a matter of +fact he had expected to find nobody on board +or near the <i>Dart</i>, knowing that all of the Tagals +of that territory had moved away to join the insurgent +forces operating around Manila.</p> + +<p>For a minute after Watt Brown had delivered +his warning there was a silence, broken only by +the soft lapping of the waves as they broke +against the <i>Dart’s</i> sides.</p> + +<p>“What is that you say?” demanded the captain +at length.</p> + +<p>“I warn you to keep off,” shouted Watt +Brown. “Come closer at your peril!”</p> + +<p>“What right have you to talk to me in this +fashion, Brown?”</p> + +<p>“A good deal of right, Captain Kenny. I +have found you out, and so have others; and you +are a thorough villain.”</p> + +<p>“What have you found out?”</p> + +<p>“Found out that you were trying to defraud +the other owners, for one thing.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_231">[231]</span>“It aint so!” stormed the former skipper of +the schooner.</p> + +<p>“It is so.”</p> + +<p>“And you tried to take my life!” I called out, +as I showed myself for the first time.</p> + +<p>“Raymond!” he ejaculated, and for the instant +he could say no more.</p> + +<p>“I have a good body of men with me,” continued +Watt Brown, “and I warn you to keep +off.”</p> + +<p>“The ship is mine, and I intend to have her,” +was the reckless return.</p> + +<p>Captain Kenny turned to Ah Sid and spoke to +the Chinaman. In return the former cook of the +<i>Dart</i> interpreted his remarks for his countrymen.</p> + +<p>A short discussion took place, and then Captain +Kenny called out once more.</p> + +<p>“We are coming on board, Brown, and the +best thing you can do is to make a peaceful surrender.”</p> + +<p>“We won’t surrender, and if you come ten +feet nearer we’ll open fire on you.”</p> + +<p>“You won’t dare!”</p> + +<p>“We will dare. Do you know who this boat +belongs to?”</p> + +<p>“She belongs to me.”</p> + +<p>“She belongs to the United States Government—or +will belong to the government very +soon.”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_232">[232]</span>“On the contrary, she belongs to the captain +of yonder Chinese junk.”</p> + +<p>“Not much! Now keep off! I have warned +you for the last time. If you don’t—”</p> + +<p>Watt Brown got no further. While he had +been speaking Captain Kenny had drawn his +pistol, and now, taking sudden aim, he let drive, +the bullet clipping the second mate’s forelock.</p> + +<p>“The rascal!” I burst out, and was on the +point of firing when the howitzer roared out, +sending a shot cutting over the small boat’s bow. +A splinter planted itself in Ah Sid’s shoulder and +we were glad to see that unworthy Celestial +squirm with pain.</p> + +<p>The discharge of the ship’s cannon alarmed +the Chinamen more than all threats would have +done, and catching up their oars, they turned +the battered small boat about and made for the +junk.</p> + +<p>“That scared them,” cried Dan.</p> + +<p>“Can’t Oi have a shot at ’em?” queried Matt +Gory disappointedly.</p> + +<p>“You may get more shots than you want before +we have done with ’em,” smiled Watt +Brown grimly.</p> + +<p>“You think they will come back?” said Dan.</p> + +<p>“Most certainly Captain Kenny will be back. +He’s not the fellow to give up so readily.”</p> + +<p>We watched the small boat until it was out of +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_233">[233]</span>range, then dropped our weapons and sought +shelter from the fierce rays of the setting sun. +During the excitement I had forgotten about +Watt Brown’s packet, but now I brought it forth +and handed it to him, and in as gentle a way as +I could, told him of his parent’s death.</p> + +<p>“Poor father!” he murmured, and tears stood +on his rough cheeks. “He was a good man, +even if he was queer. I wish I could have been +with him when he died.”</p> + +<p>He then proceeded to tell us something of his +parent’s history, how he had been first a sailor, +then a doctor, and then a rover of the earth in +search of adventure.</p> + +<p>“He has been to nearly every country on the +globe,” he continued. “He was always wanting +to see the unknown and the strange. He did +not travel so much when my mother was living, +but after she died he could not content himself +in one place for more than six months or a year +at the most. He came to Manila with me on my +last trip and intended to look for a Kanaka +whom he had once met in the Hawaiian Islands.”</p> + +<p>“He said the document was of great value,” +I answered. “I hope it proves so.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll look it over the first chance I get. Now +is no time to think of anything like that, since +those heathens are coming our way a second +time,” concluded Watt Brown.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_234">[234]</span>He was right about the Chinamen. The small +boat had left the junk and was moving up the +shore as swiftly as the oarsmen could drive it +through the surf. Captain Kenny was again on +board, but Ah Sid was missing.</p> + +<p>“They are going to make for the beach and +attack us from land,” exclaimed Dan.</p> + +<p>“Can’t we hit him with the howitzer?” asked +Matt Gory. “You are afther bein’ a foine shot, +Brown.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll try it,” answered the mate, and once +again the cannon was loaded. To sight the +piece was difficult, as the small boat danced up +and down on the waves incessantly.</p> + +<p>When the howitzer was touched off it was +seen that the shot had passed over the small boat. +That it had come close, however, was proven by +the consternation on board, several of the Celestials +having dropped their oars in terror.</p> + +<p>“Missed!” muttered Watt Brown. “Try +the muskets.”</p> + +<p>We at once complied, the mate firing with us. +But the distance was too great for those who +were not sharpshooters, and none of the bullets +took effect, excepting upon the small boat.</p> + +<p>Before the howitzer could be loaded again the +party landed and, hauling the rowboat up on the +sands, they ran for the shelter of the trees and +rocks.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_235">[235]</span>“Take the small-arms over to port,” ordered +Watt Brown. “They’ll be coming out through +the woods in less than ten minutes.”</p> + +<p>“Another boat is putting off from the junk!” +exclaimed Dan, who had picked up the glasses.</p> + +<p>“Six, seven, eight, nine men are coming over +in her! And they have a small gun on board!”</p> + +<p>“Seven and nine make sixteen,” I said. +“Sixteen to four are pretty big odds.”</p> + +<p>“Yis, but we are afther havin’ the advantage +of position,” returned Matt Gory. “Brown, +can’t ye be afther blowin’ that second boat sky-hoigh +wid th’ howitzer?”</p> + +<p>“I can try,” answered the second mate.</p> + +<p>He had already reloaded the piece, and as the +second small boat came closer he began to sight +the gun.</p> + +<p>“There is a flag of truce!” cried Dan, as an +officer in the boat held up a white handkerchief +by two of the corners.</p> + +<p>“We don’t recognize any flag of truce!” cried +Watt Brown. “I’ll show ’em that none o’ their +dirty Chinese tricks will work on me!”</p> + +<p>And rushing around he found a big red blanket +and swung it defiantly to the breeze. For +several seconds the Chinamen refused to recognize +the return signal, but then the white handkerchief +dropped and the second small boat came +to a lazy roll on the long waves.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_236">[236]</span>“Watch the woods!” sang out Watt Brown. +“I’ll keep these fellows at bay, never fear.”</p> + +<p>“I see some forms behind yonder trees,” said +Dan, a second later. “They are coming on as +fast as they can, and each man has a pistol and +a rifle! They mean fight!”</p> + +<p>“Take that, ye villain!” came from Matt +Gory, and taking a quick aim, he fired, and the +foremost of the Celestials went down, hit in the +side.</p> + +<p>This serious shot brought the crowd under +Captain Kenny to a halt, and in a twinkle all disappeared +again from view.</p> + +<p>“They are gone,” said the Irish sailor.</p> + +<p>“They’ll be coming on again, soon,” said the +second mate. And his words proved only too +true.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_237">[237]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXXI.<br> +<small>THE WRECKING OF THE HOWITZER.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>For fully five minutes the situation remained +unchanged, and during that time we took the +opportunity to reload the empty weapons and +bring out several others that had been hidden in +a secret closet of the cabin.</p> + +<p>It must not be supposed that I had forgotten +my money belt and the documents belonging to +our firm. I had thought of them several times, +but, as yet, had not dared to go below to see if +they were safe.</p> + +<p>Now, however, both Dan and I hurried to the +stateroom which we had occupied. The door +was closed, but not locked, and we entered, to +find all pitch-dark, the port-hole having become +covered with mud.</p> + +<p>Striking a match, we lit a lantern and proceeded +to make an investigation. Trunks and +lockers had been broken open, and clothing and +other things lay around in confusion.</p> + +<p>“Not a money belt in sight!” I groaned, after +a search. “And the documents are gone, too!”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_238">[238]</span>“We haven’t looked everywhere, yet,” answered +Dan. “Turn over the bed mattresses.”</p> + +<p>“How could they get into the beds?” I asked. +“If those rascally Tagals——”</p> + +<p>A shout from the deck interrupted me, and +dropping everything I flew through the cabin +and up the companion-way stairs, with Dan behind +me.</p> + +<p>“The second boat is coming on again!” announced +Watt Brown. “Watch the woods, for +there may be some understanding between the +two attacking parties.”</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ thim rascals are coming on, too!” +burst in Matt Gory. “Down, all of yez!” and +he dropped flat on the deck.</p> + +<p>We did the same, and just then a volley of rifle +shots rang out, and one of the bullets tore its +way through the top of Dan’s straw hat, while +all came alarmingly close.</p> + +<p>“On and at them!” shouted Captain Kenny, +forgetful, no doubt, that the Celestials could not +understand a word. And he led the way in a +rush for the ship.</p> + +<p>By this time the second small boat was less +than two hundred feet off and coming forward +with all the speed that the eight sturdy oarsmen +could command. The officer in the bow was at +the small cannon mentioned, and at what he +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_239">[239]</span>deemed a favorable moment touched off the +piece.</p> + +<p>His aim was certainly a good one, for the ball +hit the howitzer and sent it flying from its carriage +and rolling over the deck to port. A portion +of the block was splintered, and a bit of +woodwork flew up and hit Watt Brown in the +breast, inflicting an ugly and dangerous wound.</p> + +<p>“Brown is killed!” burst out Dan in horror, +and knelt down at his side.</p> + +<p>“Never mind—m—e,” came in a gasp from +the second mate. “Repel boarders, or w—we +are—lo—lost!” and then he fainted dead away.</p> + +<p>He spoke the truth, for now the second boat +was almost alongside, while Captain Kenny and +his command were less than fifty feet away.</p> + +<p>“Gory, cover the boat!” I yelled. “Dan, fire +with me at the captain’s crowd!” and I blazed +away, and had the satisfaction of seeing another +Celestial go down.</p> + +<p>Dan followed my command and succeeded in +hitting Captain Kenny in the leg. It was not a +serious wound, but it made the rascal drop on +his breast, uttering loud cries of pain and terror. +“Don’t hit me again! Don’t!” he screamed, +and crawled over the sands to where there was +a rock, behind which he hid himself, muttering +bitter imprecations at what he termed his hard +luck.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_240">[240]</span>The fall of their leader disconcerted the Chinamen, +and again they halted. In the meantime +Matt Gory had picked out the officer in the +second boat and laid him low with a bullet +through the chest.</p> + +<p>“Hurrah fer Uncle Sam!” roared the Irish +sailor enthusiastically. “Hurrah fer another +Dewey victory!” and he discharged an additional +musket and a second Celestial fell over +among his companions.</p> + +<p>But now the fighting became general and to +go into all of the details would be impossible. I +fired three shots and then saw three Chinamen +coming up over the stern of the <i>Dart</i>, where +those from shore and those from the second +small boat had joined forces.</p> + +<p>“They are coming aboard!” cried Dan. +“Fire at them! Give it to them hot!” and he +blazed away, and one of the Celestials fell back +among his friends.</p> + +<p>But now five of the enemy came up, firing +several rounds as they advanced, and the deck +became filled with smoke. Soon it was a hand-to-hand +encounter, and we found ourselves +gradually forced back to the companion +way.</p> + +<p>“We can’t stand up against ’em!” panted +Matt Gory, as he shouldered up to me with the +blood streaming from a cut in his cheek. “They +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_241">[241]</span>are afther bein’ too many for us, bad cess to +’em!”</p> + +<p>“Let us take a final stand in the cabin,” I answered. +“Remember, possession is nine points +of the law.”</p> + +<p>Matt Gory was willing and tumbled down the +companion way, followed by Dan and myself. +As we burst into the cabin we shut the door behind +us and locked it.</p> + +<p>The Celestials were now baffled for the moment +and we heard them running around the +deck, speculating upon what they had best do +next. We used this time to barricade the door +and to reload our pistols, our guns having been +left behind us.</p> + +<p>Soon came a hammering and a demand in Chinese, +probably to open the door. For an answer, +Matt Gory stepped close, and before we +could stop him, fired a shot through a panel. A +yell of pain followed, and we heard the staggering +footsteps of the wounded man as he hurried +on deck again.</p> + +<p>“That was a bad move, Matt,” I said. +“They’ll do something awful in revenge; you +see if they don’t!”</p> + +<p>“I couldn’t hilp it, the ould Nick take ’em!” +was the reply. “If thim haythins oncet gain—hark, +phat’s that!”</p> + +<p>A loud booming of a big cannon over the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_242">[242]</span>waters had reached all of our ears. We listened +intently and presently another report followed.</p> + +<p>“It is a shot from a man-o’-war!” I burst out.</p> + +<p>“If it’s an American ship we are saved!”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps it is the <i>Concord</i>!” came from Dan. +“Don’t you remember what Watt Brown said?”</p> + +<p>“Yes; but could she come in here?”</p> + +<p>“There would be no need. She has that +Chinese junk at her mercy.”</p> + +<p>“Sure an’ if it’s wan of our warships we must +be afther flyin’ a signal of distress!” exclaimed +Matt Gory.</p> + +<p>“That is true, Matt; but how can we do it?”</p> + +<p>“Here is a flag,” answered Dan, hauling it +from the case in the closet. “If we can get that +up——”</p> + +<p>“Oi’ll put it up!” cried the Irishman, who was +too excited to even think of the danger. “Here +goes!” and he hurried to a passageway leading +through to the forecastle.</p> + +<p>I could not resist the temptation to follow +him, and Dan did the same. We entered the +forecastle to find it as much disordered as our +stateroom had been, for the Tagals had used it as +a shelter during their brief stay on the <i>Dart</i>.</p> + +<p>“Now to get up the mast unobserved!” +whispered the Irish sailor, and moving cautiously +out upon the forward deck, he started to +carry out his design, the flag under his arm.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_243">[243]</span>He had taken less than a dozen steps when +there came a Chinese yell and the crack of a +rifle, and poor Gory pitched headlong. A rush +to the forecastle followed.</p> + +<p>“Back, Dan, it’s our only chance,” I cried. +“They won’t grant us any mercy if they catch +us!” and we flew back into the passageway and +to the cabin, locking the second door and barricading +it like the first.</p> + +<p>The Chinamen followed us along the passage +and we heard them pounding on the doors +for several seconds. But then came a call from +the deck and the dull booming of the cannon we +had before heard.</p> + +<p>“That shooting means something,” said Dan. +“Oh if only the <i>Concord</i> has arrived!”</p> + +<p>“With Tom Dawson and the rest of our +friends on board!” I added.</p> + +<p>The rush of footsteps on the deck continued, +and we heard several Celestials in earnest consultation.</p> + +<p>“They are up to something,” whispered Dan. +“Poor Brown! I wonder if he and Matt Gory are +dead?”</p> + +<p>“Captain Kenny will have much to answer +for,” I answered. “He is responsible for the +whole muss.”</p> + +<p>We waited for a few minutes more. Then +came another rush of footsteps and we heard the +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_244">[244]</span>Chinamen leaving the <i>Dart</i> by the side nearest +to shore.</p> + +<p>“They are going to take to the woods!” yelled +Dan. “Hurrah! the battle is ours!” And he +started to unlock the cabin door leading to the +companion way.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> + +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_245">[245]</span> + +<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XXXII.<br> +<small>GOOD-BY TO THE PHILIPPINES.</small></h2> +</div> + +<p>“We must be careful,” I said to my chum, as +he began to mount the steps. “Remember poor +Gory’s rashness.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll be careful enough,” he replied, and +peered over the combing to see if the coast was +clear.</p> + +<p>To his gratification every Celestial had fled, +taking the wounded along.</p> + +<p>“They are gone, Oliver!”</p> + +<p>“I’m glad of it,” I said, and scrambled out on +the deck with him. “What of the junk?”</p> + +<p>“She is making up the coast with all speed. +And there is a warship, true enough!”</p> + +<p>“We can fly that flag of distress now,” I continued, +and ran back for the article. Soon I was +on my way to the top, where I placed the glorious +Stars and Stripes with the Stars downward.</p> + +<p>A shot from the warship told us that our +signal was seen, and through the glasses we saw +a boat put off in command of one of the officers. +Feeling that we were now safe I turned my attention +to Watt Brown, while Dan went to look +after Matt Gory.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_246">[246]</span>I found the second mate lying close to where +he had fallen. He was now conscious, but it +was easy to see that death was hovering close to +his soul. He tried to smile as I took his hand, +but the effort was a failure.</p> + +<p>“We whipped ’em,” he gasped. “I’m glad—of—it.”</p> + +<p>“You had better not talk, Brown,” I returned. +“You are too weak. Let me bind up your +wounds and give you a drink of something.”</p> + +<p>“It aint no use, Raymond, I’m knocked out +and I know it. But we whipped ’em,” and he +tried to smile again. A second later he fainted +once more.</p> + +<p>I bound up his wound and tried to force some +liquor down his throat. I was in the midst of +these labors when the small boat from the warship +came alongside and the officer and several +others hurried to the deck.</p> + +<p>“Tom Dawson!” I cried joyfully, and caught +the first mate by the hand.</p> + +<p>“Poor Brown!” were his first words. “Is it +serious?” and as I nodded in the affirmative he +looked very sober.</p> + +<p>It took some little time to explain the situation +and hear what the officer from the <i>Concord</i> +and Tom Dawson had to say, and in the meantime +Watt Brown and Matt Gory were taken below +and made as comfortable as circumstances +permitted. There was hope for the Irish sailor, +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_247">[247]</span>but none for poor Watt Brown, much to the +sorrow of all of us, for everyone loved the open-hearted +second mate.</p> + +<p>Soon a second boatload of sailors came to the +<i>Dart</i> and I was asked to go ashore with them, +to point out the direction the fleeing Celestials +had taken. I went, and at the rock came upon +Captain Kenny’s body, terribly mutilated by +knife-cuts. The Chinamen had fallen upon him, +and in their rage over the failure of the expedition +had literally hacked him to death. We +buried him where he had fallen.</p> + +<p>The search for the fleeing pirates, for I can call +them nothing less, lasted far into the night, but +availed nothing. At last I returned to the <i>Dart</i>, +utterly fagged out. A surgeon had been sent +for and he was attending the wounded ones, and +I asked him about both.</p> + +<p>“The Irish sailor will live,” was the answer, +“but Brown is mortally wounded.”</p> + +<p>On the <i>Concord</i> were the two men who had +owned the <i>Dart</i> in company with Captain +Kenny. Their stock in the craft was in the +majority, and they turned her over to the government, +Uncle Sam to keep the money which +was coming to the late captain’s heirs, until it +was properly claimed.</p> + +<p>Our tales were listened to with keen interest +the next day by the warm-hearted commander +of the <i>Concord</i>.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_248">[248]</span>“We will do our best for you,” he said to Dan +and me. “I imagine you have nothing to fear +so long as you are on board with me.”</p> + +<p>Watt Brown’s death occurred the following +afternoon and was a most affecting scene. He +and I had got to know each other pretty well +since we had been cast ashore, and he called me +to him before he breathed his last.</p> + +<p>“Good-by to you, Raymond,” he whispered. +“I am alone in the world, and that being so I +leave my father’s legacy to you. It relates to a +treasure said to be buried somewhere on the +Hawaiian Islands. I hope you find it. Good-by,” +and he died in my arms as peacefully as a +child. They buried him on the shore, and I +nailed together a rude cross for a headstone.</p> + +<p>During the day following I made another +search of the stateroom and the cabin in quest +of my missing money belt and the documents +belonging to Raymond, Holbrook & Smith. +For a long while I discovered nothing, but at +last I turned over some clothing lying in an out-of-the-way +corner, and there the articles lay revealed, +along with Dan’s pocketbook and belt +and a number of other things of lesser importance.</p> + +<p>“They are found at last!” I cried, and a great +weight was lifted from my shoulders. “Now let +those Spaniards confiscate that land in Manila +if they dare!”</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_249">[249]</span>“It was worth coming to the <i>Dart</i> after all,” +smiled Dan. “Our mission is now ended.”</p> + +<p>And he spoke the truth.</p> + +<p>Here I think I can properly bring to a close +my tale of adventures while serving in the navy +and battling for my rights in the Philippines.</p> + +<p>The <i>Dart</i> was turned over to the government +as before mentioned, and the proper parties +raised and repaired her and gave her an equipment +for coast service.</p> + +<p>How Manila fell into the hands of Uncle Sam +at last is a matter of history. Dan, I, and several +of our old friends were present when this event +occurred, and at the first opportunity my chum +and I went ashore to learn how Harry Longley +was faring.</p> + +<p>We found him sitting up and glad to learn that +everything had turned out so well. With the +United States authorities in the city to protect +him, Longley unearthed the money belonging +to our firm and placed it in the safe, along with +the documents I had rescued. To-day business +is booming with Raymond, Holbrook & Smith, +and no more is heard of disputing our claim to +the land upon which our offices in Manila stand.</p> + +<p>As soon as we could do so, we sent a cablegram +to Mr. Holbrook, telling him of what had +occurred. Later on we took passage back to +Hong Kong on the <i>Starlight</i>, in company with +<span class="pagenum" id="Page_250">[250]</span>Tom Dawson and several other of our friends, +including Matt Gory, who was now almost well.</p> + +<p>Both Dan and I had seen enough of war, and +instead of thinking about going back to the +Philippines, I took passage on a steamer for San +Francisco, and Dan accompanied me.</p> + +<p>When I reached the Golden Gate I found that +my father was still in Cuba, and with the war +going on, I grew very anxious concerning him. +But, as my friends who have read “When Santiago +Fell” know, he escaped from grave perils +without injury, and he soon came on to the +West, followed, a month later, by Mark Carter, a +first-rate young fellow who had shared his adventures. +Mark, Dan, and I soon became warm +friends, and it was while making a tour of California +that we concocted a plan for going to the +Hawaiian Islands, so recently annexed to the +United States, in quest of the treasure mentioned +in the strange document left by Watt Brown’s +father. What our future adventures were Mark +will tell, in another volume, to be called “Off for +Hawaii; Or, The Mystery of a Great Volcano.”</p> + +<p>And now let me say good-by, kind reader, +with the hope that if you ever have such stirring +adventures as have fallen to my lot, they will +end in equal good fortune.</p> + +<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> +<div class="chapter"> +<div class="transnote"> +<p class="ph1">TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:</p> + +<p>Perceived typographical errors have been corrected.</p> + +<p>Inconsistencies in hyphenation have been standardized.</p> + +<p>Archaic or variant spelling has been retained.</p> + +<p>Some illustrations have been moved to be near the text to which they refer.</p> +</div></div> +<div style='text-align:center'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 77081 ***</div> +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/77081-h/images/cover.jpg b/77081-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..30b341e --- /dev/null +++ b/77081-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/77081-h/images/coversmall.jpg b/77081-h/images/coversmall.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bf519b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/77081-h/images/coversmall.jpg diff --git a/77081-h/images/i_f000.jpg b/77081-h/images/i_f000.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a5935fb --- /dev/null +++ b/77081-h/images/i_f000.jpg diff --git a/77081-h/images/i_f001.jpg b/77081-h/images/i_f001.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..46ec95c --- /dev/null +++ b/77081-h/images/i_f001.jpg diff --git a/77081-h/images/i_f001a.jpg b/77081-h/images/i_f001a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8cad4fb --- /dev/null +++ b/77081-h/images/i_f001a.jpg diff --git a/77081-h/images/i_p066a.jpg b/77081-h/images/i_p066a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7006a41 --- /dev/null +++ b/77081-h/images/i_p066a.jpg diff --git a/77081-h/images/i_p114a.jpg b/77081-h/images/i_p114a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b618276 --- /dev/null +++ b/77081-h/images/i_p114a.jpg diff --git a/77081-h/images/i_p218a.jpg b/77081-h/images/i_p218a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c04cfa --- /dev/null +++ b/77081-h/images/i_p218a.jpg diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5d6b90 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for eBook #77081 +(https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/77081) |
